Yamaha V1 de handleiding

Categorie
Audiomixers
Type
de handleiding
EN
OWNER’S MANUAL
OWNER’S MANUAL
Version 1.2
Version 1.2
Getting Started
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
2
Getting Started with DME Designer
Thank you for purchasing the DME64N/24N.
Your DME64N/24N mixing engine, together the DME Designer software, lets you build a custom audio
system installation that can support an incredible variety of conditions. You can build an entire system
from input to output with the DME Designer software, then send the data from that system to the
DME64N/24N, which becomes an independent processor.
An amazing variety of applications are possible, including audio installations, sub-mixing, speaker
system control, matrix/routing, and multi-effect processing.
In this manual the abbreviation “DME” refers to the DME64N/24N.
SPECIAL NOTICES
The software and this Owner’s Manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.
Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully
agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software
Licensing Agreement at the end of “DME Designer Installation Guide” before installing the
application.)
Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly
forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer.
•Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and
documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the
software.
This disc is a CD-ROM. Do not attempt to play the disc on an audio CD player. Doing so may result
in irreparable damage to your audio CD player.
The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
The screen displays as illustrated in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes, and may
appear somewhat different from the screens which appear on your computer.
Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and
functions will be announced separately.
Windows
®
is the registered trademark of Microsoft
®
Corporation.
NOTE
Here the abbreviation “DME” does not include the “DME32.”
NOTE
This manual is based on the English version of the software. Illustrations, command names, window names, and similar
information are from that version. Some items may differ from what you see on the computer screen, depending on which
operating system you are using.
Getting Started
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
3
About DME Designer
DME Designer is software that provides an integrated environment where you can build and control
systems that use DME.
Audio systems with DME are built on the computer screen in block diagram format using the DME
Designer software. Information about the inputs/outputs along with the arrangement of components
and their connections is called the “configuration.”
The software sends DME settings, along with configuration and parameter data, to the DME unit
through a USB or Ethernet connection. Once the data is transferred, the DME unit can be
disconnected from the computer and used as an independent processor. The DME can also be kept
connected to the computer and controlled in realtime from DME Designer software.
If multiple DME units are connected to the computer, you can use the DME Designer software to build
a configuration that includes those multiple units.
For a DME overview and glossary, see the “DME64N/24N Owner’s Manual.”
Systems built with DME Designer can have multiple zones within an area and multiple configurations
and scenes within a zone. However, only one area, zone, or configuration can be made active and
edited at a time. When active these are called the “Current Zone,” “Current Scene,” and “Current
Configuration.”
One DME unit/Zone
Area This means the entire site, and is therefore the uppermost level for a system built using
DME Designer. At least one zone must be located within the area.
Zone Specifies a space that has individual sound effects within the area, and creates DME
connection conditions. You can create and switch between multiple configurations.
Configuration Information related to the layout and connection of components in a zone.
Scene Information related to configuration assigned to a zone and the settings of the
components included in the configuration.
Component An object that is arranged within the Configuration window.
No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
....
Confuguration
Output Processor for Dome
Output Processor for Dome
Output Processor for Dome
Output Processor for Dome
Output Processor for Dome
...
Scene Name
All On
Opening
Band Set 1
Band Set 2
Band Set 3
...
Preset
All On
BGM & MC
Band 1
Band 2
Band 3
Microphone
Mixer
External Head Amp
etc...
Power Amp
Processor
etc...
Input
External Device (MIDI, GPI, DAW, AMX/Crestron)
Audio signal
Notes
Zone
Output
Control signal
Data explanation
Setting preset data
LCD Display
Dome Low
Dome Mid
Dome Hi
....
Assigned Parameter
Crossover: Output Low: Level
Crossover: Output Mid: Level
Crossover: Output Hight: Level
(No Assign)
(No Assign)
(No Assign)
User Defined Button Scene Manager
Specifies the parameter to be changed.
Specifies the configuration
and preset data combination.
Configuration
Output Processor for Dome
Local parameter link settings
External device settings
MY8-AE
(Input)
MY8-AE
(Output)
Cross-
Over
EQ
Delay EQ Dyn
Delay
All On Component value
BGM & MC
Band 1
Band 2
Band 3
Preset data for output processor
Set the value
Getting Started
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
4
Two DME units/Zone
When one DME unit doesn’t provide sufficient processing power, up to 16 DME units can be used
DME#2
Configuration
Output Processor
for Hall
Local parameter link settings
External device settings
All On
BGM & MC
Band
Zone
LCD Display
Dome Low
Dome Mid
Dome Hi
Hall Low
Hall Mid
Hall Hi
....
Assigned Parameter
#1: Crossover: Output Low: Level
#1: Crossover: Output Mid: Level
#1
:
Crossover
:
Output Hight
:
Level
#2: Crossover: Output Low: Level
#2: Crossover: Output Mid: Level
#2
:
Crossover
:
Output Hight
:
Level
No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
....
Configuration
Output Processor for Dome
Output Processor for Dome
Output Processor for Dome
Output Processor for Dome
Output Processor for Dome
...
Scene Name
All On
Opening
Band Set 1
Band Set 2
Band Set 3
...
Preset
All On
BGM & MC
Band 1
Band 2
Band 3
Configuration
Output Processor for Hall
Output Processor for Hall
Output Processor for Hall
Output Processor for Hall
Output Processor for Hall
...
Preset
All On
BGM & MC
Band
Band
Band
User Defined Button
Scene Manager
DME#1
Configuration
Output Processor
for Dome
Local parameter link settings
External device settings
All On
BGM & MC
Band 1
Band 2
Band 3
Preset data Preset data
External Device (MIDI, GPI, DAW, AMX/Crestron)
Microphone
Mixer
External Head Amp
etc...
Power Amp
Processor
etc...
Input Output
Input Output
DME#1
DME#2
For DME#2
For DME#1
Specifies the parameter to be linked between DME units.
Grobal Parameter Link
For DME#1 For DME#2
Audio signal
Notes
Control signal
Data explanation
Setting preset data
Selects the parameter to be
edited from two DME units.
Specifies the configuration and preset
data combination in each DME
Getting Started
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
5
System Requirement
Common data for DME units in the same zone
Scene Manager A “scene” is information that is used to change the audio processing content.
A combination of a configuration and preset data is specified for each scene.
A Scene Manager is function used to memorize and manage scenes. Up to 999
scenes can be memorized, and each scene is managed by number.
MIDI Program Change
settings
This setting is necessary to switch scenes using MIDI messages.
User Defined Button setting This information is necessary to control component parameters from the unit’s
panel. Up to 24 parameters can be memorized.
Global parameter link settings This information is necessary to allow operation of similar parameters to be
linked between multiple DME units.
Separate data for individual DME units
Configuration This information defines the configuration of audio processing, audio input/
output, and external device components and the connections between
components required to achieve the desired audio processing.
Local parameter link
settings
This information is necessary to allow linked operation between similar
parameters within a single DME unit.
External device settings This information is necessary to allow control of component parameters from
external devices.
Independent settings are required for each external device.
The following external devices can be used:
• MIDI controller( MIDI Control Change, Paramter Change)
• GPI controller
• DAW controller
• AMX, Crestron, and similar remote controllers.
Preset data These are the parameter values for the components included in a configuration.
Audio processing details can be changed by changing the preset data.
The following component types include preset data:
• GEQ, Matrix Mixer, and other audio processing components.
• Internal AD/DA (DME24N), Cascade (DME64N), and MY Card I/O
components.
• External device components for external head amps (AD8HR, AD824).
Operating System Windows
®
XP Professional/XP Home Edition/2000 Professional
CPU 1 GHz or better Intel
®
Pentium
®
/Celeron
®
family processor
Memory At least 256 MB
Hard Disk Capacity At least 300 MB
Display 1,280 x 1,024 pixels or better/High Color 16 bit or better
Other Mouse, CD-ROM drive, 100Base-TX/10Base-T Ethernet or USB connection
environment.
Getting Started
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
6
Main Changes from V1.0 to V1.1
Main Panel Window
Instead of the former Parameter Link function, there are now two functions: a Global Link function
that links parameters within all DMEs in a zone and a Local Link function that links parameters
within a single DME unit. ( page 73)
The Synchronization function can now not only send data from DME Designer to the DME unit,
but can also synchronize by reading data from the DME unit. ( page 75)
Scene Increment/Decrement and Time Adjustment can now be assigned in the GPI input
function. ( page 80)
DME unit events can now be recorded by the Event Logger function and displayed in the Event
Logger window. ( page 111)
The time for executing an event can now be set by using the Event Scheduler function.
( page 116)
Parameters in the current configuration can now be listed on the display and printed out by using
the Parameter List function. ( page 124)
The Wav File Manager can manage Wave files played by the Wav File Player. ( page 128)
Settings can be made by the DAW Control function that are used for controlling DMEs from a
DAW controller. ( page 132)
DME unit data can now be saved as a backup file by using the Backup function. ( page 135)
Designer Window
The port name display can now be switched between long name display and short name display.
( page 148)
DME64N cascade connections can now be set. ( page 165)
Priority items can now be set when compiling configurations by using the [Compile Priority]
function in the “Preferences” dialog box. ( page 209)
Delay time can now be displayed for each component by using the Show Signal Delay function.
( page 246)
Monitoring points can now be edited by using the “Monitoring Point List” dialog box. (
page 247
)
The status of connections in a configuration can now be analyzed in advance by using the
Analyze function, without connecting the DME unit. ( page 249)
•You can now set the action that occurs when you double-click a user module object. You can also
turn user module security ON or OFF, and set a password. ( page 254)
Libraries with component parameters saved in them can now be recalled from the context menu
for a component object. ( page 277)
•A new rule for wiring prohibits connections to terminals that would short the terminator.
Component Editor/Component
•A status bar has been added to the component editor. It displays the component name,
component ID, and parameter IDs for parameters that are being edited. ( page 265)
•A Snap function has been added that records parameters in the editor temporarily. Parameter
sets can then be switched by using the Snap buttons. ( page 273)
The meter's peak hold function can now be turned ON or OFF. ( page 291)
•A Wav File Player component has been added for playing Wave files. ( page 359)
An effect component called SPX has been added that supports many different effect
applications, such as reverb, delay, and modulation effects, along with complex combinations of
multiple effects. ( page 397)
•A Slot Out component editor has been added. ( page 409)
An Undo/Redo function is now available when using the design mode. It can undo the most
recent operation (control movement/resize/deletion).
Getting Started
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
7
Changes from V1.1 to V1.2
Main Panel Window
The synchronization algorithm has been refined for faster synchronization.
Synchronization now can be executed from DME to DME Designer without any break in the
sound.
In the following cases, synchronization can be executed from DME Designer to DME without any
break in the sound:
The second or later synchronization after starting DME Designer* and when differences in data
between the DME and DME Designer are limited to parameters within components, AD824/
AD8HR/DME24N AD/DA setting data, or MY card setting parameters.
* If the file was saved when DME Designer was closed, there will be no break in sound even in the first
synchronization after saving.
Compile speed has been increased.
Up to three times faster when AutoDelayCompensation is turned On.
Up to two times faster when AutoDelayCompensation is turned Off.
Synchronization is possible when no MY card or a different MY card is installed in the DME unit
(a confirmation dialog will appear).
An option to automatically close the dialog after synchronization has been added. ( page 37)
•A progress bar has been added to the Synchronization dialog. ( page 36)
•A message appears to warn when synchronization will cause muting.
The following operations can be performed while on line:
- Scene storage.
- Scene name changes.
- Fade ON/OFF and Fade Mode changes.
- Fade time changes.
- Parameter link setting changes.
When a scene store is executed, that scene becomes the current scene.
•Wave files can be saved as DME data files, and are included in import/export operations.
( page 32)
•Wave files can be saved in the Wav file library.
Event Log events can be output via GPI. ( page 115)
The on-line indicator appears as a button which can be used to switch between on-line and
off-line. ( page 43)
Scene edits cause the EDIT indicator to appear. ( page 42)
An auto file save function (Auto Save, post synchronization) has been added. ( page 53)
Different zones can be specified for use by different users. ( page 56)
Scene parameters related to User Defined Button, Program Change, GPI In and GPI Out can be
set via the Scene Manager. ( page 63)
[Select All] and [Clear All] buttons have been added to the Scene Manager Recall Safe dialog.
( page 67)
User Control can be created for individual users as well as security levels. ( page 70)
•A Remote Control Setup List has been added. ( page 123)
This list can be used to make detailed settings for a new software protocol that allow the DME to
be controlled from AMX, Crestron, and similar devices.
Refer to the “DME-N Remote Control Protocol Specifications” document for details about the
communication protocol. Information about the “DME-N Remote Control Protocol Specifications”
document can be found at the Yamaha pro Audio website (URL below).
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
It is possible to specify whether listed events will be executed by the Event Scheduler.
( page 116)
Getting Started
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
8
The order of same-time events can be changed in the Event Scheduler. ( page 116)
Exceptions can be specified for Event Scheduler execution day/time. ( page 122)
Event Scheduler execution times can be specified in 1-second increments. ( page 121)
Head amp gain and MY-Card can be set via GPI, MIDI, User defined Button, DAW Control.
Parameter values, scene recall, GPI output, Wave file playback, and head amp gain can be set
via the User Defined Buttons. ( page 98)
The Component Lock function dialog is separate from the Parameter List dialog. ( page 127)
Shortcuts can be freely set as required. ( page 134)
Files can be saved in the DME unit. ( page 52)
•A [Close All Editor Windows] button has been added to the Window menu. ( page 51)
External head amp parameters will be recognized by the DME unit when either the DME or the
external head amp (AD824, AD8HR) are turned on. Execute a scene recall to send DME settings
an external head amp.
This manual is now separate from the DME Designer installer, and can not be accessed from the
DME Designer menus.
Designer Window
The following operations can be carried out via the shortcut keys.
- Navigator
- Activate Navigator
- Activate Toolkit
- Activate Design Window
- Select Left Port and Start Wiring
- Select Right Port and Start Wiring
- Wire Auto Single to Right
- Wire Auto Multi to Right
- Wire Auto Single to Left
- Wire Auto Multi to Left
- Delete Wire
It is now possible to simultaneously edit multiple objects of the same type.
Example: Change the thickness or color of multiple wires at once.
Files related to user modules (user module files, library files, user module editor files) can be
combined and exported/imported as a single file.
Port colors can be independently specified for each port type. (page 156)
Default wire thicknesses and types can be independently specified for each port type.
An automatic hot-spot connection function has been added. ( page 225)
Port display has been added to External Device, Picture, DME, and ICP1 objects.
When drawing wires the keyboard cursor keys can be used to move the mouse cursor, and the
<Enter> key can be used to create nodes.
When drawing wires <Shift> key plus <> key and <Shift> key plus <> key combinations can
be used to automatically connect horizontally-aligned hot spots.
DME object ports can be freely specified.
Compilation of configurations with loop connections is possible when Auto Delay Compensation
is On.
The name has been changed from “Foot Monitor” external device to “Floor Monitor.”
Addition External Device types have been provided.
External Devices can be double-clicked to open a file saved by other applications. (
page 172
)
Picture objects can be double-clicked to open a specified editor. ( page 187)
•Text objects can be double-clicked to open a specified editor. ( page 190)
Getting Started
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
9
User module port labels can be edited. ( page 183)
Graphics can be placed to represent user modules. ( page 183)
The Legend field automatically resizes to accommodate project names and titles of different
lengths.
•A Generic “MY-Others” setting has been provided to accommodate third-party MY cards.
Component Editor Window
Undo and Redo are now shortcut compatible.
•A scroll bar appears when the size of the component editor window is reduced.
The size and position of the component editor window are memorized.
An option to allow mouse-over zooming of the edit box has been added. ( page 266)
•A [Back] button that allows switching between related parent and child windows has been
added. ( page 265)
•A [Close All Editor Windows] button has been added to the contextual menu.
Source Selector, Speaker Processor, Limiter, Slot In, Cascade In, and Cascade Out components
have been added.
The Delay algorithm has been revised. (page 332)
- LEVEL and MUTE are effective when Delay is Off for each channel.
- The name of the overall Delay [On] parameter has been changed to [All Bypass].
The bus send level range for Delay, Matrix, and Matrix Mixer components has been changed to
- through 0.0 dB.
Snap copy is possible. ( page 274)
Snap can be retained until the application is quit or another file is opened.
Security status is displayed in the user module editor status bar.
Multiple controllers can be selected by clicking while holding the <Ctrl> key when the editor is in
the design mode. ( page 286)
[Picture], [Text], [Box], [Ellipse], and [Frame] have been added to the tool palette of the user
module editor and user control editor design mode. ( page 279)
Controller properties can be accessed by double-clicking controllers in the user module editor or
user control editor design mode. ( page 303)
Picture and Text objects can be clicked to open a specified editor in the user module editor or
user control editor.
The User Module Editor and User Control Editor offer a greater range of customization options for
color, size. etc., of the placed controls.
MIDI Setup
•A MIDI Setup minimize function has been added.
V1.2 Precautions
When using project files (*.daf) created by version 1.1.5 or earlier, synchronize from the DME
Designer to the DME unit for the first synchronization.
•Project files (*.daf) created using version 1.2 will not open properly on version 1.1.
IN
Input
Mute
Input
Level
Input
Mute
Input
Level
On
Delay On
Delay All Bypass
OUT
OUT
Mute Level
On Mute Level
IN
Delay
Delay
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
10
Contents
Chapter 1 Before Using 11
Installing DME Designer.....................................................11
Starting DME Designer.......................................................11
Closing DME Designer.......................................................13
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview 14
Names and Functions of the Windows...............................14
Users and Security.............................................................19
Project Files........................................................................22
DME Data File....................................................................30
Configuration Creation Procedure......................................34
Online.................................................................................35
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window 39
Main Panel Window............................................................39
Main Panel Window Menu..................................................44
DME File Storage...............................................................52
Preferences........................................................................53
Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings).........55
Scene Manager..................................................................63
User Control .......................................................................70
Parameter Link...................................................................73
Synchronization
(DME Designer and DME Unit Synchronization)................75
GPI .....................................................................................79
MIDI....................................................................................90
User Defined Button (User Defined Parameters)...............98
Word Clock.......................................................................102
Monitor .............................................................................104
Clock ................................................................................105
Language Settings ...........................................................106
DME Firmware Update.....................................................107
Event Logger....................................................................111
Event Scheduler...............................................................116
Remote Control Setup List ...............................................123
Parameter List..................................................................124
Component Lock ..............................................................127
Wav File Manager ............................................................128
DAW Control.....................................................................132
Shortcut Keys...................................................................134
Backup .............................................................................135
Chapter 4 Designer 136
Editing Configurations ......................................................136
Designer Window .............................................................137
Designer Window Menu ...................................................144
Toolkit Window.................................................................152
Objects .............................................................................156
Design Window Shared Settings and Operations ............207
Drawing and Editing Wires ...............................................219
Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone..........................231
Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Configuration.............233
Area Window ....................................................................235
Zone Window....................................................................237
Configuration Window.......................................................242
User Module .....................................................................250
Chapter 5 Components 259
Types of Components.......................................................259
Component Editor Window...............................................264
Snap .................................................................................273
Library...............................................................................275
User Control/User Module Editor......................................279
Creating Parameter Links.................................................314
Chapter 6 Component Guide 316
Crossover .........................................................................316
Crossover Processor........................................................320
Delay.................................................................................332
Dynamics..........................................................................334
Equalizer (EQ)..................................................................344
Fader ................................................................................348
Filters................................................................................349
Meter.................................................................................357
Miscellaneous...................................................................358
Mixer.................................................................................360
Pan ...................................................................................378
Router...............................................................................386
Source Selector................................................................388
Speaker Processor...........................................................390
SPX...................................................................................397
Slot....................................................................................408
Cascade............................................................................410
Internal Head Amp............................................................412
MY-Card ...........................................................................413
Remote Controlled Head Amp..........................................417
Component Glossary........................................................419
Troubleshooting 423
Index 424
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
11
Chapter 1 Before Using
Installing DME Designer
To use DME Designer, you must first install the software on the computer. Before you can connect the
DME Designer software to the DME unit, send and receive configurations, or perform control, you must
first install the USB MIDI Driver or the DME-N Network Driver, according to how you will be connecting,
and then make the appropriate settings.
For instructions about how to install DME Designer and about the installation and setup method for the
MIDI driver and DME-N Network Driver, see the “DME Designer Installation Guide.”
Starting DME Designer
The DME Designer software is started from the [Start] menu. DME Designer is used with one user
logged on. The user logs on when the software is started.
DME Designer Start Up and Logon (When Auto-Logon Is Not Set)
1 Click [Start] [All Programs] [YAMAHA OPT Tools] [DME Designer] [DME
Designer].
The “Log On” dialog box will be displayed.
2 Click the [] at the right of the [User] box, and select the user.
If no user has been created, only [Administrator] will appear in the list. When starting DME
Designer for the first time after installing, select [Administrator].
NOTE
In Windows2000, click [Start] [Programs] [YAMAHA OPT Tools] [DME Designer] [DME Designer].
NOTE
Automatic log-on is the default setting. If the automatic logon feature is enabled, the “Log On” dialog box will not be
displayed when the application is started. Instead, the auto-logon user will be logged on automatically. See page 21
for information about auto-logon.
Chapter 1 Before Using
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
12
3 Enter the password into the [Password] box.
Enter the password set for the user.
If no password has been set, leave the password box blank when you log on.
4 Click the [OK] button.
DME Designer starts up.
When Automatic Logon Has Been Set (page 21)
If automatic logon has been set, the “Log On” dialog box will not be displayed. The user set for
automatic logon will be logged on.
With automatic log on, even if a password is set for a user, it will not be requested during log on.
This is useful when logging on a specific user.
Starting by Opening a Project File
DME Designer starts when a project file with a saved configuration is opened. When the project file
is opened, DME Designer is started with the window configuration that was in place when the file
was last saved.
Chapter 1 Before Using
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
13
Closing DME Designer
To close DME Designer, click [Exit] on the [File] menu of the Main Panel window. It can also be closed
by clicking the [Close] button on the Main Panel window.
1 Click [Exit] on the Main Panel window [File] menu.
When you try to close DME Designer, “Project File has been modified. Save?” will be displayed in a
dialog box.
2 To save the file, click [Yes]. To close without saving, click [No].
If you click [Yes], the file currently saved with the same name will be overwritten. If the file has not
been saved, the File Save dialog box will always be displayed.
NOTE
Sometimes the “Project File has been modified. Save?” dialog box will not be displayed.
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
14
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
Names and Functions of the Windows
The DME Designer software has several windows, including the Main Panel window, Designer window,
Component Editor window, Resource Meter window, and others.
Main Panel Window
Menus and buttons are available in the Main Panel window. The current DME Designer environment,
including the active scene and zone, the currently logged on user name, and the connection status to
the DME unit are displayed on the right side of the Main Panel window.
Main Panel Window
Designer Window
Component Editor Window
Resource Meter Window
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
15
Designer Window
The Designer window displays several different windows. First among them is the Area window, where
you can manage the entire system. The Area window includes one or more Zone windows, which in
turn include one or more DME units that are used to build a zones within the area. Next is the
Configuration window, where you create the internal configuration of each DME unit. Within the
Configuration window are the User Module windows, where you can assemble often-used
components into presets; the Toolkit window, which displays objects used in the other windows as the
basic building blocks for sound designs; and the Navigator window, which lets you grasp the overall
status of the system at a glance.
Area Window
The Area window is used for designing areas, which manage the entire system. While at least one
zone is included within an area, multiple zones can be arranged there.
Toolkit Window
Configuration Window
User Module Window
Navigator Window
Zone Window
Zones
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
16
Zone Window
The Zone window is used to design zones within the area. A zone is a more concrete blueprint that
includes at least one DME. It shows the DME’s connections with other devices and the wiring
between them. You can create multiple zones.
The DME units and connected devices are arranged in each Zone window, creating configurations.
Configuration Window
The Configuration window is used to design the internal configuration of each DME unit contained
in the Zone window. By arranging and connecting components (audio processors like mixers,
compressors, effects, and crossovers, along with parts like faders and meters) in the Configuration
window, you can create things like complex processors or matrix mixers, that determine the actual
internal structure that operates each DME unit.
User Module Window
The User Module window is used for designing user modules that can be arranged in the
Configuration window. You can create original modules by combining multiple examples of often-
used components. When you save these modules as presets, you can recall them easily whenever
you want.
Configurations
Components
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
17
Toolkit Window
The Toolkit window displays the objects that you can use in each window that can be displayed in
the Designer window. Those windows are the Area, Zone, Configuration, and User Module
windows. The Toolkit displays different objects, according to the currently active window. To place
an object in a window, double-click it in the Toolkit window where it is displayed or drag it to the
currently active window.
Navigator Window
The Navigator window displays the area, zones, configurations, and components in a hierarchal
fashion that lets you check their status as a whole. When editing offline, you can click an area
name, zone name, or configuration name to make that window active. Clicking a component name
will open the component editor window for that component.
Objects and Components
Object” is the name for the parts that are arranged in the various design windows, such as the
Area, Zone, Configuration, and User Module windows. Objects are always laid out in the Toolkit
window. Only the appropriate objects for each window are displayed. The blocks displayed at the
higher level of the Toolkit window in particular are called “components.” This refers to each type of
processor that operates the DME. “Object” normally refers to Picture, Text, Ellipse and other items
that are used after connecting them by wire to the various components.
Component Editor
The blocks that are arranged in the configuration window are called “components.” Audio processors
like mixers, compressors, effects, and crossovers, along with parts like faders and meters, are used
for this purpose in the Configuration window.
When you double-click on a component block arranged in the Configuration window, the Component
Editor window will open. There you can edit the parameters for that component. The types of
parameters displayed will differ, depending on the component.
Component Editor
(Stereo Compressor)
Component
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
18
Resource Meter
This window provides an indication of the usage of the components in the configuration window. The
usage percentage increases as the number of components increases, and is shown in graph form in
this window.
This window is shown at the same time as the designer window, and provides a guide when creating
configurations.
The usage percentage also depends on the sampling frequency at which the DME unit is set to
operate. Make sure that the usage percentage is kept below 100%.
Window Operations
Operations in all windows are the same as for normal Windows applications. The windows are
controlled with the [Minimize], [Maximize/Restore], and [Close] buttons at the upper right of the title
bar. DME Designer is closed by clicking the [Close] button on the Main Panel window.
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
19
Users and Security
You can create multiple users in DME Designer and set the functions that are available to each user.
Although users who will design and put together installations must be able to use all the functions of
DME Designer, users who will only operate the system can be restricted to functions that will not allow
them to accidentally change the settings.
DME Designer is used with one user at a time logged on. To change the user, click the [File] menu
[Log Off] command on the Main Panel window.
About Users
To use DME Designer, you must logon when you start the software. Except for the first time the
software is started or when separate settings are made for the first time, you can logon by specifying
the name and password for a user that has been set as the administrator. The administrator can build
the system as a whole, or apply function limitations that let other people edit. Administrators or other
people that can use DME Designer are called “users.” The user name for the currently logged on user
appears below [User] on the Main Panel window.
The default user, named [Administrator], is set to use all of the functions. Immediately after DME
Designer is installed, [Administrator] is the only user, and there is no password set.
Multiple users can be created. When the system administrator creates multiple users, restrictions can
be applied separately for each one of them. A user with restrictions applied can edit using only the
functions the administrator enables for him.
The place to create, setup, and delete users is the “Security” dialog box. See “Security (Creating
Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55.
Currently Logged On User Name
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
20
Logging On
The “Log On” dialog box is displayed whenever the application is started or a user is logged off.
Whenever one user is already logged on, another user cannot be logged on. To log on as another
user, first log off the currently logged on user.
The “Log On” dialog box
1 [User]
From the list, select the user you want to log on as.
2 [Password] Box
Enter the password.
3 [OK] Button
Log on as the selected user.
4 [Exit] Button
When the application is started, and the “Log On” dialog box is displayed, there is an [Exit]
button. This closes the application without logging on a user.
5 [Cancel] Button
When the “Log On” dialog box is displayed after a user is logged off, there is a [Cancel] button
instead of an [Exit] button. This cancels the logoff. The original user will continue to be logged
on.
Logon Procedure
1 Click [] at the right of the [User].
A drop-down list of user names will be displayed.
2 Click the user you want to log on.
3 Enter the password into the [Password] box.
When you type in the password box, the characters you enter will display as asterisks (*).
4 Click the [OK] button.
NOTE
If the automatic logon feature is enabled, the “Log On” dialog box will not be displayed when the application is started.
Instead, the auto-logon user will be logged on automatically.
1
2
3
5
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
21
Logging Off
Logoff is used when changing users. When you log off, the document currently being edited is closed,
and the “Log On” dialog box is displayed so you can log on the next user. Log off with the [Log Off]
command on the [File] menu in the Main Panel window.
1 Click the [File] menu [Log Off] command on the Main Panel window.
Log on the next user in the “Log On” dialog box.
Automatic Logging On
With the auto-logon function, you can have a specified user automatically logged on when the
application is started. If you enable the auto-logon feature, the specified user will be logged on when
the application is started, without displaying the “Log On” dialog box.
Auto-logon is set from the “Security” dialog box. See “Security (Creating Users and Making User
Settings)” on page 55.
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
22
Project Files
Project Files
Systems built with DME Designer are saved as project files. Project files have “.daf” as the extension
for their filenames.
These files include settings for the area, zones, configurations, and each parameter.
Since only one project file can be open at a time, before you can open a second file, the first one must
be closed.
The commands for opening project files, creating new ones, and saving them, are found in the [File]
menu of the Main Panel window.
Creating New Project Files
Project files are created using the [File] menu [New] command in the Main Panel window.
1 Click [File] menu [New] in the Main Panel window.
Since the currently open project file must be closed before a new one can be created, a “Project
file has been modified. Save?” dialog box will be displayed.
2 To save the file, click [Yes]. To close without saving, click [No].
If you click [Yes], the file currently saved with the same name will be overwritten. If the file has not
been saved, the File Save dialog box will be displayed.
A new project file will be created.
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
23
Saving Project Files
Project files are saved using the [File] menu [Save] and [Save As] commands in the Main Panel
window. The [Save] command overwrites the previously saved version of the file. The [Save As]
command lets you give a new name to the file before saving it. When you save the file with a new
name, you can protect it with a password.
The “Save As” Dialog Box
When you click the [File] menu [Save As] command in the Main Panel window, the “Save As”
dialog box is displayed. Except for some [Security] options, this dialog box is the same as the
normal Windows dialog box for saving files.
1 [Save In]
Specify the folder for saving the file. The folder name is displayed in this box. Click the [] on
the right to move to another folder.
The large box below displays the contents of the folder in this box.
2 [Up One Level] Button
Moves to the folder one level higher in the hierarchy.
3 [Create New Folder] Button
Creates a new folder in the folder currently being displayed.
4 [Views] Button
Changes the way the folder content list is displayed. If you click this button, a menu appears
that lets you change the arrangement and display format of the files in the list.
5 List
This box displays the contents of the folder shown in the [Save In] box. Only files belonging to
the type selected in the [Save As Type] box will be displayed.
6 [File Name] Box
Enter the filename. If the currently open file has already been saved, its name will be already
entered in this box. To save using a different filename, change the name here.
2
3
4
1
@
#
5
6
7
8
9
)
!
[Up One Level] Button
[Create New Folder] Button
[Views] Button
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
24
7 [Save as type]
Selects the format for the file you are saving. When saving project files including Wave files set
for Wav File Player, select “Project File with wave (*.daf)”. Otherwise, select “Project File (*.daf)”.
8 [Security]
Protects files with a password. If you check here, you will be able to enter settings in the [ID],
[Password], and [Confirm Password] boxes.
9 [ID] Box
Enter the ID that has been set for the file. The currently logged on user name will be pre-
entered, but you can change it. This need not be the same as a user name.
) [Password] Box
Enter the password that has been set for the file. You can enter up to 256 alphanumeric
characters. The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks (*) in the [Password] box.
! [Confirm Password] Box
Enter the password once again to confirm it. Enter the same password as was entered into the
[Password] box. The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks (*), the same as in the
[Password] box.
@ [Save] Button
Saves the project file.
If the characters entered into the [Password] and [Confirm Password] boxes were not the same,
a “Password is different” dialog box will be displayed. Click the [OK] button and reenter the
correct password in the [Password] and [Confirm Password] boxes.
# [Cancel] Button
Cancel the file save process.
NOTE
When someone attempts to open a password-protected project file, the application will request an ID and password.
If they are not entered correctly, the file cannot be opened. Be careful to avoid mistakes when entering the ID and
password. The password cannot be reissued and the ID and password cannot be changed. Be careful not to forget
them.
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
25
Saving Project Files
1 Click [File] menu [Save] in the Main Panel window.
If there is a file already saved with the same name, it will be overwritten.
When saving a project file for the first time, you must name the file before saving it. The “Save
As” dialog box will open, the same as when clicking the [File] menu [Save As] command. Enter
a filename and specify the folder where the file will be saved.
Saving a File with a New Name
With the [File] menu [Save As] command in the Main Panel window, you can save the currently
open file with a new filename. When saving for the first time, this creates a new file. A file that has
already been saved with a name will be saved as a separate file.
1 Click [File] menu [Save As] in the Main Panel window.
The “Save As” dialog box will be displayed.
2 Enter a filename into the [File name] box.
3 Specify the folder where the file will be saved.
4 Click the [Save] button.
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
26
Protecting a Project File with a Password
When you save a project file with a new name, you can set a password and protect the file. If a
password is set, an ID and password will be requested when the file is opened.
The security settings for a file cannot be changed by resaving the file with the same name. They
can only be changed when saving the file with a new name using the [Save As] command. Once
set, the ID and password cannot be changed. To change the ID and password for password-
protected project files, use the [Save As] command to save the file as a new one with a different
name.
1 Click [File] menu [Save As] in the Main Panel window.
The “Save As” dialog box will be displayed.
2 Place a checkmark for [Security] in the file save dialog box.
3 Enter an ID into the [ID] box.
The name of the currently logged on user will be automatically entered into the [ID] box. To
change it, enter another ID into the box.
When using [Save As] to save a password-protected file, the dialog box will be displayed with
the ID and password boxes automatically filled in with the ID and password that were assigned
to the original file. To change the ID and password, enter new ones into the boxes.
4 Enter the desired password into the [Password] box.
You can enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters for the password. The characters you enter
will be displayed as asterisks (*) in the [Password] box.
5 Enter the same characters into the [Confirm Password] box as were entered into the
[Password] box.
The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks (*) in the [Password] box.
6 Click the [Save] button.
When saving a password-protected file without changing the name, the same ID and password
will be set (the ID and password cannot be changed).
Using the [Save] command, you cannot password protect an already saved project file that was
not already password protected. To set a password for a file that is not already password
protected, save it as a separate file using the [Save As] command.
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
27
Opening Project Files
Project files are opened using the [File] menu [Open] command in the Main Panel window. Since
the currently opened project file must be closed before another one can be opened, a “Project file has
been modified. Save?” dialog box may be displayed.
[Open] Command
Project files are opened using the [File] menu [Open] command in the Main Panel window.
1 Click [File] menu [Open] in the Main Panel window.
A “Project file has been modified. Save?” dialog box may be displayed.
2 Click the [Yes] or [No] button.
The “Open” dialog box will be displayed.
3 Selects the file to be opened.
4 Click the [Open] button.
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
28
Opening a Project File That Has Security Set
If security is set for a project, the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box will be displayed when you
click the [Open] button in the “Open” dialog box.
Enter the ID and password for the file into the [ID] and [Password] boxes, and click the [OK]
button.
If you enter an incorrect ID or password and click the [OK] button on the “Enter ID & Password”
dialog box, the “Wrong ID or password!” dialog box will be displayed.
Click the [OK] button and enter the correct ID and password the “Enter ID & Password” dialog
box.
Opening a Project File from the “Recently Used Files” List
Recently used project files are displayed on the [File] menu in the Main Panel window. If you click
one of the filenames, you can open that project file.
If security is set for a project file, the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box will be displayed if that file is
selected from the recently used files list. Enter the ID and password to open the file.
Recently Used Files
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
29
Double-Click the Icon for the Project File
When you double-click the icon for the project file, the file will open. If DME Designer is not started,
it will start. After logon, the project file will open.
Just as when you use the [Open] command, if DME Designer is already started, the currently open
project file must be closed before another one can be opened. Therefore, a “Project file has been
modified. Save?” dialog box will be displayed.
If security is set for the project file, the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box will be displayed. Enter
the ID and password to open the file.
Closing Project Files
You cannot have multiple project files open simultaneously in DME Designer. To close the currently
open project file, you can create a new project file or open another project file.
NOTE
Sometimes the “Project file has been modified. Save?” dialog box will not be displayed.
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
30
DME Data File
You can import or export parameters for a DME that is arranged in a configuration file. Parameters for
a single DME unit in the current configuration (the one being edited) are saved as a file. Saved
parameters can be imported into another project file.
Files with parameters saved in them are called “DME Data Files.” These files have “.ddf” as the
extension for their filenames.
DME Data Import
This imports DME data file settings into a DME included in the current configuration.
1 Make active the configuration that arranged the DME into which you are going to import.
If there are multiple configurations, display the window in front for the configuration that arranged
the DME to which you are going to import.
2 Click the [File] menu in the Main Panel window, and move the mouse cursor over [Import
DME Configuration].
A submenu will be displayed. The DMEs included in the current configuration will be displayed on
a submenu.
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
31
3 On the submenu, click on the DME into which you will import settings.
The “Open” dialog box will be displayed.
4 Select the DME data file and click the [Open] button.
[Import DME Configuration] Submenu
The DMEs included in the current configuration will be displayed on the [Import DME
Configuration] submenu.
[Create New DME] creates a new DME and imports settings.
NOTE
Only users for whom the [Operation Security] [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can
import DME data. For information about user security levels, see “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)”
on page 55.
NOTE
If DME data file import was not possible, a “DME file import failed.” message will be displayed.
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
32
DME Export
This exports parameters from a DME included in the current configuration and saves them as a file.
1 Make active the configuration that includes the DME from which you will export.
If there are multiple configurations, display the window in front for the configuration that arranged
the DME from which you are going to export.
2 Click the [File] menu in the Main Panel window, and move the mouse cursor over [Export
DME Configuration].
A submenu will be displayed.
3 On the submenu, click on the DME from which you will export settings.
The “Save As” dialog box will be displayed.
4 Enter the filename.
Determines whether a selected file type will be exported along with a wave file.
5 Specify the folder where the file will be saved, then click the [Save] button.
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
33
[Export DME Configuration] Submenu
The DMEs included in the current configuration will be displayed on the [Export DME
Configuration] submenu.
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
34
Configuration Creation Procedure
The configuration is a design diagram that determines the DME configuration. Transferring this data
causes the DME to operate. Follow the procedure below to create a DME Designer configuration.
1 Creating a New Project.
When you start DME Designer, a new project is created. If another project file is already open, use
the [File] menu [New] command in the Main Panel window to create a new file.
“Main Panel Window Menu” [File] menu [New] (page 44)
2 Zone Settings.
Zone names are set, and zones are added and deleted using the “Zone” dialog box.
See “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone” on page 231.
3 Configuration Settings.
Zone names are set, and zones are added and deleted using the “Zone” dialog box.
See “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Configuration” on page 233.
4 DME, ICP, External Device Layout.
Arrange DMEs, ICPs, and external devices in the Zone window.
See “Zone Window” on page 237,
“Objects” on page 156,
“Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” on page 207.
5 Placing Components.
Place components and user modules in the Configuration window.
See “Configuration Window” on page 242,
“User Module” on page 250,
“Types of Components” on page 259.
6 Component Logical Connections.
Use wires to connect the components and user modules you placed in the Configuration window.
See “Drawing and Editing Wires” on page 219.
7 Setting Parameters.
Edit the component parameters in the component editor.
See “Component Editor Window” on page 264.
8 Setting User Defined Parameters.
Parameters can be assigned to function keys F1 through F6 in the DME unit.
See “User Defined Button (User Defined Parameters)” on page 98.
9 Storing Scenes.
Store the scene using the [Tools] menu [Scene Manager] command in the Main Panel window.
See “Scene Manager” on page 63.
NOTE
Configurations can be created only when the DME unit is offline. To transfer the data, you must first go into online status. The
procedure for going online is given later in this document.
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
35
Online
You can connect the DME unit to your computer and transfer configurations, scenes and parameters
created in DME Designer into the DME unit. You can also read data from the DME unit into DME
Designer, synchronizing it with the status of the DME unit.
Because Synchronization presupposes that the DME unit can communicate with the computer where
DME Designer is installed, the necessary drivers (USB-MIDI or DME-N Network Driver) must be
installed, and appropriate settings must be made for each driver and for DME Designer MIDI port.
1 DME Unit and Computer Connection.
Connect the DME unit and computer using a USB cable or an Ethernet cable.
See separate “DME64N/24N Owner’s Manual” for details.
2 MIDI Driver Installation.
Install the USB-MIDI driver or DME-N Network driver in the computer.
See separate “DME Designer Installation Guide” for details.
3 MIDI Driver Setup.
Make the necessary settings for the MIDI driver installed in the computer. If the driver is set up
already, check the settings before going online.
See separate “DME Designer Installation Guide” for details.
4 MIDI Driver Port Setup.
The MIDI Setup dialog will be displayed if you press the MIDI Setup button on the MIDI Setup
toolbar that is displayed when you start DME Designer Set up the In/Out/Thru ports connected to
the DME.
5 Making MIDI IN/OUT Settings in DME Designer.
On the [Port] tab of the “MIDI” dialog box, select the MIDI driver used for sending and receiving
MIDI messages. If the driver is set up already, check the settings before going online.
“MIDI” [Port] tab (page 97)
NOTE
Because there are no scene settings when the DME unit is purchased, the configuration and scene information created in
DME Designer must first be transferred.
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
36
6 Storing and Checking Scenes.
When moving online, the lowest scene must be stored. You can check if a scene is stored using the
“Scene Manager” dialog box.
See “Scene Manager” on page 63.
7 Recalling Scenes.
When going online, the scene will be recalled. Its scene number must be displayed in [Scene
Number], and its scene name will be displayed in Scene Name. If [--------] is displayed of [Scene
Name], the scene will be recalled.
Main Panel Window “Current Scene” (page 42)
See “Scene Manager” on page 63.
8 Display the “Synchronization” dialog box.
Click [Synchronization] in the [Tools] menu or the large [Synchronization] button on the toolbar.
When the dialog box opens, a list of connected DME units will be obtained.
DMEs connected to the computer are displayed in the [Network] list.
NOTE
When requesting the “Synchronization” dialog box, a one-time alert will be displayed if no scene has been recalled, or
the MIDI Port settings have not been made. After clicking the [OK] button on the alert, each dialog will open. At this time,
you can make the needed settings in the displayed dialog box, and then again display the “Synchronization” dialog box.
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
37
9 IP Address Selection
The DMEs included in the current zone are displayed in the [Designer] list in the
“Synchronization” dialog box. Click the [IP Address] box, then select the DME unit IP address
that matches the DME currently in the DME Designer.
10 Going Online.
Clicking the [Go On-Line] button displays a dialog box where you can decide the synchronization
method.
Click the [DesignerDME] direction button.
Transfer of the configuration will begin, and DME Designer will be synchronized with the unit.
If there are many zones, this process may take time.
NOTE
IP addresses are displayed for devices of the same type in the area.
Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
38
When going online is finished, the [Go On-line] button will be grayed out, and the Main Panel
window [On-Line] button will light up. The dialog box will close automatically if [Close this window
after synchronization] is checked.
To go off line, click either the [ON-Line] button in the main panel window, or the [Go Off-line]
button in the “Synchronization” dialog box.
NOTE
It may not be possible to go online if a scene has not been stored when [Recall Safe] is selected.
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
39
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
Main Panel Window
The Main Panel window is the main window of DME Designer.
Title Bar
“DME Designer” is displayed on the title bar.
Menu Bar
Commands that can be executed in the application are collected into categories on the menu bar.
When you click one of the categories, a list of commands is displayed.
Also, the name of the currently open project file is displayed at the right. When a new project file has
been opened, or has not yet been saved, “Untitled” will be displayed for the file name.
Tool Buttons (Small)
Frequently used commands are arranged here as buttons. When a command cannot be used, its
button will be grayed out.
Log On User
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Tool Buttons (Small)
Tool Buttons (Large)
[Mute] Button
Current Scene
Current Zone
Communication
Status
[Open File] Button
[Save File] Button
[Undo] Button
[Undo History] Button
[Redo] Button
[User Defined] Button
[Word Clock] Button
[GPI] Button
[MIDI] Button
[Parameter Link] Button
[Clock] Button
[User Control Manager] Button
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
40
[Open File] Button
Opens project files.
[Open] on the [File] menu (page 45)
[Save File] Button
Saves the project file currently being edited.
[Save] on the [File] menu (page 45)
[Undo] Button
Undoes the most recent edit operation.
[Undo] on the [Edit] menu (page 47)
[Undo History] Button
Opens the “Undo History” dialog box. Undoes multiple operations.
[Undo History] on the [Edit] menu (page 47)
[Redo] Button
Restores operations undone with the [Undo] button back to their original condition.
[Redo] on the [Edit] menu (page 47)
[User Defined] Button
Opens the “User Defined Button” dialog box.
See “[User Defined Button]” on page 49.
[Word Clock] Button
Opens the “Word Clock” dialog box.
See “[Word Clock]” on page 49.
[GPI] Button
Opens the “GPI” dialog box.
See “[GPI]” on page 49.
[MIDI] Button
Opens the “MIDI” dialog box.
See “[MIDI]” on page 49.
[Parameter Link] Button
Opens the “Parameter Link” dialog box.
See “[Parameter Link]” on page 49.
[Clock] Button
Opens the “Clock” dialog box.
See “[Clock]” on page 50.
[User Control Manager] Button
Opens the “User Control Manager” dialog box.
See “[User Control]” on page 48.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
41
Tool Button (Large)
[Show/Hide Designer] Button
Displays or hides the Designer window.
[User Control] Button
Works the same as the [User Control] command on the [View] menu. Clicking this button displays a
menu.
User Control will be displayed on the menu. If you click there, the user control window will be
displayed.
If you click [New User Control], the “New User Control” dialog box opens.
[Synchronization] Button
Opens the “Synchronization” dialog box.
See “Synchronization” Dialog Box on page 76.
[Event Logger] Button
Opens the Event Logger window.
See “Event Logger” Window on page 111.
[Event Scheduler] Button
Opens the “Event Scheduler” dialog box.
See “Event Scheduler” Dialog Box on page 116.
[Show/Hide Designer] Button
[User Control] Button
[Synchronization] Button
[Event Logger] Button
[Event Scheduler] Button
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
42
[Mute] Button
Tur ns ON and OFF the DME mute button for the current zone.
To turn it ON, press the <Shift> key while clicking. If you click the button while it is OFF without
pressing the <Shift> key, the following message will be displayed: “Click the Mute Button with the Shift
Key.”
To turn it OFF, click on the button. There is no need to press the <Shift> key.
Current Scene
Displays the number and name of the current scene. You can switch between scenes.
[Scene Number]
Displays the number of the current scene. A list where you can select a scene is displayed when
you press the []. The EDIT indicator will light when a parameter has been edited after recalling or
storing a scene.
[Scene Name]
Displays the name of the current scene.
[Scene Manager] Button
Opens the “Scene Manager” dialog box.
NOTE
Press <Ctrl> key and <+> key simultaneously recall the next scene and press <Ctrl> key and <-> key simultaneously
recall the previous scene. These settings can be changed via the Shortcut keys dialog box (page 134).
Mute OFF Mute ON
[Scene Number]
[Scene Name]
[Scene Manager] Button
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
43
[User] (Logged On User)
Currently Logged On User Name
Displays the currently logged on user name.
[Security] Button
Opens the “Security” dialog box.
Current Zone
Displays the name of the active zone. A list where you can select a zone is displayed when you press
the [].
Communication Status
Displays the communication status between the DME unit and the computer.
[On-line] Button
When the DME unit is connected to a computer, clicking this button alternately switches the unit's
on-line/off-line status. The indicator will light when the DME unit is on-line.
Message Transmit/Receive Indicators
[Rx]
Lights when MIDI messages from the DME unit are received by DME Designer.
[Tx]
Lights when MIDI messages are transmitted from DME Designer to the DME unit.
Currently Logged On
User Name
[Security] Button
ON-line Button
Message Transmit/Receive Indicator
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
44
Main Panel Window Menu
[File] Menu
[New]
Creates a new project. When a new project is created, the current project will be closed.
A confirmation message asking “Project file has been modified. Save?” will be displayed.
[Yes] Button
Saves the currently open project.
If the currently open file was already given a name and saved, that saved file will be overwritten.
The “Save As” dialog box will be displayed for files that have not yet been saved. In this dialog box,
you can name the file when you save it.
[No] Button
Closes the project without saving it. If the file has already been given a name and saved, the most
recently saved version will remain as is. If the project has not been given a name and saved, it will
be lost.
[Cancel] Button
Cancels creation of a new project.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
45
[Open]
Opens saved project files. Because the currently open project will be closed, a confirmation dialog
box asking “Project file has been modified. Save?” will be displayed.
When you select this command, the “Open” dialog box will be displayed. Select the project file you
want to open and click the [Open] button.
If security is enabled for the project file, the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box will be displayed.
Enter the ID and password to open the file and click the [OK] button. The project file will open.
[Save]
Overwrites an already saved project file with the current changes. If the file is being saved for the
first time, the “Save As” dialog box will be displayed.
See “Project Files” on page 22.
[Save as]
Saves the current project file as another file with a new name or in a new location. When you select
this command, the “Save as” dialog box will be displayed.
See “Project Files” on page 22.
[Import DME Configuration]
Imports parameters for a DME that is arranged in a configuration file.
See “DME Data File” on page 30.
[Export DME Configuration]
Exports parameters of a DME that is arranged in a configuration file.
See “DME Data File” on page 30.
DME File Storage
Opens the “DME File Storage” dialog box.
See “DME File Storage” on page 52.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
46
Recently Used Files
Displays recently saved files. If you click one of the file names, you can open that file.
[Preference]
Opens the “Preference” dialog box.
See “Preferences” on page 53.
[Log Off]
Logs off the currently logged on user. Because the currently logged on user must be logged off
before a new one can be logged on, the “Log On” dialog box will be displayed so you can log on
the next user.
See “Users and Security” on page 19.
[Exit]
Closes “DME Designer.” A confirmation dialog box asking “Project file has been modified. Save?”
will be displayed. To save, click [Yes]. To close without saving, click [No.]
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
47
[Edit] Menu
[Undo]
Undoes a single operation. The name of the operation that will be undone by [Undo] is displayed in
the command name. You can also select the commands that come after that.
When [Undo] is not possible, the command will be grayed out.
[Redo]
Returns to the status before the [Undo] command was executed. The name of the operation that
will be restored by [Redo] is displayed. You can [Redo] only as many operations as were undone
with the [Undo] command. When [Redo] is not possible, the command will be grayed out.
[Undo History]
Opens the “Undo History” dialog box. Undoes multiple operations. Also deletes the history of
operations.
1 List
Displays all operations performed so far, in order starting with the oldest. You can select an
operation by clicking on it.
2 [OK] Button
Undoes all operations below the one selected on the list. The operation selected on the list does
not get undone.
3 [Close] Button
Closes the dialog box.
4 [Delete All] Button
Deletes the entire history of operations displayed on the list. When an operation is deleted from
the list, it cannot be undone.
Operations undone from the [Undo History] can be re-executed one-by-one using [Redo].
1
2
3
4
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
48
[View] Menu
[Designer]
Displays or hides the Designer window.
[Event Logger]
Displays the network event log.
Not displayed if selected while the network event log is showing.
See “Event Logger” on page 111.
[User Control]
This opens User Control.
The user controls that can be opened by the currently logged on user are displayed on a submenu.
If you click [New User Control] on the submenu, the “New User Control” dialog box opens.
See “User Control/User Module Editor” on page 279.
[Tools] Menu
[Scene Manager]
Opens the “Scene Manager” dialog box.
See “Scene Manager” on page 63.
NOTE
Controls that are not available to the currently logged-on user are not shown in the menu.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
49
[User Control Manager]
Opens the “User Control Manager” dialog box.
See “User Control” on page 70, page 279
[Parameter Link]
Opens the “Parameter Link” dialog box.
See “Parameter Link” on page 73.
[Synchronization]
Opens the “Synchronization” dialog box.
See “Synchronization (DME Designer and DME Unit Synchronization)” on page 75.
[Event Scheduler]
Opens the “Event Scheduler” dialog box.
See “Event Scheduler” on page 116.
[Wav File Manager]
Opens the “Wav File Manager” dialog box.
See “Wav File Manager” on page 128.
[GPI]
Opens the “GPI” dialog box.
See “GPI” on page 79.
[MIDI]
Opens the “MIDI” dialog box.
See “MIDI” on page 90.
[User Defined Button]
Opens the “User Defined Button” dialog box.
See “User Defined Button (User Defined Parameters)” on page 98.
[DAW Control]
Opens the “DAW Control” dialog box.
See “DAW Control” on page 132.
[Remote Control Setup List]
Opens the “Remote Control Setup List” Dialog box.
See “Remote Control Setup List” on page 123.
[Word Clock]
Opens the “Word Clock” dialog box.
See “Word Clock” on page 102.
[Monitor]
Opens the “Monitor Out” dialog box.
See “Monitor” on page 104.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
50
[Clock]
Opens the “Clock” dialog box.
See “Clock” on page 105.
[Language]
Opens the “Language” dialog box.
See “Language Settings” on page 106.
[Parameter List]
Opens the “Parameter List” dialog box.
See “Parameter List” on page 124.
[Component Lock]
Opens the “Component Lock” dialog box.
See “Component Lock” on page 127.
[Security]
Opens the “Security” dialog box.
See “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55.
[Shortcut Keys]
Opens the “Shortcut Keys” dialog box.
See “Shortcut Keys” on page 134.
[Backup]
Opens the “Backup” dialog box.
See “Backup” on page 135.
[Firmware Update]
Updates the DME unit firmware.
See “DME Firmware Update” on page 107.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
51
[Window] Menu
Displays the open windows. Click a window name to bring that window to the front.
[Close All Editor Windows]
Closes all editor windows.
[About] Menu
[About DME Designer]
Displays information about this application.
NOTE
Each design windows within the Designer window can be switched using the [Window] menu in the Designer window.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
52
DME File Storage
Allows management of DME files. Project files can be managed on the DME, eliminating the need to
manage them on the computer.
Click [DME File Storage] in the [File] menu to display the “DME File Storage” dialog.
Zone List
Select the desired zone and DME from the list.
File List
A list of the files stored on the selected DME.
[Send] Button
Transfers selected files from the computer to the DME.
[Receive] Button
Transfers selected files from the DME to the computer.
[Delete] Button
Deletes selected files from the DME.
NOTE
Synchronization may become impossible if the [Remaining Memory] value (the amount of remaining DME memory)
becomes too small. If this occurs, delete unwanted files to increase the amount of available memory.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
53
Preferences
When you click the [Preference] command on the [File] menu in the Main Panel window, the
“Preferences” dialog box is displayed. Here you can make environmental settings for using DME
Designer.
[Application] Tab
Here you can set the general usage environment.
On Startup
Selects the action when the application starts up.
[Load the last file opened]
Opens the last opened file. If the file cannot be found because it was moved, deleted, or its
name was changed, a new project will be opened.
[Create an empty file]
Opens a new project.
[Load File & Synchronization]
Opens the last opened file and synchronizes with the DME unit.
Contents Folder
Specifies the folder where the images used by the Design windows and user controls are stored.
Click the [Browse] button and specify the folder.
Auto Save
Set up the automatic file save feature.
[Enable]
Auto save of project files being worked on will occur when checked. The file will be
overwritten, but the Undo history will not be cleared. This setting has no effect when the file
being worked on has not previously been saved, or the computer is online.
[Interval in minutes]
Specifies the auto-save interval in minutes.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
54
[Confirm Scene Store]
Place a checkmark here to have a confirmation dialog box displayed when storing a scene.
[Save after synchronization]
If a save is performed after the DME Designer is synchronized to the DME unit, the next
synchronization will be significantly faster because one the difference needs to be synchronized.
Check this checkbox to specify auto-save after the DME Designer is synchronized to the DME unit.
[Component Editor] Tab
Sets up operation of the Component Editor knobs, sliders, and edit boxes. Refer to “Changing
Parameters” on page 266.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
55
Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)
When you click the [Security] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Security” dialog box is displayed.
Here you can create and delete users. You can also set the security level for each user. Users are
saved as DME Designer settings. You don’t need to create users for each file.
User Setting Restrictions
Various restrictions apply, depending on the security level of the user that is currently logged on.
The currently logged on user can edit only users at a security level lower than his or her own.
The currently logged on user cannot raise his or her own security level.
[Administrator] User
The [Administrator] user is registered by default, and can use all functions. Immediately after DME
Designer is installed, there is no password set for the [Administrator] user.
Auto-Logon User
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
56
Security Level
User security levels are set with the [Operation Security] item at the right of the “Security” dialog
box.
You can allow or disallow editing and the ability to open windows or set controls.
Ten levels, 1 through 10, are set for scene storage/recall and user controls. Level 1 is the highest
level and 10 is the lowest. By default, level 1 is set for the [Administrator] user. Level 1 can be set
for the [Administrator] only. Users created by the [Administrator] directly below itself can be set at
levels 2 through 10. New users created subordinate to users at level 2 can be set at levels 3
through 10. New users can be created no higher than one level below the user that created them.
Scene sets the level for storing and recalling scenes. The logged on user can store or recall scenes
at levels equal to or lower than his or her own level. For example, a user at level 3 can recall scenes
set for scene recall at levels 3 through 10.
Levels are also set for user control. The logged on user can display or edit user controls at levels
equal to or lower than his or her own level.
The log-on user can use zones that are checked in the [View Zone] field.
Level 1 User
Level 2 User
Level 3 User
Level 4 User
Security Level Settings
User Level
High
Low
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
57
[Enable Auto-Log On]
Enables auto-logon. If this checkbox is selected, the user displayed in the box to the right will be
logged on automatically when DME Designer is started. Auto-logon logs on the user without any
password entry.
Click the [] at the right of the box, and select the user for auto-logon from the displayed user list.
If auto-logon is turned OFF, the “Log On” dialog box will be displayed whenever the DME Designer is
started. Each time a user must be selected and a password entered in order to log on.
If auto-logon is changed from ON to OFF when a password is set for the currently logged on user, a
“Confirmation of Current User” dialog box will be displayed.
Enter the user’s password into the [Password] box, and click the [OK] button.
If you click the [Cancel] button, auto-logon will remain ON.
Auto-Logon User
Selects the user for auto-logon when [Enable Auto Log On] is checked.
The currently logged on user can set this command for users at a security level equal to or lower
than his or her own. If a user at a higher level is selected, a message that warns “Cannot access
higher user level.” will be displayed. Click the [OK] button.
To set auto-logon for a user at a security level higher than the currently logged on user, first log off
as the current user, then logon as a user at a higher security level.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
58
User List
The registered users are displayed here. The currently logged on user is displayed in bold text. Click
the name of the user whose settings you want to edit.
The [Administrator] is the user set by default, and it is used for administering the system. The
[Administrator] user has the highest level and can use all functions.
All new users are created at a level lower that the [Administrator] user, and are displayed below the
[Administrator].
If a user at level 2 and below has other users subordinate to him or her, a [+] or [-] button will be
displayed to the left of higher level user’s name on the list. Clicking the [+] or [-] buttons displays or
hides the users subordinate to that higher user.
The currently logged on user can create multiple users at lower levels.
1 Name
Displays the user names. The currently logged on user is displayed in bold text.
2 Startup User Control
Displays “ON” to automatically open the user control and make settings when the user is logged
on.
3 [Add User] Button
Adds a user subordinate to the user selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Add User”
dialog box. Select the user that will be superior to the new user, then click this button.
If a user higher than the currently logged on user is selected, the button will be grayed out and
no user can be added.
4 [Remove User] Button
Deletes the user selected on the list. Only users at levels lower than the currently logged on user
can be deleted.
Furthermore, the currently logged on user cannot delete himself.
5 [Change] Button
Changes settings for the user selected on the list. Opens the “Change User Information” dialog
box. The contents of the dialog box are the same as the “Add User” dialog box.
6
21
3
4 5
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
59
6 Operation Security
Sets the functions that can be used by the user selected on the [User List] to the left. Selecting
a checkbox enables use of the corresponding function.
[Edit]
You can change the following settings: editing in the Designer window, user control edit, user
defined parameter edit, word clock, scene edit, GPI and MIDI.
[View DME Design Window]
Allows display of the Designer configuration window.
[Control Component Editor]
Allows parameter editing in the component editor.
[View Component Editor]
Allows display of the component editor.
[Change Configuration]
Allows switching between configurations.
[Synchronization]
Allows synchronizing with the DME unit.
[View Log Window]
Displays the Event Logger window.
[Scene Store/Recall Level]
Sets the level at which scenes can be stored and recalled. Click the [] and [] buttons or
enter a number into the box to set the level. While levels 1 through 10 are available, the range
of levels that can be actually set varies according to the level of the user doing the setting.
When a user is created, automatically this is set to “One level lower than the user above.” The
initially set level is the highest level that can be set for that user.
[User Control Level]
Sets the user control level. Click the [] and [] buttons or enter a number into the box to set
a level from 1 through 10. While levels 1 through 10 are available, the range of levels that can
be actually set varies according to the level of the user doing the setting.
When a user is created, automatically this is set to “One level lower than the user above.” The
initially set level is the highest level that can be set for that user.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
60
“Add User” Dialog Box/“Change User Information” Dialog Box
When you click the [Add User] button in the “Security” dialog box, the “Add User” dialog box is
displayed. If you click the [Change] button in the “Security” dialog box, the “Change User Information”
dialog box is displayed.
The “Add User” dialog box is for setting a user name and password when adding a new user. You can
change user settings in the “Change User Information” dialog box. The contents of the dialog boxes
are the same.
[Name] Box
Enter the user name. Enter a name different than other existing user names.
[Password] Box
Enter the password. When you type in the password box, asterisks (*) will be displayed instead of
the characters you enter. If you do not want to set a password the user, leave the box blank.
[Confirm Password] Box
Enter the password once again to confirm it. When you type in the password box, asterisks (*) will
be displayed instead of the characters you enter. If you do not want to set a password the user,
leave the box blank.
[Startup User Control]
When a user logs on, user controls and settings which are specified or below that user’s security
level are automatically opened.
In the “Security” dialog box [User List], [User Control] will be “ON” for users for whom this option
has been turned on.
[OK] Button
In the “Add User” dialog box, this creates new users according to the settings made there. In the
“Change User Information” dialog box, this applies the dialog box settings and changes the user
settings.
[Cancel] Button
Cancels user creation or setting changes, and closes the dialog box.
“Add User” dialog box “Change User Information” dialog box
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
61
Creating Users
Users are created as follows:
1 Click [Security] on the Main Panel window [Tools] menu.
The “Security” dialog box will be displayed.
You can open the “Security” dialog box by clicking the [Security] button in the Main Panel window.
2 Select a user from the [User List] in the “Security” dialog box.
A user will be created subordinate to the selected user. [Administrator] can be selected only if the
logged on user is the [Administrator]. If there are multiple users, select the user that will be above
the new user.
Multiple users can be created subordinate to a single user.
3 Click the [Add User] button.
The “Add User” dialog box will be displayed.
4 Enter the user name into the [Name] box.
5 Enter the password into the [Password] box.
You can also create users with no password. If you do not want to set a password for the user,
leave the [Password] box blank.
6 Enter the password into the [Confirm Password] box also.
If you do not want to set a password for the user, leave the [Confirm Password] box blank also.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
62
7 Set the [Startup User Control].
8 Click the [OK] button.
This closes the “Add User” dialog box. The new user will be added to the “Security” dialog box list.
9 Set the security level for the user, using [Operation Security] in the “Security” dialog box.
When creating a new user, all the checkboxes in [Operation Security] will be turned OFF. Click and
turn ON the functions you want to permit the new user to use. [Scene Store/Recall Level] and [User
Control Level] will be set to one level lower than the user above the newly created user. The initially
set level will automatically be the highest level that can be set for that user. To lower the level, enter
a larger number in the box.
Click the [OK] button and the dialog will close. You can continue creating new users without
closing the dialog box.
NOTE
If the text entered into the [Password] and [Confirm Password] boxes is not the same, a “Different password!” message
will be displayed. Click the [OK] button and reenter the correct password in the [Password] and [Confirm Password]
boxes in the “Add User” dialog box.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
63
Scene Manager
Scenes
Configuration contents can be given a name and saved as “Scenes.” Saving scenes is called “Scene
Store.” Parameter settings in the configuration for each site used can be stored multiple times and
recalled and used when needed. There are 999 scene memories available. When a scene is stored,
DME parameters are saved as “preset parameters.” Presets are automatically created when a scene
is stored.
Bringing back a scene (making a scene the current scene) is called “scene recall.” Scenes are
recalled using the [] button next to the current scene on the Main Panel window or by using the
“Scene Manager” dialog box.
Security for the Logged On User
The currently logged on user can store, recall, or edit scenes that have a security level equal to or
lower than his or her own. User security levels are set with the [Edit] [Store/Recall/Edit] item in
the “Security” dialog box.
“Scene Manager” Dialog Box
When you click [Scene Manager] in the [Tools] menu, the “Scene Manager” dialog box is displayed.
[Cut] Button
[Copy] Button [Insert] Button
[Paste] Button
[Clear] Button
[Recall Safe] Button
List
[Store] Button
[Recall] Button
[Detail] Button
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
64
List
Displays the contents of the scene.
Scene No.
Displays the scene number. There are 999 scene memories available. Click here to select a scene.
Name
Displays the name of the scene. Click the [Name] box to enter a scene name. Up to 18 characters
can be entered.
If the scene has not been stored, “[No Data]” will be displayed. A name can be entered when a
scene is stored. The default names are “Scene001,” “Scene002,” etc. The three-digit number is the
same as the scene number (displayed in [Scene Number]) for the stored scene.
Configuration
Displays the configuration name. If the scene has not been stored, a hyphen (-) will be displayed.
Edit Security
Displays the scene edit security levels. Clicking here will display a list where you can change these
security levels. Only levels at or below the security level of the currently logged on user are
displayed in the list. When a user is created, these settings are the same as the new user's security
level, but scene store and edit settings can be set lower.
Recall Security
Displays the scene recall security level. Clicking here will display a list where you can change the
security level. Only levels at or below the security level of the currently logged on user are
displayed in the list. When a user is created, these settings are the same as the new user's security
level, but the scene recall setting can be set lower.
Fade
Fade is used when Fader components are used in a configuration. It sets whether fade is applied
(ON) or not (OFF) when a scene is recalled.
NOTE
The fade function cannot be simulated in DME Designer.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
65
Fade Mode
Sets the fade mode. You can select “All” or “Selected.”
If you select “All,” all channels using Fader components in their configuration will be affected. Even
when multiple components are used, all channels are targeted. If you select “Selected,” the only
channels affected will be those for which the Fade switch in the component editor has been set to
ON.
Fade Time
Sets the fade time: i.e. the time it will take fader and pan parameters to reach their new settings
when a scene is recalled. The changes are smooth and continuous. If only the presets in the
recalled scene are set when that scene is recalled, the volume will be adjusted while the sound
from the previous scene is playing, until the new level is reached If the configuration also changes,
the volume will rise from silence until it reaches the new value. This can be set from zero to 60
seconds, in 0.1 second increments.
[Cut] Button
Cuts the scene selected on the list.
[Copy] Button
Copies the scene selected on the list.
[Paste] Button
Pastes the contents of the cut or copied scene into the scene selected on the list. The selected
scene will be overwritten. If no scene has been cut or copied, the button will be grayed out and
cannot be used.
NOTE
The Fade switch for each channel is set to OFF by default. The fade effect will not be applied, even if Fade=ON and
Fade Mode=Selected is selected. To apply the effect, you must set the Fade switch to ON for the channels where you
need it.
NOTE
Right-click in the list and use the contextual menu that appears to set User Defined Button, Program Change, GPI In, or GPI
Out for the scene.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
66
[Insert] Button
Inserts the contents of the cut or copied scene into the location of the scene selected on the list.
The selected scene and those below are moved down by one. For example, if “Door_Open” was
stored as scene number “005,” and selected when the [Insert] button was clicked, the inserted
scene would become scene number “005,” and “Door_Open” would be moved to scene number
“006.”
If no scene has been cut or copied, the button will be grayed out and cannot be used.
If a scene is stored in the lowest scene on the scene memory list (with the scene number [999]), the
button will be grayed out and the insert function will not be available. Delete the contents of scene
number 999 before attempting to use the insert function.
[Clear] Button
Deletes the contents of the scene selected on the list.
If the presets included in a scene are not used in another scene, a “Delete preset?” message will
be displayed.
If the presets are not needed, click the [OK] button. If you click the [Cancel] button, the presets will
not be deleted. Whichever you click, the scene itself will be deleted.
NOTE
Move the scene data to a different scene memory when you don’t want to erase the contents of Scene No. 999.
NOTE
The [Cancel] button on the “Delete Preset?” message does not cancel the [Clear] for the scene. It merely cancels
deletion of the presets.
Click the
[Insert] button
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
67
[Recall Safe] Button
Before performing a recall, you can check the contents of the scene selected on the list, and set
components that will not be read. This is used when there are components you do not want
changed by the scene recall.
When you click this button, the “Recall Safe” dialog box will be displayed.
All components included in the scene will be displayed. There is a checkbox to the left of each
component. Place a check next to the components you do not wish to have read by scene recall
(those you do not wish changed from their current status).
Press the [Select All] button to check all components, or the [Clear All] button to clear the checks
from all components.
Click the [OK] button. The dialog box will close and when the scene is recalled, all components,
except those checked, will be read.
[Store] Button
Stores the contents of the current configuration into the scene selected in the list. If an empty scene
is selected and the contents stored there, a new scene is created. If a scene is already stored in
the selected scene number, it will be overwritten. If [Confirm Scene Store] is checked on the
[Application] tab of the “Preferences” dialog box, a confirmation dialog box will be displayed
before the scene is stored.
When a scene is stored, the configuration parameters at that time are saved as “preset
parameters.” Presets are created automatically.
NOTE
The components checked in the “Recall Safe” dialog box are the components that will not be read (that will be ignored).
If you want to read all components, there is no need to make settings in the “Recall Safe” dialog box.
“Recall Safe” is used when you want to keep some components with their current settings, while there are other
components you want to change according to the scene.
NOTE
The currently logged on user can store scenes at a security level equal to or lower than his or her own only.
NOTE
When the computer and DME unit are online, a scene stored in the DME Designer will also be stored on the DME unit,
regardless of the DME settings.
The DME utility display Misc. page [Scene Store] setting only affects store operation from the DME panel controls.
Component NameCheckbox
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
68
[Recall] Button
Recalls the scene selected in the list and makes it the current scene.
[Detail] Button
Expands the dialog box and displays a preset list. If you click the preset list while it is displayed,
the preset list will be hidden. When the dialog box is opened, its status will be the same as the last
time it was closed.
Preset List
Displays the presets for each DME unit in the scene selected in the list. When another scene is
selected on the list, the contents of the preset list will be changed.
You can change the presets used in the scene by clicking the radio buttons to the left of the preset
names. You can also create, delete, and store presets or change their names.
DME
Displays the DME. Below the DME are [Slot], [Component], and [AD]. If there are presets below
them, a [+] button will be displayed. When you click the [+] it becomes a [-] and the presets are
displayed.
Preset
Displays DME presets.
If you click the preset name, selecting the text that is there, you can change the preset name. When
presets are automatically created when a scene is stored, they are named “Preset001,”
“Preset002,” and so on. Presets created with the [New] button are named “New Preset.”
You can select the presets used in a scene by clicking the radio buttons to the left of the preset
names.
NOTE
The currently logged on user can recall scenes at a security level equal to or lower than his or her own only.
Preset List
[Del] Button
[Store] Button
[New] Button
[Del Unused] Button
[Detail] Button
DME
Preset
DME
Preset
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
69
[Del] Button
Deletes the preset selected on the preset list.
[Store] Button
Stores the current parameter status in the preset selected in the preset list. The contents of the
selected preset will be overwritten.
[New] Button
Stores the current status and creates a new preset. The newly created preset is named “New
Preset.”
[Del Unused] Button
Deletes presets that are not used by DMEs included in the current zone.
NOTE
Presets used in a scene cannot be deleted.
NOTE
There is no [OK] button or [Cancel] button in the “Scene Manager” dialog box. To close the dialog box, click the [Close]
button at the upper-right of the dialog box.
Changes from storing/recalling scenes or editing, such as changing names or contents, will be applied immediately.
With the dialog box open, you can make the Designer window active and add components or change parameters.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
70
User Control
User Controls
You can create an original control by arranging knobs and sliders in the component editor. Controls
you create are called “user controls.
Those created user controls are displayed in the [View] [User Control] submenu in the Main Panel
window
Security for the Logged On User
The currently logged-on user can create and edit the user controls of all users at lower security
levels as well as the controls specified for that user. Available user controls are displayed in the
User Control manager dialog box that can be accessed through the [User Control] sub-menu of the
main panel window [View] menu.
The user control security level for each user is set with [Operation Security] [User Control Level]
in the “Security” dialog box. For information about user security, see “Security (Creating Users and
Making User Settings)” on page 55.
“User Control Manager” Dialog Box
When you click [User Control Manager] on the [Tools] menu, the “User Control Manager” dialog box is
displayed. This dialog box displays a list of user controls included in the configuration of the current
zone. There they can be created or deleted. You can also edit the name and security level of user
controls here.
NOTE
Only controls available to the currently logged on user are shown in the list.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
71
User Control
Displays the names of the user controls. Clicking here will select the characters in the name,
allowing you to change it.
Security Level
Displays the security level set for each user control.
Clicking here will display a list where you can change the security level.
User
Displays the name of the user specified in User Control.
Clicking here will display a list of the available users.
NOTE
Levels at or below the security level of the currently logged on user are displayed in the list.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
72
[New] Button
Creates new user controls. Clicking here displays the “New User Control” dialog box.
Enter the User Control name in the [Name] box.
[User Level]/[User Name]
Use the radio buttons to the left to select security-level or user dependent control.
[User Level]
Select a security level from the drop-down list.
[User Name]
Check a checkbox.
Click [OK] to create the specified User Control setup.
[Delete] Button
Deletes the user control selected on the list.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
73
Parameter Link
About Parameter Links
You can group parameters of the same type and link them. These groups are called “Parameter
Links.” When one parameter in a group is changed, all parameters in the group will change in the
same way.
There are two parameter link types: global links and local links. Global links link parameters for DMEs
within a zone. Local links link parameters that are included for a single DME.
Groups can be created and parameters added to groups in the user control/user module control
editor and component editor. For information about creating parameter links, see “Creating Parameter
Links” on page 314.
You can check the status of parameter links and edit them in the Parameter Link window.
Parameter Link Window
When you click [Parameter Link] in the [Tools] menu, the “Parameter Link” window is displayed. You
can also display the window by selecting [Open Parameter Link] from the context menu displayed in
the user control/user module editor and component editor.
1 [Global Link] button/[Local Link] button
Switches the window display.
Global Link
Links to the parameters of multiple DME units in the zone.
Local Link
Links to the parameters of one DME unit.
NOTE
Parameters can not apply to multiple groups.
NOTE
Because there is a large load on the network, the maximum number of Global Links will be limited to eight.
[Global Link] button/[Local Link] button
Parameter Link Mode
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
74
2 Parameter Link Mode
Parameter linking is active when checked. Uncheck to temporarily disable parameter linking.
Uncheck when you want to adjust the parameters individually.
You can also turn parameter link mode ON or OFF using the context menu in the user control/
user module editor or component editor.
Group List
Displays a hierarchical list of groups and the parameters that belong to them.
When a group name is selected, the controls that belong to that group are selected.
•Keep Offset (Group icon)
Tur ns ON or OFF whether the offset value set for each parameter is retained as it is. When ON
is set for a group, the Keep Offset icon is displayed in orange. When OFF is set for a group, it
is displayed in green.
When Keep Offset is set to ON and any parameter within the group goes to the minimum or
maximum value, the parameters cannot be further changed.
Keep Offset can be set to ON or OFF using the “Keep Offset” item on the context menu that is
displayed when you right click the name of a group.
Group Name
You can select a group name by clicking on it. Clicking the selected group name again will
select the characters in the name, allowing you to change it.
Clicking the plus (+) or minus (-) sign to the left of the group name displays or hides items that
belong to that group.
You can delete a group by selecting it and pressing the <Delete> key. You can also delete a
group by right-clicking on the group name and selecting [Delete] in the context menu that is
displayed.
DME Icon
Displays the DME that includes the parameters that belong to a group. The components can
be displayed or hidden by clicking the plus (+) or minus (-) signs for the DME icon. The
parameters, Min, and Max can be displayed or hidden by clicking the plus (+) or minus (-)
signs for the component.
•Parameter
Displays the parameters that belong to a group. You can display or hide minimum and
maximum values for a parameter by clicking the plus (+) or minus (-) signs.
You can delete a parameter from a group by selecting the parameter name and pressing the
<Delete> key.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
75
Synchronization
(DME Designer and DME Unit Synchronization)
The DME unit and DME Designer are synchronized by Synchronization. The DME operates according
to the configuration and scene information transferred during this process.
This Synchronization is used when transferring the configuration in DME Designer and when
controlling the DME unit in real time.
Online and Offline
When a DME unit is connected to the computer and synchronized with DME Designer, its status is
called “Online.” When a DME unit is not physically connected to the computer or is not synchronized
even when it is connected, its status is called “Offline.” You can check the online/offline status and
message transmission in [Communication Status] in the Main Panel window.
Online
Sends configurations created in DME Designer to the DME unit and reads data from the DME unit,
so that the DME unit configuration is reflected in the DME Designer configuration. You can also
control the DME in real time from DME Designer. Operations performed in the DME Designer
control editor are reflected in the DME unit, and operations on the DME side are reflected in DME
Designer.
You can not perform configuration editing using the Designer while online.
Offline
The communication status becomes offline when editing configurations.
Switching Between Online and Offline
You can switch between online and offline in the “Synchronization” dialog box.
NOTE
Because Synchronization presupposes that the DME unit can communicate with the computer where DME Designer is
installed, the necessary drivers (USB-MIDI or DME-N Network Driver) must be installed, and appropriate settings must be
made for the driver and for DME Designer MIDI IN/OUT (page 90).
For information about driver installation and settings, see the installation guide. For DME Designer communications settings,
see “Online” (page 35).
NOTE
Because there are no scene settings when the DME unit is purchased, the configuration and scene information in DME
Designer must first be transferred.
NOTE
For information about the online procedure, see “Online” (page 35).
NOTE
For information about the online procedure, see “Online” (page 35).
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
76
“Synchronization” Dialog Box
When you click the [Synchronization] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Synchronization” dialog box
is displayed. The data from the current zone in the Designer is synchronized with the DME unit.
Here you can make settings for synchronizing the unit in DME Designer one-on-one with the DME that
actually exists on the network.
[Go On-line] Button
[Go Off-line] Button
[Designer]
[Network]
Message Area
[Close this window after synchronization] checkbox
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
77
[Go On-line] Button
This button will be grayed out when the software is online.
Clicking the button displays a dialog box where you can decide the synchronization method.
[DesignerDME] button
A consistency check is performed between the data in the current zone and the DME data, then
the communication status changes to online. Transmits data from the DME Designer to the DME
unit and synchronizes the two.
[DesignerDME] button
Data from the DME unit is read into DME Designer. Current data stored in the DME unit, such as
scenes, are read into DME Designer. This assumes that the configurations in the DME unit and the
DME Designer agree.
[Go Off-line] Button
Clicking this button changes from online to offline. While offline, this button will be grayed out.
[Close this window after synchronization] Checkbox
When this checkbox is checked the dialog window will close automatically after synchronization.
Designer
The Designer list displays DME units arranged in the currently valid zone in the DME Designer.
The unit in the DME Designer is matched with a recognized IP address, and they are compared
one-to-one.
DME Name
Displays the names of DME units included in the project.
When multiple DMEs of the same type are arranged in a zone window, it is a good idea to change
the name of each one.
IP Address Select Box
Matches the units in the Designer with recognized IP addresses. Click the [] to display the IP
addresses of same type of devices in the area. If the unit is a DME24N, IP addresses for all
DME24N devices in the area will be displayed on the list.
If you click the title bar with “IP Address” written on it (pale mark appears), you can line them up
vertically.
IP Address Select Box
DME Name
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
78
Network
The devices currently connected to the network are displayed in the Network list. To keep
consistency with the Designer list on the left side, the status of DMEs on the network is displayed.
IP Address
DME Icon
Displays DME and ICP1 devices connected to the network. The zone master DME icon is red.
Icons for slave DMEs are blue. DMEs and ICP1 devices with no relation to DMEs in Designer
have gray icons.
IP Address
Displays the DME IP address.
Message Area
Displays a message that synchronization is in progress.
Reading from the DME Unit
When you are offline in a condition where it is possible to go online, you can read data.
Before this can be done, configurations, such as cards inserted in the slots and any connected serial
devices, must agree for the DME unit and DME Designer.
Preset data overwritten in the DME unit is read, along with every type of parameter setting managed in
DME Designer.
NOTE
The event log is read in the Event Logger.
DME Icon
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
79
GPI
About GPI
GPI is an abbreviation for General Purpose Interface. Using GPI input and output, DMEs can be
remotely controlled from custom-made controllers or external equipment. For both input and output,
the DME64N provides 16 GPI channels and the DME24N provides eight. Sets GPI input/output for
each DME.
Using GPI input data, you can switch DME scenes and change component change component
parameters.
For hardware-related information such as the connection method for GPI, see the “DME64N/24N
Owner’s Manual.”
“GPI” Dialog Box
When you click the [GPI] command on the [Tools] menu, the “GPI” dialog box is displayed. Sets GPI
input/output for the DME.
[DME]
From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings.
Configuration
The current configuration name will be displayed.
NOTE
Only users for whom the [Operation Security] [Edit] checkbox has been checked can make GPI settings.
[DME]
GPI IN
GPI OUT
[Apply] Button
[OK] Button
[Cancel] Button
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
80
GPI IN
The DME64N has 16 GPI IN channels, and the DME24N has 8 GPI IN channels.
These settings determine which DME parameters will be controlled by input received at each
individual GPI IN channel. The channel numbers are shown in the leftmost column.
[Function]
Specifies the function to be controlled by GPI input. Click to see a list from which you can choose
the function to be assigned to the corresponding GPI IN channel.
The nine available functions are: [No Assign], [Parameter Value Edit], [Scene Change], [Scene
Increment], [Scene Decrement], [Mute], [GPI Lock], [Time Adjustment], [Play Wav File].
The [Parameter], [Min], [Max], and [Terminal] items will change according to the selected function.
[No Assign]
No function assigned. This is the default setting.
Select [No Assign] to clear an assigned function.
The [Parameter], [Min], [Max], and [Terminal] items are not available.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
81
•[Parameter Value Edit]
Allows component parameters to be changed via GPI input.
In this case [Parameter] is used to select the parameter to be controlled.
[Min] and [Max] specify the range over which the parameter can be changed.
[Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter.
and specify continuous control of continuously-variable parameters from an external
fader, knob, or similar device.
and specify on/off control of 2-state parameters via an external switching device.
The parameter value changes in proportion to the voltage applied to the GPI input.
The minimum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the specified [Min] parameter value, and the
maximum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the specified [Max] parameter value, with
intermediate voltages produced the corresponding intermediate parameter values.
The parameter value changes in inverse proportion to the voltage applied to the GPI input.
The minimum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the specified [Max] parameter value, and the
maximum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the specified [Min] parameter value, with
intermediate voltages produced the corresponding intermediate parameter values.
The specified [Min] and [Max] parameter values are alternately selected each time the voltage
applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage.*
The specified [Min] and [Max] parameter values are alternately selected each time the voltage
applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage.*
Example: Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when [Fader Level]
is set in the [Parameter] box.
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
[Max] parameter value
[Min] parameter value
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
[Max] parameter value
[Min] parameter value
Example: Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when [Fader Level]
is set in the [Parameter] box.
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
[Max] parameter value [Max] parameter value[Min] parameter value
Median voltage
Example: Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when [Fader Level]
is set in the [Parameter] box.
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
[Max] parameter value [Max] parameter value[Min] parameter value
Median voltage
Example: Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when [Fader Level]
is set in the [Parameter] box.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
82
[Scene Change]
GPI input can be used to recall a specified scene.
[Parameter] specifies the number of the scene to be recalled.
[Min] and [Max] are not available.
[Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter.
The scene specified by [Parameter] will be recalled each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises
from below to above the median voltage.*
The scene specified by [Parameter] will be recalled each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops
from above to below the median voltage.*
Same as .
Same as .
[Scene Increment]
GPI input can be used to increment the scene number.
[Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available.
[Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter.
The scene number will be incremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to
above the median voltage.*
The scene number will be incremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to
below the median voltage.*
Same as .
Same as .
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
Trigger
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
Trigger
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
Trigger
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
Trigger
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
83
[Scene Decrement]
GPI input can be used to decrement the scene number.
[Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available.
[Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter.
The scene number will be decremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to
above the median voltage.*
The scene number will be decremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to
below the median voltage.*
Same as .
Same as .
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
Trigger
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
Trigger
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
84
[Mute]
GPI input can be used to engage or disengage the DME mute function.
[Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available.
[Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter.
Mute will be ON when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage*, and OFF when the
voltage is below the median.
Mute will be OFF when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage*, and ON when the
voltage is below the median.
Mute will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from
below to above the median voltage.*
Mute will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from above
to below the median voltage.*
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
MUTE ON
MUTE OFF MUTE OFF
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
MUTE OFF
MUTE ON MUTE ON
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
ON ONOFF
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
ON ONOFF
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
85
[GPI Lock]
GPI Lock can be turned on or off via GPI input. When GPI Lock is ON, all GPI inputs other than
the one being used for GPI Lock control are locked and input will be ignored.
[Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available.
[Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter.
GPI lock will be ON when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage*, and
OFF when the voltage is below the median.
GPI Lock will be OFF when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage*, and
ON when the voltage is below the median.
GPI Lock will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops
from below to above the median voltage.*
GPI Lock will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises
from above to below the median voltage.*
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
MUTE ON
MUTE OFF MUTE OFF
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
MUTE OFF
MUTE ON MUTE ON
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
MUTE ON
MUTE OFF MUTE OFF
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
MUTE OFF
MUTE ON MUTE ON
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
86
[Time Adjustment]
GPI input can be used to adjust the DME internal clock as follows:
[Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available.
[Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter.
and specify continuous control of continuously-variable parameters from an external
fader, knob, or similar device.
and specify on/off control of 2-state parameters via an external switching device.
The internal clock time will be adjusted each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to
above the median voltage.*
The internal clock time will be adjusted each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to
below the median voltage.*
Same as .
Same as .
Internal clock time Time after adjustment
0~14 seconds Returned to 0 seconds
15~29 seconds Advanced to 30 seconds
30~44 seconds Returned to 30 seconds
45~59 seconds Advanced to 0 seconds
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
Trigger
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
Trigger
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
87
[Play Wav File]
GPI input can be used to initiate playback of the specified Wave file.
[Parameter] specifies the Wave file to be played. Files specified by the Wav File Manager can
be selected. Wave files can only be selected if a Wav Player is included in the DME
configuration.
[Min], and [Max] are not available.
[Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter.
and specify continuous control of continuously-variable parameters from an external
fader, knob, or similar device.
and specify on/off control of 2-state parameters via an external switching device.
The specified Wave file will be played each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to
above the median voltage.*
The specified Wave file will be played each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to
below the median voltage.*
Same as .
Same as .
* “Median voltage” refers to the voltage halfway between the maximum and minimum voltages detectable by the GPI
input terminals. Refer to the “GPI Page” section of the “Utility Screens” chapter of the DME64N/24N Owner’s manual
for details on GPI voltages.
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
Trigger
Max. voltage applied to GPI IN
Min. voltage applied to GPI IN
Median voltage
Trigger
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
88
GPI OUT
The DME64N has 16 GPI OUT channels, and the DME24N has 8 GPI OUT channels.
These settings determine which DME parameter values will be output via each individual GPI IN
channel. The channel numbers are shown in the leftmost column.
[Function]
Specifies the function to be transmitted via a GPI output.
The four available functions are: [No Assign], [Parameter Value Edit], [Scene Change], and [GPI
Lock].
The [Parameter], [Threshold], [Terminal], and [Polarity] items will change according to the selected
function.
[No Assign]
No function assigned, and no GPI output will occur. This is the default setting.
Select [No Assign] to clear an assigned function.
The [Parameter], [Threshold], [Terminal], and [Polarity] items are not available.
•[Parameter Value Edit]
Allows component parameter values to be output via GPI.
In this case [Parameter] is used to select the parameter to be output.
[Threshold] specifies the parameter threshold value.
[Terminal] and [Polarity] determine how the GPI voltage will be output in response to
parameter changes.
Ter minal Polarity GPI Output
Ignored When value of the specified parameter is above the threshold level the
output will be high, and when below the threshold level the output will be
low.
Ignored When value of the specified parameter is below the threshold level the
output will be high, and when above the threshold level the output will be
low.
A pulse
*1
will be output when the value of the parameter changes from
below to above the threshold.
A pulse
*1
will be output when the value of the parameter changes from
above to below the threshold.
A pulse
*2
will be output when the value of the parameter changes from
below to above the threshold.
A pulse
*2
will be output when the value of the parameter changes from
above to below the threshold.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
89
[Scene Change]
The recall status of the specified scene is transmitted via GPI output.
[Parameter] specifies the scene for which the recall status is to be output.
[Threshold] and [Polarity] are not available.
[Terminal] determines how the GPI voltage will be output in response to parameter changes.
[GPI Lock]
The GPI Lock status is transmitted via GPI output.
[Parameter], [Threshold], and [Polarity] are not available.
[Terminal] determines how the GPI voltage will be output in response to parameter changes.
Event Schedule
Event Schedule is shown when [GPI OUT] is set in “Event Scheduler.”
See “Event Scheduler” on page 116.
User Defined Button
User Defined Button is shown when [GPI OUT] is set in “User Defined Button.”
See “User Defined Button (User Defined Parameters)” on page 98.
Event Log
Event Log is shown when [GPI OUT] is set in “Event Logger.”
See “Event Logger” on page 111.
Ter minal GPI Output
When the current scene is the same as the scene specified by [Parameter] the output will
be high, and when different the output will be low.
When the current scene is the same as the scene specified by [Parameter] the output will
be low, and when different the output will be high.
A pulse
*1
will be output when the current scene is the same as the scene specified by
[Parameter].
A pulse
*2
will be output when the current scene is the same as the scene specified by
[Parameter].
Ter minal GPI Output
When GPI Lock is ON the output will be high, and when OFF the output will be low.
When GPI Lock is ON the output will be high, and when OFF the output will be low.
250 msec
HI
LO
250 msec
HI
LO
*1 Pulse waveform 1
*2 Pulse waveform 2
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
90
MIDI
When you click the [MIDI] command on the [Tools] menu, the “MIDI” dialog box is displayed. Here you
can make MIDI input/output port, remote control, and other settings.
[Setup] Tab
Sets the DME MIDI channels along with program change, control change, and parameter change.
[DME]
From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings.
MIDI CH
Sets the MIDI channel. This number is also used as the Parameter Change Device ID.
[Tx]
Select the MIDI transmit channel from the list.
[Rx]
Select the MIDI receive channel from the list.
Program Change/Control Change/Parameter Change
Sets transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), OMNI, and Echo for program change/control change/parameter
change. When ON, clicking turns this OFF. When OFF, clicking turns this ON. When OMNI is [ON]
channel messages are received regardless of the receive channel setting. When ECHO is [ON] the
input data is “echoed” (re-transmitted) via the output port that corresponds to the input port via
which it was received.
Detailed settings for program change, control change, and parameter change are made on the
[Program Change] tab, the [Control Change] tab, and the [Parameter Change] tab.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
91
[Control Change] Tab
Assigns components to control change for each DME. You can change DME parameters by sending
control change messages from external equipment.
You can assign to control change numbers 1-31, 33-95, and 102-119.
[DME]
From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings.
Control Change List
The control change numbers and current settings are displayed in the list in the center.
No.
Displays the control change numbers.
Component
Displays the assigned components. Control changes that have no component assigned to them
are blank. If you click here, a list will be displayed. Usable components are on the list. Click the
component name to select it.
NOTE
Because control change numbers 0 and 32 are used for bank select MSB, numbers 96-101 are RPN/NRPN related, and
120-127 are used for mode messages, they cannot be used for component assignment.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
92
Parameter
Set the assigned component link parameter.
When you click here, a list of parameters included in the component is displayed. Select the
parameter you want to assign.
Min/Max
Sets the range of operation for the parameter. The current values for the [Min] (lower limit) and
[Max] (upper limit) are displayed. If you click here, a slider will be displayed. The range and
parameter units that can be set will vary, depending on the parameter selected in the [Parameter]
box.
You can change the parameter by dragging the slider. To make a finer setting, press the <Shift>
key while dragging the slider. The value for the parameter will be shown while you are dragging the
slider. When you finish dragging and release the mouse button, the slider will disappear.
The same slider is displayed whether you click the [Min] box or the [Max] box. The black part is the
parameter range. If you drag the left edge of the black part, the [Min] value will change. If you drag
the right edge, the [Max] will change.
[Clear] Button
Clears assignments for the selected control change numbers.
[All Clear] Button
Clears assignments for all control change numbers.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
93
[Program Change] Tab
Assigns scenes to program control change numbers 1 through 128. Switches scenes when program
changes are received. These settings are shared by all DMEs in the zone. Up to 999 assignments can
be made. Scenes above number 128 are assigned by changing banks.
Program Change Event
Program numbers and the scenes assigned to them are displayed in a list.
No.
This displays program numbers from 1 to 128.
Scene
Displays the scene number and name of the assigned scene. Program changes that have no
scene assigned to them are blank.
When you click here, a list of scenes is displayed. Select the scene you want to assign.
[All Clear] Button
Clears all scene assignments.
[Clear] Button
Clears the scene assignment for the program number selected in the list, so that no scene is
assigned to that number.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
94
[All Assign] Button
Assigns all scenes in order starting from program number 1.
Bank Select LSB
The bank is changed when assigning scenes numbered 129 and higher. Eight banks can be used,
numbered from zero to seven. Click the [] and select the bank where you will make settings.
[Parameter Change] Tab
Specifies the parameter to be controlled by parameter change commands for each address. Up to
128 can be set.
[DME]
From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
95
Parameter Change List
The current settings are displayed in the list in the center.
No.
This displays the parameter change numbers.
Component
Assigns components. If you click here, a list will be displayed. Assignable components are on the
list. Click the component name to select it.
Parameter
Set the assigned component link parameter.
When you click here, a list is displayed of parameters included in the component selected in the
[Component] box.
Select the parameter you want to assign.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
96
Min/Max
This sets the parameter range. The current values for the [Min] (lower limit) and [Max] (upper limit)
are displayed. The range and units that can be set will vary, depending on the parameter selected.
If you click here, a slider will be displayed.
You can change the parameter by dragging the slider. To make a finer setting, press the <Shift>
key while dragging the slider. The value for the parameter will be shown while you are dragging the
slider. When you finish dragging and release the mouse button, the slider will disappear.
The same slider is displayed whether you click the [Min] box or the [Max] box. The black part is the
parameter range. If you drag the left edge of the black part, the [Min] value will change. If you drag
the right edge, the [Max] will change.
[Clear] Button
Clears the assignment for the parameter change selected in the list, so that nothing will be
assigned to it.
[All Clear] Button
Clears all parameter change assignments.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
97
[Port] Tab
Sets the MIDI port for the current zone used by DME Designer.
MIDI PORT
Selects the MIDI driver used for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages.
[Tx]
Selects, from a list, the MIDI driver used for transmitting MIDI messages.
[Rx]
Selects, from a list, the MIDI driver used for receiving MIDI messages.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
98
User Defined Button (User Defined Parameters)
User Defined Parameters
Parameters that the user can operate using function keys <F1> through <F6> in the DME unit or ICP1
are called “User Defined Parameters.” Frequently changed parameters can be assigned in advance
to any of 24 (four pages times six) presets, and operated on the DME unit or ICP1 even if DME
Designer is not being used.
This function sets parameters in DME Designer that can be called by these function keys <F1>
through <F6>.
In DME Designer, user defined parameter settings are made using the “User Defined Button” dialog
box. The user defined parameter settings are shared between zone configurations.
“User Defined Button” Dialog Box
When you click [User Defined Button] in the [Tools] menu, the “User Defined Button” dialog box is
displayed.
[1]/[2]/[3]/[4] Tabs
Switches the set to which settings will apply. You can set up to six function keys in each set. The
user defined parameters set on a single tab are displayed on one page in the DME unit main
screen.
Function Keys
The function keys are displayed in the leftmost column of the table. When you enter text for [LCD
Display], a short name with up to eight characters will be created and displayed to the right of the
function key.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
99
Function
Specifies the function to be assigned to the function keys.
[No Assign]
No assignment. Select this option to clear an assigned function.
•[Parameter Value Edit]
Allows the parameter specified in the [Parameter] field to be changed.
[Direct Parameter Value]
Allows the value of a parameter to be set directly. The target parameter is specified in the
[Parameter] field, and the value to be set is specified in the [Max] field.
[Scene Change]
Allows scene recall. The scene to be recalled is specified in the [Parameter] field.
[GPI OUT]
Allows GPI output. The GPI setting is made in the [Parameter] field.
[Play Wav File]
Allows initiation of Wave file playback. The Wave file setting is made in the [Parameter] field.
Wave files set by the Wav File manager can be specified. Files can not be selected unless a
Wav Player is included in the DME configuration.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
100
Parameter
Sets the parameter assigned to each function key. If you click here, a list will be displayed. This list
displays the parameters that are included in the current configuration. Select the parameter you
want called by the function key.
LCD Display
Sets the text displayed on the DME unit. Click the [LCD Display] box and enter text. Up to 23
characters can be entered into the [LCD Display] box.
After you confirm the name by pressing the <Enter> key, a short name will be created and
displayed in the function key area as follows: “F1 [shortnam].” The short name will also be
displayed in the DME unit main display. A short name is automatically created with up to eight
characters for display as the user defined parameter name on the DME unit main screen
Min, Max
Sets the lower and upper limits for a parameter.
[Clear] Button
Clears assignments for the selected function keys. This is the same as “No Assign.”
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
101
Setting User Defined Parameters
After creating a parameter link group to assign, set the user defined parameter.
1 Create a configuration.
2 Click [User Defined Button] in the [Tools] menu.
The “User Defined Button” dialog box will be displayed.
3 Click one of the tabs numbered [1] through [4] to select the set of user defined parameters
you will assign your parameters to.
The four tabs correspond to the pages on the DME unit main screen.
4 Click the [Parameter] box for the function key to which you will assign the parameter.
A list of parameters included in the current configuration will be displayed.
5 Select the parameter to assign to the function key.
6 Click the [LCD Display] box and enter text for the user defined parameter name.
The [LCD Display] box can accept up to 23 characters, but only eight characters can be displayed
in the DME unit main screen. When making a user defined parameter name, the first eight
characters should be understandable.
Note
When making multiple registrations, you can save time by first setting just the [Parameter] box for all keys, then setting
the [LCD Display] box names. When you enter a user defined parameter name into an [LCD Display] box and press the
<Enter> key to confirm it, the next [LCD Display] box down will be selected, and you can enter text there immediately.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
102
Word Clock
The signal that synchronizes all devices connected to the DME is called the “Word Clock.” It uses the
same frequency as the sampling frequency. The word clock is set for each DME in the “Word Clock”
dialog box.
When you click [Word Clock] on the [Tools] menu, the “Work Clock” dialog box is displayed.
DME
From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings.
Clock Information
Displays the word clock frequency for the DME selected in [DME].
Clock Information
Slot Information
Clock Status
The DME24N has only one SLOT, and [Cascade] is not available.
The number of channels varies according to the card inserted into the slot.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
103
Card (Slot Information)
Displays the name of the card inserted into the slot.
Clock Status
The clock status is displayed using a color code:
Internal/Word Clock/Cascade
You can select one of the following for the word clock: [Slot] (64N: 1-4, 24N: 1 only), [Internal]
(44.1kHz/48kHz/88.2kHz/96kHz), [Word Clock] (WCK IN), [Cascade] (IN/OUT, 64N only). Clock
buttons that are grayed out cannot be selected.
[Close] Button
Closes the dialog box.
Status Meaning
Indicates that there is no input signal.
Indicates there is an input signal and sync is possible with the current
word clock.
Indicates there is an input signal but cannot sync with word clock (clocks
are different).
Indicates that there is no DME unit information.
NOTE
You can close the dialog box using the Close button, or by pressing <Esc> or <Alt>+<F4>.
Slot Number
Card Name
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
104
Monitor
When you click the [Monitor] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Monitor” dialog box is displayed.
Sets the monitor output destination.
[DME]
From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings.
Drop down list
From the list, select the card that will be the destination for the monitor output.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
105
Clock
When you click the [Clock] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Clock” dialog box is displayed. Here
you can set the DME internal clock. This can be set only when online. The default is the computer date
and time.
Set the date in the left box and the time in the right box. You can change the numbers using the []
and [] at the right of the boxes.
NOTE
You can close the dialog box using the Close button, or by pressing <Esc> or <Alt>+<F4>.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
106
Language Settings
When you click the [Language] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Language” dialog box is
displayed. This sets the DME unit language.
[Language]
Select the language. [English/German/French/Spanish] and [Japanese] are in the list.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
NOTE
You can close the dialog box using the Close button, or by pressing <Esc> or <Alt>+<F4>.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
107
DME Firmware Update
You can update the DME unit firmware using the [Firmware Update] command on the [Tools] menu.
When you move the mouse cursor over the [Firmware] command on the [Tools] menu, a submenu is
displayed.
When you select [Program] or [Component] on the submenu, the “Open” dialog box will be displayed.
You can perform a firmware update by specifying a firmware update file.
When performing a firmware update, connect the DME unit and the computer.
When the DME update is finished, the DME unit will be automatically restarted. You also need to restart
DME Designer.
NOTE
If the firmware has been updated from V1.07 or lower to V1.10 or upper, perform the update twice. Because the text display
data in the DME unit is changed, text display for Japanese is not possible with one update only.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
108
[Program]
Updates the DME/CP1 unit program area firmware. Opens update files with the extension “.DPB”.
1 Select [Firmware Update] [Program] in the [Tools] menu.
The “Open” dialog box will be displayed.
2 Select an update program with the extension “.DPB” and click the [Open] button.
The “Firm Update” dialog box will be displayed. The DMEs in the current zone will be displayed
in a list.
3 Check the DME you wish to update.
You can click on a checkmark to turn it ON/OFF. The [Select All] button places a checkmark
next to all the DMEs. The [Clear All] button turns OFF all the DME checkmarks.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
109
4 Check the DME you wish to update, then click the [Update] button.
The firmware update will begin.
When the DME update is finished, the DME unit will be automatically restarted. You also need to
restart DME Designer.
[Component]
Updates the DME unit component firmware. When you select this command, the “Open” dialog
box will be displayed. Opens update files with the extension “.DCB” (for DME) or “.CCB” (for ICP1).
You can select multiple update files for components.
DME Unit
When performing the firmware update, connect the DME unit and the computer by USB or
Ethernet. The USB-MIDI or DME-N Network Driver must be installed in the computer.
ICP1
To perform the firmware update, the ICP1 and the zone master DME unit must be connected by
Ethernet. In addition, the zone master DME unit must be connected to the computer as described
above.
1 Select [Firmware Update] [Component] in the [Tools] menu.
The “Open” dialog box will be displayed.
NOTE
While updating, be very careful not to disconnect the USB or Ethernet cable or turn off the power to the DME. The
DME Designer MIDI setting information will be lost.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
110
2 Select an update program with the extension “.DCB” (for DME) or “.CCB” (for ICP1) and
click the [Open] button.
The “Firmware Update” dialog box will be displayed. The DMEs or ICPs in the current zone will
be displayed in a list. The component names and versions will be displayed hierarchically for
each DME.
3 Check the component you wish to update.
You can click on the checkmark to turn it ON/OFF. The [Select All] button places a checkmark
next to all the DMEs. The [Clear All] button turns OFF all the DME checkmarks.
4 Check the component you wish to update, then click the [Update] button.
The component update will begin.
When the DME update is finished, the DME unit will be automatically restarted. You also need to
restart DME Designer.
NOTE
While updating, be very careful not to disconnect the USB or Ethernet cable or turn off the power to the DME.
The DME Designer MIDI setting information will be lost.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
111
Event Logger
When you click [Event Logger] in the [View] menu while online, the “Event Logger” window is
displayed. This records and displays DME unit events.
When the dialog box is opened while online, the event log is automatically obtained and displayed as
a list in the Event Logger window.
Events are displayed in realtime as long as the dialog box stays open while online. The information is
also simultaneously recorded in a file if the log function is enabled.
DME List
[Date]
Displays the date the event occurred. (Example Display: 2004-08-24)
[Time]
Displays the time the event occurred.
•[Type]
Displays the event type and icon.
There are three event types:
(Warning): Warning event
(Error): Error event
(Information): Other events
[Zone]
Displays the name of the zone in which the event occurred.
[DME]
Displays the name of the DME in which the event occurred.
[Event]
Displays the content of the event.
NOTE
Only users for whom the [View Log Window] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been turned ON can display the
Event Logger window. The default setting for this parameter is OFF.
NOTE
The events you wish to display in the Event Logger window must be set in advance in the “Event Log List” dialog box.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
112
[Log Setup] Button
Displays the “Log Setup” dialog box. Here you can make Event Log settings.
[Get Log] Button
When you are offline, this selects the DME from which the log will be taken. During online status,
this button is grayed out and cannot be used.
Clicking here displays the “Get Log” dialog box.
[Zone]
Selects the zone for which events will be displayed. Only events from the selected zone will be
displayed in the window. If [All Zones] is selected, events will be displayed for all DMEs arranged
in the zone.
Display button (Information/Warning/Error)
[Display Information] Button
Switches between displaying and hiding Information events.
When turned ON, Information events are displayed in the Event Logger window.
[Display Warning] Button
Switches between displaying and hiding Warning events.
When turned ON, Warning events are displayed in the Event Logger window.
[Display Error] Button
Switches between displaying and hiding Error events.
When turned ON, Error events are displayed in the Event Logger window.
[Clear Screen] Button
Clears (erases) events.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
113
“Log Setup” dialog box
Click the [Log Setup] button in the Event Logger window to display the “Log Setup” dialog box. Here
you can make Event Log settings. These settings apply to the system as a whole.
[Enable Logging]
Tur ns ON or OFF the function that writes the obtained event log data to a file. When a check is
placed here, the event log is written to a file.
When checked, it is set in the [Enable Logging] frame.
Record __ days per log file
Sets the number of days recorded into a single log file. When the specified number of days is
exceeded, a new log file is created, and future log events are recorded there.
When “1” is set for the number of days at 10:00 AM, information will be recorded in the same file
until the next day at 9:59 AM. The number of days counted are cleared when the “Log Setup”
dialog box is closed by clicking the [OK] button, or when the system goes online.
Automatically delete log files after __ days
When a check is placed here, log files exceeding the specified number of days are automatically
deleted. Specifies the number of days after which log files are automatically deleted.
Log file folder
Specify the folder for saving log files. Clicking the [Browse] button opens the standard operating
system dialog box for specifying folders. Here you can select a folder.
Log files are saved with the following file name: “LOG + Start_Date.txt”.
If there is a file with the same name already in the specified folder, a number will be affixed to the
end of the file name, and it will be saved as a separate file. (Example: LOG20040824-2.txt)
[Display Event]
Displays events with checks next to them. This operates together with the [Display Information],
[Display Warning], and [Display Error] buttons in the Event Logger window. You can place checks
next to multiple events.
[Display Log Buffer Full Message]
When a check is placed here, “Log Buffer Full” messages will be displayed on the displays of all
DME units in the zone.
[Log List Setup] Button
Sets events sent from the DME units. Clicking here displays the “Event Log List” dialog box.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
114
“Get Log” dialog box
Click the [Get Log] button in the Event Logger window to display the “Get Log” dialog box.
DME List
Displays the IP addresses and types of DME units included in the zone. Click the DME from which
to obtain events by placing a check next to it.
[Output File Name]
Sets the file name and save location for the log file. Clicking the [Browse] button opens the file
select dialog box, where you can select a file.
[DME Log Clear]
Clears (erases) logs in the DME checked. When you click this button, a confirmation dialog is
displayed.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
115
“Event Log List” Dialog Box
Sets events sent from the DME units. Sends events with checks next to them.
[Zone]
If you click here, a list will be displayed. Specifies a zone.
[DME]
If you click here, a list will be displayed. Specifies DMEs.
[Event]
You can turn sending of logs for each event ON or OFF.
[Type]
If you click here, a list will be displayed. Select type of event.
[Information], [Warning], and [Error] are displayed in a list.
[GPI OUT]
Sends GPI output for each event.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
116
Event Scheduler
“Event Scheduler” Dialog Box
When you click [Event Scheduler] in the [Tools] menu, the “Event Scheduler” dialog box is displayed.
This sets the scheduling for events. You can schedule events by specifying the date, time, and the
action to execute. You can set up schedules for events to be executed at a specified time, and events
that are to be repeated periodically. Periodic events are those that repeat each year, month, week, or
day. Up to 50 events can be scheduled. Scheduling can be set separately for each zone. Settings and
changes are sent to the DME unit during online status.
Scene changes, parameter changes, and GPI output can all be scheduled.
Event View
Displays registered scheduling events. When periodic events (cyclical events) are first displayed
together, they are displayed in order of date.
The order of same-time events can be changed by dragging and dropping.
Click to select an event.
[No.]
Displays the event number. Numbers are added from the top in order.
This function will not be executed if the checkbox is not checked.
[Name]
Displays the event names. Clicking an event will select it, allowing you to change its name. There is
no limit to the number of characters.
[Operation]
Displays the function that will be executed when the event starts.
NOTE
Only users for whom the [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been turned ON can edit scheduling settings.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
117
[Date]
Displays the event start date.
Periodic events are displayed as shown below, with an icon and text that indicate a periodic event.
•[January 1 every year]
Each New Year's Day
[First Monday of January every year]
First Monday in January each year
[Day 1 every month]
First day of each month
[Second Monday of every month]
The second Monday of each month.
[Monday every week]
Each week on Monday
[Every day]
Every day
[Time]
Displays the time for starting the event.
[Enable Event Schedule]
Enables the scheduled events.
[Add] Button
Adds an event. Clicking here displays the “Add Event” dialog box. If the maximum of 50 events has
already been registered, this button is grayed out.
[Remove] Button
Deletes the event selected on the list. This button is grayed out when no event is selected.
[Edit] Button
Lets you edit the selected event. Displays the “Edit Event” dialog box. This button is grayed out
when no event is selected.
[Copy] Button
Copies the selected event. This button is grayed out when no event is selected.
[Paste] Button
Pastes the copied event. The event is added. This button is grayed out when no event has been
copied.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
118
[Add Event (Edit Event)] Dialog Box
The dialog box is displayed when you click on the [Add] or [Edit] button in the “Event Scheduler”
dialog box. Here you can add or edit a scheduling event.
[Event Name] Box
Enter the event name. There is no limit to the number of characters.
[Event Operation]
Set the operation that is executed when the event starts.
[Operation]
When you click this button, a list of events is displayed. Specify the operation that is executed
when the event starts.
The following three items are on the list:
[Scene Change]
Changes the scene.
•[Parameter Value Edit]
Changes a parameter.
[GPI Out]
Sends GPI output.
[Play Wav File]
Allows initiation of Wave file playback.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
119
[Operation Setting]
The content changes according to the event selected for [Operation].
When [Scene Change] is selected:
Select the scene to be recalled from the [Scene] list. Stored scenes are displayed in the list.
When [Parameter Value Edit] is selected:
[Scene]
Select a scene from the list.
If the DME unit's current scene differs from the scene specified in event scheduling, the scheduled
scene will be recalled. If the DME unit's current scene is the same as the scene specified in event
scheduling, the scheduled scene will not be recalled.
[DME Unit]
From the list, select the DME unit to which this scheduled event will apply. The DMEs included in the
zone are displayed in the list.
[Component]
Select the component that has the parameter to be changed. The list displays the components
arranged for the DME that is selected in the [DME Unit] box.
[Parameter]
Select the parameter that will change. Parameters for the component that is selected in the
[Component] box are displayed in a list.
[Value]
Set a value for the parameter. Change the parameter using the spin buttons or the slider on the right.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
120
When [GPI Out] is selected:
[DME]
From the list, select the DME that will produce the GPI output.
[Ch1]/[Ch2]/[Ch3] ...
Set [ON], [OFF], or [---] for each channel. If it is set to [OFF], the [LOWHIGH] channel outputs
[HIGHLOW] signal, the [HIGHLOW] channel outputs [LOWHIGH] signal.
When [Play Wav File] is selected:
[Scene]
Select a scene from the list.
[Wave]
Select a Wave file from the list.
Wave files set by the Wav File manager can be specified. Files can not be selected unless a Wav
Player is included in the DME configuration.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
121
[Event Schedule]
Set the year/month/date to start the event.
Calendar
Sets the date the event will start.
Change the year and month using the [<] and [>] buttons. Click on a day to set that date. February
29 can be set on the calendar, where it appears every four years (each leap year).
[Time]
Sets the time the event will start.
Click the hour and minute, then set numerical values using the spin boxes.
Only the time is set for periodic events.
[Repeating Event]
When a check is placed here, the event becomes a periodic event, and the calendar is ignored.
•[Year]/[Month]/[Week]/[Day]/[Hour]
Set the period for the event, using the radio buttons to the left.
[Day]/[Day of the week]
Set the conditions on the right side. Select [Day]/[Day of the week], and set the date and other
information. The items that can be set vary according to the selected period.
When the event period is [Year]
All settings can be made.
When the event period is [Month]
If [Day] is selected, only the date can be set.
If [Day Of The Week] is selected, the week of the month and day of the week is set.
When the event period is [Week]
Only [Day Of The Week] can be selected. Set the day of the week.
When the event period is [Day]/[Hour]
Condition settings on the area on the right are not needed.
[Exception] Button
Opens the “Event Exceptions” dialog.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
122
[Event Exceptions]
Specifies “exception” year/month/day and time settings at which events will not be executed.
The available settings will depend on the event cycle.
When the event cycle is [Year]
Only the [Year] setting is available.
When the event cycle is [Month]
Only the [Month] and [Week] setting is available.
When the event cycle is [Week]
Only the [Month], [Week] and [Day] settings are available.
When the event cycle is [Day]
Only the [Month], [Week], [Day], and [Day of the week] settings are available.
When the event cycle is [Hour]
Only the [Month], [Week], [Day], [Day of the week], and [Hour] settings are available.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
123
Remote Control Setup List
Registers the parameters to be controlled from an external controller. Refer to the “DME-N Remote
Control Protocol Specifications” document for details about the communication protocol. Information
about the “DME-N Remote Control Protocol Specifications” document can be found at the Yamaha pro
Audio website (URL below).
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
[DME]
Click to see a list and select a DME.
[Function]
Select [No Assign], [Parameter Value Edit] or [Level Meter].
[Parameter]
Specifies the parameter to be controlled. A list of parameters will be displayed according to the
selection of [Function].
[Min]/[Max]
Displays the minimum and maximum values for the parameter.
[Type]
Selects a fader curve when level, etc., is select for [Parameter].
Select [dB] to directly control the level in dB, or [Curve Table] to use one of the DME fader curves
for level adjustment.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
124
Parameter List
When you click [Parameter List] in the [Tools] menu, the “Parameter List” dialog box is displayed. A list
of parameters in the current configuration of the current zone are displayed. Here you can check
things like the parameter IDs. You can also print the list of parameters.
When the dialog box is opened or when a DME is selected from the [DME] list, the parameter values
are displayed.
[DME]
From the list, select the DME that will have its parameters displayed. The DMEs included in the
current configuration are displayed in the list. Components in the selected DME are displayed in
the component list.
Component List
The components and user modules included in the DME, their IDs, and the component parameters
are displayed in hierarchal list. The AD and slot are also displayed.
[ID]
Displays the component or parameter ID.
The following is displayed for the parameter ID: “Element No. : X : Y : Parameter No. : Index No.”
[Value]
Displays the value for the parameter.
NOTE
Components for user modules are also listed in a hierarchal display, but if user module security is enabled, the
components are not displayed. However, parameters displayed in the user module editor are displayed here.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
125
[Min]/[Max]
Displays the minimum and maximum values for the parameter.
[Preview] Button
Prints a list of parameters. When you click this button a preview screen is displayed.
[Save] Button
Saves the parameter list as a CSV file. When you click this button, the standard operating system
save dialog box is displayed.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
Printing a List of Parameters
Prints all parameters for the component selected in the list, all parameters for the selected DME, or all
parameters for all DMEs.
When you click the [Preview] button, the dialog box display will change, and the print preview will be
displayed in the center. Buttons will be added to the upper part of the dialog box.
[Print] Button
Prints a list of parameters. Clicking here displays the “Print” dialog box. When you click the [Print]
button, printing begins.
NOTE
The displayed parameter values are those that were in effect when the dialog box was opened or when the displayed
DME was selected from the [DME] list. They cannot be changed here.
NOTE
The CSV format is a comma delimited text file that can be read by many types of software, such as word processor,
spreadsheet, or database programs.
NOTE
The displayed [Print] dialog box will vary according to the connected printer.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
126
[Setup] Button
Clicking here displays the “Print Setup” dialog box.
Here you can set the paper size, paper orientation, and font.
[Paper Size]
Select the paper size from the list.
[Orientation]
Set the orientation of the paper by clicking one of the radio buttons.
•[Portrait]
Prints on the paper with it oriented vertically.
[Landscape]
Prints on the paper with it orientated horizontally.
[Font]
Displays the set font. Clicking the [Font] button displays the “Font” dialog box, where you can
change the font.
[Target]
Set the parameters to be printed by clicking one of the radio buttons.
[Selected Component]
Prints all parameters for the component selected in the list.
[Selected DME]
Prints all parameters for the selected DME.
[All DME]
Prints all parameters for all DMEs.
[Close] Button
Ends the preview and returns the screen to the original dialog box.
[Prev] Button/[Next] Button
Switches the page being previewed when there are multiple pages. The [Prev] button goes to the
previous page. The [Next] button goes to the next page.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
127
Component Lock
Click [Component Lock] in the [Tools] menu to display the Component Lock dialog.
The component/user module names included in the DME will be displayed. AD and Slot will also be
displayed.
Components can be locked so that parameter changes cannot be made from an external device by
checking the checkbox to the left of the component name. The lock settings will be transferred to the
DME when the unit is placed on-line. The settings can only be changed while off-line.
[Select All] Button
Checks all component checkboxes.
[Clear All] Button
Clears all component checkboxes.
[OK] Button
Enters the settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without entering the settings.
NOTE
The hierarchy of user components in user modules will be displayed, but if user module security is enabled the components
will not be displayed. Components displayed by the User Module Editor will be displayed.
NOTE
Only users who's [Edit] box is checked can edit the lock status.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
128
Wav File Manager
When you click [Wav File Manager] on the [Tools] menu, the “Wav File Manager” dialog box is
displayed. Here you can manage playback settings for Wave files played in the Wav File Player. This is
set for each DME. The setting can be made only when in offline status. Up to 100 Wave files can be
managed.
Up to a maximum of 12 megabytes of Wave files can be registered for each DME unit. If a Wave file is
added that will exceed this amount, a warning message will be displayed.
[DME]
From the list, select the DME you want to set. The DMEs included in the current zone are displayed
in the list.
[Wave File]
Displays the Wave file information. Settings can be made here as well.
[No.]
The Wave file number is displayed in the leftmost column. Numbers are added from the top in
order.
[List Name]
You can set up to 27 characters as a label separate from the Wave file name. The Wave file name is
displayed here by default.
[File Name]
Up to 31 characters are displayed as the wave file name. If you double-click the name, the file
selection dialog is displayed, where you can select a file.
NOTE
These settings can be edited only by users for whom the [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been turned ON.
NOTE
Only Wave files with file names of 31 characters or less, (including the extension) can be registered. Check the Wave file
name beforehand. Change the name if it has 32 or more characters, including the extension.
NOTE
When saving project files including Wave files, select “Project File with wave (*.daf)” in the file save dialog box.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
129
[Size]
Displays Wave file size information. The units vary, depending on the file size. The size is displayed
to the first decimal.
[Repeats]
Sets the number of repeats for playback.
Clicking here will display a list where you can select the number of times.
Select [0] to [98] or [INFINITY].
Since external input cannot be edited, [---] is displayed.
[Interval]
Sets the time until the next playback when [Repeats] is one or more. If you click here, a list will be
displayed. You can set [0] to [99].
Since external input cannot be edited, [---] is displayed.
[Auto Start]
Tur ns automatic playback ON or OFF. If ON is set, playback happens automatically when the file is
selected.
If you click here, a list will be displayed. Select [ON] or [OFF].
[Next No.]
Specifies the number for the Wave file to be played next.
If you click here, a list will be displayed. Select the number for the Wave file to be played next.
[Stop]
This stops playback after this Wave file is finished playing, without specifying the next wave
file.
Since external input cannot be edited, [---] is displayed.
[Store] Button
Saves the current settings in the “Wav File Manager” dialog box in a file, as a library. Clicking here
displays the file save dialog box.
[Recall] Button
Reads a saved library.
Clicking this button displays a menu. A menu displays library files saved in the folder that has been
set as the Contents Folder. Click the library to be read.
[Open File Dialog]
Displays the file select dialog box. You can select a library file that is saved in the folder set as the
Contents Folder, and read it.
Size Display
Up to 1023 bytes 0.X KB
1024 bytes to 1023.9 kilobytes XXX.X KB
1024 kilobytes or more X.X MB
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
130
[Add] Button
When you click here, External Input and the file select list is displayed.
[Wave File]
The file selection dialog box is displayed, where you can select a Wave file.
If the selected table already has data, an overwrite confirmation dialog box is displayed.
[External Input]
Sets [External Input].
You can select multiple Wave files. If multiple files are specified, they are added after the selected
table. If a Wave file is registered to the number being added, it will be overwritten.
The following Wave file formats are supported: 48, 44.1, 24, 22.05 kHz, 16bit/8bit, Mono/Stereo. If a
file is selected with a format different than these, a message is displayed that says the file cannot
be used.
There is an upper limit to size beyond which a file cannot be used. This limit varies according to the
format. If the size of the selected file is beyond the limit, a message is displayed that says the file
cannot be used.
[Remove] Button
Deletes settings from the selected line. This button is grayed out when no Wave file is selected in
the list.
[Up] Button
Moves the selected line up one. It is switched with the line immediately above.
The button will be grayed out if nothing is selected in the list, or if [No. 1] is selected in the list.
[Down] Button
Moves the selected line down one. It is switched with the line immediately below.
The button will be grayed out if nothing is selected in the list, or if [No. 100] is selected in the list.
[Play] Button
Plays the selected Wave file on the computer. Allows monitoring and checking of the Wave file.
[Stop] Button
Stops playback of the Wave file.
[Remaining Memory]
Displays the remaining size that can be added.
22.05 K Mono 8 bit 1.37 MB 44.1 K Mono 8 bit 2.75 MB
22.05 K Stereo 8 bit 2.75 MB 44.1 K Stereo 8 bit 5.5 MB
22.05 K Mono 16 bit 2.75 MB 44.1 K Mono 16 bit 5.5 MB
22.05 K Stereo 16 bit 5.5 MB 44.1 K Stereo 16 bit 5.9 MB
24.05 K Mono 8 bit 1.5 MB 48 K Mono 8 bit 3 MB
24 K Stereo 8 bit 3 MB 48 K Stereo 8 bit 5.9 MB
24 K Mono 16 bit 3 MB 48 K Mono 16 bit 5.9 MB
24 K Stereo 16 bit 5.9 MB 48 K Stereo 16 bit 5.9 MB
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
131
[OK] Button
Updates the settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
Adding Wave Files
To add a Wave file, select the line where you want to add the file, then click the [Add] button. You can
also add a Wave file by dragging and dropping it from the desktop to the “Wav File Manager” dialog
box list.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
132
DAW Control
When you click [DAW Control] on the [Tools] menu, the “DAW Control” dialog box is displayed. Here
you can make settings for when the DME is controlled from a DAW controller. This is set for each zone
configuration. The setting can be made only when in offline status.
[DME]
From the list, select the DME you want to set. The DMEs included in the current zone are displayed in
the list.
[DAW Type]
Select the DAW type. The following choices are in the list: [Off], [Type1], and [Type2].
DAW Control Table
The following can be set for each channel from 1 to 64: [Function], [Controller], [Label], [Parameter].
[Function]
Selects the function that will be changed by the DAW controller. If you click here, a list will be
displayed.
NOTE
DAW control editing can be performed only by users for whom the [Edit] security checkbox has been checked.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
133
[No Assign]
Makes no assignments. Select this when you are erasing an already set assignment.
•[Parameter Value Edit]
Allows the parameter of the component specified in the [Parameter] field to be changed.
[Scene Change]
Recalls a scene. The scene is recalled even if the current scene, and the one changed by the
DAW controller, are the same.
When a selection has been made, [SCENE] is displayed in the [Label] field. The last scene is
set in the [Parameter] field.
[Scene Increment]
Sets the scene increment. Recalls the next valid scene after the current scene.
When a selection has been made, [SINC] is displayed in the [Label] field.
[Scene Decrement]
Selects the scene decrement. Recalls the next valid scene before the current scene.
When a selection has been made, [SDEC] is displayed in the [Label] field.
[Mute]
Sets all mute. Mute is set ON and OFF by the DAW controller.
When a selection has been made, [MUTE] is displayed in the [Label] field.
[Component]
Changes the component parameters. Selectable component names that are arranged in the
configuration are displayed in a list.
When selected, the first parameter included in the component is set in the [Parameter] field.
[GPI Lock]
Assigns GPI Lock. GPI Lock is set ON and OFF by the DAW controller.
When a selection has been made, [LOCK] is displayed in the [Label] field.
[Play Wav File]
Allows initiation of Wave file playback. The Wave file setting is made in the [Parameter] field.
Wave files set by the Wav File manager can be specified. Files can not be selected unless a
Wav Player is included in the DME configuration.
[Controller]
Selects a controller from the list when [Parameter Value Edit] is set in [Function]. [Switch],
[Fader], or [Knob] can be selected.
[Label]
Enter a label. Double-click to enter the text. You can enter up to 16 characters of text. Set the value
with the <Enter> key, or cancel it with the <ESC> key.
[Parameter]
If [Scene Change] , [Parameter Value Edit] or [Play Wav File], is set in [Function], set the
parameters.
If you click here, a list will be displayed.
When [Scene Change] is set in [Function]
Displays scenes that can be selected.
When [Parameter Value Edit] is set in [Function]
Selectable parameters are displayed.
When [Play Wav File] is set in [Function]
Selectable Wave files are displayed.
NOTE
If [Scene Change], [Scene Increment], [Scene Decrement], [Mute], or [GPI Lock] is selected for [Function], the label
name is fixed.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
134
Shortcut Keys
Click [Shortcut Keys] in the [Tools] menu to display the “Shortcut Keys” dialog.
Click to select the desired shortcut item.
[Enter New Key]
If assigned, the current shortcut will be displayed.
A shortcut entered via the computer keyboard will be displayed.
[OK] Button
Enters the settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without entering the settings.
Chapter 3 Main Panel Window
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
135
Backup
When you click the [Backup] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Backup” dialog box is displayed.
Data in the DME is gathered in the computer and saved as a file. Backup files are created for each
DME. You can also send the information saved in a file to a DME. Backup can be performed only when
in offline status.
[Target DME]
Displays DME, IP addresses, and DME types for each zone. Check the DME from which you want
to obtain data. You can place checks next to multiple DMEs.
[Folder] Box
Specifies the folder that will be the destination for saving and reading operations. Clicking the
[Browse] button opens the folder select dialog box, where you can specify a folder.
The backup file name will be the DME’s IP address. If the folder is specified when sending DME
data, the file sent to the DME will be the file in the folder whose file name that matches the DME’s IP
address.
[Load] Button
Sends the backed up file to the specified DME.
[Save] Button
Obtains data from the specified DME, and saves it as a backup file.
[Close] Button
Closes the dialog box.
NOTE
Backup operations can be performed only by users for whom the [Edit] security checkbox has been checked.
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
136
Chapter 4 Designer
Editing Configurations
Configurations
Information about inputs/outputs, along with the arrangement of components and how they are
connected, is called a “configuration.” Configurations are created in the Designer window and sent
to the DME unit.
In the Designer window, configurations are designed using various design windows, such as the Area,
Zone, Configuration, and User Module windows. In each window a sheet is displayed, on which
objects can be arranged.
New Configurations
You can create multiple zones within an area, and multiple configurations within a zone.
Zones are added using the “Zone” dialog box, while configurations are added using the
“Configuration” dialog box. For information about the “Zone” dialog box, see “Adding, Deleting, and
Renaming a Zone” on page 231. For information about the “Configuration” dialog box, see “Adding,
Deleting, and Renaming a Configuration” on page 233.
Security
Editing in the Designer window can be restricted based on the user security settings. Only users for
whom the [Operation Security] [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can
display the Designer window and edit configurations.
For information about the “Security” dialog box, see “Security (Creating Users and Making User
Settings)” on page 55.
Edit Mode
There is an “Edit Mode” in the Designer window. When the Edit Mode is ON, configurations can be
edited. When it is turned OFF, the DME is controlled by DME Designer.
Edit Mode=ON
When Edit Mode is ON, you can do configuration editing tasks such as arranging objects, making
connections, and changing properties.
Edit Mode=OFF
When Edit Mode is OFF, you cannot arrange objects, make selections, or display “Properties”
dialog boxes for objects. You can display the component editor.
Edit Mode ON/OFF
The edit mode can be turned on or off via the [Edit Mode] command in the [Tools] menu or in the
contextual menu that appears when you right-click the sheet. To turn Edit Mode ON click the
command, placing a checkmark to the left of the command name. When there is a checkmark next
to the command (when Edit Mode is ON), clicking the command again removes the checkmark
and turns OFF the Edit Mode.
NOTE
Only users for whom the [Operation Security] [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can turn
the Edit Mode ON.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
137
Designer Window
You can display or hide the Designer window using the [Designer] command on the [View] menu in
the Main Panel window.
Title Bar
“Designer” is displayed on the title bar. You can move the window by dragging the title bar. There are
[Minimize], [Maximize]/[Restore], and [Close] buttons at the right edge of the title bar.
Menu Bar
Commands that can be executed in the application are collected into categories on the menu bar.
When you click one of the categories, a list of commands is displayed.
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Toolbar
Toolkit Window
Design
Window
Navigator Window
Resource Meter
Window
Status Bar
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
138
Toolbar
Frequently used commands are arranged here as buttons.
[Print] Button
Prints the active design window.
“Printing Each Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 214)
[Undo] Button (page 145)
Undoes the most recent edit operation.
[Redo] Button (page 145)
Restores operations undone with the [Undo] button back to their original condition.
[Cut] Button (page 145)
Cuts the selected object from the screen and moves it to the clipboard.
[Copy] Button (page 145)
Copies the selected object to the clipboard.
[Paste] Button (page 145)
Pastes data from the clipboard.
[Navigator] Button (page 140)
Displays or hides the Navigator window.
[Resource Meter] Button (page 139)
Displays or hides the Resource Meter window.
[Analyze] Button
Displays the “Analyze” dialog box, and analyzes the configuration.
"Analyze (Configuration Analysis)" in "Configuration Window" (page 249)
[Show Signal Delay] Button
The digital signal delay value is displayed in the Configuration window.
"Show Signal Delay (Delay Display Value)" in "Configuration Window" (page 246)
[Probe Monitor] Button
Tur ns the probe monitor ON or OFF.
“Probe Monitor” in “Configuration Window” (page 244)
[Print] Button
[Undo] Button
[Redo] Button
[Cut] Button
[Copy] Button
[Paste] Button
[Navigator] Button
[Resource Meter] Button
[Zoom Out] Button
[Zoom In] Button
[Actual Size] Button
[Zoom To] Button
[Show Signal Delay]
button
[Analyze] button
[Probe Monitor] Button
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
139
[Zoom Out]/[Zoom In]/[Actual Size]/[Zoom To] Buttons
These buttons correspond to the commands on the [View] menu with the same names. Changes
the magnification of the display on the screen.
“[View] Menu” in “Designer Window Menus” (page 147)
Status Bar
DME ID/Component ID
When the mouse pointer is moved over a DME device in the Zone window, the ID for that DME
device is displayed. When the mouse pointer is moved over a component in the Configuration
window, the ID for the component is displayed.
Sheet size
Displays the size of the sheet in the active design window.
Coordinates
Displays the coordinates of the mouse pointer any time it is within the design window. When
dragging an object, the coordinates displayed here refer to the upper left corner of the object
being dragged.
Resource Meter Window
The Resource Meter window is displayed only when the Configuration window and User Module
window are active. Meters for the DSP memory usage percentage and the SPX resource usage
percentage are in the Resource Meter window.
DSP Memory Usage Percentage
When you are designing in the Configuration window, it gives you a yardstick for judging the total
usage percentage for DSP memory in the DME unit. You cannot create a design that exceeds 100
percent usage in a single configuration window. In addition, the usage percentage varies
depending on the sampling frequency, even for the same component.
When the configuration is synchronized with the DME unit during online status, checks of
connections and component information begin automatically (this is called compiling). The actual
total usage percentage is calculated after this compiling operation. The usage percentage will vary
according to the number of connections and components. The Resource Meter window gives you
a precompile guideline for use while designing your configuration. An error may occur even when
the meter shows less than 100 percent, based on conditions such as the number of connections,
and type and number of components used.
NOTE
If a configuration is compiled at fs=44.1kHz or 48kHz, and the sampling frequency is then changed to 88.2kHz or 96kHz, it is
necessary to recompile at 88.2kHz or 96kHz. If this is not done some configurations may produce no sound. In such cases a
“DSP Power Shortage” message will be displayed on the DME unit.
Sheet Size
Coordinates
DME ID/Component ID
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
140
SPX Resource Usage Ratio
Displays the resource usage ratio for SPX components arranged in the configuration.
Navigator Window
Gives a hierarchical display of the area, zones, and configurations, along with the DME devices, user
modules and components arranged within the configurations. This allows you to check the overall
status of your setup.
When doing offline editing, you can click the icon or name for an area, zone, configuration, DME
device, user module, or component to make each design window active.
[+]/[-]
The subordinate items are displayed or hidden using the [+]/[-] buttons to the left of the area,
zones, configurations, user modules, or DME devices. When the subordinate items are displayed,
the button changes to [-]. If you click this button, the subordinate items will be hidden. When the
subordinate items are hidden, the button changes to [+]. If you click this button, the subordinate
items will be displayed.
Subordinate items are also displayed and the button changes to [-] when you click on an area,
zone, configuration, user module, or DME device.
NOTE
If the [Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output] or the [Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output] components are placed in the DME64N
configuration window, you will not be able to use other components, even though the window does not reach 100 percent.
The [Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output] or [Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output] components cannot be used in the DME24N.
NOTE
For user modules with security enabled, a password is requested when displaying the hierarchical display shown below.
Area
Zones
Configuration
DME Devices
User Module
Components included
in the User Module
Components
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
141
Area
If you click the area while doing offline editing, the Area window becomes active.
Zone
If you click a zone while doing offline editing, the Zone window becomes active. If another Zone
window is open, it will be closed.
Configuration
If you click a configuration while doing offline editing, the Zone window for the clicked configuration
becomes active. If another Zone window is open, it will be closed.
DME Device
If you click a DME, a Configuration window will be opened for that unit. If that window is already
open, it will be displayed on top of any other windows.
Component
Click a component and the component editor will open.
User Module
The window specified by “User Module Properties [Double Click Action]” will open when clicked.
Components Included in the User Module
Click a component in the user module and the component editor will be displayed.
NOTE
When there are multiple configurations in a zone, click a configuration to switch configurations, not the zone.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
142
Four Design Windows
The following design windows are available: the Area window, Zone window, Configuration window,
and User Module window. In each window there is a single sheet on which objects can be arranged.
Within the Designer window, you can simultaneously open and edit in the Area window, Zone Window,
Configuration window, and User Module window.
Area Window
Used to design areas.
See “Area Window” on page 235.
Zone Window
Used to design zone configurations.
See “Zone Window” on page 237.
Configuration Window
Used to design configurations for DME units arranged in a zone.
See “Configuration Window” on page 242.
User Module Window
Used to design user modules configurations. A module that combines a number of other
components, yet is treated as a single component, is called a “user module.” It is arranged in the
Configuration window.
See “User Module Window” on page 257.
Configuration Structure and Four Design Windows
Area Window
Zone Window
Configuration Window
User Module Window
Component Editor
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
143
Toolkit Window
The Toolkit displays objects that can be arranged in each design window. The displayed contents vary
according to which window is active.
See “Toolkit Window” on page 152.
Displayed in the designer
window
Floating-style
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
144
Designer Window Menu
[Print] Menu
This menu provides commands for exporting configurations and printing windows.
[Export DXF]
Exports the information in the active window and saves it as a DXF file, which is compatible with
CAD software sold by other companies.
“Exporting the Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 211)
[Print Setup]
When you select this command, the “Print Setup” dialog box will be displayed. Sets the paper size
and orientation.
“Printing Each Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 214)
[Print Preview]
Displays a print preview of the active design window.
“Printing Each Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 214)
[Print]
Prints the active window. When you select this command, the “Print” dialog box will be displayed.
“Printing Each Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 214)
[Preferences]
Displays the “Preferences” dialog box. Sets the line thickness and the design window edit
operations.
“Preferences” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 207)
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
145
[Edit] Menu
This menu provides edit commands.
[Undo]
Undoes the most recent edit operation. Repeatedly clicking this button will delete multiple
operations. When [Undo] is not possible, the command will be grayed out.
[Redo]
Returns to the status before the [Undo] command was executed. If you repeatedly click this button,
it will redo multiple operations. If redo is not possible, the command will be grayed out.
[Cut]
Cuts the selected object. Moves the selected object to the clipboard.
[Copy]
Copies the selected object to the clipboard. The selected object remains as is.
[Paste]
This command pastes the object on the clipboard into the active window. If there is no data on the
clipboard or if the object on the clipboard is not a type that can be pasted into the active window,
this command cannot be used.
[Delete]
Deletes the selected object. The data on the clipboard does not change.
[Select All]
Selects all objects in the active design window.
[Duplicate]
Duplicates the selected object. The data on the clipboard does not change.
NOTE
There are some objects that cannot be deleted with the [Delete] command.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
146
[Display Order]
Changes the display order (in front or behind) of the selected objects.
“Changing the Order” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 218)
[Edit Legend]
This command can be selected when an Area window, Zone window, or Configuration window is
active. It lets you edit the descriptive text (legend) displayed on the sheet in the Area window, Zone
window, or Configuration window. When this command is selected, the “Edit Legend” dialog box
will be displayed.
“Legend (Descriptive Fields)” in “Objects” (page 198)
[Properties]
Opens the “Properties” dialog box for the selected objects.
See “Object Types” on page 156.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
147
[View] Menu
Displays or hides the windows.
[Toolbar]
Displays or hides the toolbar. A checkmark appears beside this menu item when the toolbar is
displayed.
[Status Bar]
Displays or hides the status bar. A checkmark appears beside this menu item when the status bar
is displayed.
[Area]/[Toolkit]/[Resource Meter]/[Navigator]
Displays or hides the Area window, Toolkit, Resource Meter, or Navigator window. A checkmark
appears to the left of the command name when a window is displayed.
The Resource Meter window is displayed only when the Configuration window and User Module
window are active.
[Full Screen]
Displays in full-screen mode. Displays the active design window (Area, Zone, Configuration, or
User Module window) exclusively, with it covering the entire screen.
A context menu appears wherever you right-click on the screen, containing the commands that are
needed at that location.
To return from the full-screen mode to the original display status, press the <Esc> key.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
148
[Port Long Name]
Switches the port name display. When you select this command, a checkmark appears next to it
and long names are displayed. If you select this command when a checkmark is next to it, the
checkmark disappears and short names are displayed.
[Zoom In]
Gives a closer view of an area displayed on the screen.
[Zoom Out]
Widens the area displayed on the screen.
[Zoom To]
Selects the display magnification from a submenu.
[Actual Size]
Returns the display to normal dimensions.
[Fit in Window]
Increases or decreases the display magnification so that the sheet exactly fits the current window.
The entire sheet will be visible.
Long name
Short name
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
149
[Tools] Menu
[Area Parts List]
This command can be used only when the Area window is active. A submenu displays the same
objects that are in the Toolkit window displayed while the Area window is active. Clicking an object
on the submenu, then clicking the Area window, places that object in the Area window.
[Area Parts List] in “Toolkit Window” (page 153)
[Device List]
This command can be used only when the Zone window is active. A submenu here displays the
same objects as the Toolkit window. Clicking an object on the submenu, then clicking the Zone
window, places that object in the Zone window.
[Zone Device List] in “Toolkit Window” (page 154)
[Component List]
This command can be used only when a Configuration window or User Module window is active.
A submenu here displays the same objects as the Toolkit window. Clicking an object on the
submenu, then clicking the Configuration/User Module window, places the object in that window.
“Component List (Configuration Window)” in “Toolkit Window” (page 154), “Component List
(User Module Window)” in “Toolkit Window” (page 155)
[Zone]
Displays the “Zone” dialog box. Here you can add, delete, or rename a zone.
See “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone” on page 231.
[Configuration]
Displays the “Configuration” dialog box. Here you can add, delete, or rename a configuration.
See “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Configuration” on page 233.
[Save User Module]
This command can be used only when a User Module is selected in the Configuration window.
Saves the selected user module.
“User Module Manager” Dialog Box in “User Modules” (page 255)
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
150
[User Module Manager]
Displays the “User Module Manager” dialog box. Here you rename or delete user modules.
“User Module Manager” Dialog Box in “User Modules” (page 250)
[Show Signal Delay]
The digital signal delay value is displayed in the configuration window with sample units.
"Show Signal Delay (Delay Display Value)" in "Configuration Window" (page 246)
[Analyze]
Displays the “Analyze” dialog box, and analyzes the configuration.
"Analyze (Configuration Analysis)" in "Configuration Window" (page 249)
[Probe Monitor]
Tur ns the probe monitor ON or OFF. This command can be selected only when a Configuration
window or User Module window is active while in online status.
“Probe Monitor” in “Configuration Window” (page 244)
[Monitoring Point List]
Opens the “Monitoring Point List” dialog box. Registers points for monitoring with headphones.
"Monitoring Point List" in "Configuration Window" (page 247)
[Edit Mode]
Tur ns the edit mode ON or OFF.
“Edit Mode” in “Editing Configurations” (page 136)
[Sheet]
Opens the “Sheet” dialog box. Sets the sheet size and background.
“Sheet” in “Objects” (page 200)
[Prohibit Diagonal Connections]
Allows you to draw horizontal and vertical wires only. Diagonal wires cannot be drawn.
“Drawing Settings” in “Drawing and Editing Wires” (page 223)
[Grid]
Opens the “Grid” dialog box. Displays or hides the grid and sets the grid spacing.
“Grid” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 210)
NOTE
Only users for whom the [Operation Security] [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can
select this command.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
151
[Window] Menu
Arranges multiple windows. The lower part of the menu displays the names of currently open
windows. A checkmark appears next to the active window. When you click the name of a window, that
window becomes active.
[Cascade]
Displays the windows overlapping one another.
[Tile]
Displays the windows arranged side-by-side.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
152
Toolkit Window
Displaying the Toolkit Window
You can display or hide the Toolkit window using the [Toolkit] command on the [View] menu. The
Toolkit displays objects that can be arranged in each design window. You can arrange objects in each
design window by dragging them from the Toolkit window or by double-clicking them in the Toolkit
window.
The objects are categorized by type and displayed here in a hierarchy. You can use the [+]/[-] buttons
to display or hide items below a particular level in the window. Click the [+] button to display the items
on the next level down, and the [-] button to hide them.
Moving the Toolkit Window
You can move the Toolkit window by dragging it. If you drag the window to right or left side, it will
remain fixed. If you drag it to other locations, it will float independently. When DME Designer is started,
the Toolkit window is displayed at the left side of the Designer window.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
153
Toolkit Window Types
The contents of the Toolkit window will vary, depending on which window is active.
The following objects are displayed in each window:
[Area Parts List]
The [Area Parts List] displays objects that can be arranged in the Area window. The same objects are
displayed in the [Area Parts List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that appears
when you right-click on the sheet.
Active Design Window Toolkit Window
Area Window Area Parts List
Zone Window Device List
Configuration Window Component List
User Module Window Component List
Area Parts List Device List
Component List
(Configuration
Window)
Component List
(User Module
Window)
DME
ICP
External Device ✔✔
Component ✔✔
SPX Component ✔✔
User Module
Pictures ✔✔✔✔
Tex t ✔✔✔✔
Boxes ✔✔✔✔
Ellipses ✔✔✔✔
NOTE
You can create multiple zones in an area. They are added using the menu bar [Tool] menu “Zone” dialog box.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
154
[Device List]
The Device list displays objects that can be arranged in a Zone window (configuration). The same
objects are displayed in the [Device List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that
appears when you right-click on the sheet.
[Component List] (Configuration Window)
The Component List displays objects that can be arranged in Configuration windows. The same
objects are displayed in the [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu
that appears when you right-click on the sheet.
NOTE
Configurations are added using the menu bar [Tool] menu “Configuration” dialog box.
[Tools] menu
Toolkit window
[Device List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or
on the context menu
Toolkit window
[Tools] menu
[Component List] submenu
on the [Tools] menu
or on the context menu
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
155
[Component List] (User Module Window)
The Component List displays objects that can be arranged in the User Module window. The same
objects are displayed in the [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu
that appears when you right-click on the sheet.
Toolkit window
[Tools] menu
[Component List] submenu
on the [Tools] menu
or on the context menu
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
156
Objects
Object Types
The devices, shapes, and wires that can be arranged in each design window are called “Objects.”
The following objects are available:
Various design elements, such as name, color and size, can be set in the “Properties” dialog box for
each object.
Size is set using the [Width] and [Height] boxes in the “Properties” dialog box. The maximum size
values that can be set may vary according to the sheet size and object position. You can set a size
that allows the object to fit in the sheet.
Name
Window Where It can be
Placed/Displayed
Explanation
Zone Area Zones
DME Zones DME and any cards inserted into its slots
ICP Zones User defined parameter control
External Device Zones External Device
Component Configuration
User Module
User Module, Audio processor, Control parts
SPX Component Configuration
User Module
SPX components
User Module Configuration Combination of components
Slot Component Configuration Cards inserted into DME slot
Pictures All Image
Text All Text box
Boxes All Box shape
Ellipses All Circular shape
Wires All Connecting wire, straight line shape
Legend All
Zones
Configuration
An area displayed on the sheet where descriptive
information is presented.
Sheet -- One sheet per design window.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
157
Zone
There must be at least one zone in the Area window. Zones are added and deleted using the “Zone”
dialog box. Zones are not displayed in the Toolkit window or in the [Area Parts List] submenu in the
[Tools] Menu
If you right-click on the name of a zone object located in the Area window, a context menu will be
displayed.
Zone Context Menu
[Open]
Opens the Configuration window.
[Display Order]
Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.
[Properties]
Displays the “Area Properties” dialog box.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
158
Zone Object Properties
When you select a zone in the Area window, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit]
menu, the “Area Properties” dialog box is displayed. Here you can set properties for zone objects.
The [Properties] command is also located on the context menu for zone objects.
[Text] Box
You can enter up to 100 English characters for the object name.
The object name is displayed in the rectangular box for the object. If there is a large number of
characters and the object’s shape is too narrow, all characters might not be displayed.
[Font] Button
Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. This sets the font used to display the object
name.
For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.
[Color] Button
Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. This sets the color of the object name text.
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.
Text Position
Sets the location of the text. The list to the left sets the vertical position of the text. The list to the
right sets the horizontal position.
•Vertical Position
Select [Top], [Center], or [Bottom].
Horizontal Position
Select [Left], [Center], or [Right].
[Width] Box
Specifies the width of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels.
[Height] Box
Specifies the height of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
159
[Style]
Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken].
Background Image
Sets background effects for the object.
[Color] Button
Sets the color. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.
[Image] Button
Displays an image inside the object. You can use image files in the following formats: BMP
(.bmp), PNG (.png), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg). Clicking here displays the “Select Image”
dialog box. Specify an image file and set its display method.
For information about the “Select Image” dialog box, see page 205.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
Raised Sunken
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
160
DME
DMEs are arranged in the Zone window. If DME properties settings have been made for an expansion
card installed in one of the DME slots, the card will be displayed automatically.
DME24N
DME64N
DME24N with no I/O card installed.
DME24N with an I/O card installed in
its expansion slot.
DME64N with no I/O cards connected in slots.
DME64N with I/O cards installed
in expansion slots 1, 2, and 4.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
161
When I/O Cards Are Installed in DME Expansion Slots
When an I/O card is selected for an expansion slot in the DME properties, an I/O port is added for
the DME arranged in the Zone window. An I/O component block will be added to the configuration
window.
If [None] is selected for I/O cards in the DME properties, any I/O component blocks will also be
deleted automatically from the Configuration window. (Even if the I/O components are deleted, the
wiring will remain.)
When the DME64N Cascade Setting is Turned ON
When [Show Cascade Port] is checked in the DME64N “DME Device Properties” dialog box, the
cascade I/O components will be displayed in the Configuration window.
If “Show Cascade Port” is turned OFF in the DME64N “DME Device Properties” dialog box,
cascade I/O components will also be deleted automatically in the Configuration window. (Even if
the Cascade I/O components are deleted, the wiring will remain.)
DME64N block with card inserted in a slot and the Configuration window
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
162
CobraNet Card
If the I/O card is a CobraNet card, a CobraNet icon will be displayed in the DME object.
Object Selection
To open a configuration window for a DME object arranged in the Zone window, first select it by
clicking on it, then double-click on it. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be
displayed.
DME block with CobraNet card inserted
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
163
DME Object Context Menu
[Open Configuration Window]
Opens the Configuration window.
[Cut]
Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.
[Copy]
Copies the selected object to the clipboard.
[Paste]
Pastes the DME device that is on the clipboard.
[Delete]
Deletes the object you clicked on.
[Duplicate]
Duplicates the object you clicked on.
[Display Order]
Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.
[Flash Unit LEDs]
When selected the DME front panel will flash, and will continue flashing until selected a second
time.
[Output Level]
When you select this command, the “Output Level” dialog box will be displayed. This sets the DME
master volume.
[Properties]
Displays the “DME Device Properties” dialog box.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
164
DME Properties
To display the “DME Device Properties” dialog box, select a DME object, then click the [Properties]
command on the [Edit] menu. Here you can set DME properties.
[Label] Box
You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object.
[Width] Box
Specifies the width of the object in pixels.
[Height] Box
Specifies the height of the object in pixels.
[Style]
Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken].
[Label Font] Button
Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.
[Label Color] Button
This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[Port Label Color] Button
Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[Color] Button
Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
NOTE
The name set in the [Label] box will be displayed on the list in the Toolkit window, [Import]/[Export] menu commands,
and on the list in the dialog box. If there are multiple examples of the same DME, set different names for each so that you
can distinguish one from the other.
NOTE
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.
DME24N DME64N
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
165
Analog I/O
Sets the label for the DME24N I/O port. When you click the [Edit I/O Port Label] button, the “Edit
Port Label” dialog box is displayed.
Cascade
Tur ns the DME 64N cascade ON or OFF.
Show Cascade Port
Checking this enables cascade.
Cascade Setting
Here you can make settings that apply when cascade is enabled. Clicking here displays the
“Cascade Setting” dialog box.
I/O Card
Settings for the [Slot1] ~ [Slot4] I/O cards. [Slot1] only can be set for DME24N.
[Select I/O Card]
Specifies the type of I/O card.
[Card Label]
I/O card names having up to 100 characters can be entered here.
[Edit SlotN I/O Port Label] Button
Specifies an I/O port label for each slot. Clicking here displays the “Edit Port Label” dialog
box.
Port Style On Zone Window
Specifies how the DME ports appear in the zone window.
•[Audio Port (Classic Style)]
Displays all audio ports.
[Custom Port Style]
Customizes the port display.
[Left]
Sets the number of ports to be displayed on the left.
[Right]
Sets the number of ports to be displayed to the right.
[Edit Port Label and Type]
Sets the label and type for each port. Click to display the [Edit Port Label] dialog.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
166
“Cascade Setting” Dialog Box
Clicking the [Cascade Setting] button displays the “Cascade Setting” dialog box. Here you can
display DME64E cascade connections and make settings related to them. These settings are
common to the cascaded DMEs in the same zone.
Unit No. (Cascade Connection Number)
All DME units other than the first unit (default “1”) are assigned automatically, and are grayed out
after connection indicating that the settings cannot be changed.
Head Margin
Here you can display and set the head margin for the Cascade connection audio signal. Select [0
db] or [-18 db]. All DME Unit No. settings for DME units other than the first unit will be automatically
set to the same value as the first unit when connected. These settings are grayed out after
connection indicating that they cannot be changed.
Mixer I/O Channel
Here you can display and set the channel used for audio input/output to a mixer. If the checkbox is
turned ON, the channel for the Cascade connection with the mixer is set. If turned OFF, the channel
for connecting with the DME is set.
[Check All] Button
Checks all checkboxes.
[Clear All] Button
Clears all checkboxes.
[OK] Button
Updates the settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
167
“Edit Port Label” Dialog Box
When you click the [Edit I/O Port Label]/[Edit SlotN I/O Port Label] button, the “Edit Port Label”
dialog box is displayed. Here you can set the port labels displayed for components. Enter a [Short
Name] and [Long Name] for [Inputs] and [Outputs]. You can enter up to 100 English characters for
each name.
You can switch between long and short port names displayed in the configuration window with the
[Port Long Name] command in the [View] menu. When you select this command, a checkmark
appears next to it and long names are displayed. If you select this command while a checkmark is
next to it, the checkmark disappears and short names are displayed.
When the Port Style On Zone Window [Custom Port Style] is selected, labels specified here will not
appear in the Zone Window. Labels specified here are always displayed in the Configuration
Window.
Edit Port Label and Type Dialog Box
The Edit Port Label and Type dialog box will appear when the [Edit Port Label and Type ..] button is
clicked. Here you can specify the port labels and types to be displayed in for the components.
To set labels enter the [Port Name] for [Left] and [Right]. Each name can be up to 100 characters in
length.
To set the port type use [Port Type] to select the [Left] and [Right] types.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
168
ICP
You can arrange control panel objects in the Zone window. These can be controlled using user
defined parameters.
First click on an ICP object arranged in the Zone window to select it, then double-click the object. This
opens a “Control Panel Properties” window. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be
displayed.
ICP Object Context Menu
[Cut]
Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.
[Copy]
Copies the selected object to the clipboard.
[Paste]
Pastes the control panel object that is on the clipboard. If the same control panel object exists on
the sheet where you are pasting, a new ICP object will be created.
[Delete]
Deletes the object you clicked on.
[Duplicate]
Duplicates the object you clicked on.
[Display Order]
Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.
[Properties]
Displays the properties dialog box.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
169
ICP Properties
To display the “Control Panel Properties” dialog box, select a ICP object, then click the [Properties]
command on the [Edit] menu.
[Label] Box
You can enter up to 100 text characters to display above the object. Labels for identical ICP
objects that exist in other configurations will also be changed.
[Width] Box
Specifies the object width in pixels.
[Height] Box
Specifies the object height in pixels.
[Style]
Sets the object style. Select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken] from the list.
[Label Font] Button
Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.
[Back Color] Button
Sets the object color. Click to display the Select Color dialog box.
[Label Color] Button
This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.
[User Defined Lock]
Sets whether user defined parameters will be displayed or hidden. Pages with checkmarks will not
be displayed. The four [1]/[2]/[3]/[4] tabs in the “User Defined Button” dialog box correspond to the
pages on the DME unit main display.
Ethernet Port
Tur ns Ethernet port rendering on or off. Ethernet port display will appear when the checkbox is ON.
The radio buttons can be used to specify whether the display is on the left or right side.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
170
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
External Device
Arranges external device objects in the Zone window. These objects can be added by plug-in
functions. External applications can be linked to the devices arranged in the window. These links to
external applications are set using the “External Device Properties” dialog box.
To start the application linked to an external device object arranged in the Zone window, first click on
the object to select it, then double-click it. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be
displayed.
AD824/AD8HR
The AD824 is an eight-channel analog-to-digital converter. The AD8HR is an eight-channel analog-
to-digital converter that features a head amp with high quality sound.
You can connect Yamaha AD824 and AD8HR A/D converters to a DME unit and control them
remotely from DME Designer. DME Designer has a component editor for controlling [AD824] and
[AD8HR] units.
If you arrange an [AD824] or [AD8HR] from [External Device] in the Zone window, select the
connected DME unit in the properties dialog box, and double-click on an [AD824] or [AD8HR]
block, the component editor is displayed.
NOTE
If no external application is linked to the an object, no application will start when the object is double-clicked.
NOTE
If a DME is not selected in the properties dialog box, the component editor will not be displayed even if you double-click.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
171
External Device Object Context Menu
[Open Component Editor]
Starts the application assigned to the object.
For the [AD824] and [AD8HR], it opens the component editor.
[Cut]
Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.
[Copy]
Copies the selected object to the clipboard.
[Paste]
Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.
[Delete]
Deletes the object you clicked on.
[Duplicate]
Duplicates the object you clicked on.
[Display Order]
Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.
[Properties]
Displays the “External Device Properties” dialog box.
At the lowest position below [External Device], [AD824] and [AD8HR] display the “Serial Controlled
Device Properties” dialog box. The other objects display the “External Device Properties” dialog
box.
External Device Properties
To display the “External Device Properties” dialog box, select any external device object besides
AD824 or AD8HR, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.
[Label] Box
You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object.
[Width] Box
Specifies the object width in pixels.
[Height] Box
Specifies the object height in pixels.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
172
[Style]
Sets the object style. Select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken] from the list.
[Label Font] Button
Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.
[Label Color] Button
This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[Port Label Color] Button
Sets the color of the I/O port label. Click to display the Select Color dialog box.
[Back Color] Button
Sets the object color. Click to display the Select Color dialog box.
Launch Application
The radio buttons determines whether an application or file will be linked to an external device.
[Application] Box
The linked application will be displayed. Click the [Browse] button to locate and select an
application. Specifies the path to an application to be launched when an External Device
object is double-clicked.
[File] Box
The linked file will be displayed. Click the [Browse] button to locate and select a file. Specifies
the path to a file to be launched when an External Device object is double-clicked.
Port
Specifies the number of ports displayed for an External Device object.
[Left]
Sets the number of ports to be displayed on the left.
[Right]
Sets the number of ports to be displayed to the right.
[Edit Port Label] Button
Sets the label and type for each port. Click to display the [Edit Port Label] dialog.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
NOTE
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
173
External Device Properties (AD824, AD8HR “Serial Controlled Device
Properties” Dialog Box)
To display the “Serial Controlled Device Properties” dialog box, select AD824 or AD8HR, then click
the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.
This dialog box is the same as the “External Device Properties” dialog box, except for [Remote].
Remote
Select the DME you will control remotely from AD824 and AD8HR.
[DME Unit]
The DMEs in the current configuration will be displayed in a list. Select the DME you will
control remotely.
[ID]
Selects an ID from 1 to 8. The default is 1.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
174
Component
Components are arranged in the Configuration window and the User Module window. They include
audio processors like mixers and compressors, and control parts like switches and sliders. They can
be added by plug-in functions. Component objects arranged in a configuration are displayed in block
form.
To open the component editor for an arranged component, first select it by clicking on it, then double-
click on it. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed.
Component Object Context Menu
[Open Component Editor]
Opens the component editor.
[Cut]
Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.
[Copy]
Copies the selected object to the clipboard.
[Paste]
Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.
[Delete]
Deletes the object you clicked on.
[Duplicate]
Duplicates the object you clicked on.
[Display Order]
Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.
[Recall Component Library]
Recalls libraries with component parameters saved in them. Clicking here displays the submenu.
When a library is selected from the submenu, the library is read and the component parameters are
changed.
For more information about libraries, see “Library” (page 275).
[Store Component Library]
Saves the component parameters. Click to display the Store dialog. If you then save without
changing the folder, the parameters will be added to the library.
Refer to “Library” on page 275 for more information.
[Properties]
Displays the “Component Properties” dialog box.
Label
ID
Input Port
Output Port
Amount of DSP memory used
in the DME
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
175
Component Properties
Here you can set properties for each component. If multiple examples of the same component type
are arranged on a single sheet, changing the properties of a single component does not change
the others.
To display the “Component Properties” dialog box, select a component object, then click the
[Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.
[Label] Box
You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object.
[Width] Box
Specifies the width of the object in pixels.
[Height] Box
Specifies the height of the object in pixels.
[Style]
Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken].
[Label Font] Button
Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.
NOTE
Libraries can be recalled only by users for whom [Control Component Editor] in security is turned ON. The command is
grayed out for users for whom [Control Component Editor] is turned OFF.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
176
[Label Color] Button
This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[Inputs/Outputs Label Color] Button
Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[Color] Button
Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
NOTE
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
177
SPX Component
SPX components are arranged in the Configuration window and the User Module window. Component
objects arranged in a configuration are displayed in block form.
Clicking on a positioned SPX component will select it, and right-clicking will display a contextual
menu.
Unlike normal components, SPX components use SPX-specific resources and therefore the usage
percentage display that appears to the lower right of normal components will not appear. Check the
SPX resource usage percentage via the SPX meter in the Resource Meter window.
Context Menu for SPX Component Objects
[Cut]
Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.
[Copy]
Copies the selected object to the clipboard.
[Paste]
Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.
[Delete]
Deletes the object you clicked on.
[Duplicate]
Duplicates the object you clicked on.
[Display Order]
Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.
[Properties]
Displays the “SPX Component Properties” dialog box.
[Recall Component Library]
Recalls libraries with component parameters saved in them. Clicking here displays the submenu.
When a library is selected from the submenu, the library is read and the component parameters are
changed.
For more information about libraries, see “Library” (page 275).
When you will change the effect type for the SPX component, select the desired type from the
[Effect Type] displayed in the submenu.
NOTE
Libraries can be recalled only by users for whom [Control Component Editor] in security is turned ON. The command is
grayed out for users for whom [Control Component Editor] is turned OFF.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
178
SPX Component Properties
SPX component properties are set for each component. If multiple examples of the same
component type are arranged on a single sheet, changing the properties of a single component
does not change the others.
To display the “SPX Component Properties” dialog box, select a component object, then click the
[Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.
[Label] Box
You can enter up to 100 characters to display over the object.
[Width] Box
Specifies the width of the object in pixels.
[Height] Box
Specifies the height of the object in pixels.
[Style]
Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken].
[Label Font] button
Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see “Select Font” dialog box (page 202).
[Label Color] Button
Sets the color for the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[Inputs/Outputs Label Color] Button
Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[Color] Button
Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[OK] Button
Updates the settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
NOTE
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see “'Select Color' Dialog Box” (page 203).
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
179
Slot Component
If an inserted I/O card is selected in the DME properties settings, it will be displayed in the
Configuration window as a Slot component.
Slot component objects arranged in a configuration are displayed in block form.
If you select an arranged component by clicking on it, then double-click it, the Slot Out component
editor opens. If you right click on the object, a context menu will be displayed.
Slot Component Object Context Menu
[Open MY-Card Editor]
Opens the editor for an MY-Card inserted in a slot.
[Open Slot Out Component Editor]
Opens the Slot Out component editor.
[Cut]/[Copy]/[Paste]/[Delete]/[Duplicate]
The functions cannot be used with Slot components.
[Display Order]
Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.
[Properties]
Displays the “Slot Out Component Properties” dialog box.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
180
Slot Out Component Properties
To display the “Slo tOut Component Properties” dialog box, select a Slot Out component object,
then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.
[Label] Box
You can enter up to 100 characters to display over the object.
[Width] Box
Specifies the width of the object in pixels.
[Height] Box
Specifies the height of the object in pixels.
[Style]
Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken].
[Label Font] button
Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see “'Select Font' Dialog Box” (page 202).
[Label Color] Button
This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[Inputs/Outputs Label Color] Button
Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[Color] Button
Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[OK] Button
Updates the settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
NOTE
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see “'Select Color' Dialog Box” (page 203).
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
181
User Module
A user module combines a number of other components into a module that is treated as a single
component. It can be arranged in the Configuration window. A user object arranged in a window is
displayed as a single block. The User Module Design Window or User Module Window will open,
according to the “User Module Manager” setting when you double click the user module (page 250).
If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed.
User Module Object Context Menu
[Open User Module Design Window]
Opens the User Module Design Window.
[Open User Module Editor]
Opens the User Module Editor.
[Cut]
Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.
[Copy]
Copies the selected object to the clipboard.
[Paste]
Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.
[Delete]
Deletes the object you clicked on.
[Duplicate]
Duplicates the object you clicked on.
[Display Order]
Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.
[Recall Component Library]
Recalls a library into which component parameters have been saved. Click to display a sub-menu.
Select a library from the sub-menu to load the parameters into the component.
Refer to “Library” on page 275 for more information.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
182
[Store Component Library]
Saves the component parameters. Click to display the Store dialog. If you then save without
changing the folder, the parameters will be added to the library.
Refer to “Library” on page 275 for more information.
[Save User Module]
Saves the selected user module. See “Saving User Modules” on page 255.
[Properties]
Displays the “User Module Properties” dialog box.
The submenu displays library files saved in the “Library” folder for user modules.
[Open File Dialog]
Displays the file select dialog box. You can recall libraries saved in folders other than the user
module “Library” folder.
User Module Properties
To display the “User Module Properties” dialog box, select a user module object, then click the
[Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.
NOTE
Libraries can be recalled only by users for whom [Control Component Editor] in security is turned ON. The command is
grayed out for users for whom [Control Component Editor] is turned OFF.
NOTE
The “User Module Properties” dialog box is also displayed when a [Blank User Module] is arranged in the configuration
window.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
183
[Label] Box
You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object.
[Width] Box
Specifies the width of the object in pixels.
[Height] Box
Specifies the height of the object in pixels.
[Style]
Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], [Sunken], or [Image]. When
[Image] is selected the Open dialog will appear. Select an image file and click [Open] to place the
selected image as an object.
[Label Font] Button
Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.
[Label Color] Button
This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[Inputs/Outputs Labels Color] Button
Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[Color] Button
Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
Inputs/Outputs Sets
Sets the number of input/output ports. Enter a number into the [Inputs] box and [Outputs] box, or
set a value using the [] and [] buttons at the right of each box. The maximum of both input and
output ports is 64.
Edit I/O Port Label
Input and output port names up to 100 characters in length can be entered.
Double-Click Action
Sets the action that occurs when you double-click on a user module object arranged in the
Configuration window.
[Open User Module Design Window]
Opens the User Module window.
[Open User Module Editor]
Opens the User Module editor.
NOTE
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
184
Security Settings
Tur ns user module security ON or OFF, and sets a password.
[Enable Security]
Enables user module security. If you turn this function ON when no password is currently set,
the “Set Password” dialog box appears. Enter a password, then click the [OK] button.
If you change the setting from OFF to ON, the “Input Password” dialog box appears. You
cannot turn Security OFF until you enter the correct password.
[Set Password] Button
Changes the password for user modules. Clicking this button displays the “Input Password”
dialog box. Enter the current password and click the [OK] button. The “Set Password” dialog
box will be displayed, and you can set a new password.
This button will be grayed out when [Enable Security] is turned OFF.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
NOTE
When security is active the editor cannot be opened unless the appropriate password is entered. Once the
password has been entered security is temporarily disabled until the DME Designer is quit, or a different file is
opened.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
185
Picture
An image can be arranged as an object on a sheet. This specifies a file for this purpose. You can use
image files in the following formats: BMP (.bmp), PNG (.png), XBM (.xbm), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG
(.jpg).
Before placing a picture object, prepare an image file. Copy the image file to the folder specified in the
“Preferences” dialog box [Application] tab [ContentsFolder] in the Main Panel window.
In the project file, the location and name of the image file are registered in an relative path below the
[ContentsFolder] and the linked image file is read and displayed. If the image file is moved, renamed,
or the [ContentsFolder] is changed, the image cannot be displayed.
Placing Pictures
There are three picture placement methods:
•You can drop the [Picture] item from the Toolkit window into each design window.
•You can double-click [Picture] on the Toolkit window.
•You can click [Picture] in the [Area Parts]/[Device List]/[Component List] on the [Tools] menu,
then click each design window.
When you place a picture object, the “Open” dialog box is displayed. Select the image file and
click the [Open] button. The picture will be placed in the design window.
NOTE
The default for the “Preferences” dialog box [Application] tab [ContentsFolder] in the Main Panel window is
“C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME Designer.” The [Designer] folder is located in the [DME Designer] folder. Within
that folder, there is an [Images] folder prepared for saving image files.
NOTE
Background images for sheets are specified in the “Sheet” dialog box. Pictures are arranged as objects on the sheets.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
186
Picture Object
When you click a picture object that is located in each design window, handles (small squares)
appear at the corners and sides of the object. You can expand or reduce the picture’s size by
dragging a handle.
If you double-click on the object, the “Open” dialog opens. There you can change the image file.
If you right-click on a picture object, a context menu will be displayed.
Picture Module Object Context Menu
[Cut]
Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.
[Copy]
Copies the selected object to the clipboard.
[Paste]
Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.
[Delete]
Deletes the object you clicked on.
[Duplicate]
Duplicates the object you clicked on.
[Display Order]
Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.
[Properties]
Displays the “Picture Properties” dialog box.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
187
Picture Object Properties
To display the “Picture Properties” dialog box, select a picture object, then click the [Properties]
command on the [Edit] menu.
[Label] Box
You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object.
If the box is left blank, the label will disappear.
[Draw Picture Border]
Displays a border around picture objects.
[Label Font] Button
Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.
[Label Color] Button
This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.
[Port Label Color] Button
Sets the color of the I/O port label. Click to display the Select Color dialog box.
[File Name] Box
Displays the path to the graphic file.
[Browse] Button
Selects a graphic file.
[Link Component Editor]
When On a Picture object can be double clicked to open the component editor specified by the
[Select Component] button.
[Select Component] Button
Specifies the component editor to be opened when a Picture object is double clicked. Only
effective when [Link Component editor] is On.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
188
Port
Specifies the number of ports to be displayed for a picture object.
[Left]
Sets the number of ports to be displayed on the left.
[Right]
Sets the number of ports to be displayed to the right.
[Edit Port Label] Button
Sets the label and type for each port. Click to display the [Edit Port Label] dialog.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
189
Text Box
Text objects can be arranged in all design windows. Text is entered into the “Text Properties” dialog
box. When first placed in the design window, the word “Text” is entered into the box.
If you click the text object, handles (small squares) appear at the corners and sides of the object. You
can adjust the size by dragging the handles. You can open the “Text Properties” dialog box by double-
clicking the box. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed.
Text Object Context Menu
[Cut]
Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.
[Copy]
Copies the selected object to the clipboard.
[Paste]
Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.
[Delete]
Deletes the object you clicked on.
[Duplicate]
Duplicates the object you clicked on.
[Display Order]
Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.
[Properties]
Displays the “Text Properties” dialog box.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
190
Text Object Properties
To display the “Text Properties” dialog box, double-click on a text object, or select a text object,
then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.
[Text] Box
You can enter up to 10,000 English characters to display in the text object box.
[Text Font] Button
Sets the font. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.
[Text Color] Button
Sets the color of the text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[Background Color] Button
Sets the color of the background. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[Draw Text Border]
Displays a frame around the text object. If this is not checked, only the text will be displayed on the
sheet.
[Text Border Style] Box
Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken].
[Link Component Editor]
When On a Text object can be double clicked to open the component editor specified by the
[Select Component] button.
[Select Component] Button
Specifies the component editor to be opened when a Text object is double clicked. Only effective
when [Link Component editor] is On.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
NOTE
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
191
Box (Rectangle)
You can arrange rectangles on the sheet.
If you click the box, handles (small squares) appear at the corners and sides of the object. You can
adjust the size by dragging the handles. You can open the “Box Properties” dialog box by double-
clicking the box. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed.
Box Object Context Menu
[Cut]
Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.
[Copy]
Copies the selected object to the clipboard.
[Paste]
Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.
[Delete]
Deletes the object you clicked on.
[Duplicate]
Duplicates the object you clicked on.
[Display Order]
Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.
[Properties]
Displays the “Box Properties” dialog box.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
192
Box Object Properties
To display the “Box Properties” dialog box, double-click on a box object or select a box object,
then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.
[Width] Box
Specifies the width of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels.
[Height] Box
Specifies the height of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels.
[Style]
Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken].
[Round Corner]
Creates a rectangular box with rounded corners.
[Color] Button
Sets the color of the box. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.
Line
Sets the line that frames the box.
•[Type]
Displays a list where you can select the type of line to frame the box. The following types are
available: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [DashDot], and [DashDotDot].
[Size] Box
Sets the width of the line that frames the box. This setting can range from 1 to 100 pixels.
[Color] Button
Sets the color of the line that frames the box. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog
box.
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
193
Ellipse
[Ellipse] in the Toolkit window places a elliptical shape on the sheet.
When you click an Ellipse object that is located in the sheet, handles (small squares) appear at the
corners and sides of the object. You can adjust the size by dragging the handles. You can open the
“Ellipse Properties” dialog box by double-clicking the ellipse. If you right-click on the object, a context
menu will be displayed.
Ellipse Object Context Menu
[Cut]
Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.
[Copy]
Copies the selected object to the clipboard.
[Paste]
Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.
[Delete]
Deletes the object you clicked on.
[Duplicate]
Duplicates the object you clicked on.
[Display Order]
Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu.
[Properties]
Displays the “Ellipse Properties” dialog box.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
194
Ellipse Object Properties
To display the “Ellipse Properties” dialog box, double-click on an ellipse object, or select an ellipse
object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.
[Width] Box
Specifies the width of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels.
[Height] Box
Specifies the height of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels.
[Color] Button
Sets the color of the ellipse. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.
Line
Sets the line that frames the ellipse.
•[Type]
Displays a list where you can select the type of line to frame the ellipse. The following types
are available: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [DashDot], and [DashDotDot].
[Size] Box
Sets the width of the line that frames the ellipse. This setting can range from 1 to 100 pixels.
[Color] Button
Sets the color of the line that frames the ellipse. Clicking here displays the “Select Color”
dialog box.
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
195
Wire
Draws lines (wires) for connecting components and creating shapes. For instructions on drawing
wires, see “Drawing and Editing Wires” on page 219.
First click on an wire object arranged on the sheet to select it, then double-click the object. This opens
a “Wire Properties” window.
If you right-click on a wire object, one of three types of context menus will be displayed, depending
where you clicked.
Wire Object Context Menu (Line Segment)
[Start Wire]
Begins drawing a line segment from the location where you clicked.
[Delete Wire]
Deletes the entire wire.
[Cut]
Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard.
[Copy]
Copies the selected object to the clipboard.
[Paste]
Pastes the object that is on the clipboard.
[Delete]
Deletes the line segment where you right-clicked.
[Duplicate]
Duplicates the wire object.
Line SegmentNode
Ter mination
Line Segment Context Menu
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
196
[Wire Color]
Specifies the wire color.
[Properties]
Displays the “Wire Properties” dialog box.
Wire Object Context Menu (Node)
[Start Wire]
Begins drawing a wire segment from the location where you right-clicked.
[Delete Wire]
Deletes the entire wire.
[Delete]
Deletes the node. The nodes before and after will become directly connected.
[Properties]
Displays the “Wire Properties” dialog box.
Wire Object Context Menu (Termination)
[Continue Wire]
Begins drawing wire from a termination node.
[Start Wire]
Begins drawing a wire from the location where you right-clicked.
[Delete Wire]
Deletes the entire wire.
[Properties]
Displays the “Wire Properties” dialog box.
Node Context Menu
Ter mination Context Menu
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
197
Wire Object Properties
To display the “Wire Properties” dialog box, double-click on a wire object. You can also select a
wire object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu.
[Line Width] Box
Set the line width. This setting can range from 1 to 10 pixels.
[Line Type]
Displays a list where you can select the type of line. The following types are available: [Solid],
[Dash], [Dot], [DashDot], and [DashDotDot].
[Line Color] Button
Sets the color of the line. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[Selected Color] Button
Sets the color of the selected line. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
NOTE
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
198
Legend (Descriptive Fields)
Displays a legend for all sheets except the User Module window.
When you click the [Edit Legend] command on the [Edit] menu or double-click on one of the Legend
fields displayed on the sheet, the “Edit Legend” dialog box is displayed. If you right-click on the
Legend, the displayed context menu will have the [Edit Legend] command only. If you click there it will
display the “Edit Legend” dialog box.
The “Edit Legend” dialog box is used to enable/disable Legend display and to set the contents
displayed there. You can display the [Edit Legend] command from the [Edit] menu.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
199
“Edit Legend” Dialog Box
[Project] Box, [Title] Box, [No.] Box, [Author] Box, [Company] Box, [Address1] Box, and
[Address2] Box
Used to enter the Project, Title, Number, Author, Company, Address1, and Address2. You can enter
up to 100 English characters for each field.
[Date] Box and [Revisions] Box
You can enter up to five dates and five revisions. You can enter up to 100 English characters for
each field.
[Legend Base Font Style]
Displays a list where you can select the font.
[Show Legend]
Place a checkmark here to display the legend on the sheet.
[Save as Default Legend]
Saves this legend as the default legend used when a new sheet is created. When a new
configuration is created, it will have a legend with the same contents as this one.
[Change for All Legends In Area]
Place a checkmark here to have the changes made here reflected in sheets in all design windows
included in the area.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
200
Sheet
There is one sheet in each design window for arranging objects. The size of the sheet and its
background image are specified with the “Sheet” dialog box. This dialog box is displayed using the
[Sheet] command from the [Tools] menu.
Make the window where you are going to change sheet settings active, then click [Tools] menu
[Sheet].
“Sheet” Dialog Box
[Preset Size]
Displays a list where you can select preset paper sizes.
When you select a paper size, numerical values are set for [Horizontal] and [Vertical].
[Custom Sizes]
Set a custom size by specifying the vertical and horizontal sizes of the sheet.
[Horizontal] Box
Sets the horizontal width of the sheet.
•[Vertical] Box
Sets the vertical height of the sheet.
[Fixed Aspect Ratio]
When this is checked the relationship between horizontal and vertical is fixed. When the value
for [Horizontal] or [Vertical] changed, the size of the other direction changes so that the
proportions of the paper remain the same.
[Save As Default Sheet Size]
When turned ON, the current values will become the default for creating sheets. New sheets
will be created at the same size.
NOTE
The upper left is the starting point for measuring sheet size. Therefore, in the [Horizontal] box set the number of
pixels to the right edge, and in the [Vertical] box, set the number of pixels to the lower edge. The boundaries in
which items are already arranged on the sheet will form the minimum sheet size.
Because any objects that are moved, cut, or deleted will return to the same location if the [Undo] command is
used, the minimum sheet size will be determined by the boundaries in which any objects were located, now or in
the past.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
201
Background Effect
Sets the background for the sheet.
[Color] Button
Sets the color of the background. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.
[Image] Button
Displays an image as the sheet background. You can use image files in the following formats:
BMP (.bmp), PNG (.png), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg). Clicking here displays the “Select
Image” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Image” dialog box, see page 205.
[Change for All Sheets]
Changes all sheets so that they are the same.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
202
“Select Font” Dialog Box
When you click the [Font] or [Label Font] button in an object’s properties dialog box, the “Select Font”
dialog box is displayed. Sets the font.
Font
Selects the font. The currently selected font name is displayed in this box. Select a font by clicking
its name on the list.
Font Style
Sets the style of the text. The currently selected style is displayed in the box. Select a style by
clicking its name on the list below.
Normal ..........Standard style
Italic ..............Italic or slanted text
Bold ..............Bold text
Bold Italic......Bold italic text
Size
Sets the text size. The currently selected size is displayed in the box. Select a size by clicking it in
the list below.
Effects
Sets effects for the text. Check the effects you wish to set.
Strikeout........Adds a strikeout line through the center of the text.
Underline ......Adds an underline to the text.
Script
From the list, select the script (language) for the text. There is no need to change the language
setting unless you want to specify a specific language.
Sample
Displays an example of the current settings.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
203
“Select Color” Dialog Box
When you click the [Color] or [Label Color] button in an object’s properties dialog box, the “Select
color” dialog box is displayed. Sets the color of objects and text.
Setting Basic Colors
There are 48 basic colors provided in the [Basic colors] section. When you select a basic color by
clicking on it, the position of that color in the color palette to the right is indicated by a cross (+).
Information about the selected color is displayed below the color palette.
Click the [OK] button to set the color you selected.
Setting Colors That Are Not in the [Basic colors] Section.
You can select any color in the color palette displayed at the upper-right of the dialog box by
clicking on it in the palette. Color information is displayed below the color palette. If you like the
color you selected, click the [OK] button. If you don’t like the color, you can select a new color by
clicking in another location in the color palette, or by dragging the cross symbol to another location
there.
Grey colors can be selected on the tall, thin chart to the right of the palette.
Click the [OK] button to set the color you selected.
Saving Colors You Have Created
In the custom color section, you can save up to 16 colors you have created. When you save a
custom color, it can be selected by clicking on its color button, in the same way as for the [Basic
colors].
Even if you open the “Select color” dialog box from the Properties of another object, any custom
color you save will be displayed and you can use that same color for the other object.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
204
1 Click the [Custom colors] box where you will save the color you create.
The box you clicked will be selected and a frame will appear around it.
2 Set the color on the color palette.
3 Click the [Add to Custom Colors] button.
The selected color will be added to [Custom colors].
NOTE
You can save another color in a box that already has an original color saved in it. Just click on the box to select it.
The new color will overwrite the previous color, which will be lost.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
205
“Select Image” Dialog Box
You can display an image for the background of sheets or objects. You can use image files in the
following formats: BMP (.bmp), PNG (.png), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg).
In the project file, the location and name of the image file are registered in an relative path below the
[ContentsFolder] and the linked image file is read and displayed. If the image file is moved, renamed,
or the [ContentsFolder] is changed, the image cannot be displayed.
If you click the [Image] button in the properties dialog box for an object that can display a background
image or in the “Sheet” dialog box, the “Select Image” dialog box will be displayed. Specify an image
file and set its display method.
Image Layout
Selects the manner in which the image file will be displayed.
[Center]
Centers the image in the object or sheet.
[Tile]
Displays multiple copies of the image side-by-side until the available space is filled. If the
image file is smaller than the sheet, it will be displayed repeatedly like tiles on a wall.
[Fit]
Expands or reduces the size of the image to match the size of the sheet where it will be
displayed.
[File] Box
Specifies a path for the image file. A path can be directly entered in the box. You can also click the
[Browse] button and select the image file. It will be entered automatically.
To stop display of an image, delete all characters in the box, leaving the field blank.
NOTE
The default for the “Preferences” dialog box [Application] tab [ContentsFolder] in the Main Panel window is
“C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME Designer.” The [Designer] folder is located in the [DME Designer] folder. Within
that folder, there is an [Images] folder prepared for saving image files.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
206
[Browse] Button
Specifies a path for the image file. Clicking here displays the “Open” dialog box. Select a file with
one of the following extensions: “.bmp,” “.png,” “.xpm,” or “.jpg,” then click the [Open] button.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
207
Design Window Shared Settings and Operations
Preferences
You can set the operating environment for the Designer window in the “Preferences” dialog box. This
dialog box is opened using the [Preferences] command in the Designer window [Print] menu.
Graphics
Ports & Wires
Specifies wire color, thickness, and type for each port type.
[Color]
Sets the default color for the port and wire.
[Width]
Sets the default wire width from a range of 1 to 5.
•[Type]
Sets the port type.
NOTE
The initial color and thickness of the wires produced when drawing connections are specified here. The color and
thickness of drawn wires can be changed via the Wire Properties dialog box.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
208
Crosshairs
[Show Crosshairs While Dragging]
Place a checkmark here to have crosshairs displayed for guidance when dragging the wire
endpoint.
[Arbitrary Crosshair Length]
Specifies the length of the crosshair lines.
Enter a number into the [Arbitrary Crosshair Length] box to specify the length in pixels.
[Infinite Crosshairs] causes the lines to go all the way to the edge of the window.
Offset Paste/Duplicate from Original By
Sets the position when pasting or duplicating objects.
•[Auto-size (based on original object)]
If you place a checkmark here, the paste/duplicate position will be automatically adjusted so
that the object does not overlap the original object.
[Horizontal Pixels] Box
Sets the horizontal distance.
•[Vertical Pixels] Box
Sets the vertical distance.
Auto Suffix Number
Tur ns automatic appending of sequentially-numbered suffixes to the names of placed objects on or
off.
[DME/ICP1]
When ON numbered suffixes will automatically be appended to added DME, and ICP objects.
[Component]
When ON numbered suffixes will automatically be appended to added SPX and user module
objects.
[Other Objects]
When ON numbered suffixes will automatically be appended to added objects not covered by
the above two categories.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
209
Compile Priority
Here you can make compile settings for the configuration.
[Resource]
Compiles arrangable components in order based on their component numbers. The Delay
values differ depending on the signal lines.
[Fixed Delay]
Fixes the Delay value (number of Samples) for the signal lines. However, it also reduces the
number of components that can be arranged.
•[Auto Delay Compensation]
This turns ON or OFF a function that automatically corrects the component delay when [Fixed
Delay] is selected.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
NOTE
These compile settings are reflected in online status. If you change the settings in offline status, it will be enabled when
going online after going offline once.
NOTE
Auto Delay Compensation will not function properly in configurations that have a loop connection.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
210
Grid
Displays a grid on the sheet in each design window to guide the placement of objects. You can also
have the objects “snap to” (automatically align with) the grid when dragging them. When you click the
[Grid] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Grid” dialog box is displayed. Here you can enable or
disable display of the grid and set the grid interval and form.
[Snap to Grid]
Makes objects align the grid when dragging them.
Spacing
This sets the spacing of the grid. This setting can range from 2 to 99 pixels.
[X:] Box
This sets the spacing of the grid in the horizontal direction.
•[Y:] Box
This sets the spacing of the grid in the vertical direction.
[Show Grid]
Displays the grid. Place a checkmark here to enable display and select the type of grid.
[Line]
Displays the grid using lines.
[Dot]
Displays the grid using dots.
[Save As Default Setting]
Place a checkmark here to make the current grid settings the default when a new sheet is created.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
211
Exporting Each Design Window
Configurations are saved in project files. This is done using the [File] menu [Save] and [Save As]
commands in the Main Panel window. For information about saving project files see “Project Files” on
page 22.
Instead of saving projects in their entirety, you can output the information contained in the active
window using the Designer Window [Print] [Export DXF] command and save it in a DXF format file.
These files have “.dxf” as their filename extension.
Because the DXF format uses the standard CAD file format, it can be opened using CAD software.
DXF format files can also be opened by graphics software that support vector graphics, such as
Adobe Illustrator
®
.
When you select this command, the “Export DXF” dialog box will be displayed.
Symbols are substituted for external devices in the following three types of folders.
Microphone mike symbol
Power Amp amp symbol
Speaker speaker symbol
•Text decoration except for size will be eliminated.
Picture objects and background images for the sheet or objects will all be eliminated.
[Style] attributes for boxes will be eliminated.
When you select the [Print] menu [Export DXF] command, the “Export DXF” dialog box will be
displayed.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
212
DXF File Name
Enter a filename for the DXF file. The default file name entered here will vary according to the
currently active window.
If you click the [...] button at the right of the box, the “DXF File Name” dialog box is displayed.
Specify the DXF file filename and the folder where the file will be saved.
Enter the filename, specify the folder where the file will be saved, then click the [Save] button.
When you return to the “Export DXF” dialog box, the specified filename will be displayed in the
[DXF File Name] box.
Scale
Sets the reduction ratio. When the size of the sheet is large, you can reduce it before exporting it.
Text Style
Specifies the text font for output in DXF format. The default is the “TXT” (drawing font used in CAD).
Block
Sets the block form used in the sheet. Displays a list where you can select the form.
[Block]
Makes the blocks rectangular and groups the text in the port icons and port names.
[Explode]
Makes the blocks into sets of four lines, and does not group the text in the port icons and port
names.
NOTE
When you click on the [Save] button in the “DXF File Name” dialog box, the DXF file is not saved. Only when you click on
the [OK] button in the “Export DXF” dialog box, does the DXF file become saved.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
213
[Paper Size]
Sets the size of the paper.
[Preset Size]
Displays a list where you can select preset paper sizes. When you select a paper size, numerical
values are set for [Horizontal] and [Vertical].
[Custom Sizes]
Set a custom size by specifying the vertical and horizontal sizes of the sheet.
[Horizontal] Box
Sets the horizontal width of the sheet.
•[Vertical] Box
Sets the vertical height of the sheet.
[Unit]
Selects the unit used for setting the sheet size.
[OK] Button
Saves the DXF file according to the settings in the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Cancels the DXF file export process.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
214
Printing Each Design Window
You can print out the content of each design window just as it appears on the screen. The content in
the window will be expanded or reduced in size as necessary to match the size and orientation of the
paper, and printed onto a single sheet of paper. Commands related to printing are found on the
Designer Window [Print] menu.
[Print Setup]
When you select this command, the “Print Setup” dialog box will be displayed. Sets the paper size
and orientation.
[Paper Size]
Displays a list where you can select the paper size.
Orientation
Sets the orientation of the paper.
•[Portrait]
Prints on the paper with its long sides vertical.
[Landscape]
Prints on the paper with its long sides horizontal.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
215
[Print Preview]
Displays a print preview of the active design window. You can check the appearance of the page
before printing it.
[Print]
Displays the “Print” dialog box.
[Close]
Closes the print preview window.
[Print]
Prints the active window. When you select this command, the “Print” dialog box will be displayed.
Enter the number of copies to print into the [Number of Copies] box, and click the [Print] button.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
216
Arranging Objects
Multiple object placement methods are available.
Dragging from the Toolkit Window
You can drag items from the Toolkit window to the location where you want to place them in each
design window.
Double-Clicking an Object in the Toolkit Window
You can double-click an object in the Toolkit window to place it in each design window.
Selecting from the [Tools] Menu
Available objects are displayed on the [Area Parts List]/[Device List]/[Component List] submenus
which are accessed from the [Tools] menu. When you click an object name, the mouse pointer
changes shape. Click the location on the sheet where you want to place the object.
Selecting from the Context Menu
If you right-click on the sheet, you will see the [Area Parts List]/[Device List]/[Component List]
commands displayed on the context menu that appears. When you click an object name on the
submenu, the mouse pointer changes shape. Click the location on the sheet where you want to
place the object.
Selecting Objects
Selecting with a Click
You can select an object by clicking on it. If you click another object or an empty location on the
sheet, it will cancel selection of the object you previously clicked.
Selecting with Click + <Ctrl> Key
When you want to select multiple objects, hold down the <Ctrl> key as you click each new object
you want to select. If you hold down the <Ctrl> key and click again on one of the objects that is part
of the multiple selection, it will cancel selection of that single object.
Selecting by Dragging
If you position the mouse in an empty location on the sheet and start dragging from there, a frame
will be displayed as the pointer moves.
Any objects within this frame will be selected.
Changing the Selected Object Using the <Tab> Key
When a single object is selected, you can change the selection to the next object by pressing the
<Tab> key. If you press <Shift> + <Tab>, the selection moves to the previous object. The selection
order moves from left to right.
NOTE
Wires cannot be selected with the <Tab> key.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
217
Editing Objects
Objects that have been arranged on the sheet can be edited using the [Cut], [Copy], [Paste],
[Duplicate], and similar commands in the [Edit] menu. These edit commands will also appear in the
context menu displayed when you right-click an object in the design window. Buttons for [Cut],
[Copy], and [Paste] are also available on the Designer window toolbar.
Undoing and Redoing Operations
You can undo operations using the [Undo] command on the [Edit] menu. You can use the [Redo]
command to redo operations that have been undone.
Deleting Objects
Objects can be deleted by selecting them and pressing the <Delete> key.
Moving Objects
You can move objects by dragging them with the mouse. If [Snap to Grid] is ON in the “Grid” dialog
box, the dragged objects will automatically align with the grid.
You can also move a selected object using the arrow keys. If [Snap to Grid] is ON in the “Grid”
dialog box, the selected object will move from grid line to grid line. If [Snap to Grid] is OFF, the
object will move pixel to pixel.
NOTE
Some objects cannot be edited.
NOTE
Some objects cannot be deleted. With some other objects, you must first make appropriate settings in a dialog box
before you can delete them.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
218
Changing the Order
Objects newly placed on the sheet will be displayed above any previously placed objects they
overlap. You can change this behavior using the [Display Order] command on the [Edit] menu. Select
the object for which you want to change the display order, then select the appropriate command from
the [Display Order] submenu on the [Edit] menu.
[Top]
Moves the selected object to the top of the stack.
[Bottom]
Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stack.
[Front]
Moves the selected object up one level in the stack.
[Back]
Moves the selected object down one level in the stack.
Uppermost Object
BackBottom
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
219
Drawing and Editing Wires
Wire
Objects that are arranged on sheets in the Configuration or User Module windows can be connected
to each other by wires. Not only does this let you logically connect signal sources (output side) and
destinations (input side), it also lets you draw connections and independent lines on the display. Each
wire has at least two wire nodes. Between the nodes are line segments.
Selecting Wires and Canceling Selection
You can select a line segment by clicking on it.
If you hold down the <Alt> key while clicking, you will select the entire wire.
NOTE
The color used when a wire object is selected can be set with [Selected Color] in the “Wire Properties” dialog box.
Line Segment
Wire Node
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
220
Line Segment
The line width default value is set from one to five pixels in the Designer window “Properties” dialog
box. In the “Wire Properties” dialog box, the line thickness and color can be adjusted as required
for the various wires arranged on the sheet.
Line Segment Selection
When you select a line segment by clicking on it, only that line segment is selected. If you hold
down the <Ctrl> key while clicking, you can select multiple line segments. Furthermore, if you drag
the mouse from an empty location on the sheet so that nodes are enclosed by a box, line segments
between those nodes will be selected.
Canceling Line Segment Selection
If you select another object or an empty location on the sheet, it will cancel selection of the object
you previously clicked.
You can also cancel selections by holding the <Ctrl> key while clicking.
<Ctrl> + Click
Canceling Selection of a Line Segment
Selected with <Ctrl> + Click
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
221
Wire Nodes
Both ends of a wire, the location where wires bend, and the location where wires diverge are called
Nodes.” When a wire object is not selected, its nodes are not displayed. When a wire is selected,
the nodes are displayed with a red circle.
Node Selection
When you click on a node, only that node itself is selected. You can select multiple nodes by
holding down the <Ctrl> key while clicking. Furthermore, if you drag the mouse from an empty
location on the sheet so that nodes are enclosed by a box, the enclosed nodes will be selected.
Canceling Node Selection
If you select another object or an empty location on the sheet, it will cancel selection of the object
you previously clicked.
You can also cancel node selections by holding the <Ctrl> key while clicking. With this technique,
you can cancel only the node you clicked on when multiple nodes are selected.
<Ctrl> + Click
Canceling Selection of a Node Selected with
<Ctrl> + Click
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
222
Hotspot
The small white rectangles at the edge of objects are called “Hotspots.” Wires usually connect to
hotspots.
Some hotspots do not have a connection to a logical signal within the hardware.
Component and user module hotspots normally include logical connections.
External device hotspots do not include logical connections.
Selecting Hotspots
If you click a hotspot, drawing will start. To select, press <Shift> + click.
You can select multiple hotspots as follows: Select a hotspot with <Shift> + click, then select
additional hotspots using <Ctrl> + <Shift> + click.
Hotspots
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
223
Drawing Settings
Several functions are available to help ensure accurate wire drawing.
Grid
To accurately draw in relation to the grid, turn ON [Snap to Grid] in the “Grid” dialog box.
Draw Exact Vertical and Horizontal Lines
If you turn ON [Prohibit Diagonal Connections] in the [Tools] menu, wires will be drawn only
vertically or horizontally. It will not be possible to draw diagonal wires. When you select this
command, it is turned ON, and a checkmark appears next to it. If you select the command while it
is ON, it will turn OFF.
Even if “Prohibit Diagonal Connections” is turned OFF, this function will operate whenever you
press the <Shift> key while drawing.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
224
Wire Drawing
Wire drawing starts at the positions shown in the following table:
Connecting Hotspots with Hotspots
Method 1 Clicking
Click the hotspot where the connection originates to begin drawing, then click the destination
hotspot. The two hotspots will be connected by a wire.
Method 2 Dragging
Drag from the origin hotspot to the destination hotspot.
Connect with Bent Line
Method 1 From Hotspot to Hotspot
Click the hotspot where the connection originates to begin drawing, then click the location (which
will become a node) where you want the line to bend. Finally, click the destination hotspot to
complete the connection.
Drawing Start Location Start Method
Hotspot Click
Wire End Terminal Right-click click [Continue Wire] on the menu
Node Right-click click [Start Wire] on the menu
Line Segment Right-click click [Start Wire] on the menu
Anywhere on the Sheet Right-click click [Start Wire] on the menu
NOTE
When creating diagrams the keyboard cursor keys can be used to move the mouse cursor, and the <Enter. Key can be used
to create nodes.
NOTE
A termination cannot be connected to a terminal that will be shorted. Multiple connections cannot be made to a DME
object's Cascade port.
NOTE
When creating diagrams horizontally aligned hot spots can be automatically connected by pressing the <Shift> + <>
keys or <Shift> + <> keys.
NOTE
A termination cannot be connected to a terminal that will be shorted. Multiple connections cannot be made to a DME
object's Cascade port.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
225
Method 2 From Hotspot to Node or Line Segment
Click the hotspot where the connection originates to begin drawing, then click the location (node)
where you want the line to bend. Click an already drawn wire node or line segment to complete the
connection. If you connect to a line segment, a node will be created there.
Connect Multiple Hotspots in a Single Operation
Method 1 <Ctrl> Key Combinations
If you hold down the <Ctrl> key when finishing dragging, a wire will be drawn at all origin hotspots.
The wire will be connected to the destination hotspot you dragged and those that come after.
Begin dragging from the connection origin hotspot, then press the <Ctrl> key after aligning the
mouse pointer with the hotspot you will connect too. A wire will be displayed below the destination
hotspot. Finish dragging while holding the <Ctrl> key down.
Method 2 Connect Multiple Selected Hotspots
Select multiple hotspots using <Shift> + click and <Ctrl> + click, then drag from one of the
selected hotspots to the destination hotspot. The selected multiple origin hotspots will all be
connected.
NOTE
A termination cannot be connected to a terminal that will be shorted. Multiple connections cannot be made to a DME
object's Cascade port.
Press <Ctrl> Key
Multiple Hotspots Selected
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
226
Method 3 Using Shortcuts
Press the [F2] key to select the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the selected object and
begin drawing a wire.
Press <Shift> + [F2] to select the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the selected object and
begin drawing a wire.
Press the [F4] key to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the selected object and
the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the object on the right.
Press <Shift> + [F4] to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the selected object and
the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the object on the left.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
227
Press the [F5] key to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the selected object and
the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the object on the right, and continue automatically
making sequential connections until no more open ports are available on either object. Automatic
connections will not be made over other objects.
Press <Shift> + [F5] to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the selected object and
the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the object on the left, and continue automatically
making sequential connections until no more open ports are available on either object. Automatic
connections will not be made over other objects.
Press the [F8] key to clear all wires connected to the selected object.
Starting Drawing from the End Point/Node/Line Segment of an Existing Wire
You can draw from the end or midway point of an existing wire. If you start from a node or line
segment, a branch line will be created.
Method 1 Continue Drawing from a Wire End Point
When continuing an existing wire, right-click on the wire end point, then click [Continue Wire] on
the displayed context menu.
NOTE
When multiple objects are selected these operations apply to the first object selected.
NOTE
These shortcuts can be changed as required.
See Chapter 3 Main Panel Window, “Shortcut Keys” on page 134.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
228
Method 2 Start Drawing from a Node
Right-click on a wire node, then click [Start Wire] on the displayed menu. You can start a branch
wire from the node you clicked on.
Method 3 Start Drawing from a Line Segment
Right-click on a wire line segment, then click [Start Wire] on the displayed menu. A node will be
created at the point you right-clicked, and you can start a branch wire from that node.
Drawing from Anywhere on the Sheet
Right-click the start position for drawing, the click [Start Wire] on the context menu that is
displayed. Click the location where the line should bend, then double-click at the end location to
finish drawing.
Finishing Drawing
When the hotspots or already drawn wires are connected, drawing is finished.
To finish drawing without connecting to a hotspot, use one of the following methods:
Right-click the mouse
Double-click
•Press the <Esc> key
Drawing also finishes if another window is made active.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
229
Wire Editing
You can delete wires, change node positions, connect to other wires, and perform other wire edit
operations.
Delete
Deleting an Entire Wire
Right-click the wire then click [Delete Wire] in the context menu
Deleting Nodes
Nodes can be deleted by selecting them and pressing the <Delete> key. Nodes on both sides of
the deleted node will become directly connected.
Editing by Dragging
Moving Nodes
You can move nodes by dragging them with the mouse.
When multiple nodes are selected and dragged with the mouse, you can move all selected nodes
simultaneously.
Selected Node
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
230
Moving Line Segments
To move a line segment, select the nodes on both sides of the segment, and drag one of the
nodes.
Connecting to Other Wires
If you drag a node and lay it over another wire, the two will be connected at that position. If you
drag it to a line segment, a node will be created.
Logical connection
A connection from a source (output side) signal to a destination (input side) signal is called a “logical
connection.” If a logical connection is present in a configuration, the actual hardware signal will be
connected. A single wire can make a single logical connection.
Logical connections are possible only in the Configuration window and the User Module window.
Wires in the Area window or Zone window can be drawn for display only. Even in the Configuration
window and User Module window, you can also draw wires for display only.
Situations Where No Logical Connection Is Created
Both sides are source (output side) signals
Both sides are destination (input side) signals
•Two source (output side) signals are connected to a destination
There are two destination (input side) signals, and the wire is not connected to a source (output
side) signal.
Window Wire
Area Window Drawing for display only
Zone Window Drawing for display only
Configuration Window Logical connection and drawing for display only
User Module Window Logical connection and drawing for display only
Created Node
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
231
Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone
At least one zone is included within an area. In the default Area window that zone will be named
[Zone1]. Multiple zones can be arranged in an Area.
When you click the [Zone] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Zone” dialog box is displayed. Here
you can add, delete, or rename a zone.
Zone List
Lists the zones included in the project. To change settings for a zone, select it by clicking it in the
list.
[Add] Button
Adds a zone. Clicking here displays the “Please enter new name” dialog box. Enter a new name,
then click [OK]. A zone will be added.
[Delete] Button
Deletes the zone selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Are you sure?” dialog box. Click
the [OK] button, and the zone will be deleted. Click the [Cancel] button, and the deletion will be
cancelled.
NOTE
A minimum of one zone is required. When only one zone remains, deletion is impossible.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
232
[Rename] Button
Changes the name of the zone selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Enter new name for
the current zone name” dialog box. Enter a zone name, then click the [OK] button.
[Close] Button
Closes the “Zone” dialog box.
NOTE
The current name of the zone you will be renaming is displayed in the “Current Zone Name” box of the “Enter new name
for current zone name” message.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
233
Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Configuration
At least one configuration is included within a zone. In a new Zone that configuration will be named
[Configuration1]. You can add configurations as required.
When you click the [Configuration] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Configuration” dialog box is
displayed. Here you can add, delete, or rename a configuration.
Configurations
Lists the configurations included in the zone being edited. To change settings for a configuration,
select it by clicking it in the list.
[Add] Button
Adds a configuration. Clicking here displays the “Please enter new name” dialog box. Enter a
configuration name, then click [OK]. A configuration will be added.
[Delete] Button
Deletes the configuration selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Are you sure?” dialog
box. Click the [OK] button, and the configuration will be deleted. Click the [Cancel] button, and the
deletion will be cancelled.
NOTE
A minimum of one configuration is required. When only one configuration remains, deletion is impossible.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
234
[Rename] Button
Changes the name of the configuration selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Enter new
name for the current configuration” dialog box. Enter a configuration name, then click the [OK]
button.
[Close] Button
Closes the “Configuration” dialog box.
NOTE
The current name of the configuration you will be renaming is displayed in the “Current Configuration Name” box of the
“Enter new name for current configuration name” message.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
235
Area Window
In the Area window, the area is designed by arranging objects on a design sheet, When you click
“Area” in the Navigator window, the Area window becomes active. You can also open the Area window
using the [Area] command in the [View] menu.
The following objects can be arranged in the Area window:
Zone
External Device
Picture
•Text
Box
Ellipse
Wire
Legend
Title Bar
You can move windows by dragging the title bar.
Zone
Zones are added and deleted using the “Zone” dialog box. You cannot perform operations such as
deletion, cut, or copy. You can change the position and design of zone objects in the Area window.
Double-click to open a Zone window.
Objects
You can perform edit operations such as arrange, cut, copy, paste, delete, and move on all objects
except zones.
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Tool Bar
Toolkit Window
Zones
Picture
(Image)
Sheet
Text (Text Object)
Box
(Rectangle)
Ellipse (Circle)
Legend
Wire (Line)
Wire
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
236
Arranging Objects
Objects other than zones can be placed in the window by dragging them from the Toolkit window. You
can also place objects by double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. You can also display the [Area
Parts List] from the [Tools] menu or from the context menu that appears when you right-click on the
sheet.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
237
Zone Window
In the Zone window, the zone configuration is designed by arranging zone devices on a design sheet,
A zone configuration can be created that is the same as the actual hardware arrangement.
To display the Zone window, double-click in the Area window. When you click a configuration in the
Navigator window, it becomes active.
The following objects can be arranged in the Zone window:
DME
ICP
External Device
Picture
•Text
Box
Ellipse (Circle)
Legend
Title Bar
Displays the zone name you have in the “Zone” dialog box. There is always one zone named [Zone
1] in a newly created project.
Configuration
You can create multiple configurations within a zone, but they cannot be arranged within the Zone
window. There is a Zone window for each configuration where devices can be arranged. To switch
configurations, click the desired configuration in the Navigator window.
You can add, delete, and rename configurations in the “Configuration” dialog box.
DME
ICP
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Tool Bar
Toolkit Window
Sheet
External Device
Picture (Image)
Text
(Text Object)
Box (Rectangle)
Ellipse (Circle)
Legend
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
238
Objects
You can perform edit operations such as place, cut, copy, paste, delete, and move to devices and
shapes. If you double-click on a device arranged in the window, a Configuration window or dialog
box will open.
Arranging Objects
You can place objects by dragging them from the Toolkit window. You can also place objects by
double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. The same objects are displayed in the [Device List]
submenu on the context menu that appears when you right-click the [Tools] menu or on the sheet.
For information about the “Device List,” see page 154.
DME Arrangement
To place a DME object, first drag the [New] icon. When you drag the [New] icon and place it in the
Zone window, you also add an icon for that DME to the Toolkit window. You can rename the DME in
the “DME Device Properties” dialog box. This also renames the DME icon in the Toolkit Window.
You can place a created DME in another configuration, but you cannot place multiple identical
DMEs in a single configuration. If there are multiple DMEs in a hardware configuration, create an
equivalent number of DME objects.
Device Action When Double-Clicked
DME Displays Configuration Window
ICP Displays “Control Panel Properties” dialog box
External Device Opens external application linked to the device.
Place New DME
Placed DME
DME not placed in
active configuration
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
239
Placing a New DME
Below the DME folder in the Toolkit window are the [DME24N] and [DME64N] folders. Below these
folders you will find a [New] icon. Drag it to the Zone window.
When you drag the [New] icon and place it in the Zone window, you also add an icon for that DME
to the Toolkit window.
A DME added to the Toolkit window cannot be placed again in the same configuration window. The
DME placed in the Toolkit window will be displayed with a muted color.
To place multiple DMEs, drag the [New] icon to add each DME.
Placing Existing DMEs
When there are multiple configurations, you can place existing DMEs in configurations other than
their original one.
Drag the DME icon created in the Toolkit window to the Zone window.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
240
When you place the DME in the Zone window, the DME icon display in the Toolkit window will
change to a muted color that indicates that it has already been placed.
ICP Placement
Just like for a DME, the first step it placing an ICP is to drag the [New] icon from the Toolkit window.
You can place the created ICP in another configuration, but you cannot place multiple identical
ICPs in a single configuration. If there are multiple ICPs in a hardware configuration, create an
equivalent number of ICP objects.
Placing a New ICP
Subordinate to the ICP folder in the Toolkit window is the [ICP1] folder. Below these folders you will
find a [New] icon. Drag it to the Zone window.
ICP not placed in
active configuration
Placed ICP
Place New ICP
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
241
When you drag the ICP [New] icon and place it in the Zone window, you also add an icon for that
ICP to the Toolkit window.
The ICP added in the Toolkit window will be displayed with a muted color to indicate it has already
been placed. To place multiple ICPs, drag the [New] icon to add each new ICP.
Placing Existing ICPs
When there are multiple configurations, you can place existing ICPs in configurations other than
their original one.
Drag the ICP icon created in the Toolkit window to the Zone window.
The ICP will be placed in the Zone window. The ICP added in the Toolkit window will be displayed
with a muted color to indicate it has already been placed.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
242
Configuration Window
The Configuration window is used for arranging components on the sheet and making logical
connections. It is displayed when you double-click on a DME.
Title Bar
Displays “DME Name (Zone Name).” The configuration window for a DME64N placed in [Zone1]
will be “DME64N (Zone1).” The DME name is set in the properties for the DME placed in the Zone
window.
Objects
Objects such components, user modules, and shapes are arranged in the Configuration window.
When you double-click a component placed in the window, the component editor will open. If you
double-click a user module, the user module will open.
I/O Component
Depending on the settings for the DME placed in the Zone window, I/O components will be
automatically placed or added.
I/O components can be arranged in the DME24N configuration window.
When “Show Cascade Port” is ON in the DME64N “DME Device Properties” dialog, Cascade I/O
is added automatically.
When you set a slot in the properties for a DME placed in the Zone window, Slot I/O will be
automatically added.
You cannot apply edit operations like cut/copy/paste/duplicate to I/O components, Slot I/O, and
Cascade I/O.
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Tool Bar
Toolkit Window
Sheet
User Module
Component
Wire
I/O Component
Legend
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
243
Placing Components
You can place objects by dragging them from the Toolkit window. You can also place objects by
double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. The same objects are displayed in the [Component List]
submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that appears when you right-click on the sheet.
For information about the [Component List] in the Configuration window, see page 154.
Arranging a Number of Components of the Same Type
You can arrange a number of components of the same type. If there are two or more of the same
component, numbers will be attached to their names as follows: “Compressor (2),” “Compressor
(3)” and so on. Multiple components placed in the configuration are independent, and you can set
different parameters for each of them.
NOTE
If the [Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output] or the [Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output] components are placed in the DME64N
configuration window, you will not be able to use other components, even though the window does not reach 100 percent.
The [Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output] or [Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output] components cannot be used in the DME24N.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
244
Probe Monitor
Probe monitor is a function that lets you monitor output ports in your configuration with headphones.
You can turn it ON or OFF using [Probe Monitor] in the [Tools] menu or the [Probe Monitor] button on
the toolbar. The probe monitor can be set to ON or OFF for each DME.
The probe monitor can be used only when online with the DME and Configuration window or user
module active. When the probe monitor is ON, no editing is possible except in the Component Editor.
Probe Monitor Procedure
1 Turn the probe monitor ON.
Click [Probe Monitor] in the [Tools] menu or the [Probe Monitor] button on the toolbar.
The shape of the mouse pointer changes.
2 Click the output port you want to monitor.
The output port you clicked will be selected and monitoring will begin.
If you click another output port, the location being monitored will change.
Monitor object
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
245
L/R Selection
To monitor the left channel and right channel simultaneously, <Shift> + click on the left channel,
then do the some for the right channel.
Exiting the Probe Monitor
Click [Probe Monitor] in the [Tools] menu or the [Probe Monitor] button on the toolbar to turn OFF
the probe monitor. When probe monitor is turned off, the mouse pointer returns to its normal shape.
Monitoring the Second or Later Time
The software remembers the location being monitored even when probe monitoring is turned OFF.
The next time probe monitoring is turned ON, the location that was being monitored previously will
be selected.
NOTE
If the configuration is edited after turning monitoring OFF, the monitor location will not be selected.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
246
Show Signal Delay (Delay Display Value)
The signal delays according to the processing time in the audio processor. The [Show Signal Delay]
command from the [Tools] menu calculates a delay value and displays it for the component. Selecting
this command switches delay value display between ON and OFF. A checkmark appears when
display is turned ON.
When turned ON, the settings are compiled to obtain a delay value, which is displayed for
components and lines. The delay value obtained through compilation remains valid until the
configuration is edited. Sample units are used to display the delay value.
This corresponds to the [Show Signal Delay] button on the toolbar.
ON and OFF settings for [Show Signal Display] are saved for each configuration window. Switching
the setting between ON and OFF in another configuration window has no effect on the current window.
You can edit the configuration while [Show Signal Delay] is turned ON.
Delay values for components and I/O components are displayed at the lower center of the object.
Delay values for wires are displayed beside the input port of the connected object.
NOTE
Delay values for SPX components vary depending on the Bypass ON/OFF status, because SPX components add the effect
signal to the original signal. When [Show Signal Delay] is turned ON, the delay value for the Bypass ON status will be
displayed.
NOTE
Delay values for Wav File Player components are displayed for external inputs. Delay values for local Wave files cannot be
displayed.
When you turn ON [Show Signal Delay], the delay value appears
above the object.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
247
Monitoring Point List
When you click [Monitoring Point List] in the [Tools] menu, the “Monitoring Point List” dialog box is
displayed. Here you can register or edit points for monitoring with headphones.
[Cut] Button
Cuts the selected monitoring point information. When monitoring point information is cut,
information below that point moves up.
[Copy] Button
Copies the selected monitoring point information.
[Paste] Button
Pastes the copied monitoring point information at the selected line.
[Insert] Button
The copied monitoring point information is inserted at the selected point.
[Clear] Button
Deletes the selected monitoring point information.
NOTE
Monitoring points can be edited only by users for whom the [Edit] security checkbox has been turned ON.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
248
Monitoring Point List
Displays and allows editing of monitoring point information.
[No.]
Displays the numbers for monitor link points. Numbers are assigned in order from the top.
[Label]
Displays and allows editing of monitoring point names. Clicking here selects the text. You can then
enter a new name.
[Component L]
Sets the monitoring point L channel component. Clicking here displays a list of components
arranged in the active configuration window. You can then select components for monitoring.
[Port L]
Sets the monitoring point L channel port. Clicking here displays a list of ports for the component
selected in the [Component L] field. Click the port you want to monitor.
[Component R]
Sets the monitoring point R channel component. Clicking here displays a list of components
arranged in the active configuration window. You can then select components for monitoring.
[Port R]
Sets the monitoring point R channel port. Clicking here displays a list of ports for the component
selected in the [Component R] field. Click the port you want to monitor.
[OK] Button
Updates the settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
NOTE
Components arranged in user modules are also displayed in the list. However, components for user modules for which
security is set will not be displayed.
NOTE
If you click a port in the designer window while the “Monitoring Point List” dialog box is displayed, the port will be
registered to the monitoring point of current selected row. If you will register the monitoring points as stereo, click a port
while holding down the <Shift> key to register Component L and Port L, then click a port again while holding down the
<Shift> key to register Component R and Port R.
NOTE
Components arranged in user modules are also displayed in the list. However, components for user modules for which
security is set will not be displayed.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
249
Analyze (Configuration Analysis)
When you click the [Analyze] command on the [Tools] menu or the [Analyze] button on the toolbar, the
“Analyze” dialog box is displayed. The wire connections in the currently active configuration window
are analyzed, and the results are displayed in the “Analyze” dialog box.
Because this function allows you to make sure there are no problems with component arrangement
and wires without connecting to the DME unit, it is useful for eliminating complier errors before
executing Synchronization.
Message Box
Displays the progress of the analysis operation. When the analysis finishes, the results are
displayed.
If errors are detected during analysis, they will display as shown below.
[Close] Button
Closes the dialog box.
NOTE
The [Analyze] command on the [Tools] menu can be selected only when a configuration window is active.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
250
User Module
User Modules
A module treated as a single component that combines a number of other components is called a
user module.” A user module can be arranged in the Configuration window just like any other
component. User module editing consists of placing the component and making logical connections
with wires, the same as for configurations.
User modules are saved in the project file, but they can also be saved as files. User modules saved as
files can be displayed in the Toolkit window and used in other project files.
A “User Modules” folder will be created in the folder specified in [Contents Folder] in the “Preferences”
dialog box in the Main Panel window. User modules will be saved there. If you do not change the
setting in the “Preferences” dialog box, the location will be “C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME
Designer\User Modules.”
User Module Manager
When you click [User Module Manager] on the [Tools] menu, the “User Module Manager” dialog box is
displayed. You can change settings, rename or delete in the window that opens when you double-
click a user module.
User Modules
Lists user modules that are saved in the “User Modules” folder. Select the target user module by
clicking on it.
NOTE
The Main Panel Menu “Preferences” dialog box is displayed using [Preference] in the [File] menu.
NOTE
Only user modules saved can be displayed. User modules placed in the component editor are saved in project files, and
can be used without being saved as files. However, they will not be displayed in the “User Module Manager” dialog box
list.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
251
Double Click Action
Sets the action that occurs when you double-click on a user module placed in the Configuration
window.
[Open User Module Design Window]
Opens the User Module window.
[Open User Module Editor]
Opens the User Module editor. The user module editor is a window where controls for components
that are placed in a user module can be laid out and their parameters changed. For more
information about the user module editor, see “User Control/User Module Editor” on page 279.
Security Settings
Makes security settings for the user module selected on the list.
[Enable Security]
Enables user module security. If security is enabled, a password is requested when attempting to
open the User Module window. If the correct password is not entered, the window will stay closed.
When you place a checkmark here, the “Set Password” dialog box appears. Enter the same
password into the [Password] box and [Confirm Password] box, and click the [OK] button.
To disable user module security, turn OFF the checkbox. If you click the checkbox when it already
has a checkmark, the “Input Password” dialog box appears. Enter the password set for this user
module, and click the [OK] button. You can disable security in this way. If you do not enter the
correct password, you will not be able to disable security.
[Set Password] Button
Changes the password. Clicking here displays the “Input Password” dialog box. Enter the current
password and click the [OK] button. The “Set Password” dialog box will be displayed. Enter the
same password into the [Password] box and [Confirm Password] box, and click the [OK] button.
Default Library
Specifies the default library file for newly-created user modules.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
252
[Rename] Button
Changes the name of the user module selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Rename
User Module” dialog box. Enter a name into the user module name box, and click the [OK] button.
[Delete] Button
Deletes the user module selected on the list.
[Import] Button
Imports the user module settings and library from the user module export file.
[Export] Button
Saves the user module settings and library to the user module export file.
Click to display the Export dialog, All features of this dialog window are the same as the standard
Windows file save dialog, except for the [Export Library] option.
[Export Library] can be sued to select the library to be saved.
[Import Library] Button
Loads a file from the specified folder into the library.
NOTE
The user module name also becomes the file name. When naming a user module, do not use characters that cannot be
used for filenames.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
253
[Export Library] Button
Saves the library to a file.
Use [Export Library] to select the library to be saved.
[OK] Button
Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box.
[Cancel] Button
Closes the dialog box without changing the settings.
NOTE
Settings in the “User Module Manager” dialog box are changed when you click the [OK] button. If you mistakenly set
security, change the password, or delete a user module, you can click the [Cancel] button to close the dialog box and
return to the original unchanged settings.
Please note that [Import], [Export], [Import Library], and [Export Library] will be applied even if the [Cancel] button is
clicked.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
254
Creating User Modules
When you place a blank user module in the Configuration window, a new user module is created.
1 Make the Configuration window active.
2 Click the [+] next to [User Module] in the Toolkit window.
The items in the level below the [User Module] folder will be displayed.
3 Drag the [Blank User Module] to the Configuration window.
When you release the mouse button at the location where you will place the user module, the “User
Module Properties” dialog box is displayed.
4 Here you can set object properties.
[Inputs/Outputs Sets] is set to 1. Set the required number of ports.
5 Click the [OK] button.
A user module will be created, and placed in the Configuration window.
The user module properties can also be changed later. For information about the “User Module
Properties” dialog box, see “User Module” on page 181.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
255
Saving User Modules
When user modules are saved, they appear below [User Module] in the Toolkit window. They can be
used in other project files.
Save the User Module using the [Save User Module] command on the [Tools] menu. The [Save User
Module] command can be used only when a user module is selected in the Configuration window.
When you select the command, the “Save User Module” dialog box will be displayed. Enter a name for
the User Module, then click the [OK] button.
Set [Double Click Action] and [Security Settings] at the lower part of the “Save User Module” dialog
box.
They correspond to the same items in the “User Module Manager” dialog box. When saved with
different settings than the “User Module Manager” dialog box, the saved settings are immediately
applied.
Double Click Action
Sets the window that opens when you double-click on a user module placed in the component
editor.
[Open User Module Design Window]
Opens the User Module window.
[Open User Module Editor]
Opens the User Module editor.
NOTE
User modules placed in the component editor are saved in the project file. When you want to use a user module in another
project or in another configuration in the same project, save it using the “Save User Module” command.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
256
Security Settings
Sets user module security.
[Enable Security]
Enables user module security.
If you place a checkmark here, the “Set Password” dialog box appears. Enter the same password
into the [Password] box and [Confirm Password] box, and click the [OK] button.
[Set Password] Button
Changes the password. Clicking here displays the “Input Password” dialog box. Enter the current
password and click the [OK] button. The “Set Password” dialog box will be displayed. Enter the
same password into the [Password] box and [Confirm Password] box, and click the [OK] button.
If you try to save a user module with the same name as an already saved user module, a message
asking “This file already exists. Overwrite?” will be displayed. To overwrite, click the [Yes] button. To
change the name, click the [No] button, and change the file name in the “Save User Module”
dialog box.
NOTE
When the “Save User Module” dialog box is displayed, the name set in the user module’s “User Module Properties”
dialog box will be entered into the [File name] box. If you change the name of a user module and save it using the “Save
User Module” dialog box, the filename in the user module and the user module name displayed in the Toolkit window will
also change.
The [Label] box displayed in the “User Module Properties” dialog box will not change.
NOTE
If characters not usable in file names are used in the file name set in the “User Module Properties” dialog box, an error
message will be displayed at the same time as the “Save User Module” dialog box. Delete the unusable characters
before saving.
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
257
User Module Window
User modules are edited in the User Module window. The User Module window is used for arranging
components on the sheet and making logical connections. It is displayed when you double-click on an
object arranged in the Configuration window.
Title Bar
The user module names are displayed on the title bar. User module names are set in the “User
Module Properties” dialog box.
Objects
You can place, cut, copy, paste, delete, and move component and shape objects. When you
double-click an object placed in the window, the component editor will open.
Placing Components
Components are placed the same as in the Configuration window.
You can place objects by dragging them from the Toolkit window to the User Module window. You
can also place objects by double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. The same objects are
displayed in the [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that
appears when you right-click on the sheet.
For information about the User Module window [Component List], see page 155.
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Tool Bar
Component
Wire
Chapter 4 Designer
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
258
Placing a Number of Components of the Same Type
You can arrange a number of components of the same type. If there are two or more of the same
component, numbers will be attached to their names as follows: “Compressor (2),” “Compressor
(3)” and so on. Multiple components placed in the configuration are independent, and you can set
different parameters for each of them.
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
259
Chapter 5 Components
Types of Components
Component Groups
When the Configuration window and User Module window are made active, a component list is
displayed in the Toolkit window, and you can use the [Component List] on the [Tools] menu.
Components can be separated into groups based on types. In the Toolkit window, component groups
are displayed as folders. Some of the groups in the Toolkit window are further divided into subgroups.
Click the [+]/[-] buttons to the left of the folders to display the components.
NOTE
When the User Module window is active, [User Module] is not present on the menu.
Group
Component
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
260
In the Designer window [Tools] menu [Component List] menu, component groups are displayed as
submenu items.
The items with small rightward-facing triangles are groups. Those without triangles are components.
Component List
NOTE
When the User Module window is active, [User Module] is not present in the menu.
Group Component Variations
Crossover
2 Way
3 Way
4 Way
5 Way
6 Way
Crossover Processor
2 Way
3 Way
4 Way
5 Way
6 Way
Crossover Processor II
2 Way
3 Way
4 Way
5 Way
6 Way
Delay Long
1 Output
2 Output
3 Output
4 Output
5 Output
6 Output
7 Output
8 Output
Short
1 Output
2 Output
3 Output
4 Output
5 Output
6 Output
7 Output
8 Output
Group
Component
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
261
Dynamics Compander CompanderH
Mono
Stereo
CompanderS
Mono
Stereo
Compressor
Mono
Stereo
De-Esser
Mono
Stereo
Ducking
Mono
Stereo
Expander
Mono
Stereo
Gate
Mono
Stereo
Limiter
Mono
Stereo
EQ GEQ Mono
7 Band
15 Band
31 Band
Stereo
7 Band
15 Band
31 Band
PEQ Mono
2 Band
3 Band
4 Band
6 Band
8 Band
Stereo
2 Band
3 Band
4 Band
6 Band
8 Band
Fader
1 Channel
2 Channel
4 Channel
8 Channel
12 Channel
16 Channel
Filter BPF
Mono
Stereo
HPF
Mono
Stereo
LPF
Mono
Stereo
Notch
Mono
Stereo
Programmable BPF
Mono
Stereo
Programmable HPF
Mono
Stereo
Programmable LPF
Mono
Stereo
Meter
1 Channel
2 Channel
4 Channel
8 Channel
12 Channel
16 Channel
Miscellaneous Oscillator Mono
Wav File Player
Group Component Variations
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
262
Mixer Auto Mixer
2 Channel
4 Channel
8 Channel
12 Channel
16 Channel
Delay Matrix
2 Input 2 Output
4 Output
8 Output
12 Output
16 Output
4 Input 2 Output
4 Output
8 Output
12 Output
16 Output
8 Input
2 Output
4 Output
8 Output
12 Output
16 Output
Matrix Mixer 2 Input
1 Output
2 Output
4 Input
1 Output
2 Output
4 Output
8 Input 1 Output
2 Output
4 Output
8 Output
12 Input 1 Output
2 Output
4 Output
8 Output
12 Output
16 Input 1 Output
2 Output
4 Output
8 Output
12 Output
16 Output
32 Input 16 Output
32 Output
64 Input 32 Output
64 Output
Pan LCR 1 Channel
2 Channel
4 Channel
8 Channel
12 Channel
16 Channel
LR 1 Channel
2 Channel
4 Channel
8 Channel
12 Channel
16 Channel
Surround 3-1
5.1
6.1
Group Component Variations
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
263
Router 1 Input 2 Output
4 Output
8 Output
12 Output
16 Output
2 Input 2 Output
4 Output
8 Output
12 Output
16 Output
4 Input 2 Output
4 Output
8 Output
12 Output
16 Output
8 Input 2 Output
4 Output
8 Output
12 Output
16 Output
12 Input 2 Output
4 Output
8 Output
12 Output
16 Output
16 Input 2 Output
4 Output
8 Output
12 Output
16 Output
Source Selector 3 Position 1 Channel
4 Position 1 Channel
2 Channel
6 Channel
8 Position 1 Channel
2 Channel
6 Channel
16 Position 1 Channel
Speaker Processor 1 Way
2 Way
3 Way
4 Way
5 Way
6 Way
SPX
Slot Slot In Component Editor
Slot Out Component Editor
Cascade Cascade In Component
Editor
Cascade Out Component
Editor
Group Component Variations
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
264
Component Editor Window
Component Editor
Component parameters are edited in the component editor. The same component can be placed
multiple times on the same sheet in a Configuration or User Module window. If there are multiple
examples of the same component in a configuration window or user module window, each component
is independent and its parameters are set individually in a separate Component Editor window.
Opening the Component Editor
When you double-click on a component located in a Configuration window, the Component Editor
window will open. There is not just one window that is called the component editor. The contents of the
editor and the name on the title bar will differ according to type of component for which the window
was opened.
Component Editor Window Structure
The contents of the Component Editor window vary according to the component.
Title Bar
Displays the label. Label settings are made in the “Component Properties” dialog box. For
information about component labels see “Component” (page 174) in “Objects.”.
Title Bar
Library
[ON] Button
Graph
Knob
Meter
Slider
Edit Box
Snap
Back Button
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
265
Back Button
This button appears in the child window of windows that have a parent-child relationship, and can
be clicked to return the parent window.
Status Bar
Component Name
Displays the component name.
Component ID
Displays the component ID.
Parameter ID
Displays the parameter ID for controls that are being operated.
Snap
Up to four component editor parameter sets can be recorded temporarily. You can switch between
parameter sets using buttons.
Parameter sets can be copied by dragging and dropping a button onto any other button. Copy can
also be carried out from the contextual menu that appears when a button is right-clicked.
Library
Saves and recalls component editor parameter sets as files.
See “Library” on page 275.
Graph
Displays the effects of the component in a graphical format. When parameters are changed, the
graph changes too. In graphs that have control points, adjust parameters by dragging the points.
As you drag the points, the corresponding parameters reflect the changes you make.
Meter
Displays the signal level.
Slider/Knob
You can change parameters by dragging the corresponding sliders or knobs.
NOTE
When controlling the DME64N/24N by connecting an RS-232C compatible controller to the [REMOTE] terminal, a
component ID is required for distinguishing the same components in the DME64N/24N. The component ID is included in
the signal that controls the component parameters. For details about control methods, contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor at the end of the DME64N/24N Owner’s Manual.
Component Name
Component ID
Parameter ID
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
266
Changing Parameters
In the Component Editor window, parameter settings can be made by dragging buttons and sliders,
not only by directly entering numbers. In locations where multiple controls, like edit boxes and knobs,
are combined, you can change the values either way.
Preference
When you click the [Preference] command on the [File] menu in the Main Panel window, the
“Preferences” dialog box is displayed. You can set the action of the knobs and sliders on the
[Component Editor] tab of the “Preferences” dialog box.
When you close the dialog box after changing settings, those changes are immediately reflected in
the component.
Knob Mode
Sets how the knobs operate.
Slider Mode
Sets the action that occurs when you click on the scale located under the sliders.
Edit Box Zoom
Specifies whether the edit box will be enlarged or not on mouse-over.
Edit Box Font
Specifies the edit box font.
NOTE
This is the font when the box is enlarged, not the font that is used when the box is at it's smallest size. The text may bleed
beyond the box with some fonts.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
267
Knob
You can change the way knobs operate, using the [Component Editor] tab [Knob Mode] setting
in the “Preferences” dialog box.
Circular
The knob is dragged following its shape, as though you were drawing a circle.
Linear
As you drag the knob to the upper, the value increases. Dragging it down decreases the value.
NOTE
To make a finer setting, press the <Shift> key while dragging the knob.
If you click a knob while pressing the <Ctrl> key, the setting will return to its default value.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
268
Slider
You can change the parameter by dragging the slider.
You can set the action that results from using the mouse on the scale area with [Component Editor]
tab [Slider Mode] in the “Preferences” dialog box.
Ramp
When the fader bar is clicked the knob will move a preset amount in the corresponding direction.
Touch
The slider does not move without directly touching it, even if you click the mouse button.
Jump
The slider jumps to the location where you click.
NOTE
To make a finer setting, press the <Shift> key while dragging the slider.
If you click a slider while pressing the <Ctrl> key, the setting will return to its default value.
Scale
Slider
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
269
Buttons
There are several types of buttons.
Switches between ON/OFF. When turned on, the button lights up. The color depends on the
button’s function.
In button sets of this type, you can select one of several buttons. When you do all other buttons in
the set turn off.
Click here to execute a command.
Displays a menu.
When turned ON When turned OFF
Click this button
to switch all channels
in the block.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
270
Displays another window.
Edit Box
Displays current values for settings. You can modify values by typing from the keyboard or using
the mouse. When a value is changed, the knob or slider moves.
Mouse-over
When [Edit Box Zoom] in the [Component Editor] tab of the Preferences dialog box is checked, the
edit box will zoom when the mouse is positioned over it (mouse-over).
Click
Text in the selected edit box will turn red. Values can be entered and edited via the keyboard. It is
not necessary to enter the unit. Press the <ENTER> key to confirm the entry and display the unit.
Changing Values Using Spin Boxes
When the mouse pointer is placed over an edit box, a spin box appears. Clicking the up arrow
button [] increases the value, while clicking the down arrow [] decreases it.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
271
Double-click
Selects a number. You can change the selected number using the keyboard. There is no need to
enter units. When you press the <Enter> key, the numbers you entered will be set and the units
displayed.
Moving with the <Tab> Key
If you press <Tab> key while an edit box is selected, the selection will move to the next edit box.
If you press <Shift> + <Tab>, the selection moves to the previous edit box.
Changing Selections with the Key/Mouse Wheel
You can modify values in selected edit boxes using the direction keys or the mouse wheel.
Up and Down Arrow Keys
Increases or decreases number settings.
•<PageUp> Key/<PageDown> Key
Increases or decreases number settings in large increments. The <PageUp> key increases
and the <PageDown> key decreases the setting.
<Enter> Key
When you press the <Enter> key, the numbers you entered will be confirmed.
<Ctrl> Key + <Enter> Key
When you press the <Ctrl> + <Enter> key, the setting will return to its default value.
Mouse Wheel
Rolling the mouse wheel upward (away from you) increases the value. Rolling it down
(towards you) decreases the value.
•Dragging
Dragging upward increases the value, while dragging downward decreases it.
<ESC> Key
The <ESC> key can be used to cancel a value being entered.
Enter a number from
the keyboard.
Set the value with
the <Enter> key.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
272
Graph
Displays parameters graphically. When parameters are changed, the graph also changes.
In graphs that have control points, you can adjust parameters by dragging the points. On graphs
with control points that are limited to movement in one direction only, aligning the mouse pointer
with the control point and pressing the mouse button causes the mouse pointer to change to a
double-headed arrow pointing in both directions of movement. Change the parameter by dragging
in the directions of the arrow.
Control points that can be dragged in any direction usually have their position determined by
multiple parameters in the component editor. These multiple parameters can be adjusted by
dragging the point.
When there are multiple control points in the graph, they are identified by their colors. A bar with the
same color as each control point can be found below the corresponding knob or edit box.
NOTE
When a graph that has control points is copied to the User Control Editor or User Module Editor, the controls points will
not be displayed. The controllers assigned to the corresponding parameters must also be copied to display the control
points.
Control Point
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
273
Snap
About Snap
The Snap function records parameters for the component editor, user control editor, and user module
editor temporarily. Clicking a button switches the parameter set, setting all parameters in the editor to
the status that existed when the parameters were recorded in the memory. You can record the current
values for parameters. Furthermore, when you recall a library, it is recorded to the Snap button that is
on at that time. For more information about libraries, see “Library” (page 275).
Snap Buttons ([A] through [D])
The Snap buttons allow you to switch between parameter sets. The buttons change in appearance
according to their ON/OFF status and to whether or not there were changes to the parameter set
from when the editor was started.
When there has been no change to the parameter set since the editor was started
When a button is selected it lights up.
When a parameter set that is different than when the editor was started has been recorded
to a button
The color of the button name changes on buttons for which the parameter set has changed. When
a button is selected it lights up.
Snap Buttons
ON OFF
ON OFF
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
274
Recording Parameter Sets
Recording parameters from the current window
The parameters present when the snap button is switched are recorded to the snap button before
the switch.
1 Click the snap button ([A] through [D]) that will record the parameter set. This turns it
ON.
2 Set the parameters in the editor to the settings you want to record.
3 Click another snap button.
Recalling a Library
1 Click the snap button that has recorded the parameter set. This turns it ON.
2 The library is recalled.
Switching Parameter Set
If you click a snap button that has a parameter set recorded, the system switches to the parameter
set recorded there.
Copying Parameter Sets
Parameter sets can be copied between snap buttons [A]~[D].
Select from the contextual menu.
Drag and drop.
Drag-and-drop copy will also work between components of the same type.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
275
Library
The Library
Component editor, user control editor, and user module editor parameters can be saved as library
files. By reading back a saved library file, you can reset all the editor parameters to the status they had
when the file was saved. Saving in a library file is called “storing,” while bringing back the settings is
called “recalling” them.
Library files have the following file name extensions: “.cel” for component editors, “.ucl” for user
control editors, and “.uml” for user module editors.
If you store library files in folders that conform to the following path, they will be automatically
displayed in the component editor [Recall Library] menu: “C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME
Designer\Editor\Library\Component Group Name\Component Name.”
The dialog box used for storing items in the library opens with the library folder displayed.
[Store Library] Button
[Recall Library] Button
[Recall Library]
Menu
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
276
If you save like this without changing the folder, the item you saved will be displayed on the [Recall
Library] menu. When a library is saved, it can be displayed in the component editor for other project
files besides the currently open one, and also in new project files.
Library Filenames
Because the library filenames are displayed in the [Recall Library] menu, use a filename that helps
you understand the contents of the parameter set in the file. When saving in the default folder, there
is no need to include the component name in the filename.
For example, when you are storing a parameter set in the stereo compressor library, the “Save
Library File” dialog will be displayed with the “C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME
Designer\Editor\Library\Compressor\Compressor Stereo” folder selected. If you save in that folder,
the file you save will be displayed only in the [Recall Library” menu for stereo compressor
components only. It will not be displayed in any other library.
If you use a filename that makes it easy to understand the parameter contents or the conditions
under which they are used, you can select them without confusion when recalling.
Storing in the Library
The library is the place to store component editor parameters.
Editor Window
1 Set the parameters to be stored in the library.
2 Click the [Store Library] button in the component editor.
The “Save Library File” dialog box will be displayed.
3 Enter the filename.
Select a filename that makes it easy to understand the contents of the parameter set.
4 Specify the folder for saving the file.
If you want the saved file displayed on the [Recall Library] menu, do not change the folder for
saving.
5 Click the [Save] button.
Designer Window
Right-click a component or user module in the Designer window to show the contextual menu. Use
the [Store Component Library] command to store the library.
The menu that appears when the contextual menu [Store Component Library] command is clicked
is the same as the menu that appears when the Edit window [Store Library] button is clicked.
Specify a file name and save the file.
NOTE
If you change the [Contents Folder] in the “Preferences” dialog box in the Main Panel window, a “Library” folder will be
created in the specified folder, and a folder for each component will be created there.
NOTE
In the “Save Library File” dialog box, you can specify another folder for saving library files, and save them there. Library files
that are saved in another folder also can be recalled by specifying the folder.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
277
Recalling a Library
The recall function reads stored parameters into the component editor.
Editor Windows
You can recall libraries in the component editor, user control editor, and user module editor
windows by clicking the [Recall Library] button. When a library is recalled in an editor window, the
parameter set is recorded to the selected snap button.
1 Click the snap button ([A] through [D]) that will record the parameter set.
2 Click the [Recall Library] button in the component editor.
The [Recall Library] menu will be displayed.
3 Click the library name (filename) in the [Recall Library] menu.
The parameters in the library will be recalled.
Designer Window
If you right-click on a component or user module in the design window, a context menu will be
displayed. You can recall a library using the [Recall Component Library] command.
If you click [Recall Component Library] in the context menu, the same menu is displayed as when
you click the [Recall Library] button in the editor window. If you select a library that is displayed in
the submenu, that library is recalled.
Not only the library name, but also the effect type is displayed in the submenu that appears when
you right-click on an SPX component.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
278
Recalling a Library Stored in a Folder Other Than the Default
Libraries not stored in the default folder do not appear on the [Recall Library] menu. You must
specify the file you want in order to recall it.
1 Click the [Recall Library] button in the component editor.
The [Recall Library] menu will be displayed.
2 Click the [Recall Library] menu [Open File Dialog].
The “Open” dialog box will be displayed.
3 Move to the correct folder and select a library file.
4 Click the [Open] button.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
279
User Control/User Module Editor
User Control
The user control function lets you lay out a set of component controls in the Configuration window or
User Module window, and create a control window with them. The controls in the user control editor
are linked to the controls for the original component. If the parameters are changed in the user control
editor, the parameters will change in the same way in the component editor. If parameters are
changed in the component editor, the controls in the user control window will also change in the same
way.
You can create a compact control window by only including controls for parameters that are used
frequently.
You can also lay out controls for multiple components, so that you can adjust parameters for them from
a single window.
There is also a [Library] button in the user control editor, which you can use to save parameters to the
library.
User controls are created by selecting [View] menu [User Control] [New User Control] in the
Main Panel window. Created user controls are displayed in the [View] menu [User Control]
submenu. If you select one, a window will open for it. The controls which can be opened by the user
control editor are automatically set according to the user security settings of the currently logged in
user.
User Control Editor
Laid Out Controls
Edit Palette
Component Editor
Controls Laid Out
in the User Control
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
280
[User Control] Menu
User controls are displayed in the [View] [User Control] submenu of the Main Panel window. If you
click the [User Control] button in the Main Panel window, you will display the same menu as the [View]
menu [User Control] submenu.
User Control Name
Displays a menu of user controls included in the current configuration of the current zone. Clicking
one of the user controls opens the user control editor. A checkmark appears next to already open
windows.
New User Control
When you select the “New User Control” command, the “User Control Manager” dialog box will be
displayed. Here you can create, delete, rename, and otherwise manage user controls. For
information about the “User Control Manager” dialog box, see page 70.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
281
Creating New User Controls
New user controls are added in the “User Control Manager” dialog box.
1 Click [User Control Manager] on the Main Panel window [Tools] menu.
The “User Control Manager” dialog box will be displayed.
2 Click the [New] button.
The “New User Control” dialog box will be displayed.
3 Enter the name for the new user control into the [Name] box.
4 Sets security for User Control.
Different settings are provided for individual security levels and users.
Security cannot be set higher than the user security level.
Click the [User Level] [] button to select a security level.
NOTE
You can also display the “User Control Manager” dialog box by clicking the [View] menu [User Control] [New User
Control] command.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
282
Use [User Name] to select a user.
5 Click the [OK] button.
The user control will be created and displayed on the list in the “User Control Manager” dialog box.
6 Click the [OK] button in the “User Control Manager” dialog box.
When a new user control is created, it will be displayed in the [View] menu [User Control]
submenu in the Main Panel window. If you click the control, it will be displayed in a user control
editor window.
[Snap] and [Library] appear appears in a new user control.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
283
User Control Security
Security can be set independently for each User Control. User Control levels higher than the user
security level will not be displayed in the menu or the User Control Manager dialog box.
The security level settings for both the user control and the user affect editing and display of user
controls.
User Control Security Level
Security 1 ~ 10 can be set for each level or user. Level 1 is the highest level and 10 is the lowest.
If the security level for a user control is set to 2, only users at level 1 or level 2 can display or edit it
Security levels for user controls can be changed in the “User Control Manager” dialog box by a
user who has logged on at a security level equal to or higher than the user control.
1 Click [User Control Manager] on the Main Panel window [Tools] menu.
The “User Control Manager” dialog box will be displayed.
2 Changing User Control Security
•To Change the Security level
Click the [Security Level] box of the User Control to be changed.
The security level list will appear.
Click the level to be set for the User Control.
The selected level will be displayed in the [Security Level] box.
NOTE
The levels displayed on the list will differ according to the security level of the user.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
284
Setting Security for Individual Users
Click the [User] box of the User Control to be changed.
The user list will appear.
Click the user to be set for the User Control.
The selected user name will be displayed in the [User] box.
3 Click the [OK] button.
User Security Settings
In the “Security” dialog box in the Main Panel window, you can set the user control levels at which
to allow or disallow editing and display.
A user can edit user controls if a check has been placed for that user in the [Operation Security]
[Edit] checkbox. User controls at a level equal to or lower than the level set in [Operation Security]
[User Control Level] will be displayed in the menu.
Using user security, you can set whether user controls will open at logon or when a file is opened.
If [Startup User Control] is turned ON, the user control editor will be automatically displayed when
files that include user controls are opened.
For information about the “Security” dialog box, see “Security (Creating Users and Making User
Settings)” on page 55.
NOTE
The users that can be selected will depend on the user security level.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
285
User Module Editor
The user module editor lets you make a layout of controls for components arranged in the user module
window. For each user module there is one user module editor. The name of the user module is
displayed in the title bar. Only components that are arranged in a particular user module can be laid
out in the specific control window that is associated with that user module. Both the user module and
the control window will have the same name.
Opening a User Module Editor Window
Use [Double Click Action] in the “User Module Manager” dialog box or “User Module Properties”
dialog box to set the window that will open when you double-click in the Configuration window. If
the [Open User Module Editor] checkbox has been turned ON for a user module, a user module
editor can be opened for it. For information about the “User Module Manager” dialog box, see
page 250. For information about the “User Module Properties” dialog box, see page 181.
A User Module can also be opened via the User Module contextual menu in the Designer window.
NOTE
You can copy controls from a user module to the user control editor.
User Module Editor
Laid Out Controls
Edit Palette
Component Editor
Controls Laid Out
in the User Control
Status Bar
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
286
Operation Mode and Design Mode
There are two modes for the user control editor/user module editor and the component editor:
operation mode” and “design mode.” In operation mode you adjust parameters, while in design
mode you lay out controls.
You can switch between operation mode and design mode using the context menu that is displayed
when you right-click in the user control editor/user module editor or component editor.
The [Design Mode] command switches the design mode between ON and OFF. A checkmark
appears when the design mode is turned ON. If you click in the context menu when the checkmark is
present, design mode will turn OFF, and the edit window will return to operation mode.
NOTE
Only users for whom the [Operation Security] [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can turn the
design mode ON.
NOTE
You can select controls in the component editor so that you can copy them into the user control editor/user module editor.
When you want to select multiple objects, hold down the <Ctrl> key as you click each new object you want to select.
Switches
between
operation mode
and design
mode
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
287
Status Bar
The lock icon will appear in the User Module when security is active.
User Module properties (page 181).
User Module (page 250).
The lock icon will appear locked when the password has not been entered, and layouts edited in the
Design Mode cannot be saved.
When the password is entered it becomes temporarily possible to save the layout.
The lock icon will not appear if the [Enable Security] checkbox in the “Properties” dialog box is not
checked.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
288
Edit Palette
The edit palette is automatically displayed whenever the user control editor/user module editor is
active in design mode. Whenever you move the user control editor/user module editor, the edit palette
moves together with it. When you turn OFF design mode, the palette disappears.
Commands for editing in the user control editor/user module editor are provided on the edit palette.
[Design Mode Off] Button
Tur ns OFF the design mode.
[Undo] Button/[Redo] Button
Used to undo/redo operations.
[Cut] Button/[Copy] Button
Cuts or copies the selected controls.
See “Cut/Copy/Paste Controls” on page 303.
[Paste] Button
Pastes cut or copied controls.
See “Cut/Copy/Paste Controls” on page 303.
[Design Mode Off] Button
[Undo] Button
[Redo] Button
[Cut] Button
[Copy] Button
[Paste] Button
Control Alignment
Grid Setting
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
289
Alignment of Controls
Aligns the positions of multiple controls.
[Align Left] Button
Aligns all selected controls with the left edge of the leftmost selected control.
[Align Right] Button
Aligns all selected controls with the right edge of the rightmost selected control.
[Align To Top] Button
Aligns all selected controls with the top edge of the uppermost selected control.
[Align To Bottom] Button
Aligns all selected controls with the bottom edge of the lowermost selected control.
[Align Horizontally] Button
This button can be used only when three or more controls are selected.
It arranges the controls in a uniform horizontal line. Without changing the position of the leftmost
and rightmost control, this button arranges the controls between them at uniform intervals. It puts
the same amount of space between each control and its neighbor.
[Align Vertically] Button
This button can be used only when three or more controls are selected.
It arranges the controls in a uniform vertical line. Without changing the position of the uppermost
and lowermost control, this button arranges the controls between them at uniform intervals. It puts
the same amount of space between each control and its neighbor.
[Horizontal/Center Align] Button
Aligns the selected controls horizontally with the center position.
[Vertical/Center Align] Button
Aligns the selected controls vertically with the center position.
[Align Left] Button
[Align Right] Button
[Align To Top] Button
[Align To Bottom] Button
[Align Horizontally] Button
[Align Vertically] Button
[Horizontal/Center Align] Button
[Vertical/Center Align] Button
[Picture] Button
[TEXT] Button
[Box] Button
[Ellipse] Button
[Frame] Button
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
290
[Picture] Button
Places a graphic file.
[TEXT] Button
Places a text box.
[Box] Button
Places a square.
[Ellipse] Button
Places an ellipse.
[Frame] Button
Places a frame.
Grid Setting
When arranging controls, you can align them along the grid. This menu sets the spacing of the
grid.
Clicking the [] button displays a menu. Click the menu to set the grid spacing. Select [OFF] to
turn OFF the grid.
NOTE
When the grid is turned ON (when any grid item besides OFF is selected), clicking any control that is not aligned with the
grid position, will cause it to align with the nearest grid.
Please note that after copying multiple controls in one operation from the component editor and adjusting their positions
manually, their positions could become disarranged when you select them by clicking on them, if they do not already
align with the grid interval.
Furthermore, if you change the grid spacing after aligning the positions of controls in the user control editor/user module
editor, the controls will be placed into positions that do not align with the grid even if they are arranged using the align
buttons. When there are controls that do not align with the grid, turn the grid OFF.
Grid=10
Grid=20
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
291
User Control Editor/User Module Editor Context Menu
The context menus that appear when you right-click in a window will differ in operation mode and in
design mode. In design mode, other commands will be added, depending on where you click.
The context menu for the user module editor contains the [Set User Module As Master Layout]
command.
Operation Mode
Commands that are displayed in the context menus for operation mode will also be displayed in
design mode.
[Design Mode]
Switches between design mode and operation mode. When you are in design mode, a checkmark
will appear to the left of the command name.
[Peak Hold]
Tur ns the peak hold meter ON or OFF and performs a reset. The ON or OFF setting for peak hold
applies to the whole zone.
[On]
When you select this, peak hold is turned ON, and a checkmark appears next to it. If you
select this item while it is checked, peak hold is turned OFF.
[Reset]
Resets peak hold.
[Close All Editor Windows]
Closes all component editor windows.
[Open Parameter Link]
Opens the “Parameter Link” window. For information about the Parameter Link window, see
“Parameter Link” (page 73).
NOTE
Peak hold is a function that makes it easy to see the maximum signal value by lighting up at the level of the
maximum value as the signal peak comes in.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
292
[Parameter Link Mode]
A checkmark appears when this is turned ON.
Tur ning this ON changes to parameter link mode, where group parameters can be linked.
When this is turned OFF, group parameters will not be linked, and they can be changed
individually. Turn this OFF when editing the offset for each parameter.
Parameter link mode is linked to the [Parameter Link] check box in the Parameter Link window.
[Set User Module As Master Layout] (User Module Editor Only)
Sets the layout of active user module editor as the master layout. The window size and the
background will be applied to user module editors created in the future.
The Context Menu Displayed in Design Mode When You Right-Click an Empty
Location
[Tab Order]
When using user control editors or user module editors, this function displays the order in which
you move through them by pressing the <Tab> key. When you select this command, numbers are
displayed next to the edit boxes. A checkmark appears next to [Tab Order] in the context menu. To
exit tab order settings, click [Tab Order] the context menu or click anywhere besides a tab order
number in the user control editor.
Clicking the displayed numbers changes the order. The numbers are changed in the order that
they are clicked. To exit tab order settings, click [Tab Order] the context menu or click anywhere
besides a tab order number in the user control editor.
See “Changing the Tab Order” on page 313.
[Set Background Image]
Sets a background image for a window. Clicking here displays the “Background Image” dialog
box.
See “Setting Background Images for Windows” on page 295.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
293
The Context Menu Displayed in Design Mode When You Right-Click a Control
[Open Original Component Editor]
This menu is displayed when you right-click a control in design mode. It opens the component
editor for the control you clicked.
[Add Parameter to Parameter Link]
Adds a control to the parameter link group. Click the group name displayed in the submenu. See
“Creating Parameter Links” (page 314).
If you click a parameter link group name, a control is added to that group.
[Property]
Opens the properties dialog box for the control.
See “Control Properties” on page 303.
NOTE
There some controls, such as edit boxes and sliders, that do not display the [Property] command.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
294
Changing the Window Size
In design mode, you can change the window size of the user control editor. If you align the mouse
pointer with a side or corner of the window, its shape will change into a double-headed arrow. When
the arrow is shaped like this, dragging it will change the size of the window.
Even if you change the width of the window, the library button will remain where it is, in the upper right
corner.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
295
Setting Background Images for Windows
The default color for the user control editor/user module editor window background is black, the same
as for the component editor window. However, you can change the color or display an image in the
background. These settings are made in the “Background Image” dialog box. To display this dialog
box, right-click in the user control editor window while in design mode, then click [Set Background
Image] on the displayed context menu.
[Default]
Sets the background color to black, the same as the component editor. Select this if you have set
the background with [Color] or [Image], and you want to return to the original background.
[Color]
Sets the color of the background. Use the [Select Color] button to select a color.
[Select Color] Button
Clicking here displays the “Select color” dialog box. This sets the color of the background. For
information about the “Select color” dialog box, see page 203.
NOTE
If you select a light color, it may be difficult to see the grid.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
296
[Image]
Displays an image for the background. You can use image files in the following formats: BMP
(.bmp), PNG (.png), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg). Use the [Select Image] button to select an
image file.
[Select Image] Button
Clicking here displays the “Select Image” dialog box. Here you can select an image file to be
displayed as the window background.
[Layout] Box
This box displays a list where you can select how the image file will be displayed.
[Center]
Centers the image in the window.
[Tile]
Displays multiple copies of the image side-by-side until the available space is filled. If the
image file is smaller than the window, it will be displayed repeatedly like tiles on a wall.
[Fit]
Expands or reduces the size of the image to match the size of the window where it will be
displayed.
[File] Box
Specifies a path for the image file.
Click the [Select Image] button and select an image file. The path will be automatically entered.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
297
Placing Controls
Controls can be placed when you are in the design mode. You can turn the design mode ON and OFF
by right-clicking in the user control editor/user module editor, or component editor, then clicking the
[Design Mode] command in the context menu that is displayed.
You can place controls by dragging them from the component editor or by using the copy and paste
commands.
Selecting Controls
If you click a control in the component editor while in design mode, the control will be selected and
a red frame will be displayed around it. Controls like knobs, sliders, edit boxes, and labels are all
separate objects. Only the item clicked will be selected.
If you hold down the <Ctrl> key while clicking, you can select multiple controls and labels. If you
use <Ctrl> + click on a selected control, it will cancel that control’s selection.
If you position the mouse in an empty location on the sheet and start dragging from there, a frame
will be displayed as the pointer moves. All controls enclosed by that frame will be selected.
[Library]
Edit Palette
Knob
Slider
Edit Box
Buttons
Text
Graph
Solid Frame
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
298
Placing Controls by Dragging Them (User Control Editor)
You can drag the controls you want to copy from the component editor to the user control editor.
1 Open the component edit window that has the controls you will be placing in the user
control box.
2 Open the user control editor.
User control names are displayed in the [View] [User Control] submenu in the Main Panel
window Click a user control name to open its window.
3 Right-click in the component editor or the user control editor.
The context menu will be displayed.
4 Click [Design Mode] on the menu.
Design mode will be turned ON.
5 Drag the controls from the component editor to the user control editor.
NOTE
If you drag controls like knobs and sliders, edit boxes and labels that show parameter types, and place them one-by-one
in the user control editor, they must be arranged in the user control editor. If you select multiple items and drag them, you
can copy them as a group into the user control editor, keeping their original arrangement.
When copying multiple controls from a single component editor, if you select all the controls you want copy and drag
them together as a unit, their original positional relationship and tab order will be maintained.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
299
Arrange the controls in the user control editor.
Placing Controls by Dragging Them (User Module Editor)
You can drag the controls you want to copy from the component editor window in the user module
to the user module editor.
1 Create a user module, then arrange and connect the components for it.
2 Store the user module by checking [Double Click Action] [Open User Module Editor]
in the Store dialog box (see “Saving User Modules” on page 255 for details about
storing user modules).
3 Double-click a user module in the Configuration window.
The user module editor and edit windows for the components arranged in the user module will
be displayed.
4 Right-click in the component editor or user module editor, then click the [Design Mode]
command in the context menu.
Design mode will be turned ON.
5 Drag the controls from the component editor to the user module editor.
Arrange the controls in the user control editor.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
300
Placing Controls Using Copy and Paste
Copy the controls in the component editor and paste in the user control editor or user module
editor.
To copy controls in the component editor, press the [Copy] command shortcut keys, <Ctrl> + <C>.
To paste in the user control editor or user module editor, press the [Paste] command shortcut key,
<Ctrl> + <V>, or the [Paste] button on the edit palette.
1 Click on the source component editor window to make it active, then select the control
or controls you want to copy.
2 Press the <C> key while holding down the <Ctrl> key.
The selected controls will be copied to the clipboard.
3 With the target user control editor or user module editor active, press the <V> key while
holding down the <Ctrl> key.
You can also paste by clicking the [Paste] button on the edit palette.
The controls will be copied.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
301
When You Cannot Copy
Regardless of whether you drag or use copy and paste, you cannot create multiple copies from the
same single component. If you drag controls that are already copied into the user control editor or
user module editor, the mouse pointer will change into the “unavailable” mark (a circle with a
diagonal slash), indicating that you cannot copy.
You can copy more than one component of the same type into the user control editor, as long as
they come from different components located in the configuration or user module.
Controls for components arranged in the configuration can be copied only to the user control
editor.
Controls for components arranged in a user module can be copied to both the user control editor
and the user module.
Order of Controls
Controls newly pasted in the user control editor will be displayed above any previously pasted
controls they overlap. The tab order for edit boxes will be the order in which they were pasted.
Because the order cannot be changed, paste solid frames with parameter groups arranged on
them before copying controls.
NOTE
In the component editor, you can select multiple controls using <Ctrl> + click or by dragging. Once controls are copied,
they will be pasted in the order in which they were copied.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
302
Moving and Aligning Controls
In the user control editor or user module editor, you can move or align copied controls.
Selecting Controls
In the user control editor or user module editor, controls are selected in the same way as in the
component editor. Click a control to select it, or press <Ctrl> + click to select multiple controls. If
you use <Ctrl> + click on a selected control, it will cancel that control's selection. If you position the
mouse in an empty location in the user control editor or user module editor and start dragging from
there, a frame will be displayed as the pointer moves. All controls enclosed by that frame will be
selected.
A red frame will be drawn around the selected controls.
Moving Controls
Move selected controls by dragging them or by pressing the arrow keys on your keyboard. When
you select multiple controls using <Shift> + click, you can move all of them at the same time.
Dragging
When grid is ON, the upper left of the dragged controls will automatically align with the grid. When
dragging, the coordinates displayed here refer to the upper left corner of the object being
dragged. The “Distance to Right” and “Distance to Bottom” are displayed in pixel units, using the
upper-left of the window as a reference point.
When multiple controls are selected and dragged, the coordinates are those of the upper-left
corner of the control where the mouse is aligned.
Arrow Keys
When the grid is ON, the arrow keys move controls a grid unit at a time. When the grid is OFF,
controls are moved one pixel at a time.
Alignment
You can align controls using the following alignment buttons on the edit palette: [Align Left], [Align
Right], [Align To Top], [Align To Bottom], [Align Horizontally], [Align Vertically], [Horizontal/Center
Align], and [Vertical/Center Align].
You can only use the [Align Horizontally] or [Align Vertically] buttons when three or more controls
are selected.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
303
Cut/Copy/Paste Controls
You can edit controls arranged in the user control editor or user module editor using the [Cut], [Copy],
and [Paste] commands in the edit palette.
Cut
Cuts controls arranged in the user control editor. Select one or more controls, then press the [Cut]
button on the edit palette
Copy
Copies controls arranged in the user control editor or user module editor. Select one or more
controls, then press the [Copy] button on the edit palette.
Paste
Pastes cut or copied controls. Click the [Paste] button on the edit palette. If you cannot paste, the
button color turns pale.
Delete
Controls can be deleted by selecting them and pressing the <Delete> key.
Undo and Redo Commands During Editing
You can undo or redo control movements, size changes, or deletions using the [Undo] and [Redo]
commands in the [Edit] menu.
Control Properties
A properties dialog box will open when you either double click a controller in the User Control Editor or
User Module Editor, or right-click the controller and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here
you can specify a design for the controller.
Multiple properties of the same type can be set at the same time by clicking the controllers while
holding the <Ctrl> key and then opening the properties dialog box.
Edited items are shown in bold text until you either click [OK] or [Cancel].
NOTE
If you close an editor window, you will no longer be able to undo and redo operations performed there.
NOTE
Sliders have no property settings.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
304
“Knob Properties” Dialog Box
When you right-click on a knob, then select [Properties] from the context menu, the “Knob
Properties” dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box sets the size of the knob.
[Size]
Displays a list where you can select the knob size. Select [Large], [Medium], [Small], or [Very
Small].
[Color]
Select a color from the list: [White], [Red], [Yellow], [Green], [Blue], or [Violet].
“Toggle Button Properties” Dialog Box
The Toggle Button Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click the ON/OFF
button or right-click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. This sets the text displayed
by the button, along with the color of the button.
[Text] box
Enter the text to be displayed by the button. You can set different text for when the button is ON and
for when it is OFF.
[Size]
Select a button size from the list: [Small (37x11)], [Small (51x11], [Medium (74x11)], [Medium
(74x22)], or [Large (111x33)].
NOTE
You can change the size of a knob by dragging one of the marks at the four corners (top, bottom, left, right) of the knob
in the user control editor.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
305
[Color]
Displays a list where you can select the color of the button. If you click the [], a list of button
colors will be displayed.
[Text Font] Button
Sets the font, size and style. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.
“Radio Button Properties” Dialog Box
The Radio Button Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click a radio button or
right-click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. You can set the button's color, size,
and font.
[Color]
Select a color from the list: [White], [Red], [Yellow], [Green], [Blue], or [Violet].
[Size]
Select a button size from the list: [Small (37x11)], [Small (44x11], [Medium (75x11)], [Medium
(74x22)], or [Large (111x33)].
[Text] Box
Enter the text to be displayed by the button.
[Text Font] Button
Sets the font, size and style. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box.
For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
306
“Text Properties” Dialog Box
The Text Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click a parameter name or other
text, or right-click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can enter the text to
be displayed.
[Text] Box
Enter the text to be displayed by the button.
[Text Font] button
Click this button to display the “Select Font” dialog box. Sets the font, font size, and style. For
information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 203.
[Alignment]
Specifies the horizontal alignment of the text: [Left], [Center], or [Right].
[Rotate]
Rotates the text by the specified angle: [-90], [0], [90], or [180].
[Link Component Editor]
Specifies the component editor to be opened when text is clicked.
[Text Color] Button
Click this button to display the “Select Color” dialog box. Sets the color of the text. For information
about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
307
Edit Box Properties
The Edit Box Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click an edit box or right-
click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can set the edit box size.
[Size]
Select an edit box size from the list: [Large], [Medium], or [Small].
Level Meter Properties
The Level Meter Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click a level meter or
right-click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can specify the number of
meter segments and scale.
[Segment]
Select a number of meter segments from the list: [2], [6], or [60].
[Scale]
Select the type of scale to be displayed beside the meter from the list. This option is only available
when [Segment] is set to 60.
“Solid Frame Properties” Dialog Box
The Solid Frame Properties dialog box will appear when you right-click a solid frame and select
[Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can enter the text to be displayed. Here you can
set the frame size and divider location.
Frame Size
The width is set using the [Width] and the height is set using [Height]. The units are pixels.
Partition Line/Sub-Partition Line
Sets partition lines within the frame. [Partition Line] is a long partition line displayed from end to
end, and [Sub-Partition Line] is a short partition line.
[Direction]
Select the direction of a partition line from the list. [Vertical] inserts a vertical partition line and
[Horizontal] inserts a horizontal partition line. When [None] is select, partition lines are not
displayed.
NOTE
You can change the size of a frame by dragging one of the marks at the four corners (top, bottom, left, right) of the frame
in the user control editor.
Partition Line
Sub-Partition Line
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
308
•[Position]
Displays the currently set line position. Displays the number of pixels from the top of the solid
frame when [Vertical] is selected for the [Direction], and the number of pixels from the left of
the solid frame when [Horizontal] is selected.
[Add] Button
If you set the position of the partition line in the box on the right and click the [Add] button, the
partition line will be added and displayed in the [Position] list.
[Delete] Button
Deletes the partition line selected in the [Position] list.
“Color Frame Properties” Dialog Box
The Color Frame Properties dialog box will appear when you right-click a solid frame and select
[Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can enter the text to be displayed. Here you can
set the frame size and divider location.
Frame Size
The width is set using the [Width] and the height is set using [Height]. The units are pixels and the
minimum value is 3.
Frame Color
Sets the color of the color frame.
Click this button to display the “Select color” dialog box. For information about the “Select color”
dialog box, see page 203.
Fill Color
Sets the frame fill color.
Click the [Select Color] button to display the “Select color” dialog box. Refer to “Select Color”
Dialog Box in the Object section on page 203 for information on this dialog box.
Line Width
Sets the thickness of the lines at [Top]/[Left]/[Right]/[Bottom]. Set “0” to display no lines.
NOTE
You can change the position of a partition line by dragging one of the marks on the line in the user control editor.
NOTE
You can change the size of a frame by dragging one of the marks at the four corners (top, bottom, left, right) of the frame
in the user control editor.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
309
User Picture Properties Dialog Box
Right-click the image and select [Properties] from the contextual menu to display the User Picture
Properties dialog box.
[File Path] Box
Displays the path to the graphic file.
[Select File] Button
Selects a graphic file.
Size
[Width]
Specifies the width in pixels.
[Height]
Specifies the height in pixels.
[Reset] Button
Click to display the graphic at it's original size.
[Stretch]
When ON, the graphic will be enlarged when a size that is bigger than it's original size is
specified.
[Link Component Editor]
When ON, clicking the [Select Component] button selects the editor that is opened when the
graphic is clicked.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
310
Text Properties Dialog Box
Right-click the text box and select [Properties] from the contextual menu to display the Text
Properties dialog box.
[Text] Box
Displays and edits the text to be displayed.
[Text Font]
Selects the font. Click to display the Select Font dialog box.
Refer to “Select Font” Dialog Box on page 202 for more information on the Select Font dialog box.
[Text Color] Button
Sets the text color. Click to display the Select Color dialog box.
[Alignment]
Selects [Left], [Center], or [Right] text alignment.
[Rotate]
Rotates the text box.
[Link Component Editor]
When ON, clicking the [Select Component] button selects the editor that is opened when the text
box is clicked.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
311
Box Properties Dialog Box
Right-click the box and select [Properties] from the contextual menu to display the Box Properties
dialog box.
Box Size
[Width]
Specifies the width in pixels.
[Height]
Specifies the height in pixels.
Box Style
[Style]
Sets the style of the object. Select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken] from the list.
[Round Corner]
Turn ON to produce a round-cornered box. Use [Curve] to select the degree of roundness.
Line
•[Type]
Select a type of frame line from the list: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [Dash Dot]. Or [Dash Dot Dot].
[Size]
Sets the thickness of the frame line in pixels. The range is from 1 to 100.
[Select Color] Button
Sets the color of the frame line. Click to display the “Select color” dialog box.
Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box on page 203 for more information on the Select Color
dialog box.
Fill Color
[Select Color] Button
Sets the frame fill color. Click to display the “Select color” dialog box.
Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box on page 203 for more information on the Select Color
dialog box.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
312
Ellipse Properties Dialog Box
Right-click the ellipse and select [Properties] from the contextual menu to display the Ellipse
Properties dialog box.
Ellipse Size
[Width]
Specifies the width in pixels.
[Height]
Specifies the height in pixels.
Line
•[Type]
Select a type of frame line from the list: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [Dash Dot]. Or [Dash Dot Dot].
[Size]
Sets the thickness of the frame line in pixels. The range is from 1 to 100.
[Select Color] Button
Sets the color of the frame line. Click to display the “Select color” dialog box.
Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box on page 203 for more information on the Select color dialog
box.
Fill Color
Sets the ellipse fill color when ON.
[Select Color] Button
Sets the ellipse fill color. Click to display the “Select color” dialog box.
Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box on page 203 for more information on the Select color dialog
box.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
313
Changing the Tab Order
The tab order for controls is determined by the order in which they were pasted into the user control
editor or user module editor. If you right-click the user control editor or user module editor, you can
check or change the tab order using the [Tab Order] command on the context menu.
If you select the [Tab Order] command, tab order numbers will be displayed at the upper-left of each
edit box. Clicking the displayed numbers changes the order.
1 Right-click in the user control editor or user module editor.
The context menu will be displayed.
2 Click [Tab Order] in the context menu.
Numbers for the current tab order are displayed to the upper-left of each edit box.
3 Click the tab order numbers in the order in which you want to set the tab order.
Even if you do not want to change tab order number 1, click all the numbers in the order you desire,
starting from number 1. When you click on each number, it will change to the number that reflects
the order in which it was clicked.
4 Once you have finished specifying the order, click somewhere within the window
where there is no tab number.
The tab order numbers will disappear.
The changed tab order will apply the next time DME Designer is started.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
314
Creating Parameter Links
You can group controls (parameters) and link their parameters. You can create parameter link groups
and add controls to them in the component editor. Parameter link settings are made in the Parameter
Link window. For information about parameter links and the Parameter Link window, see “Parameter
Link” (page 73).
Creating Parameter Links
If you right-click on a control, a context menu will be displayed.
The [Global Link] [Add Group] and [Local Link] [Add Group] commands create new groups.
Controls can be added by right-clicking.
Adding Controls to a Group
If you right-click a control in the component editor, a context menu will be displayed. You can
create groups or add controls using commands in the [Add Parameter to Parameter Link]
submenu. Groups that do not have the same type of parameters will be grayed out and cannot be
selected.
Global Link
The group names for global link groups are displayed in the [Global Link] submenu. When you
click a group name, a control is added to the group.
NOTE
A parameter can belong to one group only. Furthermore, only parameters of the same type can be grouped.
Chapter 5 Components
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
315
Local Link
The group names for local like groups are displayed in the [Local Link] submenu. When you click a
group name, a control is added to the group.
Adding Multiple Controls
You can select multiple controls in Design Mode. When multiple controls are selected, multiple
parameters can be added to a group simultaneously.
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
316
Chapter 6 Component Guide
Crossover
Separates input signals into multiple frequency channels and outputs them. The following five types of
components are available in the Crossover group: 2 Way, 3 Way, 4 Way, 5 Way, and 6 Way.
Crossover components have a single input and multiple outputs.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it.
Name Function
1 Crossover Curve Displays the level of each frequency band,
distinguished by color.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
2 Input Level - to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.
3 Output Level - to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each
frequency band.
4 Mute ON/OFF Mutes the output signal level for each
frequency band.
5 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for
each frequency band.
6 Frequency Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cross frequency between each
frequency band.
1
2
3
6
4
7
5
8 9
)
! @
Crossover component
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
317
The number of output channels varies according to the component variation.
Set the attenuation curve for the lowest band and the middle bands with the Low Pass Filter (LPF) and
High Pass Filter (HPF), and the highest band with HPF. Each frequency band has its own color, with
Low being red, Mid being green, and so on. These correspond to the colors of the lines on the graph.
7 LPF Type Thru
6 dB/Oct
12 dB/Oct AdjustGc
12 dB/Oct Butrwrth
12 dB/Oct Bessel
12 dB/Oct Linkwitz
18 dB/Oct AdjustGc
18 dB/Oct Butrwrth
18 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct AdjustGc
24 dB/Oct Butrwrth
24 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct Linkwitz
36 dB/Oct AdjustGc
36 dB/Oct Butrwrth
36 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct AdjustGc
48 dB/Oct Butrwrth
48 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct Linkwitz
Sets the attenuation for each octave and the
filter type.
[THRU] turns off the filter.
8 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency.
9 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected
for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff
frequency.
) HPF Type Thru
6 dB/Oct
12 dB/Oct AdjustGc
12 dB/Oct Butrwrth
12 dB/Oct Bessel
12 dB/Oct Linkwitz
18 dB/Oct AdjustGc
18 dB/Oct Butrwrth
18 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct AdjustGc
24 dB/Oct Butrwrth
24 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct Linkwitz
36 dB/Oct AdjustGc
36 dB/Oct Butrwrth
36 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct AdjustGc
48 dB/Oct Butrwrth
48 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct Linkwitz
Sets the attenuation for each octave and the
filter type.
[THRU] turns off the filter.
! Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.
@ Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected
for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff
frequency.
2 Way Low/High
3 Way Low/Mid/High
4 Way Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High
5 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High
6 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/Mid/High-Mid/High
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
318
Graphic Control Points
The graph control points show [Output Level] and [Frequency]. As you modify the parameters
using the knobs and edit boxes, the control points move. Also, as you drag the points, the [Output
Level] and [Frequency] parameters reflect the changes you make.
You can adjust the [Output Level] parameter by vertically dragging the control point in the center of
each curve.
You can adjust the [Frequency] parameter by horizontally dragging the control point at the
intersection of the curves for each frequency band.
Changing the [Output Level] Parameter
Changing the [Frequency] Parameter
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
319
LFP/HPF
[Type] sets the attenuation slope and the filter type for the LPF and HPF. The selected items are
displayed on the buttons. Clicking these buttons displays a menu. Combinations of six slope types
and four filter types are available. [6dB/Oct], [12dB/Oct], [18dB/Oct], [24dB/Oct], [36dB/Oct], and
[48dB/Oct] set the attenuation per octave. A low value produces gentle attenuation. A large value
produces sudden attenuation.
THRU
No filter is applied. There is no attenuation, which produces a level line at all frequencies.
AdjustGc (Adjustable Gc)
With this setting, you can adjust Gc (gain on the cutoff frequency) between -6 dB and +6 dB.
If you set -3 dB it becomes a Butterworth filter. If you set -6 dB, it becomes Linkwitz-Riley filter.
When you select Adjustable Gc, the Gc knob is displayed.
Butrwrth (Butterworth)
This filter has the most general characteristics. The pass band is flat and the gain for the
cutoff frequency is -3 dB.
Bessel
For curves where phase characteristics are important, Bessel has gentler attenuation than
Butterworth, and there is little distortion of the waveform when square waves are passed
through.
Linkwitz (Linkwitz-Riley)
As second-order filters, the sum of the output voltages for LPF and HPF have a gain of 0 dB
across the entire band. The pass band is flat, but the cutoff frequency gain is -6 dB.
Type
Linkwitz-Riley
Butterworth
Bessel
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
320
Crossover Processor
A crossover processor consists of a crossover, delay, parametric equalizer, and compressor. After the
input signal is processed by the crossover, effects of the delay, parametric equalizer, and compressor
are applied to each frequency band. The following two types are available in the Crossover Processor
group: Crossover Processor and Crossover Processor II.
Crossover Processor
The following five types of components are available in the Crossover Processor group: 2 Way, 3 Way,
4 Way, 5 Way, and 6 Way. Crossover processors have a single input and 2 to 6 outputs.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Band numbers may vary depending
on the component, but they share a common configuration in the component editor.
If you click the [Crossover], [Compressor], [PEQ], or [Delay] button in the [Navigator] section, an
editor for the crossover, compressor, parametric equalizer, or delay will be displayed in a separate
window. A separate component editor will open for each output channel (such as Low or Mid) when
you click on the compressor, parametric equalizer, or delay.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Navigator Crossover -- This opens the crossover editor window.
2 Delay -- This opens the delay editor window.
3 PEQ -- This opens the parametric equalizer editor
window.
4 Compressor -- This opens the compressor editor window.
5 Input Level - to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.
6 Output Level - to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each
frequency band.
7 Mute ON/OFF Mutes the signal for each frequency band.
8 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for
each frequency band.
1
2 3 4
5
6
7
8
Component editor for Crossover Processor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
321
The output number varies according to the component variation.
Set the attenuation curve for the lowest band and the middle bands with the Low Pass Filter (LPF) and
High Pass Filter (HPF), and the highest band with HPF. Each frequency band has its own color, with
Low being red, Mid being green, and so on. These correspond to the colors of the lines on the graph.
Crossover
When you click the [Crossover] button for the crossover processor, it opens the crossover editor
window.
2 Way Low/High
3 Way Low/Mid/High
4 Way Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High
5 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High
6 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/Mid/High-Mid/High
Name Function
1 Crossover Curve Displays the level of each frequency channel,
distinguished by color.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
2 Frequency Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cross frequency between each
frequency band.
1
2
36
7 8 4 5
[Crossover Processor-Crossover] editor window
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
322
3 LPF Type Thru
6 dB/Oct
12 dB/Oct AdjustGc
12 dB/Oct Butrwrth
12 dB/Oct Bessel
12 dB/Oct Linkwitz
18 dB/Oct AdjustGc
18 dB/Oct Butrwrth
18 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct AdjustGc
24 dB/Oct Butrwrth
24 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct Linkwitz
36 dB/Oct AdjustGc
36 dB/Oct Butrwrth
36 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct AdjustGc
48 dB/Oct Butrwrth
48 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct Linkwitz
Sets the attenuation for each octave and the
filter type.
[THRU] turns off the filter.
4 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency.
5 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected
for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff
frequency.
6 HPF Type Thru
6 dB/Oct
12 dB/Oct AdjustGc
12 dB/Oct Butrwrth
12 dB/Oct Bessel
12 dB/Oct Linkwitz
18 dB/Oct AdjustGc
18 dB/Oct Butrwrth
18 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct AdjustGc
24 dB/Oct Butrwrth
24 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct Linkwitz
36 dB/Oct AdjustGc
36 dB/Oct Butrwrth
36 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct AdjustGc
48 dB/Oct Butrwrth
48 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct Linkwitz
Sets the attenuation for each octave and the
filter type.
[THRU] turns off the filter.
7 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.
8 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected
for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff
frequency.
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
323
Delay
When you click the [Delay] button for the crossover processor, it opens the delay editor window.
Here you can set the delay for each frequency band.
Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Delay ms: 0 to 500
Sample: the range
depends on the Fs value.
Meter: 0 to 171.8
Feet: 0 to 563.6
Frame: the range depends
on the Frame value.
Beat: the range depends
on the Beat value.
Sets the delay time.
2 Level - to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel
3 On ON/OFF Turns delay ON.
4 Mute ON/OFF Mutes the signal for each frequency band.
5 Delay Scale ms
Sample
Meter
Feet
Frame
Beat
Selects the units for setting the delay time. The
selected button will light up, and the units in the [Delay]
edit box will change.
If [Beat] is selected, use the knob to set the BPM
(beats/minute).
1
2
3
5
4
[Crossover Processor - Delay] editor window
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
324
Parametric Equalizer
When you click [PEQ] button for the crossover processor, it opens the parametric equalizer editor
window. Here you can make parametric equalizer settings for each frequency band.
Name Function
1 PEQ Curve Displays the PEQ curve.
Parameter Setting Range Function
2 Type PEQ
L.SHELF 6 dB/Oct
L.SHELF 12 dB/Oct
H.SHELF 6 dB/Oct
H.SHELF 12 dB/Oct
HPF
LPF
Select the filter type from a menu.
3 Q: 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the frequency band width for each band.
4 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency for each band.
5 Gain -18 dB to +18 dB Sets the gain for each band.
6 Bypass ON/OFF Turns ON bypass for each band.
7 PEQ On ON/OFF Turns the PEQ ON.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
[Crossover Processor-PEQ] editor window
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
325
Compressor
When you click the [Compressor] button for the crossover processor, it opens the compressor
editor window. Here you can make compressor settings for each frequency band.
Name Function
1 Compressor Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the
input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output
level.
2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation.
3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.
Parameter Setting Range Function
4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.
5 Ratio 1:1 to :1 Sets the compression ratio.
6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way compression is applied.
7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.
8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s
48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s
88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s
96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s
Sets the release time.
The setting range may very, depending on the
operating frequency.
9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain.
) On ON/OFF Turns the compressor ON. When you turn this button
OFF, the compressor is bypassed.
1
2 )3
4 5 6
7 8 9
[Crossover Processor-Compressor] editor window
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
326
Crossover Processor II
The following five types of components are available in the Crossover Processor II group: 2 Way, 3
Way, 4 Way, 5 Way, and 6 Way. Crossover processor II components have a single input and 2 to 6
outputs.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of bands may vary
depending on the component, but they share a common configuration in the component editor.
There are input and output level meters in the upper part of the window. If you click the [Crossover],
[Delay], [PEQ], or [Compressor] button in the [Navigator] section, an editor for the crossover, delay,
parametric equalizer, or compressor will be displayed in a separate window. A separate component
editor will open for each output channel (such as Low or Mid) when you click on the delay, parametric
equalizer, or compressor.
Name Function
1 Input Meter Displays the input signal level.
2 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
3 Input Gain - to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.
4 Mute ON/OFF Mutes the input signal.
5 Output Gain - to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each
frequency band.
6 Mute ON/OFF Mutes the output signal for each frequency
band.
21
3
4
56 )987
Crossover Processor II
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
327
Crossover
When you click the [Crossover] button for the crossover processor, it opens the crossover editor
window.
7 Navigator Crossover -- This opens the crossover editor window.
8 Delay -- This opens the delay editor window.
9 PEQ -- This opens the parametric equalizer editor
window.
) Compressor -- This opens the compressor editor window.
Name Function
1 Crossover Curve Displays the level of each frequency band,
distinguished by color.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
2 Frequency Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cross frequency between each
frequency band.
3 Polarity Polarity Normal/Inverted Reverses the output signal phase for each
frequency band.
4 Mute Mute ON/OFF Mutes the signal for each frequency band.
This is linked to the Mute setting in the
original window. The display appears as a
dotted line when muted.
Name Function
1
2
3
4
5
679)
8
Crossover Processor II component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
328
5 LPF Type Thru
6 dB/Oct
12 dB/Oct AdjustGc
12 dB/Oct Butrwrth
12 dB/Oct Bessel
12 dB/Oct Linkwitz
18 dB/Oct AdjustGc
18 dB/Oct Butrwrth
18 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct AdjustGc
24 dB/Oct Butrwrth
24 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct Linkwitz
36 dB/Oct AdjustGc
36 dB/Oct Butrwrth
36 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct AdjustGc
48 dB/Oct Butrwrth
48 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct Linkwitz
Sets the attenuation for each octave and the
filter type.
[THRU] turns off the filter.
6 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency.
7 Gc -6 dB to 6 dB When [Adjustable Gc] is selected for [Type],
this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency.
8 HPF Type Thru
6 dB/Oct
12 dB/Oct AdjustGc
12 dB/Oct Butrwrth
12 dB/Oct Bessel
12 dB/Oct Linkwitz
18 dB/Oct AdjustGc
18 dB/Oct Butrwrth
18 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct AdjustGc
24 dB/Oct Butrwrth
24 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct Linkwitz
36 dB/Oct AdjustGc
36 dB/Oct Butrwrth
36 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct AdjustGc
48 dB/Oct Butrwrth
48 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct Linkwitz
Sets the attenuation for each octave and the
filter type.
[THRU] turns off the filter.
9 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.
) Gc -6 dB to 6 dB When [Adjustable Gc] is selected for [Type],
this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency.
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
329
Delay
When you click the [Delay] button for the crossover processor, it opens the delay editor window.
Here you can set the delay for each frequency band.
Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Delay ms: 0 to 500
Sample: the range depends on the Fs value.
Meter: 0 to 171.8
Feet: 0 to 563.6
Frame: the range depends on the Frame value.
Beat: the range depends on the Beat value.
Sets the delay time.
2 Level - to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each
channel.
3 On ON/OFF Turns delay ON.
4 Delay Scale ms
Sample
Meter
Feet
Frame
Beat
Selects the units for setting the delay
time. The selected button will light up,
and the units in the [Delay] edit box
will change.
If [Beat] is selected, use the knob to
set the BPM (beats/minute).
1
2
3
4
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
330
Parametric Equalizer
When you click the [PEQ] button for the crossover processor, it opens the parametric equalizer
editor window. Here you can make parametric equalizer settings for each frequency band.
Name Function
1
PEQ Curve Displays the PEQ curve.
Parameter Setting Range Function
2 Type PEQ
L.SHELF 6 dB/Oct
L.SHELF 12 dB/Oct
H.SHELF 6 dB/Oct
H.SHELF 12 dB/Oct
HPF
LPF
Select the filter type from the menu.
3 Q 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the band width of each band.
4 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency of each band.
5 Gain -18 dB to +18 dB Sets the frequency gain for each band.
6 Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses all PEQ bands.
7 PEQ On ON/OFF Turn the PEQ ON.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
331
Compressor
When you click the [Compressor] button for the crossover processor, it opens the compressor
editor window. Here you can make compressor settings for each frequency band.
Name Function
1 Compressor Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the
input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output
level.
2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation.
3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.
Parameter Setting Range Function
4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.
5 Ratio 1:1 to :1 Sets the compression ratio.
6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way compression is applied.
7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.
8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s
48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s
88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s
96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s
Sets the release time.
The setting range may vary, depending on the
operating frequency.
9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain.
) On ON/OFF Turns the compressor ON. When you turn this button
OFF, the compressor is bypassed.
1
23 )
4 5 6
7 8 9
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
332
Delay
This is a multi-tap delay that provides independent delay and level control for each output. You can
specify the delay time in milliseconds, samples, meters, feet, time code frames, or number of beats.
Within the delay group, there are two subgroups called Long and Short. Each has a different setting
range for the delay.
Delay Long
Delay long components are available with from one to eight outputs. Each has a single input and from
one to eight outputs.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Only the number of outputs in each
component is different. The other parts are the same.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Delay All Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses from input to output.
2 Input Level - to ±0 dB Sets the input signal level.
3 Mute ON/OFF Mute the input signal.
4 Delay Tap Delay ms: 0 to 1300
Sample: the range depends
on the Fs value.
Meter: 0 to 446.7
Feet: 0 to 1465.4
Frame: the range depends on
the Frame value.
Beat: the range depends on
the Beat value.
Sets the delay time.
There are two edit boxes, displaying
milliseconds and the units selected for [Delay
Scale].
5 Level - to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel.
6 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s delay.
7 Mute ON/OFF Turns ON muting for each channel’s output.
8 Delay Scale Delay Scale ms
Sample
Meter
Feet
Frame
Beat
Selects the units for setting the delay time.
The selected button will light up, and the
units in the [Delay] edit box will change.
If [Beat] is selected, use the knob to set the
BPM (beats/minute).
1
8
2
3
6
5
4
7
Delay Long Component Editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
333
Delay Short
Delay short components are available with from one to eight outputs. Each has a single input and from
one to eight outputs.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Only the number of outputs in each
component is different. The other parts are the same.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Delay All Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses from input to output.
2 Input Level - to ±0 dB Sets the input signal level.
3 Mute ON/OFF Mute the input signal.
4 Delay Tap Delay ms: 0 to 130
Sample: the range depends
on the Fs value.
Meter: 0 to 44.7
Feet: 0 to 146.5
Frame: the range depends on
the Frame value.
Beat: the range depends on
the Beat value.
Sets the delay time.
There are two edit boxes, displaying
milliseconds and the units selected for [Delay
Scale].
5 Level - to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel.
6 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s delay.
7 Mute ON/OFF Turns ON muting for each channel’s output.
8 Delay Scale Delay Scale ms
Sample
Meter
Feet
Frame
Beat
Selects the units for setting the delay time.
The selected button will light up, and the
units in the [Delay] edit box will change.
If [Beat] is selected, use the knob to set the
BPM (beats/minute).
1
8
2
3
6
5
4
7
Delay-Short component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
334
Dynamics
Components in the dynamic group adjust the dynamic range of the sound. There are eight types of
components, each of which is available in mono channel and stereo channel versions. The seven
types are: compander hard, compander soft, compressor, de-esser, ducking, expander, gate, and
limiter.
KeyIn
All components in the dynamic group, except the de-esser, have KeyIn input. This is used as a
trigger source that activates the effects of the component.
The trigger source is set in the [KeyIn] section of the component editor.
The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button. Click the button and select the
trigger source from the menu.
[SELF]
Sets the input signal as the trigger source for mono channel components.
[L]/[R]
Sets the left or right input signal as the trigger source for stereo channel components.
[LR BOTH]
Sets both the left and right input signals as the trigger source for stereo channel components.
The strongest input signal will be the trigger source, whether from the left or right channel.
[KEYIN]
The KeyIn input will be the trigger source.
[KeyIn] Section
Mono channel
Stereo channel
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
335
Compander
The compander combines the effects of a compressor and an expander. A compressor compresses
signals that exceed the threshold, while the expander reduces signals that fall below the threshold.
There are two compander groups, CompanderH (compander hard) and CompanderS (compander
soft). Within each group, there are mono channel and stereo channel companders.
Mono channel companders have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel
companders have two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for
mono channel and stereo channel components.
The compander hard and compander soft differ in the compression ratio of their fixed expander. The
expander compression is expressed by the straight portion of the lower-left part of the compander
curve. The compression ratio of the compander hard is large. The slope is also large. The
compression ratio of the compander soft is small, with a gentle compression. The parameters in the
component editor are the same.
Name Function
1 Compander Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is
the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the
output level.
2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation.
3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.
Parameter Setting Range Function
4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.
5 Ratio 1:1 to :1 Sets the compression ratio.
6 Width +1 dB to +90 dB Sets the width of the expander.
7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.
8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s
48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s
88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s
96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s
Sets the release time.
The setting range may very, depending on the
operating frequency.
9 Gain -18 dB to ±0 dB Sets the output gain.
CompanderH
Mono channel
Stereo channel
CompanderS
Mono channel
Stereo channel
1
2 ) !3
4 5 6
7 8 9
1
2 ) !3
4 5 6
7 8 9
CompanderH Mono component editor CompanderS Stereo component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
336
Compressor
Compresses signals that exceed a threshold. Narrows the dynamic range of the signal, making it
easier to mix or record signals with a wide dynamic range such as vocals or piano music. Both mono
channel and stereo channel compressors are provided.
Mono channel compressors have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel
compressors have two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input.
Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono
channel and stereo channel components.
) KeyIn Mono SELF
KEYIN
Selects the trigger source from a menu. The
currently selected trigger source is displayed on the
button.
Stereo L
R
LR BOTH
KEYIN
! On ON/OFF Turns the compander ON.
–70
–60
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
+10
+20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20
Input Level (dB)
Output Level (dB)
Width=25
Ratio=4:1
Threshold=–25dB
1
2 ) !3
4 5 6
7 8 9
Compressor component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
337
De-Esser
Compresses the signal above a specified frequency. The de-esser controls sibilant (hissing) sounds
included in speech that are produced by the letter “S.” Both mono channel and stereo channel de-
essers are provided.
Mono channel de-essers have one input and one output each. Stereo channel de-essers have two
inputs and two outputs each.
Name Function
1 Compressor Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is
the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the
output level.
2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation.
3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.
Parameter Setting Range Function
4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.
5 Ratio 1:1 to :1 Sets the compression ratio.
6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way compression is applied.
7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.
8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s
48 kHz: 5ms to 42.3 s
88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s
96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s
Sets the release time.
The setting range may very, depending on the
operating frequency.
9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain.
) KeyIn Mono SELF
KEYIN
Selects the trigger source from a menu. The
currently selected trigger source is displayed on the
button.
Stereo L
R
LR BOTH
KEYIN
! On ON/OFF Turns the compressor ON.
–70
–60
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
+10
+20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20
Input Level (dB)
Output Level (dB)
Ratio=2:1
Knee=Hard
Threshold=–20dB
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
338
Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono
channel and stereo channel components.
Name Function
1 De-Esser Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the
input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output
level.
2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation.
3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.
Parameter Setting Range Function
4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.
5 Ratio 1:1 to :1 Sets the compression ratio.
6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way the de-esser effect is applied.
7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.
8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s
48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s
88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s
96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s
Sets the release time.
The setting range may very, depending on the
operating frequency.
9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain.
) Frequency 80 Hz to 10 kHz Sets the minimum signal frequency for compression.
! On ON/OFF Turns the de-esser ON.
1
2 93
4 5 6
7 8 9 )
De-Esser component editor
–70
–60
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
+10
+20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20
Input Level (dB)
Output Level (dB)
Ratio=2:1
Knee=Hard
Threshold=20dB
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
339
Ducking
Attenuates the output a particular amount, when an input signal exceeds its threshold. Both mono
channel and stereo channel duckers are provided.
Mono channel duckers have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel duckers have
two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input.
Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono
channel and stereo channel components.
Name Function
1 Ducking Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is
the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the
output level.
2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation.
3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.
Parameter Setting Range Function
4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.
5 Range -70 dB to ±0 dB Sets the amount by which the level is reduced.
6 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.
7 Hold 44.1 kHz: 0.02 ms to 2.13 s
48 kHz: 0.02 ms to 1.96 s
88.2 kHz: 0.01 ms to 1.06 s
96 kHz: 0.01 ms to 981 ms
Sets the hold time.
The setting range may very, depending on the
operating frequency.
8 Decay 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s
48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s
88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s
96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s
Sets the decay time.
The setting range may very, depending on the
operating frequency.
9 KeyIn Mono SELF
KEYIN
Selects the trigger source from a menu.
The currently selected trigger source is displayed
on the button.
Stereo L
R
LR BOTH
KEYIN
) On ON/OFF Turns the ducking ON.
1
2 9 )3
4 5 6
7 8
Ducking component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
340
Expander
Widens the dynamic range of the signal. Low-level signals such as noise are diminished. Both mono
channel and stereo channel expanders are provided.
Mono channel expanders have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel expanders
have two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input.
Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono
channel and stereo channel components.
Name Function
1 Expander Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is
the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the
output level.
2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation.
3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.
Parameter Setting Range Function
4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.
5 Ratio 1:1 to :1 Sets the compression ratio.
6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way the expander is applied.
8 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.
–70
–60
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
+10
+20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20
Input Level (dB)
Output Level (dB)
Range=25dB
Threshold=20dB
1
2 3
4 5 6
) !
7 8 9
Expander component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
341
Gate
Attenuates signals that are lower than the threshold level. Both mono channel and stereo channel
gates are provided.
Mono channel gates have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel gates have two
inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input.
Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono
channel and stereo channel components.
8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s
48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s
88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s
96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s
Sets the release time.
The setting range may very, depending on the
operating frequency.
9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain.
) KeyIn Mono SELF
KEYIN
Selects the trigger source from a menu. The
currently selected trigger source is displayed on the
button.
Stereo L
R
LR BOTH
KEYIN
! On ON/OFF Turns the expander ON.
–70
–60
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
+10
+20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20
Input Level (dB)
Output Level (dB)
Ratio=2:1
Threshold=–10dB
Knee=Hard
1
2 9 )3
4 5 6
7 8
Gate component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
342
Limiter
Signals above the threshold are compressed at an :1 ratio, preventing output of signals that exceed
the threshold level. Mono channel and stereo channel components are provided.
Mono channel components have a single input and output plus a key input, while stereo channel
components have two inputs and outputs and a key input.
Name Function
1 Gate Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is
the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the
output level.
2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation.
3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.
Parameter Setting Range Function
4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.
5 Range -70 dB to ±0 dB Sets the amount by which the level is reduced.
6 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.
7 Hold 44.1 kHz: 0.02 ms to 2.13 s
48 kHz: 0.02 ms to 1.96 s
88.2 kHz: 0.01 ms to 1.06 s
96 kHz: 0.01 ms to 981 ms
Sets the hold time.
8 Decay 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s
48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s
88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s
96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s
Sets the decay time.
The setting range may very, depending on the
operating frequency.
9 KeyIn Mono SELF
KEYIN
Selects the trigger source from a menu. The
currently selected trigger source is displayed on the
button.
Stereo L
R
LR BOTH
KEYIN
) On ON/OFF Turns the gate ON.
–70
–60
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
+10
+20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20
Input Level (dB)
Output Level (dB)
Threshold=20dB
Range=25dB
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
343
Double click the component to open the component editor. Mono channel and stereo channel
components have the same parameters.
Name Function
1 Limiter Curve Displays the limiter response in graph form. The
horizontal axis represents input signal level and the
vertical axis represents output level.
2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the amount of gain reduction.
3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.
Parameter Setting Range Function
4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value.
5 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time.
6 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s
48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s
88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s
96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s
Sets the release time. The range varies according
to the operating frequency.
9 KeyIn Mono SELF
KEYIN
The trigger source can be selected from this menu.
The currently selected source is displayed in the
button.
Stereo L
R
LR BOTH
KEYIN
) On ON/OFF Turns the limiter ON.
1
4
5 6
2
3 7 8
Limiter component editor
–70
–60
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
+10
+20
–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20
Input Level (dB)
Output Level (dB)
Threshold=–20dB
RATIO=20:1
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
344
Equalizer (EQ)
The equalizer boosts or cuts the levels of specified frequencies. The EQ group contains graphic
equalizers (GEQ) and parametric equalizers (PEQ).
The frequency bands in the graphic equalizer are fixed. The graphical interface lets you visually check
the gain of each frequency. There are three different types of equalizers, each with a different number
of frequency bands. Mono channel and stereo channel equalizers are available for each type.
With the parametric equalizer, you can freely adjust the frequency bands, their amplitudes, and
bandwidths. There are six different types of parametric equalizers, each with a different number of
frequency bands. Mono channel and stereo channel equalizers are available for each type.
Graphic Equalizer (GEQ)
Boosts or cuts signals within the specified frequencies. The mono group contains 7 band, 15 band,
and 31 band mono channel components. The stereo group contains 7 band, 15 band, and 31 band
stereo channel components.
Mono channel GEQs have one input and one output each. Stereo channel GEQs have two inputs and
two outputs each.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of bands varies
depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor.
Name Function
1 Input Meter Displays the input signal level.
2 EQ Curve Displays the equalizer effect.
3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.
Mono channel
Stereo channel
1
5
4
2
3
7
)
9
(
*
@
!
$
#
&
% ^
&
% ^
&
% ^
&
% ^
8
6
Component editor for GEQ
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
345
EQ Graph [Bypass] Button
A number for each frequency band is displayed on these buttons. When you click the button, it
lights up and the bypass turns ON. When you turn this ON, bypassed sound (unchanged sound) is
output. When you turn this OFF, the sound is output with effects applied.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
4 Equalizer Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses all bands in the GEQ equalizer
section.
5 Gain Set by [Range]. Sets the output gain for its band.
6 GEQ ON ON/OFF Turns the GEQ ON.
7 Range (Button) ±15
±12
±6
-24
Selects the gain adjust width.
8 EQ Flat -- Returns the faders of all bands to 0dB.
9 Input Level - to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.
) Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.
! HPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.
@ Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.
# LPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency.
$ Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.
% Notch Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the notch filter frequency.
^ Q: 0.1 to 63.0 Sets the width of the frequency band that will
be changed by the filter.
& Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.
* Output Level - to ±0 dB Sets the signal level.
( On ON/OFF Turns output ON.
Bypass ON
Bypass OFF
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
346
Parametric Equalizer (PEQ)
Boosts or cuts signals within specified frequencies. In both the Mono group and Stereo group there
are 2 band, 3 band, 4 band, 6 band, and 8 band components available.
Mono channel PEQs have one input and one output each. Stereo channel PEQs have two inputs and
two outputs each. The number of bands varies depending on the component, but all share a common
configuration in the component editor.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of bands varies
depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor.
Name Function
1 EQ Curve Displays the equalizer effect.
You can change the parameter by dragging
the control point with the mouse.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
2 Input Level - to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.
3 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.
4 Equalizer Type PEQ
L.SHELF 6 dB/Oct
L.SHELF 12 dB/Oct
H.SHELF 6 dB/Oct
H.SHELF 12 dB/Oct
HPF
LPF
Select the filter type from the menu.
5 Q 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the band width for each frequency
band.
6 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency for each band.
7 Gain -18 dB to +18 dB Sets the level of the frequency that will be
changed.
8 Bypass ON/OFF Turns ON bypass for each band.
1
8
5
6
7
3
2
!
)
9
4
PEQ component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
347
Filter Type
Various types of curves are available for changing the level. Click the [Type] button and select the
type from the menu.
PEQ
This is a general parametric equalizer.
•L. SHELF (Low Shelving)
There is no sound attenuation at low frequencies. The sound is attenuated at a constant rate
from the cutoff frequency towards the higher frequencies. The attenuation rate per octave can
be set to [6 dB/Oct] or [12 dB/Oct].
H.SHELF (High Shelving)
There is no sound attenuation at high frequencies. The sound is attenuated at a constant rate
from the cutoff frequency towards the lower frequencies. The attenuation rate per octave can
be set to [6 dB/Oct] or [12 dB/Oct].
HPF
This is a high-pass filter (Q=0.7). Attenuates the low frequencies with a gentle curve (12 dB/
Oct).
LPF
This is a low-pass filter (Q=0.7). Attenuates the high frequencies with a gentle curve (12 dB/
Oct).
9 Equalizer PEQ ON ON/OFF Turns the PEQ ON
) Output Level - to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level.
! On ON/OFF Turns output ON.
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
348
Fader
Controls the output level for each channel. Fader components are available for 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16
channels.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies, but
all components share a common configuration in the component editor.
[Fade]
Sets the action of the fader when there is a large change in its position during scene recall. When
you turn this ON, the fader moves gradually to the position after the jump. If you turn this OFF, it
immediately jumps to the parameters saved in the recalled scene.
See “The ‘Scene Manager’ Dialog Box” (page 63) for details about settings for the components to
be faded and the time period when the [Fade] is On.
Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for each
channel.
2 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s output.
3 Fader - to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel.
4 Fade ON/OFF Sets fade during scene recall ON or OFF.
1
2
3
4
Fader component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
349
Filters
A filter passes specific frequencies and attenuates all others.
There are seven types of filters available in the filter group: band pass filter (BPF), high pass filter
(HPF), low pass filter (LPF), notch filter (Notch), programmable BPF, programmable HPF, and
programmable LPF.
Band Pass Filter (BPF)
The band pass filter passes the signal from a specified frequency band, while attenuating frequencies
outside that band. There are two types of BPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono
channel BPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel BPFs have two of each.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for
mono channel and stereo channel components.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Level - to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.
2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.
3 BPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the center frequency.
4 Q: 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the band width of a frequency band.
5 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.
6 Output Level - to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level.
2
1
5
3 4 6
BPF component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
350
High Pass Filter (HPF)
The high pass filter passes frequencies in the signal that are higher than a specified frequency, while
attenuating lower frequencies in the signal. There are two types of HPF components: mono channel
and stereo channel. Mono channel HPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel HPFs have
two of each.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for
mono channel and stereo channel components.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Level - to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.
2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.
3 HPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cutoff frequency.
4 Slope 6 dB/Oct
12 dB/Oct
Sets the attenuation for each octave.
5 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.
6 Output Level - to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level.
2
1
5
3 4 6
HPF component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
351
Low Pass Filter (LPF)
The low pass filter passes frequencies in the signal that are lower than a specified frequency, while
attenuating higher frequencies in the signal. There are two types of LPF components: mono channel
and stereo channel. Mono channel LPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel LPFs have
two of each.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for
mono channel and stereo channel components.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Level - to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.
2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.
3 LPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cutoff frequency.
4 Slope 6 dB/Oct
12 dB/Oct
Sets the attenuation for each octave.
5 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.
6 Output Level - to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level.
2
1
5
3 4 6
LPF component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
352
Notch Filter (Notch)
The notch filter attenuates the signal within a specified frequency band, while passing frequencies
outside that band. There are two types of notch filter components: mono channel and stereo channel.
Mono channel notch filters have one input and one output. Stereo channel notch filters have two of
each.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for
mono channel and stereo channel components.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Level - to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.
2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.
3 Notch Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the center frequency.
4 Q: 0.1 to 63.0 Sets the band width of the frequency band
that will be changed
5 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.
6 Output Level - to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level.
2
1
5
3
4
6
Notch component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
353
Programmable BPF
The band pass filter passes the signal from a specified frequency band, while attenuating frequencies
outside that band. With the programmable band pass filter you can set the filter type and the slope
between the frequency band that is passed and the band that is cutoff.
There are two types of programmable BPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono
channel programmable BPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel programmable BPFs
have two of each.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for
mono channel and stereo channel components.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Level - to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.
2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.
3 HPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.
4 Type Thru
6 dB/Oct
12 dB/Oct AdjustGc
12 dB/Oct Butrwrth
12 dB/Oct Bessel
12 dB/Oct Linkwitz
18 dB/Oct AdjustGc
18 dB/Oct Butrwrth
18 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct AdjustGc
24 dB/Oct Butrwrth
24 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct Linkwitz
36 dB/Oct AdjustGc
36 dB/Oct Butrwrth
36 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct AdjustGc
48 dB/Oct Butrwrth
48 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct Linkwitz
Sets the attenuation for each octave and the
filter type.
[THRU] turns off the filter.
5 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected
for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff
frequency.
6 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.
2 6 )
1 !
3 7
4
5
8
9
Programmable BPF component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
354
7 LPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency.
8 Type Thru
6 dB/Oct
12 dB/Oct AdjustGc
12 dB/Oct Butrwrth
12 dB/Oct Bessel
12 dB/Oct Linkwitz
18 dB/Oct AdjustGc
18 dB/Oct Butrwrth
18 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct AdjustGc
24 dB/Oct Butrwrth
24 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct Linkwitz
36 dB/Oct AdjustGc
36 dB/Oct Butrwrth
36 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct AdjustGc
48 dB/Oct Butrwrth
48 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct Linkwitz
Sets the attenuation for each octave and the
filter type.
[THRU] turns off the filter.
9 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected
for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff
frequency.
) Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.
! Output Level - to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
355
Programmable HPF
The high pass filter passes frequencies in the signal that are higher the specified frequency, while
attenuating lower frequencies in the signal. With the programmable high pass filter you can set the
filter type and the slope between the frequency band that is passed and the band that is cutoff.
There are two types of programmable HPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono
channel programmable HPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel programmable HPFs
have two of each.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for
mono channel and stereo channel components.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Level - to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.
2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.
3 HPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.
5 Type Thru
6 dB/Oct
12 dB/Oct AdjustGc
12 dB/Oct Butrwrth
12 dB/Oct Bessel
12 dB/Oct Linkwitz
18 dB/Oct AdjustGc
18 dB/Oct Butrwrth
18 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct AdjustGc
24 dB/Oct Butrwrth
24 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct Linkwitz
36 dB/Oct AdjustGc
36 dB/Oct Butrwrth
36 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct AdjustGc
48 dB/Oct Butrwrth
48 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct Linkwitz
Sets the attenuation for each octave and the
filter type.
[THRU] turns off the filter.
6 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected
for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff
frequency.
7 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.
8 Output Level - to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level.
2 6
1
3
7
4
5
Programmable HPF component editors
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
356
Programmable LPF
The low pass filter passes frequencies in the signal that are lower than the specified frequency, while
attenuating higher frequencies in the signal. With the programmable low pass filter you can set the
filter type and the slope between the frequency band that is passed and the band that is cutoff.
There are two types of programmable LPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono
channel programmable LPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel programmable LPFs
have two of each.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for
mono channel and stereo channel components.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Level - to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.
2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.
3 LPF Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency.
5 Type Thru
6 dB/Oct
12 dB/Oct AdjustGc
12 dB/Oct Butrwrth
12 dB/Oct Bessel
12 dB/Oct Linkwitz
18 dB/Oct AdjustGc
18 dB/Oct Butrwrth
18 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct AdjustGc
24 dB/Oct Butrwrth
24 dB/Oct Bessel
24 dB/Oct Linkwitz
36 dB/Oct AdjustGc
36 dB/Oct Butrwrth
36 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct AdjustGc
48 dB/Oct Butrwrth
48 dB/Oct Bessel
48 dB/Oct Linkwitz
Sets the attenuation for each octave and the
filter type.
[THRU] turns off the filter.
6 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected
for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff
frequency.
7 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON.
8 Output Level - to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level.
2
6
1
3
7
4
5
Programmable LPF component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
357
Meter
Displays signal levels. Meter components are available with 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16 channels.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies
depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor.
Name Function
1 Meter Displays signal levels for each channel.
1
Meter component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
358
Miscellaneous
In the Miscellaneous group, there are the Oscillator subgroup and the Wav File Player.
Oscillator
The Oscillator subgroup contains a monochannel oscillator component. The oscillator generates sine
waves at fixed frequencies of 100 Hz, 1 kHz, and 10 kHz, a variable frequency sine wave, pink noise,
and burst noise. The oscillator component has two outputs.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it.
Pink Noise
A standard signal used for sound measurement.
This sound covers a frequency range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz. As the frequency doubles, the energy of
the sound is cut in half. The sound level is equal at all frequencies.
Burst
Outputs pink noise continuously.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Wave Form Sine 100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
Vari
Selects the frequency and waveform that will
be generated. Only one of the six [Sine] and
[Noise] buttons can be selected.
2 Noise Pink
Burst
3 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz When [Vari] is selected for [Sine], this sets
the frequency of the generated sine wave.
4 Output Level - to +6 dB Displays the signal level.
5 On ON/OFF Turns ON the oscillator.
6 Meter -- Displays the output signal level.
1
6
4
3
5
2
Oscillator component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
359
Wav File Player
The Wav File Player is a component for playing Wave files. Only one Wav File Player component can
be arranged for each single DME unit.
Double-click the component to display the component editor for it.
NOTE
If you switch the effect type for SPX components while playing Wave file by Wav File Player, drop-outs in the sound played in
the Wav File Player may occur.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Ex. Input Level - to 0 dB Sets the input level from an input port. Only effective
when “External Input” is selected as the playback file.
2 Wav File Player Play 001 to 100 Selects and displays the playback file.
Only files set in the DME unit in which this component
is placed by the Wav File Manager can be selected.
3 List -- Open the Wav File Manager to display a list of files set
in the DME unit in which this component is located.
This list functions as a play list.
4 IG -- Selects the previous file in the play list.
5 HI -- Selects the next file in the playsuit.
6 F -- Plays the selected Wave file. Mute is turned OFF
when “External Input” is selected.
7 J -- Stops playback of the Wave file. Muted when
“External Input” is selected.
NOTE
Playback will be paused if synchronization is carried out in the “Designer DME” direction during playback.
Playback will resume once synchronization is complete, but if a Wave file was being played it will resume playback from the
beginning.
1
24 5673
Wav File Player component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
360
Mixer
The Mixer group contains the Auto Mixer, Delay Matrix, and Matrix Mixer.
Auto Mixer
There is a noise gate for each input channel, which passes only signals that exceed a specified
threshold. There are five mixer types, each with a different number of inputs.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies
depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. The auto
mixer component editor consists of two sections: input channels and master output.
1
3
8
4
5
2
6
7
)
9
!
Auto Mixer component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
361
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Channels Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of each channel’s
input signal.
2 Gate Indicator -- When the gate is open, the light turns
green. When the gate is closed, the light
turns yellow.
3 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value for each gate.
4 Hold 44.1 kHz: 110 m to 2.13 s
48 kHz: 101 m to 1.96 s
88.2 kHz: 55.1 m to 1.06 s
96 kHz: 50. 6m to 981 m
Sets the gate hold time.
The setting range may vary, depending
on the operating frequency.
5 Input Channels Decay 44.1 kHz: 110 m to 46 s
48 kHz: 101 m to 42.3 s
88.2 kHz: 55 m to 23 s
96 kHz: 51 m to 21.1 s
Sets the speed for closing the gate.
The setting range may vary, depending
on the operating frequency.
6 Solo ON/OFF Turns solo ON.
7 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s input.
8 Fader - to +10 dB Sets the input signal level for each
channel.
9 Master Output Gain Correct ON/OFF Turns ON gain correction.
) On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s output.
! Master - to +10 dB Sets the output signal level.
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
362
Delay Matrix
This is a matrix mixer that allows you to set an independent delay time and level adjustment for each
output. There are three groups of delay matrix, based on the number of inputs: 2 Input, 4 Input, and 8
Input. In each of the three groups there are five mixers available with 2, 4, 8, 12, or 16 outputs, for a
total of 15 components.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of input and output
channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the
component editor.
The delay matrix component editor consists of four sections: input, output, matrix, and block. The
[Master] buttons in the [Input] and [Output] sections display windows where you can make master
input and output settings. Delay and level for each channel are set in separate windows that display
four channels each.
Section Name Function
1 Input Master Opens the Input Master window.
2 Output Master Opens the Output Master window.
3 Matrix Delay meters
Output level meters
Displays output level and delay time for each output
channel. Clicking here displays the Crosspoint window.
2 Input
4 Input
8 Input
1
2
4
5
7
6
3
Delay Matrix component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
363
Matrix (Delay Meter/Output Level Meter)
The upper row has delay meters, while the middle row has output level meters. You can view
parameters for all output channels at once.
When you click the output channel number on the matrix, the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One
Output] editor window opens. When you click the input channel number on the left side of the
matrix, the [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window opens.
The matrix is divided into groups. For the 2 Input matrix, each group has two input channels and
four output channels. For the 4 Input matrix, each group has four input channels and four output
channels. Groups in matrixes with more than four inputs are the same as for the 4 Input matrix.
When you place the mouse pointer over a group, its channel numbers are highlighted. Click to
open the [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window.
4 Block On Turns ON output for all channels in the Crosspoint
window. Lights the [ON] button (does not change the
delay matrix component editor).
5 Off Turns OFF output for all channels in the Crosspoint
window (does not change the delay matrix component
editor).
6 Nominal Resets all output levels in the Crosspoint window,
making them 0 dB. The delay settings are not changed.
7 Minimum Resets all output levels in the Crosspoint window,
making them - dB. The delay settings are not
changed.
Section Name Function
Output Level Meter
Delay Meter
Click to open the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs
to One Output] editor window.
Click to open the [Delay Matrix - One Input
to All Outputs] editor window.
Click to open the “In 1-4 x
Out 1-4” Crosspoint window.
Click to open the “In 5-8 x Out
5-8” Crosspoint window.
For 2 input matrix, click to
open the “In 1-2 x Out 1-4”
Crosspoint window.
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
364
Input Master
If you click the [Input Master] button in the delay matrix component editor, it will open the [Delay
Matrix - InputMaster] editor window. Here you can turn the master input for each channel ON and
OFF and set the level.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of each channel’s signal.
2 Level - to +10 dB Sets the level of the signal from each channel’s
input.
3 Solo ON/OFF Turns ON solo for each channel.
4 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s input.
5 Block On -- Turns ON input for all channels in the Input Master
window. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up.
6 Off -- Turns OFF input for all channels in the Input Master
window.
7 Nominal -- Resets all input signal levels in the Input Master
window, making them 0 dB.
8 Minimum -- Resets all input signal levels in the Input Master
windows, making them - dB.
5
6
8
7
2
1
3
4
[Delay Matrix - InputMaster] editor window
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
365
Output Master
If you click the [Output Master] button in the delay matrix component editor, it will open the [Delay
Matrix - OutputMaster] editor window. Here you can turn the master output for each channel ON
and OFF and set the level.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Output Meter -- Displays the output signal level for each channel.
2 Level - to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel.
3 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s output.
4 Block On -- Turns ON output for all channels in the Output
Master window. When turned ON, the [On] button
lights up.
5 Off -- Turns OFF output for all channels in the Output
Master window.
6 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master
window, making them 0 dB.
7 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master
window, making them - dB.
4
5
7
6
2
1
3
[Delay Matrix - OutputMaster] editor window
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
366
All Inputs to One Output
When you click the output channel number on the matrix, the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One
Output] editor window opens. All input channels and one output channel are displayed. The output
channel is the one you have clicked on in the delay mixer component editor.
Output Channel Switching
The [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window displays the output channel clicked on
in the delay matrix component editor. The [Channel] buttons in the [Output] section of the [Delay
Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the
window.
If you make the delay matrix component editor active while the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One
Output] editor window is displayed, and then click another output channel, that channel group will
be displayed in the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window.
One [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window is displayed for each delay matrix
component editor.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Bus Send Level Delay 0 to 500 Sets the delay time for each input channel.
2 Level - to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each input channel.
3 On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for each input channel.
4 Output Channel -- Displays the selected output channel. Select
another channel from a menu.
5 On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for the channel displayed in
the window.
6 Meter -- Displays the output signal level of the channel
displayed in the window.
7 Block On -- Turns ON all channel inputs. When turned ON, the
[On] button lights up.
8 Off -- Turns OFF all channel inputs.
9 Nominal -- Resets all of input signal levels, making them 0 dB.
) Minimum -- Resets all of input signal levels, making them - dB.
1
2
3
4
56
7
8
)
9
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
367
One Input to All Outputs
When you click the input channel number on the left side of matrix, the [Delay Matrix - One Input to
All Outputs] editor window opens. One input channel and all output channels are displayed. The
input channel is the one you have clicked on in the delay mixer component editor.
Input Channel Switching
The [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window displays the input channel for the
channel number clicked on in the delay matrix component editor.
The [Channel] buttons in the [Input] section of the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor
window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Channel -- Displays the selected input channel. Select another
channel from a menu.
2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.
3 Level - to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.
4 Solo ON/OFF Turns solo ON.
5 On ON/OFF Turns input ON.
6 Bus Send Level Delay 0 to 500 Sets the delay time for each output channel.
7 Level - to +10 dB Sets the signal level for each output channel.
8 On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for each output channel.
9 Block On -- Turns ON all channel outputs. When turned ON, the
[On] button lights up.
) Off -- Turns OFF all channel outputs.
! Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels, making them 0 dB.
@ Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels, making them - dB.
9
)
!
1
2
4
5
3
6
7
8
@
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
368
If you make the delay matrix component editor active while the [Delay Matrix - One Input to All
Outputs] editor window is displayed, and then click another input channel, that channel will be
displayed in the [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window.
One [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window is displayed for each delay matrix
component editor.
Crosspoint
If you click a level meter in the delay
matrix component editor, that group's
[Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor
window will be displayed. Turns the
input channels ON and OFF and sets
their levels. Just like the delay matrix
component editor, the input channels
are arranged vertically while the output
channels are arranged horizontally.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Channel -- Switches to another channel group.
2 Output Channel -- Switches to another channel group.
3 Bus Send Level Delay 0 to 500 Sets the delay time for each crosspoint.
4 Level - to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each crosspoint.
5 On ON/OFF Turns ON output for each crosspoint.
6 Block On -- Turns ON output for all channels in the Crosspoint
window. The [On] button lights up.
7 Off -- Turns OFF output for all channels in the Crosspoint
window.
8 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Crosspoint
window, making them 0 dB.
9 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Crosspoint
window, making them - dB.
6
7
9
8
1
2
3
4
5
[Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
369
Channel Group Switching
The [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window displays four channels each for Input and Output.
It displays the channel group you click on in the delay matrix component editor. The [Channel]
buttons in the [Input] and [Output] sections of the [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window switch
the channel group that is displayed in the window.
If you click another channel group when the delay matrix component editor is active and an [Delay
Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window is displayed, that channel group will be displayed in the open
[Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window.
Only one [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] matrix window is displayed for each delay matrix component
editor.
Matrix Mixer
In the matrix mixer, the input channels and output buses are arranged in a checkerboard
configuration. You can adjust the group balance for each output bus. There are 24 components in the
in the Matrix Mixer group, each with different numbers of input and output channels. There are seven
groups based on the number of inputs, as follows: 2 Input, 4 Input, 8 Input, 12 Input, 16 Input, 32
Input, and 64 Input.
[Input] section
[Channel] menu
[Output] section
[Channel] menu
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
370
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of input and output
channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the
component editor.
The matrix mixer component editor consists of four sections: input, output, matrix, and block. The
[Master] buttons in the [Input] and [Output] sections display windows where you can make master
input and output settings. The level for each channel is set in separate windows that display four
channels each.
NOTE
If a 64 input 64 output Matrix Mixer component or a 64 input 32 output Matrix Mixer component is placed in the DME64N
configuration window, no other components can be used even though the resource meter does not reach 100%. The 64
input 64 output Matrix Mixer component or the 64 input 32 output Matrix Mixer component cannot be used in the DME24N.
Section Name Function
1 Input Master Opens the Input Master window.
2 Output Master Opens the Output Master window.
3 Matrix Output level meters These meters display the output level for each channel.
Clicking here displays the Crosspoint window.
4 Block On Turns ON output for all channels in the Crosspoint window.
Lights the [ON] button (does not change the matrix mixer
component editor).
5 Off Turns OFF output for all channels in the Crosspoint window
(does not change the matrix mixer component editor).
6 Nominal Resets all output levels in the Crosspoint window, making
them 0 dB.
7 Minimum Resets all output levels in the Crosspoint window, making
them - dB.
4
5
7
6
1
2
3
Matrix Mixer component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
371
Matrix (Output Level Meters)
In the matrix, you can view levels for all output channels at once. The meter will be grayed out when
the corresponding channel is set to Off.
When you click an output channel number on the matrix, the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One
Output] editor window opens. When you click the input channel number on the left side of the
matrix, the [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window opens.
The matrix is divided into groups, each with four input channels and four output channels. When
you place the mouse pointer over a group, its channel numbers are highlighted. Click to open the
[Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window.
Output level meter
Click to open the [Matrix Mixer - All
Inputs to One Output] editor window.
Click to open the [Matrix Mixer - One
Input to All Outputs] editor window.
Click to open the “In 1-4 x Out 5-8”
[Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
372
Input Master
If you click the [Input Master] button in the matrix mixer component editor, it will open the [Matrix
Mixer - InputMaster] editor window. Here you can turn the master input for each channel ON and
OFF and set the level.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of each channel’s signal.
2 Level - to +10 dB Sets the signal level from each channel input to the
output bus.
3 Solo ON/OFF Turns ON solo for each channel.
4 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s input.
5 Block On -- Turns ON input for all channels in the Input Master
window. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up.
6 Off -- Turns OFF input for all channels in the Input Master
window.
7 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Input Master
window, making them 0 dB.
8 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Input master
window, making them - dB.
[Matrix Mixer - InputMaster] GfB^[EB hE
5
6
8
7
1
3
4
2
[Matrix Mixer - InputMaster] editor window
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
373
Output Master Window
If you click the [Output Master] button in the matrix mixer component editor, it will open the Output
Master window. Her you can turn the master output for each channel ON and OFF and set the level.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Output Meter -- Displays the output signal level for each channel.
2 Level - to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel.
3 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s output.
4 Block On -- Turns ON output for all channels in the Output
Master window. When turned ON, the [On] button
lights up.
5 Off -- Turns OFF output for all channels in the Output
Master window.
6 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master
window, making them 0 dB.
7 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master
window, making them - dB.
[Matrix Mixer - OutputMaster] GfB^[EB hE
4
5
7
6
1
3
2
[Matrix Mixer - OutputMaster] editor window
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
374
All Inputs to One Output
When you click the output channel number on the matrix, the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One
Output] editor window opens. All input channels and one output channel are displayed. The output
channel is the one you have clicked on in the matrix mixer component editor.
Output Channel Switching
[Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window displays the output channel clicked in the
matrix mixer component editor. The [Channel] buttons in the [Output] section of the [Matrix Mixer -
All Inputs to One Output] editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window.
If you make the matrix mixer component editor active while the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One
Output] editor window is displayed, and then click another output channel, that channel group will
be displayed in the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window.
One [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window is displayed for each matrix mixer
component editor.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Bus Send Level Level - to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each input channel.
2 On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for each input channel.
3 Output Channel -- Displays the selected output channel. Select
another channel from a menu.
4 On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for the channel displayed in
the window.
5 Meter -- Displays the output signal level of the channel
displayed in the window.
6 Block On -- Turns ON all channel inputs. When turned ON, the
[On] button lights up.
7 Off -- Turns OFF all channel inputs.
8 Nominal -- Resets all input signal levels, making them 0 dB.
9 Minimum -- Reset all input signal levels, making them - dB.
1
2
3
45
6
7
9
8
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
375
One Input to All Outputs
When you click the input channel number on the left side of the matrix, the [Matrix Mixer - One Input
to All Outputs] editor window opens. One input channel and all output channels are displayed. The
input channel is the one you have clicked on in the delay mixer component editor.
Input Channel Switching
The [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window displays the input channel for the
channel number clicked on in the matrix mixer component editor.
The [Channel] buttons in the [Input] section of the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor
window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window.
If you make the matrix mixer component editor active while the [Matrix Mixer- One Input to All
Outputs] editor window is displayed, and then click another input channel, that channel will be
displayed in the [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window.
One [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window is displayed for each matrix mixer
component editor.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Channel -- Displays the selected input channel. Select
another channel from a menu.
2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal.
3 Level - to +10 dB Sets the input signal level.
4 Solo ON/OFF Turns solo ON.
5 On ON/OFF Turns input ON.
6 Bus Send Level Level - to +10 dB Sets the signal level for each output channel.
7 On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for each output channel.
8 Block On -- Turns ON all channel outputs. When turned
ON, the [On] button lights up.
9 Off -- Turns OFF all channel outputs.
) Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels, making them
0 dB.
! Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels, making them
- dB.
8
9
!
)
1
2
4
5
3
6
7
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
376
Crosspoint
If you click a level meter in the matrix mixer component editor, the output crosspoint window for the
group will be displayed. Turns the input channels ON and OFF and sets their levels. Just like the
matrix mixture component editor, the input channels are arranged vertically while the output
channels are arranged horizontally.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Channel -- Switches to another channel group.
2 Output Channel -- Switches to another channel group.
3 Bus Send Level Level - to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each crosspoint.
4 On ON/OFF Turns ON output for each crosspoint.
5 Block On -- Turns ON output for all channels in the Crosspoint
window. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up.
6 Off -- Turns OFF output for all channels in the Crosspoint
window.
7 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Crosspoint
window, making them 0 dB.
8 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Crosspoint
window, making them - dB.
[Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] GfB^[EB hE
5
6
8
7
1
2
3
4
[Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
377
Channel Group Switching
The [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window displays four channels each for Input and Output.
It displays the channel group that was clicked on in the matrix mixer component editor. The
[Channel] buttons in the [Input] and [Output] sections of the [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor
window switch the channel group that is displayed.
If you click another channel group when the matrix mixer component editor is active and an [Matrix
Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window is displayed, that channel group will be displayed in the open
[Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window.
Only one [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] matrix window is displayed for each matrix mixer component
editor.
[Input] section
[Channel] menu
[Output] section
[Channel] menu
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
378
Pan
The Pan group contains the following subgroups: LCR, LR, and Surround.
Pan Nominal Position
Component editors for both LCR and Surround contain the “Pan Nominal Position” parameter.
The button for that parameter displays its current setting. Clicking the button displays a menu with
[Center] and [LR], which are used to set the pan 0 dB reference.
Center (Center Nominal)
Uses the center volume as a reference, setting it as 0 dB. The LR speakers are -3 dB.
LR (LR Nominal)
Uses the LR speaker volumes as a reference, setting them as 0 dB. The center volume is +3 dB.
LCR
In the LCR component, one input is divided into left, center, and right outputs. The number of outputs
is triple the inputs. Components are available with 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16 channels.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies
depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor.
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
379
LR
Separates a single input into left and right outputs. Components are available with 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and
16 channels.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies
depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor.
Parameter Setting Range Function
1 CSR 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the center signal to LR.
2 Pan L63 - Center - R63 Sets LR orientation.
3 Pan Nominal Position Center
LR
Selects the nominal position from a menu.
Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Pan L63 - R63 Sets the LR orientation.
2 Pan Nominal Position Center
LR
Selects the nominal position from a menu.
1
3
2
LCR component editor
2
1
Pan component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
380
Surround
There are three types of surround pan components in the Surround subgroup: 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1.
The surround pan component editor has a two-dimensional surround pan graph where you can set the
location of the sound image.
You can set the sound location using the mouse in the two-dimensional surround pan graph.
The sound image location is displayed at the bottom of the two-dimensional surround pan graph, but
numbers cannot be entered there.
Name
Location,
Setting Range
Function
1 2D Surround Pan Graph -- Sets the sound image orientation. You can
move the sound image by clicking and
dragging.
2 Speaker
Button
L Left L63 F63 Clicking here moves the sound image to the
button location.
3 C Center C F63
4 R Right R63 F63
5 Ls Left Surround L63 R63
6 Bs Back Surround C R63
7 Rs Right Surround R63 R63
8 LFE Low Frequency
Effect (Sub Woofer)
-- Indicates that there is a sub woofer. Clicking
makes the LFE level 0 dB. The sound image
does not move by clicking.
9 Left-Right Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the LR sound image.
) Front-Back Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the front-back sound image.
1
2
8
3 4
5 6 7
9 )
Surround 6.1 component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
381
Dragging
You can move the control by dragging it with the mouse.
Click
If you click within the graph, the control point will move to that position.
Click
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
382
Speaker Button
If you click any speaker button besides the [LFE] button, the control point will jump to that
speaker’s position.
Click
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
383
Surround 3-1
Surround 3-1 has four channel surround pan, with three channels in front, and one in the rear. There
is one input and four outputs.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it.
Section Name/Parameter Setting Range Function
1 2D Surround
Pan Graph
2D Surround
Pan Graph
-- Sets the sound image orientation. You can
move the sound image by clicking and
dragging.
2 Speaker Button -- Clicking here moves the sound image to the
button location.
3 Position Left-Right Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the LR surround location.
4 Front-Back Position F63 - C - R63 Displays the front-back surround location.
5 Divergence Front 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the front-center
signal to front L and front R.
6 Pan Nominal Position Center
LR
Selects the nominal position from a menu.
1
2
3 4
5
6
2
Surround 3-1 component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
384
Surround 5.1
Surround 5.1 has surround pan with three channels in front, two in the rear, and one sub woofer
channel. There is one input and six outputs.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it.
Section Name/Parameter Setting Range Function
1 2D Surround
Pan Graph
2D Surround
Pan Graph
-- Sets the sound image orientation. You can
move the sound image by clicking and
dragging.
2 Speaker Button -- Clicking here moves the sound image to the
button location.
3 Position Left-Right Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the LR surround location.
4 Front-Back Position F63 - C - R63 Displays the front-back surround location.
5 Divergence Front 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the front-center
signal to front L and front R.
6 LFE Level - to +10 dB Sets output level to the sub woofer.
7 Pan Nominal Position Center
LR
Selects the nominal position from a menu.
1
3 4
5
6
7
2
2
Surround 5.1 component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
385
Surround 6.1
Surround 6.1 has surround pan with three channels in front, three in the rear, and one sub woofer
channel. There is one input and seven outputs.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it.
Section Name/Parameter Setting Range Function
1 2D Surround
Pan Graph
2D Surround
Pan Graph
-- Sets the sound image orientation. You can
move the sound image by clicking and
dragging.
2 Speaker Button -- Clicking here moves the sound image to the
button location.
3 Position Left-Right Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the LR surround location.
4 Front-Back Position F63 - C - R63 Displays the front-back surround location.
5 Divergence Front 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the front-center
signal to front L and front R.
6 Rear 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the rear-center
signal to rear L and rear R.
7 LFE Level - to +10 dB Sets output level to the sub woofer.
8 Pan Nominal Position Center
LR
Selects the nominal position from a menu.
1
2
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
Surround 6.1 component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
386
Router
The router assigns inputs to outputs. Each of the six router groups has a different number of inputs.
The groups are 1 input, 2 input, 4 input, 8 input, 12 input and 16 input. Each group has five
components, with 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16 outputs.
Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies
depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor.
Routers let you route signals from various [Input] locations by connecting them to various [Output]
locations.
One output can be connected to one input only. A single input can be output to multiple channels, but
multiple inputs cannot be output over a single channel. In other words, you can distribute the inputs,
but you cannot mix them. You cannot setup routing for more signals than the number of output
channels.
1 Input
2 Input
8 Input
12 Input
16 Input
4 Input
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
387
Routing Settings
To change an assignment, click at the position where the desired input and output channels
intersect. When the mouse pointer is moved over a cell, the input and output channels are
highlighted, and a red line is displayed connecting them. Click to set routing for that position. If
another output channel has been assigned to the clicked input channel, the original assignment
will not be cleared. If another input channel has been assigned to the clicked output channel, the
original assignment will be cleared.
Clearing Routing Settings
If you click the dot that indicates routing, the routing indicated by that dot will be cleared and the
dot will be erased.
Click
Not Cleared
Cleared
Click
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
388
Source Selector
This component selects a single input source from multiple input sources.
“Position” is the number of input sources, and “Channel” is the number of channels included in the
source. For example, a “4 Position 2 Channel” component allows you to select a single 2-channel
source from four 2-channel input sources.
3 Position and 16 Position components are all 1 Channel types, while 1, 2, and 6 Channel versions of 4
Position and 8 Position components are provided.
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
389
Double-click a component to open the component editor. The component editor is the same for all
types, the only difference being the number of sources.
The Source Selector connects the selected input to the output. For example, if you select [1] for a 4
Position 2 Channel component, IN1-1 will be connected to OUT-1 and IN1-2 will be connected to
OUT2. If you select [2] IN2-1 will be connected to OUT-1 and IN2-2 will be connected to OUT2.
Source Selector Component
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
390
Speaker Processor
The Speaker Processor is a crossover processor that includes APF (All Pass Filter), horn EQ, and
limiter functions. Six component types are available: 1 Way, 2 Way, 3 Way, 4 Way, 5 Way, and 6 Way.
Speaker Processor components have one input and one or multiple outputs.
Double-click a component to open the component editor.
Name Function
1 Crossover response (phase) Crossover phase response, color coded for
output channel.
2 Crossover response (level) Crossover level response, color coded for
each output channel.
3 Input meter Displays the input signal level.
4 Output meter Displays the output level for each band.
5 Crossover Curve Display Button Turns crossover curve display for each
output channel on or off.
Section Parameter Range Function
6 Delay Delay ON/OFF Applies delay to the crossover response.
7 PEQ PEQ ON/OFF Applies PEQ to the crossover response.
1
3
4
2
8 9 ) ! @ # $
5655 7
Speaker processor Component
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
391
Different numbers of channels are provided by each component variation.
Each frequency band has its own color, with Low being red, Mid being green, and so on.
8 Navigator Input Level - to +10 dB Specifies the input signal level.
9 Crossover Opens the crossover editor window.
) Delay Opens the delay editor window.
! PEQ Opens the parametric equalizer editor
window.
@ Output Level - to +10 dB Sets the output level from each output
channel.
# Mute ON/OFF Mutes the output of each output channel.
$ Limiter Opens the limiter editor window.
1 Way ALL
2 Way Low/High
3 Way Low/Mid/High
4 Way Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High
5 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High
6 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/Mid/High-Mid/High
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
392
Graph Control Points
The crossover level control points indicate [Output Level] and [Frequency]. The control points will
move in response to [Output Level] changes made via the knobs or edit boxes. The [Output Level]
and [Frequency] parameters can also be changed by directly dragging the control points.
Changes to the [Frequency] parameter are shown on the crossover phase response graph.
The control point in the center of the graph can be dragged vertically to change the [Output Level]
parameter.
Control points at the intersections between the frequency bands can be dragged horizontally to
change the [Frequency].
The [Output Level] parameter changes.
The crossover phase response will change.
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
393
Crossover
Click the Speaker Processor [Crossover] button to open the crossover editor window.
Section Parameter Range Function
1 Polarity Polarity Normal/Inverted Inverts the polarity of each output channel.
2 Mute Mute ON/OFF Mutes the output of each output channel.
This parameter is linked to the Mute setting in
the original window.
3 Frequency Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the crossover frequency between output
channels.
The display appears as a dotted line when
muted.
4 LPF Type Thru
6dB/Oct
12dB/Oct AdjustGc
12dB/Oct Butrwrth
12dB/Oct Bessel
12dB/Oct Linkwitz
18dB/Oct AdjustGc
18dB/Oct Butrwrth
18dB/Oct Bessel
24dB/Oct AdjustGc
24dB/Oct Butrwrth
24dB/Oct Bessel
24dB/Oct Linkwitz
36dB/Oct AdjustGc
36dB/Oct Butrwrth
36dB/Oct Bessel
48dB/Oct AdjustGc
48dB/Oct Butrwrth
48dB/Oct Bessel
48dB/Oct Linkwitz
Sets the roll-off slope and filter type for each
octave.
The filter is bypassed when [Thru] is
selected.
5 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency.
6 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB Sets the cutoff frequency gain when the
[Type] setting is [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc).
1
2
3
47
5 68 9
[Speaker Processor - Crossover] editor window
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
394
Delay
Click the Speaker Processor [Delay] button to open the window. Delay can be set independently
for each output channel.
7 HPF Type Thru
6dB/Oct
12dB/Oct AdjustGc
12dB/Oct Butrwrth
12dB/Oct Bessel
12dB/Oct Linkwitz
18dB/Oct AdjustGc
18dB/Oct Butrwrth
18dB/Oct Bessel
24dB/Oct AdjustGc
24dB/Oct Butrwrth
24dB/Oct Bessel
24dB/Oct Linkwitz
36dB/Oct AdjustGc
36dB/Oct Butrwrth
36dB/Oct Bessel
48dB/Oct AdjustGc
48dB/Oct Butrwrth
48dB/Oct Bessel
48dB/Oct Linkwitz
Sets the roll-off slope and filter type for each
octave.
The filter is bypassed when [Thru] is
selected.
8 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency.
9 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB Sets the cutoff frequency gain when the
[Type] setting is [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc).
Parameter Range Function
1 Delay ms: 0 to 500
Sample: the range
depends on the Fs value.
Meter: 0 to 171.8
Feet: 0 to 563.6
Frame: the range depends
on the Frame value.
Beat: the range depends
on the Beat value.
Sets the delay time.
Two edit boxes show milliseconds and the unit
specified in the [Delay Scale] section.
Sets the output level for each band.
2 On ON/OFF Turns delay ON.
3 Delay Scale ms
Sample
Meter
Feet
Frame
Beat
Selects the delay time units. The selected button will
light and the [Delay] edit box will change accordingly.
When [Beat] is selected the knobs can be used to
adjust BPM.
Section Parameter Range Function
3
2
1
[Speaker Processor - Delay] editor window
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
395
Parametric Equalizer
Click the Crossover Processor [PEQ] button to open the window. Parametric equalization is
provided for each crossover band.
*1 APF: The APF (All Pass Filter) is a filter that passes all frequency bands while affecting only the phase. Used to match the phase of the
crossover bands.
APF 1st shifts the phase from 0° to 180°, while APF 2nd shifts the phase from 0° to 360°. APF 2nd also allows Q adjustment.
*2 Horn EQ: CD (Constant Directivity) horn speakers exhibit a roll-off in high-frequency level.
Horn EQ is provided to compensate for this roll-off. For this reason the gain can only be set to higher than 0dB, and the frequency higher than
500Hz.
Name Function
1 Crossover response (phase) Shows crossover phase response.
2 Crossover response (level) Shows crossover level response.
Parameter Range Function
3 Type PEQ
L.SHELF 6dB/Oct
L.SHELF 12dB/Oct
H.SHELF 6dB/Oct
H.SHELF 12dB/Oct
HPF
LPF
APF
*1
1st
APF
*1
2nd
Horn EQ
*2
Select a filter type from the menu.
4 B/W 0.090 to 6.672 Sets the octave bandwidth for each band.
5 Q 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the Q for each band.
6 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency for each band.
7 Gain -18 dB to +18 dB Sets the gain for each band.
8 Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses the PEQ for each band.
9 PEQ On ON/OFF Turns PEQ ON.
9
3
5
4
6
1
2
7
8
[Speaker Processor - PEQ] edit window
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
396
Limiter
Click the Speaker Processor [Limiter] button to open the window. Limiter settings are provided for
each output channel.
Name Function
1 Limiter Curve A graphic representation of limiter response. The
horizontal axis represents input level, and the vertical
axis represents output level.
2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the amount of gain reduction.
3 Output Meter Displays the output level.
Parameter Range Function
4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold level.
5 Attack Fast
Mid
Slow
Manual (0 to 120ms)
Sets the attack time.
6 Release Fast
Mid
Slow
Manual
(44.1kHz: 6ms to46s
48kHz: 5ms to 42.3s
88.2kHz: 3ms to 23s
96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s)
Sets the release time.
With the [Fast], [Mid], or [Slow] settings the optimum
value is automatically set based on the longest
wavelength audio signal received by the limiter. Three
settings are available: [Fast], [Mid], and [Slow].
7 On ON/OFF Turns the limiter ON. The limiter is bypassed when the
button is turned OFF.
1
4 5 6
23 7
[Speaker Processor - Limiter] Editor Window
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
397
SPX
SPX is an effect component that supports many different effect applications, such as reverb, delay,
and modulation effects, along with complex combinations of multiple effects. Although the SPX
component is a single component, it encompasses 43 effect types.
When you change the effect type, right-click the SPX component to display the context menu, click
[Recall Component Library], then select the effect type from the [Effect Type] submenu.
Double-click this component to display the component editor for it.
Name Function
1 Input Meter Displays the input signal level.
2 [Mix Balance] Control Adjusts the balance between the fundamental tone and the effect tone.
3 [Bypass] button When turned ON, the input signal is output without change.
4 Output Meter Displays the output signal level.
5 Other Parameters Other parameters vary according to the effect type.
SPX component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
398
Other effect parameters vary according to the selected effect type, as shown below.
Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function
Reverb Hall
Reverb Room
Reverb Stage
Reverb Plate
One input, two
output hall, room,
stage, and plate
reverb simulations,
all with gates.
Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time
Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
Lo.Ratio 0.1 to 2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio
Diff. 0 to 10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)
Density 0 to 100% Reverb density
E/R Dly 0.0 to 100.0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb
E/R Bal. 0 to 100% Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all
reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Gate Lvl OFF, -60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in
Attack 0 to 120 ms Gate opening speed
Hold 44.1kHz: 0.02ms to 2.13s
48kHz: 0.02 ms to 1.96s
88.2kHz: 0.01ms to 1.06s
96kHz: 0.01ms to 981ms
Gate open time
Decay 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s
48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s
88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s
96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s
Gate closing speed
Early Ref.
One input, two
output early
reflections.
Type S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers,
Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
RoomSize 0.1 to 20.0 Reflection spacing
Liveness 0 to 10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead,
10 = live)
Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
Diff. 0 to 10 Reflection diffusion (left-right reflection spread)
Density 0 to 100% Reflection density
ER Num. 1 to 19 Number of early reflections
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Gate Reverb
Reverse Gate
One input, two
output early
reflections with
gate, and early
reflections with
reverse gate.
Type Type-A, Type-B Type of early reflection simulation
RoomSize 0.1 to 20.0 Reflection spacing
Liveness 0 to 10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead,
10 = live)
Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
Diff. 0 to 10 Reflection diffusion (left-right reflection spread)
Density 0 to 100% Reflection density
ER Num. 1 to 19 Number of early reflections
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Mono Delay
One input, one
output basic repeat
delay.
Delay 0.0 to 2730.0 ms Delay time
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
399
Stereo Delay
Two input, two
output basic stereo
delay.
Delay L 0.0 to 1350.0 ms Left channel delay time
Delay R 0.0 to 1350.0 ms Right channel delay time
FB.Gain L -99 to +99% Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-
phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
FB.Gain R -99 to +99% Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-
phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Mod.Delay
One input, two
output basic repeat
delay with
modulation.
Delay 0.0 to 2725.0 ms Delay time
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed
Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth
Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Delay LCR
One input, two
output 3-tap delay
(left, center, right).
Delay L 0.0 to 2730.0 ms Left channel delay time
Delay C 0.0 to 2730.0 ms Center channel delay time
Delay R 0.0 to 2730.0 ms Right channel delay time
Delay FB 0.0 to 2730.0 ms Feedback delay time
Level L -100 to +100% Left channel delay level
Level C -100 to +100% Center channel delay level
Level R -100 to +100% Right channel delay level
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Echo
Two input, two
output stereo delay
with crossed
feedback loop.
Delay L 0.0 to 1350.0 ms Left channel delay time
Delay R 0.0 to 1350.0 ms Right channel delay time
FB.Dly L 0.0 to 1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time
FB.Dly R 0.0 to 1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time
FB.Gain L -99 to +99% Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-
phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
FB.Gain R -99 to +99% Right channel feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-
phase feedback)
L->R FBG -99 to +99% Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-
phase feedback)
R->L FBG -99 to +99% Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-
phase feedback)
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Chorus
Two input, two
output chorus
effect.
Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed
AM.Depth 0 to 100% Amplitude modulation depth
PM.Depth 0 to 100% Pitch modulation depth
Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time
Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
LSH F 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G -12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain
EQ F 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G -12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0 to 0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G -12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain
Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
400
Flange
Two input, two
output flange effect.
Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed
Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth
Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
LSH F 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G -12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain
EQ F 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G -12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0 to 0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G -12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain
Symphonic
Two input, two
output symphonic
effect.
Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed
Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth
Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time
Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
LSH F 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G -12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain
EQ F 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G -12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0 to 0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G -12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain
Phaser
Two input, two
output 16-stage
phaser.
Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed
Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Offset 0 to 100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
PHASE 0.00 to 354.38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance
Stage 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages
LSH F 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G -12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain
HSH F 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G -12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain
Auto Pan
Two input, two
output autopanner.
Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed
Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth
Direction L<->R, L->R, L<-R, Turn L, Turn
R
Panning direction
Wave Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform
LSH F 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G -12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain
EQ F 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G -12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0 to 0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G -12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain
Tremolo
Two input, two
output tremolo
effect.
Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed
Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth
Wave Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform
LSH F 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G -12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain
EQ F 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G -12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0 to 0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G -12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain
Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
401
HQ.Pitch
One input, two
output high-quality
pitch shifter.
Pitch -12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift
Fine -50 to +50 cents Pitch shift fine
Delay 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Delay time
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Mode 1 to 10 Pitch shift precision
Dual Pitch
Two input, two
output pitch shifter.
Pitch 1 -24 to +24 semitones Channel #1 pitch shift
Fine 1 -50 to +50 cents Channel #1 pitch shift fine
Pitch 2 -24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift
Fine 2 -50 to +50 cents Channel #2 pitch shift fine
Level 1 -100 to +100% Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase,
minus values for reverse phase)
Pan 1 L63 to R63 Channel #1 pan
Level 2 -100 to +100% Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase,
minus values for reverse phase)
Pan 2 L63 to R63 Channel #2 pan
Delay 1 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Channel #1 delay time
FB.Gain 1 -99 to +99% Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-
phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Delay 2 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Channel #2 delay time
FB.Gain 2 -99 to +99% Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-
phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Mode 1 to 10 Pitch shift precision
Rotary
One input, two
output rotary
speaker simulator.
Rotate STOP, START Rotation stop, start
Speed SLOW, FAST Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters)
Slow 0.05 to 10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed
Fast 0.05 to 10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed
Drive 0 to 100 Overdrive level
Accel 0 to 10 Acceleration at speed changes
Low 0 to 100 Low-frequency filter
High 0 to 100 High-frequency filter
Ring Mod.
Two input, two
output ring
modulator.
Source OSC, SELF Modulation source: oscillator or input signal
Osc.Freq. 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency
FM Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed
FM Depth 0 to 100% Oscillator frequency modulation depth
Mod.Filter
Two input, two
output modulation
filter.
Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed
Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth
Phase 0.00 to 354.38 degrees Left-channel modulation and right-channel
modulation phase difference
Type LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
Offset 0 to 100 Filter frequency offset
Reso. 0 to 20 Filter resonance
Level 0 to 100 Output level
Distortion
One input, two
output distortion
effect.
DST.Type DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2,
CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
Drive 0 to 100 Distortion drive
Master 0 to 100 Master volume
Tone -10 to +10 Tone
N.Gate 0 to 20 Noise reduction
Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
402
Amp Simulate
One input, two
output guitar amp
simulator.
AMP.Type STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH,
MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR,
CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT
Guitar amp simulation type
DST.Type DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2,
CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
Drive 0 to 100 Distortion drive
Master 0 to 100 Master volume
Bass 0 to 100 Bass tone control
Middle 0 to 100 Middle tone control
Treble 0 to 100 High tone control
Cab Dep 0 to 100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth
EQ F 100 to 8.0 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G -12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0 to 0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
N.Gate 0 to 20 Noise reduction
Dyna.Filter
Two input, two
output dynamically
controlled filter.
Sense 0 to 100 Sensitivity
Direction UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change
Decay 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s
48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s
88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s
96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s
Filter frequency change decay speed
Type LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type
Offset 0 to 100 Filter frequency offset
Reso. 0 to 20 Filter resonance
Level 0 to 100 Output Level
Dyna.Flange
Two input, two
output dynamically
controlled flanger.
Sense 0 to 100 Sensitivity
Direction UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change
Decay 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s
48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s
88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s
96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s
Decay speed
Offset 0 to 100 Delay time offset
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
LSH F 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G -12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain
EQ F 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G -12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q 10.0 to 0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G -12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain
Dyna.Phaser
Two input, two
output dynamically
controlled phaser.
Sense 0 to 100 Sensitivity
Direction UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change
Decay 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s
48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s
88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s
96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s
Decay speed
Offset 0 to 100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Stage 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages
LSH F 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G -12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain
HSH F 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency
HSH G -12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain
Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
403
Rev+Chorus
One input, two
output reverb and
chorus effects in
parallel.
Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time
Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diff. 0 to 10 Spread
Density 0 to 100% Reverb density
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Rev/Cho 0 to 100% Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100%
= all chorus)
Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed
AM.Depth 0 to 100% Amplitude modulation depth
PM.Depth 0 to 100% Pitch modulation depth
Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time
Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
Rev->Chorus
One input, two
output reverb and
chorus effects in
series.
Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time
Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diff. 0 to 10 Spread
Density 0 to 100% Reverb density
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Rev Bal. 0 to 100% Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all
chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb)
Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed
AM.Depth 0 to 100% Amplitude modulation depth
PM.Depth 0 to 100% Pitch modulation depth
Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time
Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
Rev+Flange
One input, two
output reverb and
flanger effects in
parallel.
Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time
Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diff. 0 to 10 Spread
Density 0 to 100% Reverb density
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Rev/Flg 0 to 100% Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100%
= all flange)
Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed
Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth
Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
Rev->Flange
One input, two
output reverb and
flanger effects in
series.
Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time
Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diff. 0 to 10 Spread
Density 0 to 100% Reverb density
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Rev Bal. 0 to 100% Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all
flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb)
Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed
Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth
Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
404
Rev+Sympho.
One input, two
output reverb and
symphonic effects
in parallel.
Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time
Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diff. 0 to 10 Spread
Density 0 to 100% Reverb density
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Rev/Sym 0 to 100% Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb,
100% = all symphonic)
Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed
Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth
Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time
Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
Rev->Sympho.
One input, two
output reverb and
symphonic effects
in series.
Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time
Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diff. 0 to 10 Spread
Density 0 to 100% Reverb density
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Rev Bal. 0 to 100% Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all
symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb)
Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed
Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth
Mod.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Modulation delay time
Wave Sine, Tri Modulation waveform
Rev->Pan
One input, two
output reverb and
autopan effects in
parallel.
Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time
Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diff. 0 to 10 Spread
Density 0 to 100% Reverb density
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Rev Bal. 0 to 100% Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all
panned reverb, 100% = all reverb)
Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed
Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth
Direction L<->R, L->R, L<-R, Turn L, Turn
R
Panning direction
Wave Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform
Delay+ER.
One input, two
output delay and
early reflections
effects in parallel.
Delay L 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Left channel delay time
Delay R 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Right channel delay time
FB.Dly 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Feedback delay time
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Dly/ER 0 to 100% Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay,
100% = all early reflections)
Type S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers,
Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
RoomSize 0.1 to 20.0 Reflection spacing
Liveness 0 to 10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead,
10 = live)
Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
Diff. 0 to 10 Spread
Density 0 to 100% Reverb density
ER Num. 1 to 19 Number of early reflections
Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
405
Delay->ER.
One input, two
output delay and
early reflections
effects in series.
Delay L 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Left channel delay time
Delay R 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Right channel delay time
FB.Dly 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Feedback delay time
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY.BAL 0 to 100% Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = all
early reflected delay, 100% = all delay)
Type S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers,
Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
RoomSize 0.1 to 20.0 Reflection spacing
Liveness 0 to 10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead,
10 = live)
Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
Diff. 0 to 10 Spread
Density 0 to 100% Reverb density
ER Num. 1 to 19 Number of early reflections
Delay+Reverb
One input, two
output delay and
reverb effects in
parallel.
Delay L 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Left channel delay time
Delay R 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Right channel delay time
FB.Dly 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Feedback delay time
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Delay Hi 0.1 to 1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Dly/Rev 0 to 100% Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% =
all reverb)
Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time
Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
Rev Hi 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diff. 0 to 10 Spread
Density 0 to 100% Reverb density
Delay->Reverb
One input, two
output delay and
reverb effects in
series.
Delay L 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Left channel delay time
Delay R 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Right channel delay time
FB.Dly 0.0 to 1000.0 ms Feedback delay time
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Delay Hi 0.1 to 1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Dly.Bal 0 to 100% Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all
delayed reverb, 100% = all delay)
Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time
Ini.Dly 0.0 to 500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
Rev Hi 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
Diff. 0 to 10 Spread
Density 0 to 100% Reverb density
Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
406
Dist->Delay
One input, two
output distortion
and delay effects in
series.
DST.Type DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2,
CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
Drive 0 to 100 Distortion drive
Master 0 to 100 Master volume
Tone -10 to +10 Tone control
N.Gate 0 to 20 Noise reduction
Delay 0.0 to 2725.0 ms Delay time
FB.Gain -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio
Freq. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz Modulation speed
Depth 0 to 100% Modulation depth
Dly.Bal 0 to 100% Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion,
100% = all delayed distortion)
Multi.Filter
Two input, two
output 3-band
multi-filter (24 dB/
octave).
Type 1 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
Type 2 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
Type 3 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
Freq. 1 28.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency
Freq. 2 28.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency
Freq. 3 28.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency
Level 1 0 to 100 Filter 1 level
Level 2 0 to 100 Filter 2 level
Level 3 0 to 100 Filter 3 level
Reso. 1 0 to 20 Filter 1 resonance
Reso. 2 0 to 20 Filter 2 resonance
Reso. 3 0 to 20 Filter 3 resonance
Stereo Reverb
Two input, two
output stereo
reverb.
Rev Time 0.3 to 99.0 s Reverb time
Rev Type Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type
Ini.Dly 0.0 to 100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins
Hi.Ratio 0.1 to 1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio
Lo.Ratio 0.1 to 2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio
Diff. 0 to 10 Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread)
Density 0 to 100% Reverb density
E/R Bal. 0 to 100% Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all
reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
407
M.Band Dyna.
Two input, two
output 3-band
dynamics
processor, with
individual solo and
gain reduction
metering for each
band.
Low Gain -96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level
Mid Gain -96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level
Hi. Gain -96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level
Presence -10 to +10 For positive values, the threshold of the high band is
lowered and the threshold of the low band is
increased. For negative values, the opposite will
occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected
the same.
Cmp.Thre -24.0 dB to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold
Cmp.Rat 1:1 to 20:1 Compressor ratio
Cmp.Atk 0 to 120 ms Compressor attack
Cmp.Rel 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s
48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s
88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s
96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s
Compressor release time
Cmp.Knee 0 to 5 Compressor knee
Lookup 0.0 to 100.0 ms Lookup delay
Cmp.Byp ON/OFF Compressor bypass
L-M XOver 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency
M-H XOver 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency
Slope -6 dB, -12 dB Filter slope
Ceiling -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Specifies the maximum output level
Exp.Thre -54.0 dB to -24.0 dB Expander threshold
Exp.Rat 1:1 to :1 Expander ratio
Exp.Rel 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s
48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s
88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s
96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s
Expander release time
Exp.Byp ON/OFF Expander bypass
Lim.Thre -12.0 dB to 0.0 dB Limiter threshold
Lim.Atk 0 to 120 ms Limiter attack
Lim.Rel 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s
48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s
88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s
96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s
Limiter release time
Lim.Byp ON/OFF Limiter bypass
Lim.Knee 0 to 5 Limiter knee
Low ON/OFF Low band solo
Mid ON/OFF Mid band solo
High ON/OFF High band solo
Effect Type Parameter Setting Range Function
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
408
Slot
Slot In
The Slot In Component only has outputs. 4, 8, and 16 channel types are provided.
Right-click the component and select [Open Slot In Component] from the contextual menu to open the
component editor. The component editor is the same for all types.
Name Function
1 Meter Shows the signal level for each channel.
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
409
Slot Out
The Slot Out component has only an input. There are three types of Slot In components: four-
channel, eight-channel, and 16 channel types.
The component editor can be displayed by right-clicking the component, then clicking [Open Slot
Out Component Editor] on the displayed context menu.
Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for each
channel.
2 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel's output.
3 Delay 0 to 24 Samples Sets the delay time.
4 Level - to ±0 dB Sets the output level.
5 Dither Off
16
20
24
Sets the quantization bit rate for conversion.
1
2
3
4
5
Slot Out component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
410
Cascade
Cascade In
The Cascade In Component only has outputs.
Only the DME64N has a Cascade In component, which can be displayed by checking [Show
Cascade Port] in the DME Device Properties dialog box.
Right-click the component and select [Open Component Editor] from the contextual menu to open the
component editor. The component editor is the same for all types.
Name Function
1 Meter Shows the signal level for each channel.
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
411
Cascade Out
The Cascade Out Component only has inputs.
Right-click the component and select [Open Component Editor] from the contextual menu to open the
component editor. The component editor is the same for all types.
Name Function
1 Meter Shows the signal level for each channel.
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
412
Internal Head Amp
In the DME24 configuration window, there are [Unit Input] and [Unit Output] blocks. They are the
Analog In and Analog Out DME24 I/O ports.
Unit Input
Double-click [Unit Input] to display the component editor for it.
Analog Out
Double-click [Unit Output] to display the component editor for it. The displayed parameters are the
same as for Slot Out component editor.
Parameter Setting Range Function
1 +48 ON/OFF Turns ON phantom power (+48V).
2 Gain +10 to -60 dB Sets the head amp gain.
1
2
Internal Head Amp component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
413
MY-Card
This shows the input and output for the card inserted into the DME expansion slot. The following
components are available, depending on the card types:
Input Format/Output Format
This is the I/O mode for high sample rate operation (88.2/96 kHz).
In the Double Channel Mode, high sampling rate data (88.2/96 kHz) is transmitted and received by
two channels, each channel handling the digital audio data at half the sampling rate. For this reason
the total number of available channels is halved, and even-numbered channels are unavailable.
In the Double Speed Mode digital audio data is transmitted and received at the current high sampling
rate (88.2/96 kHz).
In the Single Mode digital audio data is transmitted and received at half the current high sampling rate
(88.2/96 kHz).
Setting Examples
When the MY card word clock is used as the master word clock, Double FS determines whether the
speed of that word clock is to be doubled and used as the DME clock. The Double Fs setting is only
available the word clock from an MY Card is used.
Operation clock of related equipment The DME operation clock Input Format/Output Format
88.2/96 kHz (Double Channel) 88.2/96 kHz Double Channel
88.2/96 kHz (Double Speed) Double Speed
44.1k/48k Single
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
414
MY-Others
Double-click the block to display the component editor for it.This editor can be used for generic MY
card editing, but some parameters are not available. Use a card specific editor when available.
MY8-AE96S
Double-click the block to display the component editor for it.
Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Format Double Channel
Double Speed
Single
Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz.
2 Double Fs ON/OFF When ON the speed of the word clock from the MY
Card is doubled.
3 Output Format Double Channel
Double Speed
Single
Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz.
Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Format Double Channel
Double Speed
Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz.
2 Double Fs ON/OFF When ON the speed of the word clock from the MY
Card is doubled.
3 Output Format Double Channel
Double Speed
Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz.
4 Sampling Rate
Converter
ON/OFF Turns the sampling rate converter ON.
1
3
2
1
3
4
2
MY8-AE96S component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
415
MY16-AE/MY8-AE96/MY8-AE/MY8-AT/MY8-TD/MY16-TD/MY16-AT
Double-click the block to display the component editor for it.
Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Input Format Double Channel
Double Speed
Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz. For MY8-AE96, the
setting range is Double Channel/Double Speed. For
other cards, it is Double Channel/Single.
2 Double Fs ON/OFF When ON the speed of the word clock from the MY
Card is doubled. Only for MY16-AE/MY8-AE96/MY16-
TD. When On is set for the MY8-AE96, the Input Format
is Double Channel. When Off is set, the input format is
Double Speed.
3 Output Format Double Channel
Double Speed
Single
Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz. For MY8-AE96, the
setting range is Double Channel/Double Speed. For
other cards, it is Double Channel/Single.
1
3
2
Example: MY16-AE component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
416
MY16-C
Double-click the block to display the component editor for it.
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Setting Priority Setting Priority Hardware/
Software
The MY16-C switch settings take priority when
“Hardware” is selected, and the DME Designer
settings take priority when “Software” is
selected.
2 Bundle Number Input 0 to 65279 Sets the input bundle number.
Output 0 to 65279 Sets the output bundle number.
3 Serial Channel Rx OFF, 1 - 16 Sets the serial channel for the receive side.
Tx OFF, 1 - 16 Sets the serial channel for the send side.
4 Properties Bit Length Bit Off
16 bit
20 bit
24 bit
Sets the bit rate for output. Mutes the signal if
[Bit Off] is set.
5 Latency 5.33 ms
2.67 ms
1.33 ms
Sets the delay.
NOTE
The parameters will not link immediately when Setting Priority is switched.
Please edit another parameter after switching Setting Priority.
MY16-C R | [ l g G f B ^ [
1
2
3
4
5
MY16-C component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
417
Remote Controlled Head Amp
There are AD824 and AD8HR components arranged in the zone window.
AD824
Controls the Yamaha A/D converter AD824. The AD824 is an eight channel analog to digital
converter.
Double-click the component to display the component editor for it.
NOTE
If a DME is not selected in the properties dialog box, the component editor will not be displayed even if you double-click
(page 170).
Parameter Setting Range Function
1 +48 ON/OFF Turns ON phantom power (+48V).
2 Gain +10 to -62 dBu Sets the head amp gain.
3 Word Clock 48 kHz
44.1 kHz
BNC
Slot
Sets the operating frequency for the Word Clock.
1
2
3
AD824 component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
418
AD8HR
Controls the Yamaha A/D converter AD8HR. The AD8HR is an eight channel analog to digital
converter.
Double-click this component to display the component editor for it.
NOTE
If a DME is not selected in the properties dialog box, the component editor will not be displayed even if you double-click
(page 170).
Section Parameter Setting Range Function
1 Gain +48 ON/OFF Turns ON phantom power (+48V).
2 HPF ON/OFF Turns output ON.
3 Frequency 20 to 600Hz Sets the cutoff frequency.
4 Gain +10 to -62 dBu Sets the head amp gain.
5 Word Clock Word Clock 96 kHz
88.2 kHz
48 kHz
44.1 kHz
Word Clock In
Digital Out A
Sets the operating frequency for the Word
Clock.
Double Speed
Double Channel
Selects the operation for 88.2/96 kHz.
1
2
4
3
5
AD8HR component editor
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
419
Component Glossary
Adjustable Gc (AdjustGc)
One type of filter characteristic. With this setting, you can adjust Gc (gain on the cutoff frequency)
between -6 dB and +6 dB. If you set -3 dB it becomes a Butterworth filter. If you set -6 dB, it becomes
Linkwitz-Riley filter.
Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Programmable BPF,
Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor
Attack (Attack Time)
In dynamic components, sets the time period for compressing or expanding the signal after the
component operates. As the attack time is made faster, compression or expansion becomes more
instantaneous. As it is made slower, the initial attack part of the sound will not be compressed or
expanded.
Components: Crossover Processor, Compander, Crossover Processor II, Compressor, De-
Esser, Ducking, Expander, Gate, Limiter, Speaker Processor
Bessel
One type of filter characteristic. For curves where phase characteristics are important, Bessel has
gentler attenuation then Butterworth, and there is little distortion of the waveform when square waves
are passed through.
Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Programmable BPF,
Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor
Butterworth (Butrwrth)
One type of filter characteristics. This filter has the most general characteristics. The pass band is flat
and the gain for the cutoff frequency is -3 dB.
Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Programmable BPF,
Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor
Bypass
Passes the signal without changing it. When you turn this ON, bypassed sound (unchanged sound) is
output. When you turn this OFF, the sound is output with effects applied.
Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, GEQ, PEQ, BPF, HPF, LPF, Notch,
Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor, SPX
Decay (Decay Time)
Sets the time period until gain returns to normal after a trigger signal level falls below the threshold
value.
Components: Ducking, Gate, Auto Mixer
Delay
Sets the time period by which a signal is delayed.
Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Delay Long, Delay Short, Delay
Matrix, Speaker Processor, SPX, Slot Output, Unit Output
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
420
Delay Scale
Sets the units used for specifying the delay time.
Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Delay Long, Delay Short, Speaker
Processor
Divergence
Sets the ratio for sending the center signal to LR. When 100 percent is set, the signal will be sent to LR
only. When zero percent is set, the signal is sent to center only.
Components: LCR, Surround 3-1, Surround 5.1, Surround 6.1
Fade
Sets the action of the fader when there is a large change in its position during scene recall.
When you turn this ON, the fader moves gradually to the position after the jump. If you turn this OFF, it
immediately jumps to the parameters saved in the recalled scene.
Component: Fader
Frequency
Sets a frequency. In the de-esser, this sets the lowest frequency of the signal to be compressed when
the component is operating. In the BPF, HPF, and LPF filters, this sets the cutoff frequency. In the
graphic equalizer, it is also used as the frequency band button.
Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, De-Esser, GEQ, PEQ,
BPF, HPF, LPF, Notch, Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Oscillator,
Speaker Processor, SPX, Remote HA
Gain
Sets the amplification factor for the entire signal level.
Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Compander, Compressor,
De-Esser, Expander, GEQ, PEQ, Auto Mixer, Speaker Processor, Remote HA, DME24N HA-AD
Gain Correct
In the Auto-Mixer, automatically controls the output level for the number of open channels. In
situations, where multiple microphones are used, feedback may occur because many channels are
open at the same time. Feedback can be avoided by using gain correct.
Component: Auto Mixer
Hold (Hold Time)
Sets how long the gate stays open or the ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen
below the threshold level.
Components: Ducking, Gate, Auto Mixer, SPX
KeyIn
Tur ns an input signal connected to a component's KeyIn port into a trigger that activates the
component. You can select the trigger source in components that have KeyIn ports.
Components: Compander, Compressor, Ducking, Expander, Gate, Limiter
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
421
Knee
In compressors, de-essers, and expanders, sets the way in which compression or expansion will be
applied after the signal exceeds the threshold. The following range of settings is available: HARD, 1,
2, 3, 4, 5.
If Hard is set, the signal level changes to a straight line following the specified slope when the trigger
signal exceeds the threshold.
If a value between 1 and 5 (5 = softest) is specified, the curve gradually changes when the threshold
is exceeded, producing a more natural sound.
Components: Compander, Compressor, Ducking, Expander, Gate, Limiter
LFE (Sub Woofer Speaker)
This is a special speaker for playing back low frequency sounds.
Component: Surround 5.1, Surround 6.1
Linkwitz-Riley (Linkwitz)
One type of filter characteristics. As second-order filters, the sum of the output voltages for LPF and
HPF have a gain of 0bB across the entire band. The pass band is flat, but the cutoff frequency gain is
-6 dB.
Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Programmable BPF,
Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor
Pan
Sets the distribution ratio of the input signal between right and left.
Components: LCR, LR, SPX
Pan Nominal Position
Sets the 0 dB reference for pan. There are two selections available, [Center] and [LR] (LR Nominal).
Center nominal uses the center volume as a reference. The means the center volume is 0 dB, and the
LR speakers are -3 dB.
LR nominal uses the LR speaker volume as the reference. The means the LR speaker volume is 0 dB,
and the center is +3 dB.
Components: LCR, Surround 3-1, Surround 5.1, Surround 6.1
Phase
Reverses the phase of the signal. If you turn this ON, signal is inverted. If you turn this OFF, the signal
is not inverted.
Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, GEQ, PEQ, BPF, HPF, LPF, Notch,
Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Fader, Auto Mixer, Delay Matrix,
Matrix Mixer, Slot Output, Unit Output
Q
Sets the frequency bandwidth that will change the sound. As the value gets larger, the width gets
narrower and the curve becomes steeper.
In the parametric equalizer, this sets the frequency width where the gain will be cut or boosted. When
Q is widened, the gain is boosted or cut along a wide range centering on the frequency set by the
frequency setting, resulting in a large change in the tone quality. When Q is narrowed, only a specific
frequency is boosted or cut.
Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, GEQ, PEQ, BPF, Notch, Speaker
Processor, SPX
Chapter 6 Component Guide
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
422
Range
Set for Ducking and Gate. Sets the amount by which the level is reduced when signal is ducked/
gated. It can be set within the range of -70 to 0 dB. At -70 dB the entire signal above the threshold
value is cut. At 0 dB, there is no effect.
Components: Ducking, Gate
Ratio
Sets the ratio of change in the output signal level with respect to the input signal level.
At 1:1, there is no compression.
At 2:1, when a trigger signal level that exceeds the threshold changes by 10 dB, the output level will
change by 5 dB.
Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Compander, Compressor,
De-Esser, Expander, SPX
Release (Release Time)
Sets the time period until gain returns to normal after a trigger signal level falls below the threshold
value and operation of a component ceases.
If the release time is short, the sound will seem like it is jumping (the ear will notice the change)
because the gain suddenly returns to normal. If the release is set too long, compression might not be
applied properly because the next high level signal will be input before the gain returns to normal from
the previous high. It’s a good ideal to try an initial release time setting in the range of 0.11 to 0.5
milliseconds.
Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Compander, Compressor,
De-Esser, Expander, Limiter, Speaker Processor, SPX
Slope
In a high pass filter (HPF) or low pass filter (LPF), this sets the attenuation amount for each octave.
A large value results in rapid attenuation. Clicking the [Slope] button displays a menu.
You can select [6 dB/Oct] or [12 dB/Oct] in the HPF or LPF.
In the crossover that is part of the crossover processor, in the stand-alone crossover, the
programmable BPF, the programmable LPF, and the programmable HPF, you can select from [6 dB/
Oct], [12 dB/Oct], [18 dB/Oct], [24 dB/Oct], [36 dB/Oct], and [48 dB/Oct].
Component: HPF, LPF
Threshold
Sets the signal level that causes the component to operate.
Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Compander,
Compressor, De-Esser, Ducking, Expander, Gate, Limiter, Auto Mixer, Speaker Processor, SPX
Width
Sets how much lower the level must be than the threshold level for the expansion effect to begin.
When the trigger signal level changes by 2 dB with the expansion ratio of the expander set at 5:1, the
output level will change by 10 dB.
In the compander, if the width is set at 90 dB, the expander effect will be essentially be turned OFF.
Component: Compander
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
423
Troubleshooting
For the latest information about DME Designer, visit the Yamaha pro audio site at
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com.
Symptom Possible Causes Corrective Actions
A compile error occurs during
synchronization.
DSP total resource consumption has
exceeded the upper limit.
Delete unneeded components. The
Resource Meter window must read 100%
or less.
The wiring between components is
connected from multiple output terminals
to a single input.
Change the connections so that a single
output is connected to a single input
terminal. Using a matrix mixer or similar
component, gather multiple outputs into
one signal.
Cannot place component. Cannot place
wiring.
You are in online status. Execute [Go Off-line] on the
synchronization screen to go into offline
status.
The Designer window in not in edit mode. Place a checkmark next to [Edit] on the
[Tool] menu.
The currently logged on user is restricted
from editing.
Logoff, then log in again as a new user,
or as the Administrator. If edit restrictions
are required for a user, place a check in
the [Security] [Edit] checkbox
A user module is not displayed on the
list.
The [File] menu [Preference]
[ContentsFolder] has been changed, or
the “User Module” folder has been
moved.
Check that there are user module files
(.umf) in the “ContentsFolder” and “User
Module” folders.
Cannot switch configurations in the
Navigator Window.
While online, you cannot not switch to a
configuration different from the current
scene.
If you can switch between scenes, you
will be able to switch configurations.
The user module window does not open,
even when a user module is double-
clicked.
This is a user module saved by selecting
[Open] [User Module Design
Window].
Open the save dialog, select [Open]
[User Module Editor], and resave the
user module.
No editor displays after right-clicking on
a card component, and selecting [Open]
from the context menu.
Some cards do not have editors. No special corrective action.
The message “Reset Config…” is
displayed for a long time in the message
area of the “Synchronization” dialog box.
This is not abnormal. If many scenes are
entered into the DME, processing takes
time.
Wait until processing finishes.
Cannot set the monitor output. This is because channels connected with
wiring cannot be used as monitor output.
Select an unconnected channel.
The MIDI Setup toolbar will not be
displayed.
Stored in the minimized task tray. Right-click the MIDI Setup icon in the
task tray then click [Show].
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
424
Index
A
AD824 .................................................................................170, 417
AD8HR ................................................................................170, 418
"Add Event" dialog box ................................................................ 118
“Add User” dialog box .................................................................. 60
Adjustable Gc (AdjustGc) ........................................................... 419
[Administrator] User ...................................................................... 55
Analyze ........................................................................................249
[Area Parts List] ........................................................................... 153
Area window .......................................................................... 15, 235
Attack (Attack Time) ....................................................................419
Auto Log On .................................................................................. 21
Auto-Logon User ................................................................... 57
Auto Mixer ...................................................................................360
B
Background Images
setting .................................................................................295
Backup ........................................................................................135
Band Pass Filter (BPF) ................................................................349
Bessel ..........................................................................................419
Box (rectangle) ............................................................................ 191
Butterworth (Butrwrth) ................................................................. 419
Bypass ........................................................................................419
C
“Cascade Setting” dialog box .....................................................166
“Change User Information” dialog box ......................................... 60
Changing Order ..........................................................................218
“Clock” dialog box ......................................................................105
Close .............................................................................................29
Communication Status ..................................................................43
Compander .................................................................................335
Component ............................................................................17, 174
placing ................................................................................243
Component Editor .........................................................................17
opening ...............................................................................264
Component Editor window
structure ..............................................................................264
Component Group ......................................................................259
Component List ........................................................................... 260
[Component List] (Configuration window) ..................................154
[Component List] (User Module window) ...................................155
Compressor .................................................................................336
Configuration ...............................................................................136
adding .................................................................................233
analysis ...............................................................................249
creating new .......................................................................136
creation procedure ................................................................34
deleting ...............................................................................233
editing .................................................................................136
renaming .............................................................................233
Configuration window ............................................................ 16, 242
[Component List] .................................................................154
Control
aligning ................................................................................302
copy ....................................................................................303
cut .......................................................................................303
moving .................................................................................302
paste ...................................................................................303
placing ................................................................................297
properties ............................................................................303
[Control Change] tab ....................................................................91
Crossover ....................................................................................316
Crossover Processor ...................................................................320
Crossover Processor II ................................................................326
Current Scene ............................................................................... 42
Current Zone ................................................................................. 43
D
DAW Control ................................................................................ 132
Decay (Decay Time) ................................................................... 419
De-Esser ...................................................................................... 337
Delay ................................................................................... 332, 419
delay long ...........................................................................332
delay short ..........................................................................333
Delay Matrix ................................................................................ 362
Delay Scale ................................................................................. 420
Delay value .................................................................................. 246
Design Mode ............................................................................... 286
Design window ............................................................................ 142
exporting ............................................................................. 211
printing ................................................................................ 214
shared settings and operations .......................................... 207
Designer window ........................................................................... 15
[Device List] ................................................................................ 154
Display Order .............................................................................. 218
Divergence .................................................................................. 420
DME ............................................................................................. 160
arrangement ........................................................................ 238
DME Data File ............................................................................... 30
export .................................................................................... 32
import .................................................................................... 30
Drawing Setting ...........................................................................223
Ducker ......................................................................................... 339
Dynamics .................................................................................... 334
E
"Edit Event" dialog box ................................................................ 118
[Edit] menu ............................................................................47, 145
Edit Mode .................................................................................... 136
Edit Palette .................................................................................. 288
Ellipse .......................................................................................... 193
Auto Log On
[Enable Auto-Log On] ........................................................... 57
[Enable Auto-Log On] ................................................................... 57
Equalizer
Graphic Equalizer (GEQ) .................................................... 344
Parametric Equalizer (PEQ) ................................................ 346
Equalizer (EQ) ............................................................................. 344
“Event Log List” dialog box ......................................................... 115
Event Logger ............................................................................... 111
“Event Scheduler” dialog box ..................................................... 116
Expander ..................................................................................... 340
Export
Design window .................................................................... 211
DME ...................................................................................... 32
External Device ........................................................................... 170
F
Fade ............................................................................................ 420
Fader ........................................................................................... 348
[File] menu .................................................................................... 44
Filter
Band Pass Filter (BPF) ........................................................ 349
High Pass Filter (HPF) ......................................................... 350
Low Pass Filter (LPF) ..........................................................351
Notch Filter (Notch) ............................................................. 352
Programmable BPF ............................................................. 353
Programmable HPF ............................................................. 355
Programmable LPF ............................................................. 356
Index
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
425
Filters ...........................................................................................349
Firmware Update
DME unit firmware ............................................................... 107
Frequency ...................................................................................420
G
Gain .............................................................................................420
Gain Correct ................................................................................420
Gate .............................................................................................341
General Purpose Interface (GPI) ................................................... 79
“Get Log” dialog box ................................................................... 114
GPI (General Purpose Interface) ................................................... 79
“GPI” dialog box ............................................................................ 79
Graphic Equalizer (GEQ) ............................................................ 344
Grid .............................................................................................210
H
[Help] menu ..................................................................................51
High Pass Filter (HPF) ................................................................. 350
Hold (Hold Time) ......................................................................... 420
Hotspot ........................................................................................222
I
ICP ...............................................................................................168
placement ...........................................................................240
Import
DME .......................................................................................30
K
KeyIn ...................................................................................334, 420
Knee ............................................................................................421
L
Language
setting .................................................................................106
“Language” dialog box ...............................................................106
LCR .............................................................................................378
Legend (Descriptive Fields) ........................................................198
LFE (Sub Woofer Speaker) .......................................................... 421
Library .........................................................................................275
recalling ...............................................................................277
storing .................................................................................276
Linkwitz-Riley (Linkwitz) ..............................................................421
Log Off ..........................................................................................21
Log On ..........................................................................................20
“Log Setup” dialog box ............................................................... 113
Logical connection ......................................................................230
situations where no logical connection is created .............. 230
Low Pass Filter (LPF) ................................................................... 351
LR ................................................................................................379
M
Main Panel window .................................................................14, 39
Matrix Mixer .................................................................................369
Menu bar ............................................................................... 39, 137
Meter ...........................................................................................357
MIDI ...............................................................................................90
[Control Change] tab ............................................................91
[Parameter Change] tab .......................................................94
[Port] tab ...............................................................................97
[Program Change] tab .......................................................... 93
[Setup] tab ............................................................................90
“MIDI” dialog box .......................................................................... 90
Miscellaneous .............................................................................358
Mixer ............................................................................................360
Auto Mixer ........................................................................... 360
Delay Matrix ........................................................................362
Matrix Mixer ......................................................................... 369
“Monitor” dialog box .................................................................... 104
Monitoring Point List .................................................................... 247
[Mute] button ................................................................................. 42
MY-Card ...................................................................................... 413
N
Navigator window .................................................................. 17, 140
Notch Filter (Notch) ..................................................................... 352
O
Object ............................................................................................ 17
arranging ............................................................. 216, 236, 238
editing ................................................................................. 217
selecting .............................................................................. 216
types ................................................................................... 156
Offline ............................................................................................ 75
switching between online and offfline ................................... 75
Online ...................................................................................... 35, 75
switching between online and offfline ................................... 75
Open ............................................................................................. 27
opening a project file from the “Recently Used Files” list ..... 28
opening a project file that has security set ........................... 28
Operation Mode .......................................................................... 286
Oscillator ..................................................................................... 358
P
Pan ...................................................................................... 378, 421
LCR ..................................................................................... 378
LR ........................................................................................ 379
Surround ............................................................................. 380
Pan Nominal Position .......................................................... 378, 421
Parameter
changing ............................................................................. 266
[Parameter Change] tab ............................................................... 94
Parameter Link ...................................................................... 73, 314
Parameter List ............................................................................. 124
Parametric Equalizer (PEQ) ........................................................ 346
Phase .......................................................................................... 421
Picture ......................................................................................... 185
placing ................................................................................ 185
[Port] tab ....................................................................................... 97
Preferences ........................................................................... 53, 207
Preset list ....................................................................................... 68
Print
Design window .................................................................... 214
[Print] menu .................................................................................144
Probe Monitor .............................................................................. 244
[Program Change] tab .................................................................. 93
Programmable BPF ..................................................................... 353
Programmable HPF .....................................................................355
Programmable LPF ..................................................................... 356
Project file ...................................................................................... 22
closing ................................................................................... 29
creating new .........................................................................22
opening ................................................................................. 27
saving .............................................................................. 23, 25
Q
Q .................................................................................................. 421
R
Range .......................................................................................... 422
Ratio ............................................................................................ 422
Release (Release Time) .............................................................. 422
Resource Meter ............................................................................. 18
Resource Meter window .............................................................. 139
Router .......................................................................................... 397
Index
DME Designer Owner’s Manual
426
S
Save ........................................................................................23, 25
saving a file with a new name ............................................... 25
Save As ...................................................................................23, 25
Scene
current ...................................................................................42
Scene Manager .............................................................................63
“Scene Manager” dialog box ........................................................ 63
Security .......................................................................................136
[Administrator] User .............................................................. 55
creating users and making user settings .............................. 55
security for the Logged On User .....................................63, 70
user security level .................................................................56
user setting restrictions ......................................................... 55
Security Level ................................................................................56
“Select Color” Dialog Box ...........................................................203
“Select Font” dialog box .............................................................. 202
“Select Image” dialog box ..........................................................205
[Setup] tab ....................................................................................90
Sheet ...........................................................................................200
Show Signal Delay ......................................................................246
Slope ...........................................................................................422
Slot Component ................................................................... 179, 408
Snap ............................................................................................273
SPX Component .................................................................. 177, 397
Status bar .................................................................................... 139
Surround 3-1 ...............................................................................383
Surround 5.1 ................................................................................ 384
Surround 6.1 ................................................................................ 385
Synchronization
DME Designer and DME unit synchronization ...................... 75
“Synchronization” dialog box ................................................ 76
T
Tab Order
changing .............................................................................313
Text box ....................................................................................... 189
Threshold ....................................................................................422
Title bar .................................................................................39, 137
Tool button
large ......................................................................................41
small ......................................................................................39
Toolbar ........................................................................................138
Toolkit window .......................................................................17, 143
displaying ............................................................................152
moving .................................................................................152
types ...................................................................................153
[Tools] menu .........................................................................48, 149
U
[User]
logged on user ...................................................................... 43
User ...............................................................................................19
creatng new ..........................................................................61
list ..........................................................................................58
User Control ..........................................................................70, 279
creating new .......................................................................281
security ................................................................................283
“User Control Manager” dialog box .............................................. 70
[User Control] menu ....................................................................280
User Defined Button
User Defined Parameters ...................................................... 98
“User Defined Button” dialog box ................................................. 98
User Defined Parameters ..............................................................98
setting .................................................................................101
User Module ........................................................................181, 250
creating ...............................................................................254
saving ..................................................................................255
User Module Editor .....................................................................285
context menu ......................................................................291
User Module Manager ................................................................250
User Module window ............................................................. 16, 257
[Component List] ................................................................155
User Setting Restrictions ............................................................... 55
V
[View] menu .......................................................................... 48, 147
W
Wav File Manager ....................................................................... 128
Wav File Player ............................................................................ 359
Width ........................................................................................... 422
[Window] menu ..................................................................... 51, 151
Window size
changing ............................................................................. 294
Wire ..................................................................................... 195, 219
drawing ............................................................................... 224
drawing settings .................................................................. 223
editing ................................................................................. 229
line segment ........................................................................ 220
nodes .................................................................................. 221
Z
Zone ............................................................................................ 157
adding ................................................................................. 231
current ................................................................................... 43
deleting ............................................................................... 231
renaming ............................................................................. 231
Zone window ......................................................................... 16, 237
U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2004 Yamaha Corporation
MW D0

Documenttranscriptie

Version 1.2 OWNER’S MANUAL EN Getting Started Getting Started with DME Designer Thank you for purchasing the DME64N/24N. Your DME64N/24N mixing engine, together the DME Designer software, lets you build a custom audio system installation that can support an incredible variety of conditions. You can build an entire system from input to output with the DME Designer software, then send the data from that system to the DME64N/24N, which becomes an independent processor. An amazing variety of applications are possible, including audio installations, sub-mixing, speaker system control, matrix/routing, and multi-effect processing. In this manual the abbreviation “DME” refers to the DME64N/24N. NOTE Here the abbreviation “DME” does not include the “DME32.” NOTE This manual is based on the English version of the software. Illustrations, command names, window names, and similar information are from that version. Some items may differ from what you see on the computer screen, depending on which operating system you are using. SPECIAL NOTICES • The software and this Owner’s Manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation. • Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of “DME Designer Installation Guide” before installing the application.) • Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer. • Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software. • This disc is a CD-ROM. Do not attempt to play the disc on an audio CD player. Doing so may result in irreparable damage to your audio CD player. • The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. • The screen displays as illustrated in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different from the screens which appear on your computer. • Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be announced separately. • Windows® is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. 2 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Getting Started About DME Designer DME Designer is software that provides an integrated environment where you can build and control systems that use DME. Audio systems with DME are built on the computer screen in block diagram format using the DME Designer software. Information about the inputs/outputs along with the arrangement of components and their connections is called the “configuration.” The software sends DME settings, along with configuration and parameter data, to the DME unit through a USB or Ethernet connection. Once the data is transferred, the DME unit can be disconnected from the computer and used as an independent processor. The DME can also be kept connected to the computer and controlled in realtime from DME Designer software. If multiple DME units are connected to the computer, you can use the DME Designer software to build a configuration that includes those multiple units. Area This means the entire site, and is therefore the uppermost level for a system built using DME Designer. At least one zone must be located within the area. Zone Specifies a space that has individual sound effects within the area, and creates DME connection conditions. You can create and switch between multiple configurations. Configuration Information related to the layout and connection of components in a zone. Scene Information related to configuration assigned to a zone and the settings of the components included in the configuration. Component An object that is arranged within the Configuration window. For a DME overview and glossary, see the “DME64N/24N Owner’s Manual.” Systems built with DME Designer can have multiple zones within an area and multiple configurations and scenes within a zone. However, only one area, zone, or configuration can be made active and edited at a time. When active these are called the “Current Zone,” “Current Scene,” and “Current Configuration.” ■ One DME unit/Zone External Device (MIDI, GPI, DAW, AMX/Crestron) Zone Output Input Microphone Mixer External Head Amp etc... Notes Power Amp Processor etc... Audio signal Control signal Data explanation Setting preset data User Defined Button LCD Display Dome Low Dome Mid Dome Hi Scene Manager Assigned Parameter Crossover: Output Low: Level Crossover: Output Mid: Level Crossover: Output Hight: Level (No Assign) (No Assign) (No Assign) .... No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 .... Scene Name All On Opening Band Set 1 Band Set 2 Band Set 3 ... Confuguration Output Processor for Dome Output Processor for Dome Output Processor for Dome Output Processor for Dome Output Processor for Dome ... Preset All On BGM & MC Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Specifies the configuration and preset data combination. Specifies the parameter to be changed. Configuration Preset data for output processor Output Processor for Dome All On Component value Delay MY8-AE (Input) EQ Delay CrossOver EQ Dyn BGM & MC MY8-AE (Output) Band 1 Set the value Band 2 Band 3 Local parameter link settings External device settings DME Designer Owner’s Manual 3 Getting Started ■ Two DME units/Zone When one DME unit doesn’t provide sufficient processing power, up to 16 DME units can be used External Device (MIDI, GPI, DAW, AMX/Crestron) DME#1 Zone Input Microphone Mixer External Head Amp etc... Input Output DME#2 Output Power Amp Processor etc... Notes Audio signal Control signal Data explanation Setting preset data For DME#1 For DME#2 Scene Manager User Defined Button LCD Display Dome Low Dome Mid Dome Hi Hall Low Hall Mid Hall Hi .... Assigned Parameter #1: Crossover: Output Low: Level #1: Crossover: Output Mid: Level #1: Crossover: Output Hight: Level #2: Crossover: Output Low: Level #2: Crossover: Output Mid: Level #2: Crossover: Output Hight: Level No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 .... Scene Name All On Opening Band Set 1 Band Set 2 Band Set 3 ... For DME#1 Configuration Output Processor for Dome Output Processor for Dome Output Processor for Dome Output Processor for Dome Output Processor for Dome ... Selects the parameter to be edited from two DME units. DME#1 Configuration Output Processor for Dome Preset data All On DME#2 Configuration Output Processor for Hall All On BGM & MC Band 1 Band Local parameter link settings Band 3 External device settings Specifies the parameter to be linked between DME units. Grobal Parameter Link DME Designer Owner’s Manual Preset data BGM & MC Band 2 4 For DME#2 Configuration Output Processor for Hall Output Processor for Hall Output Processor for Hall Output Processor for Hall Output Processor for Hall ... Preset All On BGM & MC Band Band Band Specifies the configuration and preset data combination in each DME Local parameter link settings External device settings Preset All On BGM & MC Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Getting Started Common data for DME units in the same zone A “scene” is information that is used to change the audio processing content. A combination of a configuration and preset data is specified for each scene. A Scene Manager is function used to memorize and manage scenes. Up to 999 scenes can be memorized, and each scene is managed by number. Scene Manager MIDI Program Change settings User Defined Button setting This setting is necessary to switch scenes using MIDI messages. This information is necessary to control component parameters from the unit’s panel. Up to 24 parameters can be memorized. Global parameter link settings This information is necessary to allow operation of similar parameters to be linked between multiple DME units. Separate data for individual DME units This information defines the configuration of audio processing, audio input/ output, and external device components and the connections between components required to achieve the desired audio processing. Configuration Local parameter link settings This information is necessary to allow linked operation between similar parameters within a single DME unit. External device settings This information is necessary to allow control of component parameters from external devices. Independent settings are required for each external device. The following external devices can be used: • MIDI controller( MIDI Control Change, Paramter Change) • GPI controller • DAW controller • AMX, Crestron, and similar remote controllers. Preset data These are the parameter values for the components included in a configuration. Audio processing details can be changed by changing the preset data. The following component types include preset data: • GEQ, Matrix Mixer, and other audio processing components. • Internal AD/DA (DME24N), Cascade (DME64N), and MY Card I/O components. • External device components for external head amps (AD8HR, AD824). System Requirement Operating System Windows® XP Professional/XP Home Edition/2000 Professional CPU 1 GHz or better Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® family processor Memory At least 256 MB Hard Disk Capacity At least 300 MB Display 1,280 x 1,024 pixels or better/High Color 16 bit or better Other Mouse, CD-ROM drive, 100Base-TX/10Base-T Ethernet or USB connection environment. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 5 Getting Started Main Changes from V1.0 to V1.1 ■ Main Panel Window • Instead of the former Parameter Link function, there are now two functions: a Global Link function that links parameters within all DMEs in a zone and a Local Link function that links parameters within a single DME unit. (→ page 73) • The Synchronization function can now not only send data from DME Designer to the DME unit, but can also synchronize by reading data from the DME unit. (→ page 75) • Scene Increment/Decrement and Time Adjustment can now be assigned in the GPI input function. (→ page 80) • DME unit events can now be recorded by the Event Logger function and displayed in the Event Logger window. (→ page 111) • The time for executing an event can now be set by using the Event Scheduler function. (→ page 116) • Parameters in the current configuration can now be listed on the display and printed out by using the Parameter List function. (→ page 124) • The Wav File Manager can manage Wave files played by the Wav File Player. (→ page 128) • Settings can be made by the DAW Control function that are used for controlling DMEs from a DAW controller. (→ page 132) • DME unit data can now be saved as a backup file by using the Backup function. (→ page 135) ■ Designer Window • The port name display can now be switched between long name display and short name display. (→ page 148) • DME64N cascade connections can now be set. (→ page 165) • Priority items can now be set when compiling configurations by using the [Compile Priority] function in the “Preferences” dialog box. (→ page 209) • Delay time can now be displayed for each component by using the Show Signal Delay function. (→ page 246) • Monitoring points can now be edited by using the “Monitoring Point List” dialog box. (→ page 247) • The status of connections in a configuration can now be analyzed in advance by using the Analyze function, without connecting the DME unit. (→ page 249) • You can now set the action that occurs when you double-click a user module object. You can also turn user module security ON or OFF, and set a password. (→ page 254) • Libraries with component parameters saved in them can now be recalled from the context menu for a component object. (→ page 277) • A new rule for wiring prohibits connections to terminals that would short the terminator. ■ Component Editor/Component • A status bar has been added to the component editor. It displays the component name, component ID, and parameter IDs for parameters that are being edited. (→ page 265) • A Snap function has been added that records parameters in the editor temporarily. Parameter sets can then be switched by using the Snap buttons. (→ page 273) • The meter's peak hold function can now be turned ON or OFF. (→ page 291) • A Wav File Player component has been added for playing Wave files. (→ page 359) • An effect component called SPX has been added that supports many different effect applications, such as reverb, delay, and modulation effects, along with complex combinations of multiple effects. (→ page 397) • A Slot Out component editor has been added. (→ page 409) • An Undo/Redo function is now available when using the design mode. It can undo the most recent operation (control movement/resize/deletion). 6 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Getting Started Changes from V1.1 to V1.2 ■ Main Panel Window • The synchronization algorithm has been refined for faster synchronization. • Synchronization now can be executed from DME to DME Designer without any break in the sound. • In the following cases, synchronization can be executed from DME Designer to DME without any break in the sound: The second or later synchronization after starting DME Designer* and when differences in data between the DME and DME Designer are limited to parameters within components, AD824/ AD8HR/DME24N AD/DA setting data, or MY card setting parameters. * If the file was saved when DME Designer was closed, there will be no break in sound even in the first synchronization after saving. • Compile speed has been increased. Up to three times faster when AutoDelayCompensation is turned On. Up to two times faster when AutoDelayCompensation is turned Off. • Synchronization is possible when no MY card or a different MY card is installed in the DME unit (a confirmation dialog will appear). • An option to automatically close the dialog after synchronization has been added. (→ page 37) • A progress bar has been added to the Synchronization dialog. (→ page 36) • A message appears to warn when synchronization will cause muting. • The following operations can be performed while on line: - Scene storage. - Scene name changes. - Fade ON/OFF and Fade Mode changes. - Fade time changes. - Parameter link setting changes. • When a scene store is executed, that scene becomes the current scene. • Wave files can be saved as DME data files, and are included in import/export operations. (→ page 32) • Wave files can be saved in the Wav file library. • Event Log events can be output via GPI. (→ page 115) • The on-line indicator appears as a button which can be used to switch between on-line and off-line. (→ page 43) • Scene edits cause the EDIT indicator to appear. (→ page 42) • An auto file save function (Auto Save, post synchronization) has been added. (→ page 53) • Different zones can be specified for use by different users. (→ page 56) • Scene parameters related to User Defined Button, Program Change, GPI In and GPI Out can be set via the Scene Manager. (→ page 63) • [Select All] and [Clear All] buttons have been added to the Scene Manager Recall Safe dialog. (→ page 67) • User Control can be created for individual users as well as security levels. (→ page 70) • A Remote Control Setup List has been added. (→ page 123) This list can be used to make detailed settings for a new software protocol that allow the DME to be controlled from AMX, Crestron, and similar devices. Refer to the “DME-N Remote Control Protocol Specifications” document for details about the communication protocol. Information about the “DME-N Remote Control Protocol Specifications” document can be found at the Yamaha pro Audio website (URL below). http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ • It is possible to specify whether listed events will be executed by the Event Scheduler. (→ page 116) DME Designer Owner’s Manual 7 Getting Started • The order of same-time events can be changed in the Event Scheduler. (→ page 116) • Exceptions can be specified for Event Scheduler execution day/time. (→ page 122) • Event Scheduler execution times can be specified in 1-second increments. (→ page 121) • Head amp gain and MY-Card can be set via GPI, MIDI, User defined Button, DAW Control. • Parameter values, scene recall, GPI output, Wave file playback, and head amp gain can be set via the User Defined Buttons. (→ page 98) • The Component Lock function dialog is separate from the Parameter List dialog. (→ page 127) • Shortcuts can be freely set as required. (→ page 134) • Files can be saved in the DME unit. (→ page 52) • A [Close All Editor Windows] button has been added to the Window menu. (→ page 51) • External head amp parameters will be recognized by the DME unit when either the DME or the external head amp (AD824, AD8HR) are turned on. Execute a scene recall to send DME settings an external head amp. • This manual is now separate from the DME Designer installer, and can not be accessed from the DME Designer menus. ■ Designer Window • The following operations can be carried out via the shortcut keys. - Navigator - Activate Navigator - Activate Toolkit - Activate Design Window - Select Left Port and Start Wiring - Select Right Port and Start Wiring - Wire Auto Single to Right - Wire Auto Multi to Right - Wire Auto Single to Left - Wire Auto Multi to Left - Delete Wire • It is now possible to simultaneously edit multiple objects of the same type. Example: Change the thickness or color of multiple wires at once. • Files related to user modules (user module files, library files, user module editor files) can be combined and exported/imported as a single file. • Port colors can be independently specified for each port type. (→ page 156) • Default wire thicknesses and types can be independently specified for each port type. • An automatic hot-spot connection function has been added. (→ page 225) • Port display has been added to External Device, Picture, DME, and ICP1 objects. • When drawing wires the keyboard cursor keys can be used to move the mouse cursor, and the <Enter> key can be used to create nodes. • When drawing wires <Shift> key plus <→> key and <Shift> key plus <←> key combinations can be used to automatically connect horizontally-aligned hot spots. • DME object ports can be freely specified. • Compilation of configurations with loop connections is possible when Auto Delay Compensation is On. • The name has been changed from “Foot Monitor” external device to “Floor Monitor.” • Addition External Device types have been provided. • External Devices can be double-clicked to open a file saved by other applications. (→ page 172) • Picture objects can be double-clicked to open a specified editor. (→ page 187) • Text objects can be double-clicked to open a specified editor. (→ page 190) 8 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Getting Started • User module port labels can be edited. (→ page 183) • Graphics can be placed to represent user modules. (→ page 183) • The Legend field automatically resizes to accommodate project names and titles of different lengths. • A Generic “MY-Others” setting has been provided to accommodate third-party MY cards. ■ Component Editor Window • Undo and Redo are now shortcut compatible. • A scroll bar appears when the size of the component editor window is reduced. • The size and position of the component editor window are memorized. • An option to allow mouse-over zooming of the edit box has been added. (→ page 266) • A [Back] button that allows switching between related parent and child windows has been added. (→ page 265) • A [Close All Editor Windows] button has been added to the contextual menu. • Source Selector, Speaker Processor, Limiter, Slot In, Cascade In, and Cascade Out components have been added. • The Delay algorithm has been revised. (→ page 332) - LEVEL and MUTE are effective when Delay is Off for each channel. - The name of the overall Delay [On] parameter has been changed to [All Bypass]. Input Input Mute Level IN On Mute Level Delay Input Input Mute Level Delay On IN On Mute Level Delay OUT Delay All Bypass OUT • The bus send level range for Delay, Matrix, and Matrix Mixer components has been changed to -∞ through 0.0 dB. • Snap copy is possible. (→ page 274) • Snap can be retained until the application is quit or another file is opened. • Security status is displayed in the user module editor status bar. • Multiple controllers can be selected by clicking while holding the <Ctrl> key when the editor is in the design mode. (→ page 286) • [Picture], [Text], [Box], [Ellipse], and [Frame] have been added to the tool palette of the user module editor and user control editor design mode. (→ page 279) • Controller properties can be accessed by double-clicking controllers in the user module editor or user control editor design mode. (→ page 303) • Picture and Text objects can be clicked to open a specified editor in the user module editor or user control editor. • The User Module Editor and User Control Editor offer a greater range of customization options for color, size. etc., of the placed controls. ■ MIDI Setup • A MIDI Setup minimize function has been added. ■ V1.2 Precautions • When using project files (*.daf) created by version 1.1.5 or earlier, synchronize from the DME Designer to the DME unit for the first synchronization. • Project files (*.daf) created using version 1.2 will not open properly on version 1.1. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 9 Contents Chapter 1 Before Using 11 Installing DME Designer ..................................................... 11 Starting DME Designer....................................................... 11 Closing DME Designer ....................................................... 13 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview 14 Names and Functions of the Windows ............................... 14 Users and Security ............................................................. 19 Project Files........................................................................ 22 DME Data File .................................................................... 30 Configuration Creation Procedure ...................................... 34 Online ................................................................................. 35 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window 39 Main Panel Window............................................................ 39 Main Panel Window Menu.................................................. 44 DME File Storage ............................................................... 52 Preferences ........................................................................ 53 Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings) ......... 55 Scene Manager .................................................................. 63 User Control ....................................................................... 70 Parameter Link ................................................................... 73 Synchronization (DME Designer and DME Unit Synchronization)................ 75 GPI ..................................................................................... 79 MIDI .................................................................................... 90 User Defined Button (User Defined Parameters) ............... 98 Word Clock ....................................................................... 102 Monitor ............................................................................. 104 Clock ................................................................................ 105 Language Settings ........................................................... 106 DME Firmware Update ..................................................... 107 Event Logger .................................................................... 111 Event Scheduler ............................................................... 116 Remote Control Setup List ............................................... 123 Parameter List .................................................................. 124 Component Lock .............................................................. 127 Wav File Manager ............................................................ 128 DAW Control..................................................................... 132 Shortcut Keys ................................................................... 134 Backup ............................................................................. 135 Chapter 4 Designer 136 Editing Configurations ...................................................... 136 Designer Window ............................................................. 137 Designer Window Menu ................................................... 144 Toolkit Window ................................................................. 152 Objects ............................................................................. 156 Design Window Shared Settings and Operations ............ 207 10 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Drawing and Editing Wires ...............................................219 Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone..........................231 Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Configuration.............233 Area Window ....................................................................235 Zone Window....................................................................237 Configuration Window.......................................................242 User Module .....................................................................250 Chapter 5 Components 259 Types of Components.......................................................259 Component Editor Window ...............................................264 Snap .................................................................................273 Library...............................................................................275 User Control/User Module Editor......................................279 Creating Parameter Links .................................................314 Chapter 6 Component Guide 316 Crossover .........................................................................316 Crossover Processor ........................................................320 Delay.................................................................................332 Dynamics ..........................................................................334 Equalizer (EQ) ..................................................................344 Fader ................................................................................348 Filters ................................................................................349 Meter.................................................................................357 Miscellaneous ...................................................................358 Mixer .................................................................................360 Pan ...................................................................................378 Router ...............................................................................386 Source Selector ................................................................388 Speaker Processor ...........................................................390 SPX...................................................................................397 Slot....................................................................................408 Cascade............................................................................410 Internal Head Amp............................................................412 MY-Card ...........................................................................413 Remote Controlled Head Amp..........................................417 Component Glossary ........................................................419 Troubleshooting 423 Index 424 Chapter 1 Before Using Installing DME Designer To use DME Designer, you must first install the software on the computer. Before you can connect the DME Designer software to the DME unit, send and receive configurations, or perform control, you must first install the USB MIDI Driver or the DME-N Network Driver, according to how you will be connecting, and then make the appropriate settings. For instructions about how to install DME Designer and about the installation and setup method for the MIDI driver and DME-N Network Driver, see the “DME Designer Installation Guide.” Starting DME Designer The DME Designer software is started from the [Start] menu. DME Designer is used with one user logged on. The user logs on when the software is started. ■ DME Designer Start Up and Logon (When Auto-Logon Is Not Set) 1 Click [Start] ➞ [All Programs] ➞ [YAMAHA OPT Tools] ➞ [DME Designer] ➞ [DME Designer]. NOTE In Windows2000, click [Start] → [Programs] → [YAMAHA OPT Tools] → [DME Designer] → [DME Designer]. The “Log On” dialog box will be displayed. NOTE Automatic log-on is the default setting. If the automatic logon feature is enabled, the “Log On” dialog box will not be displayed when the application is started. Instead, the auto-logon user will be logged on automatically. See page 21 for information about auto-logon. 2 Click the [▼] at the right of the [User] box, and select the user. If no user has been created, only [Administrator] will appear in the list. When starting DME Designer for the first time after installing, select [Administrator]. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 11 Chapter 1 Before Using 3 Enter the password into the [Password] box. Enter the password set for the user. If no password has been set, leave the password box blank when you log on. 4 Click the [OK] button. DME Designer starts up. ■ When Automatic Logon Has Been Set (page 21) If automatic logon has been set, the “Log On” dialog box will not be displayed. The user set for automatic logon will be logged on. With automatic log on, even if a password is set for a user, it will not be requested during log on. This is useful when logging on a specific user. ■ Starting by Opening a Project File DME Designer starts when a project file with a saved configuration is opened. When the project file is opened, DME Designer is started with the window configuration that was in place when the file was last saved. 12 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 1 Before Using Closing DME Designer To close DME Designer, click [Exit] on the [File] menu of the Main Panel window. It can also be closed by clicking the [Close] button on the Main Panel window. 1 Click [Exit] on the Main Panel window [File] menu. When you try to close DME Designer, “Project File has been modified. Save?” will be displayed in a dialog box. NOTE Sometimes the “Project File has been modified. Save?” dialog box will not be displayed. 2 To save the file, click [Yes]. To close without saving, click [No]. If you click [Yes], the file currently saved with the same name will be overwritten. If the file has not been saved, the File Save dialog box will always be displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 13 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Names and Functions of the Windows The DME Designer software has several windows, including the Main Panel window, Designer window, Component Editor window, Resource Meter window, and others. Component Editor Window Main Panel Window Designer Window Resource Meter Window Main Panel Window Menus and buttons are available in the Main Panel window. The current DME Designer environment, including the active scene and zone, the currently logged on user name, and the connection status to the DME unit are displayed on the right side of the Main Panel window. 14 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Designer Window The Designer window displays several different windows. First among them is the Area window, where you can manage the entire system. The Area window includes one or more Zone windows, which in turn include one or more DME units that are used to build a zones within the area. Next is the Configuration window, where you create the internal configuration of each DME unit. Within the Configuration window are the User Module windows, where you can assemble often-used components into presets; the Toolkit window, which displays objects used in the other windows as the basic building blocks for sound designs; and the Navigator window, which lets you grasp the overall status of the system at a glance. Zone Window Configuration Window Navigator Window Toolkit Window User Module Window ■ Area Window The Area window is used for designing areas, which manage the entire system. While at least one zone is included within an area, multiple zones can be arranged there. Zones DME Designer Owner’s Manual 15 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview ■ Zone Window The Zone window is used to design zones within the area. A zone is a more concrete blueprint that includes at least one DME. It shows the DME’s connections with other devices and the wiring between them. You can create multiple zones. The DME units and connected devices are arranged in each Zone window, creating configurations. Configurations ■ Configuration Window The Configuration window is used to design the internal configuration of each DME unit contained in the Zone window. By arranging and connecting components (audio processors like mixers, compressors, effects, and crossovers, along with parts like faders and meters) in the Configuration window, you can create things like complex processors or matrix mixers, that determine the actual internal structure that operates each DME unit. Components ■ User Module Window The User Module window is used for designing user modules that can be arranged in the Configuration window. You can create original modules by combining multiple examples of oftenused components. When you save these modules as presets, you can recall them easily whenever you want. 16 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview ■ Toolkit Window The Toolkit window displays the objects that you can use in each window that can be displayed in the Designer window. Those windows are the Area, Zone, Configuration, and User Module windows. The Toolkit displays different objects, according to the currently active window. To place an object in a window, double-click it in the Toolkit window where it is displayed or drag it to the currently active window. ■ Navigator Window The Navigator window displays the area, zones, configurations, and components in a hierarchal fashion that lets you check their status as a whole. When editing offline, you can click an area name, zone name, or configuration name to make that window active. Clicking a component name will open the component editor window for that component. ■ Objects and Components “Object” is the name for the parts that are arranged in the various design windows, such as the Area, Zone, Configuration, and User Module windows. Objects are always laid out in the Toolkit window. Only the appropriate objects for each window are displayed. The blocks displayed at the higher level of the Toolkit window in particular are called “components.” This refers to each type of processor that operates the DME. “Object” normally refers to Picture, Text, Ellipse and other items that are used after connecting them by wire to the various components. Component Editor The blocks that are arranged in the configuration window are called “components.” Audio processors like mixers, compressors, effects, and crossovers, along with parts like faders and meters, are used for this purpose in the Configuration window. When you double-click on a component block arranged in the Configuration window, the Component Editor window will open. There you can edit the parameters for that component. The types of parameters displayed will differ, depending on the component. Component Editor (Stereo Compressor) Component DME Designer Owner’s Manual 17 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Resource Meter This window provides an indication of the usage of the components in the configuration window. The usage percentage increases as the number of components increases, and is shown in graph form in this window. This window is shown at the same time as the designer window, and provides a guide when creating configurations. The usage percentage also depends on the sampling frequency at which the DME unit is set to operate. Make sure that the usage percentage is kept below 100%. Window Operations Operations in all windows are the same as for normal Windows applications. The windows are controlled with the [Minimize], [Maximize/Restore], and [Close] buttons at the upper right of the title bar. DME Designer is closed by clicking the [Close] button on the Main Panel window. 18 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Users and Security You can create multiple users in DME Designer and set the functions that are available to each user. Although users who will design and put together installations must be able to use all the functions of DME Designer, users who will only operate the system can be restricted to functions that will not allow them to accidentally change the settings. DME Designer is used with one user at a time logged on. To change the user, click the [File] menu → [Log Off] command on the Main Panel window. About Users To use DME Designer, you must logon when you start the software. Except for the first time the software is started or when separate settings are made for the first time, you can logon by specifying the name and password for a user that has been set as the administrator. The administrator can build the system as a whole, or apply function limitations that let other people edit. Administrators or other people that can use DME Designer are called “users.” The user name for the currently logged on user appears below [User] on the Main Panel window. Currently Logged On User Name The default user, named [Administrator], is set to use all of the functions. Immediately after DME Designer is installed, [Administrator] is the only user, and there is no password set. Multiple users can be created. When the system administrator creates multiple users, restrictions can be applied separately for each one of them. A user with restrictions applied can edit using only the functions the administrator enables for him. The place to create, setup, and delete users is the “Security” dialog box. See “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 19 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Logging On The “Log On” dialog box is displayed whenever the application is started or a user is logged off. Whenever one user is already logged on, another user cannot be logged on. To log on as another user, first log off the currently logged on user. NOTE If the automatic logon feature is enabled, the “Log On” dialog box will not be displayed when the application is started. Instead, the auto-logon user will be logged on automatically. ■ The “Log On” dialog box 1 2 3 5 1 [User] From the list, select the user you want to log on as. 2 [Password] Box Enter the password. 3 [OK] Button Log on as the selected user. 4 [Exit] Button When the application is started, and the “Log On” dialog box is displayed, there is an [Exit] button. This closes the application without logging on a user. 5 [Cancel] Button When the “Log On” dialog box is displayed after a user is logged off, there is a [Cancel] button instead of an [Exit] button. This cancels the logoff. The original user will continue to be logged on. ■ Logon Procedure 1 Click [▼] at the right of the [User]. A drop-down list of user names will be displayed. 2 Click the user you want to log on. 3 Enter the password into the [Password] box. When you type in the password box, the characters you enter will display as asterisks (*). 4 Click the [OK] button. 20 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Logging Off Logoff is used when changing users. When you log off, the document currently being edited is closed, and the “Log On” dialog box is displayed so you can log on the next user. Log off with the [Log Off] command on the [File] menu in the Main Panel window. 1 Click the [File] menu ➞ [Log Off] command on the Main Panel window. Log on the next user in the “Log On” dialog box. Automatic Logging On With the auto-logon function, you can have a specified user automatically logged on when the application is started. If you enable the auto-logon feature, the specified user will be logged on when the application is started, without displaying the “Log On” dialog box. Auto-logon is set from the “Security” dialog box. See “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 21 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Project Files Project Files Systems built with DME Designer are saved as project files. Project files have “.daf” as the extension for their filenames. These files include settings for the area, zones, configurations, and each parameter. Since only one project file can be open at a time, before you can open a second file, the first one must be closed. The commands for opening project files, creating new ones, and saving them, are found in the [File] menu of the Main Panel window. Creating New Project Files Project files are created using the [File] menu → [New] command in the Main Panel window. 1 Click [File] menu ➞ [New] in the Main Panel window. Since the currently open project file must be closed before a new one can be created, a “Project file has been modified. Save?” dialog box will be displayed. 2 To save the file, click [Yes]. To close without saving, click [No]. If you click [Yes], the file currently saved with the same name will be overwritten. If the file has not been saved, the File Save dialog box will be displayed. A new project file will be created. 22 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Saving Project Files Project files are saved using the [File] menu → [Save] and [Save As] commands in the Main Panel window. The [Save] command overwrites the previously saved version of the file. The [Save As] command lets you give a new name to the file before saving it. When you save the file with a new name, you can protect it with a password. ■ The “Save As” Dialog Box When you click the [File] menu → [Save As] command in the Main Panel window, the “Save As” dialog box is displayed. Except for some [Security] options, this dialog box is the same as the normal Windows dialog box for saving files. 2 [Up One Level] Button 3 [Create New Folder] Button 4 [Views] Button 1 5 6 7 8 9 ) ! @ # 1 [Save In] Specify the folder for saving the file. The folder name is displayed in this box. Click the [▼] on the right to move to another folder. The large box below displays the contents of the folder in this box. 2 [Up One Level] Button Moves to the folder one level higher in the hierarchy. 3 [Create New Folder] Button Creates a new folder in the folder currently being displayed. 4 [Views] Button Changes the way the folder content list is displayed. If you click this button, a menu appears that lets you change the arrangement and display format of the files in the list. 5 List This box displays the contents of the folder shown in the [Save In] box. Only files belonging to the type selected in the [Save As Type] box will be displayed. 6 [File Name] Box Enter the filename. If the currently open file has already been saved, its name will be already entered in this box. To save using a different filename, change the name here. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 23 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview 7 [Save as type] Selects the format for the file you are saving. When saving project files including Wave files set for Wav File Player, select “Project File with wave (*.daf)”. Otherwise, select “Project File (*.daf)”. 8 [Security] Protects files with a password. If you check here, you will be able to enter settings in the [ID], [Password], and [Confirm Password] boxes. 9 [ID] Box Enter the ID that has been set for the file. The currently logged on user name will be preentered, but you can change it. This need not be the same as a user name. ) [Password] Box Enter the password that has been set for the file. You can enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters. The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks (*) in the [Password] box. ! [Confirm Password] Box Enter the password once again to confirm it. Enter the same password as was entered into the [Password] box. The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks (*), the same as in the [Password] box. NOTE When someone attempts to open a password-protected project file, the application will request an ID and password. If they are not entered correctly, the file cannot be opened. Be careful to avoid mistakes when entering the ID and password. The password cannot be reissued and the ID and password cannot be changed. Be careful not to forget them. @ [Save] Button Saves the project file. If the characters entered into the [Password] and [Confirm Password] boxes were not the same, a “Password is different” dialog box will be displayed. Click the [OK] button and reenter the correct password in the [Password] and [Confirm Password] boxes. # [Cancel] Button Cancel the file save process. 24 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview ■ Saving Project Files 1 Click [File] menu ➞ [Save] in the Main Panel window. If there is a file already saved with the same name, it will be overwritten. When saving a project file for the first time, you must name the file before saving it. The “Save As” dialog box will open, the same as when clicking the [File] menu [Save As] command. Enter a filename and specify the folder where the file will be saved. ■ Saving a File with a New Name With the [File] menu [Save As] command in the Main Panel window, you can save the currently open file with a new filename. When saving for the first time, this creates a new file. A file that has already been saved with a name will be saved as a separate file. 1 Click [File] menu ➞ [Save As] in the Main Panel window. The “Save As” dialog box will be displayed. 2 Enter a filename into the [File name] box. 3 Specify the folder where the file will be saved. 4 Click the [Save] button. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 25 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview ■ Protecting a Project File with a Password When you save a project file with a new name, you can set a password and protect the file. If a password is set, an ID and password will be requested when the file is opened. The security settings for a file cannot be changed by resaving the file with the same name. They can only be changed when saving the file with a new name using the [Save As] command. Once set, the ID and password cannot be changed. To change the ID and password for passwordprotected project files, use the [Save As] command to save the file as a new one with a different name. 1 Click [File] menu ➞ [Save As] in the Main Panel window. The “Save As” dialog box will be displayed. 2 Place a checkmark for [Security] in the file save dialog box. 3 Enter an ID into the [ID] box. The name of the currently logged on user will be automatically entered into the [ID] box. To change it, enter another ID into the box. When using [Save As] to save a password-protected file, the dialog box will be displayed with the ID and password boxes automatically filled in with the ID and password that were assigned to the original file. To change the ID and password, enter new ones into the boxes. 4 Enter the desired password into the [Password] box. You can enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters for the password. The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks (*) in the [Password] box. 5 Enter the same characters into the [Confirm Password] box as were entered into the [Password] box. The characters you enter will be displayed as asterisks (*) in the [Password] box. 6 Click the [Save] button. When saving a password-protected file without changing the name, the same ID and password will be set (the ID and password cannot be changed). Using the [Save] command, you cannot password protect an already saved project file that was not already password protected. To set a password for a file that is not already password protected, save it as a separate file using the [Save As] command. 26 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Opening Project Files Project files are opened using the [File] menu → [Open] command in the Main Panel window. Since the currently opened project file must be closed before another one can be opened, a “Project file has been modified. Save?” dialog box may be displayed. ■ [Open] Command Project files are opened using the [File] menu → [Open] command in the Main Panel window. 1 Click [File] menu ➞ [Open] in the Main Panel window. A “Project file has been modified. Save?” dialog box may be displayed. 2 Click the [Yes] or [No] button. The “Open” dialog box will be displayed. 3 Selects the file to be opened. 4 Click the [Open] button. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 27 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview ■ Opening a Project File That Has Security Set If security is set for a project, the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box will be displayed when you click the [Open] button in the “Open” dialog box. Enter the ID and password for the file into the [ID] and [Password] boxes, and click the [OK] button. If you enter an incorrect ID or password and click the [OK] button on the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box, the “Wrong ID or password!” dialog box will be displayed. Click the [OK] button and enter the correct ID and password the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box. ■ Opening a Project File from the “Recently Used Files” List Recently used project files are displayed on the [File] menu in the Main Panel window. If you click one of the filenames, you can open that project file. Recently Used Files If security is set for a project file, the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box will be displayed if that file is selected from the recently used files list. Enter the ID and password to open the file. 28 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview ■ Double-Click the Icon for the Project File When you double-click the icon for the project file, the file will open. If DME Designer is not started, it will start. After logon, the project file will open. Just as when you use the [Open] command, if DME Designer is already started, the currently open project file must be closed before another one can be opened. Therefore, a “Project file has been modified. Save?” dialog box will be displayed. NOTE Sometimes the “Project file has been modified. Save?” dialog box will not be displayed. If security is set for the project file, the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box will be displayed. Enter the ID and password to open the file. Closing Project Files You cannot have multiple project files open simultaneously in DME Designer. To close the currently open project file, you can create a new project file or open another project file. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 29 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview DME Data File You can import or export parameters for a DME that is arranged in a configuration file. Parameters for a single DME unit in the current configuration (the one being edited) are saved as a file. Saved parameters can be imported into another project file. Files with parameters saved in them are called “DME Data Files.” These files have “.ddf” as the extension for their filenames. DME Data Import This imports DME data file settings into a DME included in the current configuration. 1 Make active the configuration that arranged the DME into which you are going to import. If there are multiple configurations, display the window in front for the configuration that arranged the DME to which you are going to import. 2 Click the [File] menu in the Main Panel window, and move the mouse cursor over [Import DME Configuration]. A submenu will be displayed. The DMEs included in the current configuration will be displayed on a submenu. 30 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview 3 On the submenu, click on the DME into which you will import settings. The “Open” dialog box will be displayed. 4 Select the DME data file and click the [Open] button. ■ [Import DME Configuration] Submenu The DMEs included in the current configuration will be displayed on the [Import DME Configuration] submenu. [Create New DME] creates a new DME and imports settings. NOTE Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can import DME data. For information about user security levels, see “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55. NOTE If DME data file import was not possible, a “DME file import failed.” message will be displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 31 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview DME Export This exports parameters from a DME included in the current configuration and saves them as a file. 1 Make active the configuration that includes the DME from which you will export. If there are multiple configurations, display the window in front for the configuration that arranged the DME from which you are going to export. 2 Click the [File] menu in the Main Panel window, and move the mouse cursor over [Export DME Configuration]. A submenu will be displayed. 3 On the submenu, click on the DME from which you will export settings. The “Save As” dialog box will be displayed. 4 Enter the filename. Determines whether a selected file type will be exported along with a wave file. 5 Specify the folder where the file will be saved, then click the [Save] button. 32 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview ■ [Export DME Configuration] Submenu The DMEs included in the current configuration will be displayed on the [Export DME Configuration] submenu. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 33 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Configuration Creation Procedure The configuration is a design diagram that determines the DME configuration. Transferring this data causes the DME to operate. Follow the procedure below to create a DME Designer configuration. NOTE Configurations can be created only when the DME unit is offline. To transfer the data, you must first go into online status. The procedure for going online is given later in this document. 1 Creating a New Project. When you start DME Designer, a new project is created. If another project file is already open, use the [File] menu → [New] command in the Main Panel window to create a new file. “Main Panel Window Menu” → [File] menu → [New] (page 44) 2 Zone Settings. Zone names are set, and zones are added and deleted using the “Zone” dialog box. See “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone” on page 231. 3 Configuration Settings. Zone names are set, and zones are added and deleted using the “Zone” dialog box. See “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Configuration” on page 233. 4 DME, ICP, External Device Layout. Arrange DMEs, ICPs, and external devices in the Zone window. See “Zone Window” on page 237, “Objects” on page 156, “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” on page 207. 5 Placing Components. Place components and user modules in the Configuration window. See “Configuration Window” on page 242, “User Module” on page 250, “Types of Components” on page 259. 6 Component Logical Connections. Use wires to connect the components and user modules you placed in the Configuration window. See “Drawing and Editing Wires” on page 219. 7 Setting Parameters. Edit the component parameters in the component editor. See “Component Editor Window” on page 264. 8 Setting User Defined Parameters. Parameters can be assigned to function keys F1 through F6 in the DME unit. See “User Defined Button (User Defined Parameters)” on page 98. 9 Storing Scenes. Store the scene using the [Tools] menu → [Scene Manager] command in the Main Panel window. See “Scene Manager” on page 63. 34 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview Online You can connect the DME unit to your computer and transfer configurations, scenes and parameters created in DME Designer into the DME unit. You can also read data from the DME unit into DME Designer, synchronizing it with the status of the DME unit. Because Synchronization presupposes that the DME unit can communicate with the computer where DME Designer is installed, the necessary drivers (USB-MIDI or DME-N Network Driver) must be installed, and appropriate settings must be made for each driver and for DME Designer MIDI port. NOTE Because there are no scene settings when the DME unit is purchased, the configuration and scene information created in DME Designer must first be transferred. 1 DME Unit and Computer Connection. Connect the DME unit and computer using a USB cable or an Ethernet cable. See separate “DME64N/24N Owner’s Manual” for details. 2 MIDI Driver Installation. Install the USB-MIDI driver or DME-N Network driver in the computer. See separate “DME Designer Installation Guide” for details. 3 MIDI Driver Setup. Make the necessary settings for the MIDI driver installed in the computer. If the driver is set up already, check the settings before going online. See separate “DME Designer Installation Guide” for details. 4 MIDI Driver Port Setup. The MIDI Setup dialog will be displayed if you press the MIDI Setup button on the MIDI Setup toolbar that is displayed when you start DME Designer Set up the In/Out/Thru ports connected to the DME. 5 Making MIDI IN/OUT Settings in DME Designer. On the [Port] tab of the “MIDI” dialog box, select the MIDI driver used for sending and receiving MIDI messages. If the driver is set up already, check the settings before going online. “MIDI” → [Port] tab (page 97) DME Designer Owner’s Manual 35 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview 6 Storing and Checking Scenes. When moving online, the lowest scene must be stored. You can check if a scene is stored using the “Scene Manager” dialog box. See “Scene Manager” on page 63. 7 Recalling Scenes. When going online, the scene will be recalled. Its scene number must be displayed in [Scene Number], and its scene name will be displayed in Scene Name. If [--------] is displayed of [Scene Name], the scene will be recalled. Main Panel Window → “Current Scene” (page 42) See “Scene Manager” on page 63. 8 Display the “Synchronization” dialog box. Click [Synchronization] in the [Tools] menu or the large [Synchronization] button on the toolbar. When the dialog box opens, a list of connected DME units will be obtained. DMEs connected to the computer are displayed in the [Network] list. NOTE When requesting the “Synchronization” dialog box, a one-time alert will be displayed if no scene has been recalled, or the MIDI Port settings have not been made. After clicking the [OK] button on the alert, each dialog will open. At this time, you can make the needed settings in the displayed dialog box, and then again display the “Synchronization” dialog box. 36 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview 9 IP Address Selection The DMEs included in the current zone are displayed in the [Designer] list in the “Synchronization” dialog box. Click the [IP Address] box, then select the DME unit IP address that matches the DME currently in the DME Designer. NOTE IP addresses are displayed for devices of the same type in the area. 10 Going Online. Clicking the [Go On-Line] button displays a dialog box where you can decide the synchronization method. Click the [Designer→DME] direction button. Transfer of the configuration will begin, and DME Designer will be synchronized with the unit. If there are many zones, this process may take time. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 37 Chapter 2 DME Designer Overview When going online is finished, the [Go On-line] button will be grayed out, and the Main Panel window [On-Line] button will light up. The dialog box will close automatically if [Close this window after synchronization] is checked. NOTE It may not be possible to go online if a scene has not been stored when [Recall Safe] is selected. To go off line, click either the [ON-Line] button in the main panel window, or the [Go Off-line] button in the “Synchronization” dialog box. 38 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Main Panel Window The Main Panel window is the main window of DME Designer. Log On User Title Bar Menu Bar Tool Buttons (Small) Tool Buttons (Large) Current Scene [Mute] Button Current Zone Communication Status Title Bar “DME Designer” is displayed on the title bar. Menu Bar Commands that can be executed in the application are collected into categories on the menu bar. When you click one of the categories, a list of commands is displayed. Also, the name of the currently open project file is displayed at the right. When a new project file has been opened, or has not yet been saved, “Untitled” will be displayed for the file name. Tool Buttons (Small) Frequently used commands are arranged here as buttons. When a command cannot be used, its button will be grayed out. [Open File] Button [Save File] Button [Undo] Button [Undo History] Button [Redo] Button [User Control Manager] Button [Clock] Button [Parameter Link] Button [MIDI] Button [GPI] Button [Word Clock] Button [User Defined] Button DME Designer Owner’s Manual 39 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Open File] Button Opens project files. → [Open] on the [File] menu (page 45) ■ [Save File] Button Saves the project file currently being edited. → [Save] on the [File] menu (page 45) ■ [Undo] Button Undoes the most recent edit operation. → [Undo] on the [Edit] menu (page 47) ■ [Undo History] Button Opens the “Undo History” dialog box. Undoes multiple operations. → [Undo History] on the [Edit] menu (page 47) ■ [Redo] Button Restores operations undone with the [Undo] button back to their original condition. → [Redo] on the [Edit] menu (page 47) ■ [User Defined] Button Opens the “User Defined Button” dialog box. → See “[User Defined Button]” on page 49. ■ [Word Clock] Button Opens the “Word Clock” dialog box. → See “[Word Clock]” on page 49. ■ [GPI] Button Opens the “GPI” dialog box. → See “[GPI]” on page 49. ■ [MIDI] Button Opens the “MIDI” dialog box. → See “[MIDI]” on page 49. ■ [Parameter Link] Button Opens the “Parameter Link” dialog box. → See “[Parameter Link]” on page 49. ■ [Clock] Button Opens the “Clock” dialog box. → See “[Clock]” on page 50. ■ [User Control Manager] Button Opens the “User Control Manager” dialog box. → See “[User Control]” on page 48. 40 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Tool Button (Large) [Synchronization] Button [User Control] Button [Show/Hide Designer] Button [Event Logger] Button [Event Scheduler] Button ■ [Show/Hide Designer] Button Displays or hides the Designer window. ■ [User Control] Button Works the same as the [User Control] command on the [View] menu. Clicking this button displays a menu. User Control will be displayed on the menu. If you click there, the user control window will be displayed. If you click [New User Control], the “New User Control” dialog box opens. ■ [Synchronization] Button Opens the “Synchronization” dialog box. → See “Synchronization” Dialog Box on page 76. ■ [Event Logger] Button Opens the Event Logger window. → See “Event Logger” Window on page 111. ■ [Event Scheduler] Button Opens the “Event Scheduler” dialog box. → See “Event Scheduler” Dialog Box on page 116. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 41 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Mute] Button Mute OFF Mute ON Turns ON and OFF the DME mute button for the current zone. To turn it ON, press the <Shift> key while clicking. If you click the button while it is OFF without pressing the <Shift> key, the following message will be displayed: “Click the Mute Button with the Shift Key.” To turn it OFF, click on the button. There is no need to press the <Shift> key. Current Scene Displays the number and name of the current scene. You can switch between scenes. [Scene Number] [Scene Name] [Scene Manager] Button ■ [Scene Number] Displays the number of the current scene. A list where you can select a scene is displayed when you press the [▼]. The EDIT indicator will light when a parameter has been edited after recalling or storing a scene. NOTE Press <Ctrl> key and <+> key simultaneously recall the next scene and press <Ctrl> key and <-> key simultaneously recall the previous scene. These settings can be changed via the Shortcut keys dialog box (page 134). ■ [Scene Name] Displays the name of the current scene. ■ [Scene Manager] Button Opens the “Scene Manager” dialog box. 42 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [User] (Logged On User) Currently Logged On User Name [Security] Button ■ Currently Logged On User Name Displays the currently logged on user name. ■ [Security] Button Opens the “Security” dialog box. Current Zone Displays the name of the active zone. A list where you can select a zone is displayed when you press the [▼]. Communication Status Displays the communication status between the DME unit and the computer. Message Transmit/Receive Indicator ON-line Button ■ [On-line] Button When the DME unit is connected to a computer, clicking this button alternately switches the unit's on-line/off-line status. The indicator will light when the DME unit is on-line. ■ Message Transmit/Receive Indicators [Rx] Lights when MIDI messages from the DME unit are received by DME Designer. [Tx] Lights when MIDI messages are transmitted from DME Designer to the DME unit. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 43 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Main Panel Window Menu [File] Menu ■ [New] Creates a new project. When a new project is created, the current project will be closed. A confirmation message asking “Project file has been modified. Save?” will be displayed. [Yes] Button Saves the currently open project. If the currently open file was already given a name and saved, that saved file will be overwritten. The “Save As” dialog box will be displayed for files that have not yet been saved. In this dialog box, you can name the file when you save it. [No] Button Closes the project without saving it. If the file has already been given a name and saved, the most recently saved version will remain as is. If the project has not been given a name and saved, it will be lost. [Cancel] Button Cancels creation of a new project. 44 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Open] Opens saved project files. Because the currently open project will be closed, a confirmation dialog box asking “Project file has been modified. Save?” will be displayed. When you select this command, the “Open” dialog box will be displayed. Select the project file you want to open and click the [Open] button. If security is enabled for the project file, the “Enter ID & Password” dialog box will be displayed. Enter the ID and password to open the file and click the [OK] button. The project file will open. ■ [Save] Overwrites an already saved project file with the current changes. If the file is being saved for the first time, the “Save As” dialog box will be displayed. → See “Project Files” on page 22. ■ [Save as] Saves the current project file as another file with a new name or in a new location. When you select this command, the “Save as” dialog box will be displayed. → See “Project Files” on page 22. ■ [Import DME Configuration] Imports parameters for a DME that is arranged in a configuration file. → See “DME Data File” on page 30. ■ [Export DME Configuration] Exports parameters of a DME that is arranged in a configuration file. → See “DME Data File” on page 30. ■ DME File Storage Opens the “DME File Storage” dialog box. → See “DME File Storage” on page 52. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 45 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ Recently Used Files Displays recently saved files. If you click one of the file names, you can open that file. ■ [Preference] Opens the “Preference” dialog box. → See “Preferences” on page 53. ■ [Log Off] Logs off the currently logged on user. Because the currently logged on user must be logged off before a new one can be logged on, the “Log On” dialog box will be displayed so you can log on the next user. → See “Users and Security” on page 19. ■ [Exit] Closes “DME Designer.” A confirmation dialog box asking “Project file has been modified. Save?” will be displayed. To save, click [Yes]. To close without saving, click [No.] 46 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Edit] Menu ■ [Undo] Undoes a single operation. The name of the operation that will be undone by [Undo] is displayed in the command name. You can also select the commands that come after that. When [Undo] is not possible, the command will be grayed out. ■ [Redo] Returns to the status before the [Undo] command was executed. The name of the operation that will be restored by [Redo] is displayed. You can [Redo] only as many operations as were undone with the [Undo] command. When [Redo] is not possible, the command will be grayed out. ■ [Undo History] Opens the “Undo History” dialog box. Undoes multiple operations. Also deletes the history of operations. 1 2 3 4 1 List Displays all operations performed so far, in order starting with the oldest. You can select an operation by clicking on it. 2 [OK] Button Undoes all operations below the one selected on the list. The operation selected on the list does not get undone. 3 [Close] Button Closes the dialog box. 4 [Delete All] Button Deletes the entire history of operations displayed on the list. When an operation is deleted from the list, it cannot be undone. Operations undone from the [Undo History] can be re-executed one-by-one using [Redo]. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 47 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [View] Menu ■ [Designer] Displays or hides the Designer window. ■ [Event Logger] Displays the network event log. Not displayed if selected while the network event log is showing. → See “Event Logger” on page 111. ■ [User Control] This opens User Control. The user controls that can be opened by the currently logged on user are displayed on a submenu. If you click [New User Control] on the submenu, the “New User Control” dialog box opens. → See “User Control/User Module Editor” on page 279. NOTE Controls that are not available to the currently logged-on user are not shown in the menu. [Tools] Menu ■ [Scene Manager] Opens the “Scene Manager” dialog box. → See “Scene Manager” on page 63. 48 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [User Control Manager] Opens the “User Control Manager” dialog box. → See “User Control” on page 70, page 279 ■ [Parameter Link] Opens the “Parameter Link” dialog box. → See “Parameter Link” on page 73. ■ [Synchronization] Opens the “Synchronization” dialog box. → See “Synchronization (DME Designer and DME Unit Synchronization)” on page 75. ■ [Event Scheduler] Opens the “Event Scheduler” dialog box. → See “Event Scheduler” on page 116. ■ [Wav File Manager] Opens the “Wav File Manager” dialog box. → See “Wav File Manager” on page 128. ■ [GPI] Opens the “GPI” dialog box. → See “GPI” on page 79. ■ [MIDI] Opens the “MIDI” dialog box. → See “MIDI” on page 90. ■ [User Defined Button] Opens the “User Defined Button” dialog box. → See “User Defined Button (User Defined Parameters)” on page 98. ■ [DAW Control] Opens the “DAW Control” dialog box. → See “DAW Control” on page 132. ■ [Remote Control Setup List] Opens the “Remote Control Setup List” Dialog box. → See “Remote Control Setup List” on page 123. ■ [Word Clock] Opens the “Word Clock” dialog box. → See “Word Clock” on page 102. ■ [Monitor] Opens the “Monitor Out” dialog box. → See “Monitor” on page 104. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 49 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Clock] Opens the “Clock” dialog box. → See “Clock” on page 105. ■ [Language] Opens the “Language” dialog box. → See “Language Settings” on page 106. ■ [Parameter List] Opens the “Parameter List” dialog box. → See “Parameter List” on page 124. ■ [Component Lock] Opens the “Component Lock” dialog box. → See “Component Lock” on page 127. ■ [Security] Opens the “Security” dialog box. → See “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55. ■ [Shortcut Keys] Opens the “Shortcut Keys” dialog box. → See “Shortcut Keys” on page 134. ■ [Backup] Opens the “Backup” dialog box. → See “Backup” on page 135. ■ [Firmware Update] Updates the DME unit firmware. → See “DME Firmware Update” on page 107. 50 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Window] Menu Displays the open windows. Click a window name to bring that window to the front. ■ [Close All Editor Windows] Closes all editor windows. NOTE Each design windows within the Designer window can be switched using the [Window] menu in the Designer window. [About] Menu ■ [About DME Designer] Displays information about this application. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 51 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window DME File Storage Allows management of DME files. Project files can be managed on the DME, eliminating the need to manage them on the computer. Click [DME File Storage] in the [File] menu to display the “DME File Storage” dialog. ■ Zone List Select the desired zone and DME from the list. ■ File List A list of the files stored on the selected DME. [Send] Button Transfers selected files from the computer to the DME. [Receive] Button Transfers selected files from the DME to the computer. [Delete] Button Deletes selected files from the DME. NOTE Synchronization may become impossible if the [Remaining Memory] value (the amount of remaining DME memory) becomes too small. If this occurs, delete unwanted files to increase the amount of available memory. 52 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Preferences When you click the [Preference] command on the [File] menu in the Main Panel window, the “Preferences” dialog box is displayed. Here you can make environmental settings for using DME Designer. ■ [Application] Tab Here you can set the general usage environment. On Startup Selects the action when the application starts up. • [Load the last file opened] Opens the last opened file. If the file cannot be found because it was moved, deleted, or its name was changed, a new project will be opened. • [Create an empty file] Opens a new project. • [Load File & Synchronization] Opens the last opened file and synchronizes with the DME unit. Contents Folder Specifies the folder where the images used by the Design windows and user controls are stored. Click the [Browse] button and specify the folder. Auto Save Set up the automatic file save feature. • [Enable] Auto save of project files being worked on will occur when checked. The file will be overwritten, but the Undo history will not be cleared. This setting has no effect when the file being worked on has not previously been saved, or the computer is online. • [Interval in minutes] Specifies the auto-save interval in minutes. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 53 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Confirm Scene Store] Place a checkmark here to have a confirmation dialog box displayed when storing a scene. [Save after synchronization] If a save is performed after the DME Designer is synchronized to the DME unit, the next synchronization will be significantly faster because one the difference needs to be synchronized. Check this checkbox to specify auto-save after the DME Designer is synchronized to the DME unit. ■ [Component Editor] Tab Sets up operation of the Component Editor knobs, sliders, and edit boxes. Refer to “Changing Parameters” on page 266. 54 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings) When you click the [Security] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Security” dialog box is displayed. Here you can create and delete users. You can also set the security level for each user. Users are saved as DME Designer settings. You don’t need to create users for each file. Auto-Logon User ■ User Setting Restrictions Various restrictions apply, depending on the security level of the user that is currently logged on. • The currently logged on user can edit only users at a security level lower than his or her own. • The currently logged on user cannot raise his or her own security level. ■ [Administrator] User The [Administrator] user is registered by default, and can use all functions. Immediately after DME Designer is installed, there is no password set for the [Administrator] user. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 55 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ Security Level User security levels are set with the [Operation Security] item at the right of the “Security” dialog box. User Level High Level 1 User Level 2 User Level 3 User Level 4 User Low Security Level Settings You can allow or disallow editing and the ability to open windows or set controls. Ten levels, 1 through 10, are set for scene storage/recall and user controls. Level 1 is the highest level and 10 is the lowest. By default, level 1 is set for the [Administrator] user. Level 1 can be set for the [Administrator] only. Users created by the [Administrator] directly below itself can be set at levels 2 through 10. New users created subordinate to users at level 2 can be set at levels 3 through 10. New users can be created no higher than one level below the user that created them. Scene sets the level for storing and recalling scenes. The logged on user can store or recall scenes at levels equal to or lower than his or her own level. For example, a user at level 3 can recall scenes set for scene recall at levels 3 through 10. Levels are also set for user control. The logged on user can display or edit user controls at levels equal to or lower than his or her own level. The log-on user can use zones that are checked in the [View Zone] field. 56 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Enable Auto-Log On] Enables auto-logon. If this checkbox is selected, the user displayed in the box to the right will be logged on automatically when DME Designer is started. Auto-logon logs on the user without any password entry. Click the [▼] at the right of the box, and select the user for auto-logon from the displayed user list. If auto-logon is turned OFF, the “Log On” dialog box will be displayed whenever the DME Designer is started. Each time a user must be selected and a password entered in order to log on. If auto-logon is changed from ON to OFF when a password is set for the currently logged on user, a “Confirmation of Current User” dialog box will be displayed. Enter the user’s password into the [Password] box, and click the [OK] button. If you click the [Cancel] button, auto-logon will remain ON. ■ Auto-Logon User Selects the user for auto-logon when [Enable Auto Log On] is checked. The currently logged on user can set this command for users at a security level equal to or lower than his or her own. If a user at a higher level is selected, a message that warns “Cannot access higher user level.” will be displayed. Click the [OK] button. To set auto-logon for a user at a security level higher than the currently logged on user, first log off as the current user, then logon as a user at a higher security level. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 57 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window User List The registered users are displayed here. The currently logged on user is displayed in bold text. Click the name of the user whose settings you want to edit. 1 2 6 3 4 5 The [Administrator] is the user set by default, and it is used for administering the system. The [Administrator] user has the highest level and can use all functions. All new users are created at a level lower that the [Administrator] user, and are displayed below the [Administrator]. If a user at level 2 and below has other users subordinate to him or her, a [+] or [-] button will be displayed to the left of higher level user’s name on the list. Clicking the [+] or [-] buttons displays or hides the users subordinate to that higher user. The currently logged on user can create multiple users at lower levels. 1 Name Displays the user names. The currently logged on user is displayed in bold text. 2 Startup User Control Displays “ON” to automatically open the user control and make settings when the user is logged on. 3 [Add User] Button Adds a user subordinate to the user selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Add User” dialog box. Select the user that will be superior to the new user, then click this button. If a user higher than the currently logged on user is selected, the button will be grayed out and no user can be added. 4 [Remove User] Button Deletes the user selected on the list. Only users at levels lower than the currently logged on user can be deleted. Furthermore, the currently logged on user cannot delete himself. 5 [Change] Button Changes settings for the user selected on the list. Opens the “Change User Information” dialog box. The contents of the dialog box are the same as the “Add User” dialog box. 58 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window 6 Operation Security Sets the functions that can be used by the user selected on the [User List] to the left. Selecting a checkbox enables use of the corresponding function. • [Edit] You can change the following settings: editing in the Designer window, user control edit, user defined parameter edit, word clock, scene edit, GPI and MIDI. • [View DME Design Window] Allows display of the Designer configuration window. • [Control Component Editor] Allows parameter editing in the component editor. • [View Component Editor] Allows display of the component editor. • [Change Configuration] Allows switching between configurations. • [Synchronization] Allows synchronizing with the DME unit. • [View Log Window] Displays the Event Logger window. • [Scene Store/Recall Level] Sets the level at which scenes can be stored and recalled. Click the [▲] and [▼] buttons or enter a number into the box to set the level. While levels 1 through 10 are available, the range of levels that can be actually set varies according to the level of the user doing the setting. When a user is created, automatically this is set to “One level lower than the user above.” The initially set level is the highest level that can be set for that user. • [User Control Level] Sets the user control level. Click the [▲] and [▼] buttons or enter a number into the box to set a level from 1 through 10. While levels 1 through 10 are available, the range of levels that can be actually set varies according to the level of the user doing the setting. When a user is created, automatically this is set to “One level lower than the user above.” The initially set level is the highest level that can be set for that user. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 59 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window “Add User” Dialog Box/“Change User Information” Dialog Box When you click the [Add User] button in the “Security” dialog box, the “Add User” dialog box is displayed. If you click the [Change] button in the “Security” dialog box, the “Change User Information” dialog box is displayed. The “Add User” dialog box is for setting a user name and password when adding a new user. You can change user settings in the “Change User Information” dialog box. The contents of the dialog boxes are the same. “Add User” dialog box “Change User Information” dialog box ■ [Name] Box Enter the user name. Enter a name different than other existing user names. ■ [Password] Box Enter the password. When you type in the password box, asterisks (*) will be displayed instead of the characters you enter. If you do not want to set a password the user, leave the box blank. ■ [Confirm Password] Box Enter the password once again to confirm it. When you type in the password box, asterisks (*) will be displayed instead of the characters you enter. If you do not want to set a password the user, leave the box blank. ■ [Startup User Control] When a user logs on, user controls and settings which are specified or below that user’s security level are automatically opened. In the “Security” dialog box [User List], [User Control] will be “ON” for users for whom this option has been turned on. ■ [OK] Button In the “Add User” dialog box, this creates new users according to the settings made there. In the “Change User Information” dialog box, this applies the dialog box settings and changes the user settings. ■ [Cancel] Button Cancels user creation or setting changes, and closes the dialog box. 60 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Creating Users Users are created as follows: 1 Click [Security] on the Main Panel window [Tools] menu. The “Security” dialog box will be displayed. You can open the “Security” dialog box by clicking the [Security] button in the Main Panel window. 2 Select a user from the [User List] in the “Security” dialog box. A user will be created subordinate to the selected user. [Administrator] can be selected only if the logged on user is the [Administrator]. If there are multiple users, select the user that will be above the new user. Multiple users can be created subordinate to a single user. 3 Click the [Add User] button. The “Add User” dialog box will be displayed. 4 Enter the user name into the [Name] box. 5 Enter the password into the [Password] box. You can also create users with no password. If you do not want to set a password for the user, leave the [Password] box blank. 6 Enter the password into the [Confirm Password] box also. If you do not want to set a password for the user, leave the [Confirm Password] box blank also. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 61 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window 7 Set the [Startup User Control]. NOTE If the text entered into the [Password] and [Confirm Password] boxes is not the same, a “Different password!” message will be displayed. Click the [OK] button and reenter the correct password in the [Password] and [Confirm Password] boxes in the “Add User” dialog box. 8 Click the [OK] button. This closes the “Add User” dialog box. The new user will be added to the “Security” dialog box list. 9 Set the security level for the user, using [Operation Security] in the “Security” dialog box. When creating a new user, all the checkboxes in [Operation Security] will be turned OFF. Click and turn ON the functions you want to permit the new user to use. [Scene Store/Recall Level] and [User Control Level] will be set to one level lower than the user above the newly created user. The initially set level will automatically be the highest level that can be set for that user. To lower the level, enter a larger number in the box. Click the [OK] button and the dialog will close. You can continue creating new users without closing the dialog box. 62 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Scene Manager Scenes Configuration contents can be given a name and saved as “Scenes.” Saving scenes is called “Scene Store.” Parameter settings in the configuration for each site used can be stored multiple times and recalled and used when needed. There are 999 scene memories available. When a scene is stored, DME parameters are saved as “preset parameters.” Presets are automatically created when a scene is stored. Bringing back a scene (making a scene the current scene) is called “scene recall.” Scenes are recalled using the [▼] button next to the current scene on the Main Panel window or by using the “Scene Manager” dialog box. ■ Security for the Logged On User The currently logged on user can store, recall, or edit scenes that have a security level equal to or lower than his or her own. User security levels are set with the [Edit] → [Store/Recall/Edit] item in the “Security” dialog box. “Scene Manager” Dialog Box When you click [Scene Manager] in the [Tools] menu, the “Scene Manager” dialog box is displayed. [Copy] Button [Cut] Button [Insert] Button [Paste] Button [Clear] Button [Store] Button List [Recall Safe] Button [Detail] Button [Recall] Button DME Designer Owner’s Manual 63 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ List Displays the contents of the scene. Scene No. Displays the scene number. There are 999 scene memories available. Click here to select a scene. Name Displays the name of the scene. Click the [Name] box to enter a scene name. Up to 18 characters can be entered. If the scene has not been stored, “[No Data]” will be displayed. A name can be entered when a scene is stored. The default names are “Scene001,” “Scene002,” etc. The three-digit number is the same as the scene number (displayed in [Scene Number]) for the stored scene. Configuration Displays the configuration name. If the scene has not been stored, a hyphen (-) will be displayed. Edit Security Displays the scene edit security levels. Clicking here will display a list where you can change these security levels. Only levels at or below the security level of the currently logged on user are displayed in the list. When a user is created, these settings are the same as the new user's security level, but scene store and edit settings can be set lower. Recall Security Displays the scene recall security level. Clicking here will display a list where you can change the security level. Only levels at or below the security level of the currently logged on user are displayed in the list. When a user is created, these settings are the same as the new user's security level, but the scene recall setting can be set lower. Fade Fade is used when Fader components are used in a configuration. It sets whether fade is applied (ON) or not (OFF) when a scene is recalled. NOTE The fade function cannot be simulated in DME Designer. 64 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Fade Mode Sets the fade mode. You can select “All” or “Selected.” If you select “All,” all channels using Fader components in their configuration will be affected. Even when multiple components are used, all channels are targeted. If you select “Selected,” the only channels affected will be those for which the Fade switch in the component editor has been set to ON. NOTE The Fade switch for each channel is set to OFF by default. The fade effect will not be applied, even if Fade=ON and Fade Mode=Selected is selected. To apply the effect, you must set the Fade switch to ON for the channels where you need it. Fade Time Sets the fade time: i.e. the time it will take fader and pan parameters to reach their new settings when a scene is recalled. The changes are smooth and continuous. If only the presets in the recalled scene are set when that scene is recalled, the volume will be adjusted while the sound from the previous scene is playing, until the new level is reached If the configuration also changes, the volume will rise from silence until it reaches the new value. This can be set from zero to 60 seconds, in 0.1 second increments. NOTE Right-click in the list and use the contextual menu that appears to set User Defined Button, Program Change, GPI In, or GPI Out for the scene. ■ [Cut] Button Cuts the scene selected on the list. ■ [Copy] Button Copies the scene selected on the list. ■ [Paste] Button Pastes the contents of the cut or copied scene into the scene selected on the list. The selected scene will be overwritten. If no scene has been cut or copied, the button will be grayed out and cannot be used. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 65 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Insert] Button Inserts the contents of the cut or copied scene into the location of the scene selected on the list. The selected scene and those below are moved down by one. For example, if “Door_Open” was stored as scene number “005,” and selected when the [Insert] button was clicked, the inserted scene would become scene number “005,” and “Door_Open” would be moved to scene number “006.” Click the [Insert] button If no scene has been cut or copied, the button will be grayed out and cannot be used. If a scene is stored in the lowest scene on the scene memory list (with the scene number [999]), the button will be grayed out and the insert function will not be available. Delete the contents of scene number 999 before attempting to use the insert function. NOTE Move the scene data to a different scene memory when you don’t want to erase the contents of Scene No. 999. ■ [Clear] Button Deletes the contents of the scene selected on the list. If the presets included in a scene are not used in another scene, a “Delete preset?” message will be displayed. If the presets are not needed, click the [OK] button. If you click the [Cancel] button, the presets will not be deleted. Whichever you click, the scene itself will be deleted. NOTE The [Cancel] button on the “Delete Preset?” message does not cancel the [Clear] for the scene. It merely cancels deletion of the presets. 66 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Recall Safe] Button Before performing a recall, you can check the contents of the scene selected on the list, and set components that will not be read. This is used when there are components you do not want changed by the scene recall. When you click this button, the “Recall Safe” dialog box will be displayed. Checkbox Component Name All components included in the scene will be displayed. There is a checkbox to the left of each component. Place a check next to the components you do not wish to have read by scene recall (those you do not wish changed from their current status). Press the [Select All] button to check all components, or the [Clear All] button to clear the checks from all components. Click the [OK] button. The dialog box will close and when the scene is recalled, all components, except those checked, will be read. NOTE The components checked in the “Recall Safe” dialog box are the components that will not be read (that will be ignored). If you want to read all components, there is no need to make settings in the “Recall Safe” dialog box. “Recall Safe” is used when you want to keep some components with their current settings, while there are other components you want to change according to the scene. ■ [Store] Button Stores the contents of the current configuration into the scene selected in the list. If an empty scene is selected and the contents stored there, a new scene is created. If a scene is already stored in the selected scene number, it will be overwritten. If [Confirm Scene Store] is checked on the [Application] tab of the “Preferences” dialog box, a confirmation dialog box will be displayed before the scene is stored. NOTE The currently logged on user can store scenes at a security level equal to or lower than his or her own only. NOTE When the computer and DME unit are online, a scene stored in the DME Designer will also be stored on the DME unit, regardless of the DME settings. The DME utility display Misc. page [Scene Store] setting only affects store operation from the DME panel controls. When a scene is stored, the configuration parameters at that time are saved as “preset parameters.” Presets are created automatically. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 67 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Recall] Button Recalls the scene selected in the list and makes it the current scene. NOTE The currently logged on user can recall scenes at a security level equal to or lower than his or her own only. ■ [Detail] Button Expands the dialog box and displays a preset list. If you click the preset list while it is displayed, the preset list will be hidden. When the dialog box is opened, its status will be the same as the last time it was closed. [Del] Button [Store] Button [New] Button [Del Unused] Button DME Preset DME Preset [Detail] Button Preset List ■ Preset List Displays the presets for each DME unit in the scene selected in the list. When another scene is selected on the list, the contents of the preset list will be changed. You can change the presets used in the scene by clicking the radio buttons to the left of the preset names. You can also create, delete, and store presets or change their names. DME Displays the DME. Below the DME are [Slot], [Component], and [AD]. If there are presets below them, a [+] button will be displayed. When you click the [+] it becomes a [-] and the presets are displayed. Preset Displays DME presets. If you click the preset name, selecting the text that is there, you can change the preset name. When presets are automatically created when a scene is stored, they are named “Preset001,” “Preset002,” and so on. Presets created with the [New] button are named “New Preset.” You can select the presets used in a scene by clicking the radio buttons to the left of the preset names. 68 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Del] Button Deletes the preset selected on the preset list. NOTE Presets used in a scene cannot be deleted. ■ [Store] Button Stores the current parameter status in the preset selected in the preset list. The contents of the selected preset will be overwritten. ■ [New] Button Stores the current status and creates a new preset. The newly created preset is named “New Preset.” ■ [Del Unused] Button Deletes presets that are not used by DMEs included in the current zone. NOTE There is no [OK] button or [Cancel] button in the “Scene Manager” dialog box. To close the dialog box, click the [Close] button at the upper-right of the dialog box. Changes from storing/recalling scenes or editing, such as changing names or contents, will be applied immediately. With the dialog box open, you can make the Designer window active and add components or change parameters. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 69 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window User Control User Controls You can create an original control by arranging knobs and sliders in the component editor. Controls you create are called “user controls.” Those created user controls are displayed in the [View] → [User Control] submenu in the Main Panel window ■ Security for the Logged On User The currently logged-on user can create and edit the user controls of all users at lower security levels as well as the controls specified for that user. Available user controls are displayed in the User Control manager dialog box that can be accessed through the [User Control] sub-menu of the main panel window [View] menu. The user control security level for each user is set with [Operation Security] → [User Control Level] in the “Security” dialog box. For information about user security, see “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55. “User Control Manager” Dialog Box When you click [User Control Manager] on the [Tools] menu, the “User Control Manager” dialog box is displayed. This dialog box displays a list of user controls included in the configuration of the current zone. There they can be created or deleted. You can also edit the name and security level of user controls here. NOTE Only controls available to the currently logged on user are shown in the list. 70 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ User Control Displays the names of the user controls. Clicking here will select the characters in the name, allowing you to change it. ■ Security Level Displays the security level set for each user control. Clicking here will display a list where you can change the security level. ■ User Displays the name of the user specified in User Control. Clicking here will display a list of the available users. NOTE Levels at or below the security level of the currently logged on user are displayed in the list. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 71 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [New] Button Creates new user controls. Clicking here displays the “New User Control” dialog box. Enter the User Control name in the [Name] box. ■ [User Level]/[User Name] Use the radio buttons to the left to select security-level or user dependent control. [User Level] Select a security level from the drop-down list. [User Name] Check a checkbox. Click [OK] to create the specified User Control setup. ■ [Delete] Button Deletes the user control selected on the list. ■ [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 72 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Parameter Link About Parameter Links You can group parameters of the same type and link them. These groups are called “Parameter Links.” When one parameter in a group is changed, all parameters in the group will change in the same way. There are two parameter link types: global links and local links. Global links link parameters for DMEs within a zone. Local links link parameters that are included for a single DME. NOTE Parameters can not apply to multiple groups. Groups can be created and parameters added to groups in the user control/user module control editor and component editor. For information about creating parameter links, see “Creating Parameter Links” on page 314. You can check the status of parameter links and edit them in the Parameter Link window. Parameter Link Window When you click [Parameter Link] in the [Tools] menu, the “Parameter Link” window is displayed. You can also display the window by selecting [Open Parameter Link] from the context menu displayed in the user control/user module editor and component editor. [Global Link] button/[Local Link] button Parameter Link Mode 1 [Global Link] button/[Local Link] button Switches the window display. • Global Link Links to the parameters of multiple DME units in the zone. • Local Link Links to the parameters of one DME unit. NOTE Because there is a large load on the network, the maximum number of Global Links will be limited to eight. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 73 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window 2 Parameter Link Mode Parameter linking is active when checked. Uncheck to temporarily disable parameter linking. Uncheck when you want to adjust the parameters individually. You can also turn parameter link mode ON or OFF using the context menu in the user control/ user module editor or component editor. • Group List Displays a hierarchical list of groups and the parameters that belong to them. When a group name is selected, the controls that belong to that group are selected. • Keep Offset (Group icon) Turns ON or OFF whether the offset value set for each parameter is retained as it is. When ON is set for a group, the Keep Offset icon is displayed in orange. When OFF is set for a group, it is displayed in green. When Keep Offset is set to ON and any parameter within the group goes to the minimum or maximum value, the parameters cannot be further changed. Keep Offset can be set to ON or OFF using the “Keep Offset” item on the context menu that is displayed when you right click the name of a group. • Group Name You can select a group name by clicking on it. Clicking the selected group name again will select the characters in the name, allowing you to change it. Clicking the plus (+) or minus (-) sign to the left of the group name displays or hides items that belong to that group. You can delete a group by selecting it and pressing the <Delete> key. You can also delete a group by right-clicking on the group name and selecting [Delete] in the context menu that is displayed. • DME Icon Displays the DME that includes the parameters that belong to a group. The components can be displayed or hidden by clicking the plus (+) or minus (-) signs for the DME icon. The parameters, Min, and Max can be displayed or hidden by clicking the plus (+) or minus (-) signs for the component. • Parameter Displays the parameters that belong to a group. You can display or hide minimum and maximum values for a parameter by clicking the plus (+) or minus (-) signs. You can delete a parameter from a group by selecting the parameter name and pressing the <Delete> key. 74 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Synchronization (DME Designer and DME Unit Synchronization) The DME unit and DME Designer are synchronized by Synchronization. The DME operates according to the configuration and scene information transferred during this process. This Synchronization is used when transferring the configuration in DME Designer and when controlling the DME unit in real time. NOTE Because Synchronization presupposes that the DME unit can communicate with the computer where DME Designer is installed, the necessary drivers (USB-MIDI or DME-N Network Driver) must be installed, and appropriate settings must be made for the driver and for DME Designer MIDI IN/OUT (page 90). For information about driver installation and settings, see the installation guide. For DME Designer communications settings, see “Online” (page 35). NOTE Because there are no scene settings when the DME unit is purchased, the configuration and scene information in DME Designer must first be transferred. NOTE For information about the online procedure, see “Online” (page 35). Online and Offline When a DME unit is connected to the computer and synchronized with DME Designer, its status is called “Online.” When a DME unit is not physically connected to the computer or is not synchronized even when it is connected, its status is called “Offline.” You can check the online/offline status and message transmission in [Communication Status] in the Main Panel window. ■ Online Sends configurations created in DME Designer to the DME unit and reads data from the DME unit, so that the DME unit configuration is reflected in the DME Designer configuration. You can also control the DME in real time from DME Designer. Operations performed in the DME Designer control editor are reflected in the DME unit, and operations on the DME side are reflected in DME Designer. You can not perform configuration editing using the Designer while online. ■ Offline The communication status becomes offline when editing configurations. ■ Switching Between Online and Offline You can switch between online and offline in the “Synchronization” dialog box. NOTE For information about the online procedure, see “Online” (page 35). DME Designer Owner’s Manual 75 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window “Synchronization” Dialog Box When you click the [Synchronization] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Synchronization” dialog box is displayed. The data from the current zone in the Designer is synchronized with the DME unit. Here you can make settings for synchronizing the unit in DME Designer one-on-one with the DME that actually exists on the network. [Go On-line] Button [Go Off-line] Button [Designer] [Network] Message Area [Close this window after synchronization] checkbox 76 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Go On-line] Button This button will be grayed out when the software is online. Clicking the button displays a dialog box where you can decide the synchronization method. [Designer→DME] button A consistency check is performed between the data in the current zone and the DME data, then the communication status changes to online. Transmits data from the DME Designer to the DME unit and synchronizes the two. [Designer←DME] button Data from the DME unit is read into DME Designer. Current data stored in the DME unit, such as scenes, are read into DME Designer. This assumes that the configurations in the DME unit and the DME Designer agree. ■ [Go Off-line] Button Clicking this button changes from online to offline. While offline, this button will be grayed out. ■ [Close this window after synchronization] Checkbox When this checkbox is checked the dialog window will close automatically after synchronization. ■ Designer The Designer list displays DME units arranged in the currently valid zone in the DME Designer. The unit in the DME Designer is matched with a recognized IP address, and they are compared one-to-one. DME Name IP Address Select Box DME Name Displays the names of DME units included in the project. When multiple DMEs of the same type are arranged in a zone window, it is a good idea to change the name of each one. IP Address Select Box Matches the units in the Designer with recognized IP addresses. Click the [▼] to display the IP addresses of same type of devices in the area. If the unit is a DME24N, IP addresses for all DME24N devices in the area will be displayed on the list. If you click the title bar with “IP Address” written on it (pale ▲ mark appears), you can line them up vertically. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 77 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ Network The devices currently connected to the network are displayed in the Network list. To keep consistency with the Designer list on the left side, the status of DMEs on the network is displayed. DME Icon IP Address • DME Icon Displays DME and ICP1 devices connected to the network. The zone master DME icon is red. Icons for slave DMEs are blue. DMEs and ICP1 devices with no relation to DMEs in Designer have gray icons. • IP Address Displays the DME IP address. ■ Message Area Displays a message that synchronization is in progress. Reading from the DME Unit When you are offline in a condition where it is possible to go online, you can read data. Before this can be done, configurations, such as cards inserted in the slots and any connected serial devices, must agree for the DME unit and DME Designer. Preset data overwritten in the DME unit is read, along with every type of parameter setting managed in DME Designer. NOTE The event log is read in the Event Logger. 78 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window GPI About GPI GPI is an abbreviation for General Purpose Interface. Using GPI input and output, DMEs can be remotely controlled from custom-made controllers or external equipment. For both input and output, the DME64N provides 16 GPI channels and the DME24N provides eight. Sets GPI input/output for each DME. Using GPI input data, you can switch DME scenes and change component change component parameters. For hardware-related information such as the connection method for GPI, see the “DME64N/24N Owner’s Manual.” NOTE Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox has been checked can make GPI settings. “GPI” Dialog Box When you click the [GPI] command on the [Tools] menu, the “GPI” dialog box is displayed. Sets GPI input/output for the DME. [DME] GPI IN GPI OUT [Apply] Button [Cancel] Button [OK] Button ■ [DME] From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings. ■ Configuration The current configuration name will be displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 79 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ GPI IN The DME64N has 16 GPI IN channels, and the DME24N has 8 GPI IN channels. These settings determine which DME parameters will be controlled by input received at each individual GPI IN channel. The channel numbers are shown in the leftmost column. [Function] Specifies the function to be controlled by GPI input. Click to see a list from which you can choose the function to be assigned to the corresponding GPI IN channel. The nine available functions are: [No Assign], [Parameter Value Edit], [Scene Change], [Scene Increment], [Scene Decrement], [Mute], [GPI Lock], [Time Adjustment], [Play Wav File]. The [Parameter], [Min], [Max], and [Terminal] items will change according to the selected function. • [No Assign] No function assigned. This is the default setting. Select [No Assign] to clear an assigned function. The [Parameter], [Min], [Max], and [Terminal] items are not available. 80 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [Parameter Value Edit] Allows component parameters to be changed via GPI input. In this case [Parameter] is used to select the parameter to be controlled. [Min] and [Max] specify the range over which the parameter can be changed. [Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter. and specify continuous control of continuously-variable parameters from an external fader, knob, or similar device. and specify on/off control of 2-state parameters via an external switching device. The parameter value changes in proportion to the voltage applied to the GPI input. The minimum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the specified [Min] parameter value, and the maximum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the specified [Max] parameter value, with intermediate voltages produced the corresponding intermediate parameter values. Example: Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when [Fader Level] is set in the [Parameter] box. Max. voltage applied to GPI IN [Max] parameter value [Min] parameter value Min. voltage applied to GPI IN The parameter value changes in inverse proportion to the voltage applied to the GPI input. The minimum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the specified [Max] parameter value, and the maximum voltage applied to GPI IN will produce the specified [Min] parameter value, with intermediate voltages produced the corresponding intermediate parameter values. Example: Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when [Fader Level] is set in the [Parameter] box. Max. voltage applied to GPI IN [Max] parameter value [Min] parameter value Min. voltage applied to GPI IN The specified [Min] and [Max] parameter values are alternately selected each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage.* Example: Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when [Fader Level] is set in the [Parameter] box. Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN [Max] parameter value [Min] parameter value [Max] parameter value The specified [Min] and [Max] parameter values are alternately selected each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage.* Example: Relationship between the voltage applied to GPI IN and the Fader Level when [Fader Level] is set in the [Parameter] box. [Max] parameter value [Min] parameter value [Max] parameter value Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN DME Designer Owner’s Manual 81 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [Scene Change] GPI input can be used to recall a specified scene. [Parameter] specifies the number of the scene to be recalled. [Min] and [Max] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter. The scene specified by [Parameter] will be recalled each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage.* Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Trigger The scene specified by [Parameter] will be recalled each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage.* Trigger Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Same as . Same as . • [Scene Increment] GPI input can be used to increment the scene number. [Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter. The scene number will be incremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage.* Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Trigger The scene number will be incremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage.* Trigger Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN 82 Same as . Same as . DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [Scene Decrement] GPI input can be used to decrement the scene number. [Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter. The scene number will be decremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage.* Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Trigger The scene number will be decremented each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage.* Trigger Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Same as . Same as . DME Designer Owner’s Manual 83 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [Mute] GPI input can be used to engage or disengage the DME mute function. [Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter. Mute will be ON when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage*, and OFF when the voltage is below the median. Max. voltage applied to GPI IN MUTE ON Median voltage MUTE OFF MUTE OFF Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Mute will be OFF when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage*, and ON when the voltage is below the median. Max. voltage applied to GPI IN MUTE OFF Median voltage MUTE ON MUTE ON Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Mute will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from below to above the median voltage.* Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN ON OFF ON Mute will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from above to below the median voltage.* ON OFF ON Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN 84 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [GPI Lock] GPI Lock can be turned on or off via GPI input. When GPI Lock is ON, all GPI inputs other than the one being used for GPI Lock control are locked and input will be ignored. [Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter. GPI lock will be ON when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage*, and OFF when the voltage is below the median. Max. voltage applied to GPI IN MUTE ON Median voltage MUTE OFF MUTE OFF Min. voltage applied to GPI IN GPI Lock will be OFF when the voltage applied to GPI IN is above the median voltage*, and ON when the voltage is below the median. Max. voltage applied to GPI IN MUTE OFF Median voltage MUTE ON MUTE ON Min. voltage applied to GPI IN GPI Lock will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from below to above the median voltage.* Max. voltage applied to GPI IN MUTE ON Median voltage MUTE OFF MUTE OFF Min. voltage applied to GPI IN GPI Lock will be alternately turned ON and OFF each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from above to below the median voltage.* Max. voltage applied to GPI IN MUTE OFF Median voltage MUTE ON MUTE ON Min. voltage applied to GPI IN DME Designer Owner’s Manual 85 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [Time Adjustment] GPI input can be used to adjust the DME internal clock as follows: Internal clock time Time after adjustment 0~14 seconds Returned to 0 seconds 15~29 seconds Advanced to 30 seconds 30~44 seconds Returned to 30 seconds 45~59 seconds Advanced to 0 seconds [Parameter], [Min], and [Max] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter. and specify continuous control of continuously-variable parameters from an external fader, knob, or similar device. and specify on/off control of 2-state parameters via an external switching device. The internal clock time will be adjusted each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage.* Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Trigger The internal clock time will be adjusted each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage.* Trigger Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN 86 Same as . Same as . DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [Play Wav File] GPI input can be used to initiate playback of the specified Wave file. [Parameter] specifies the Wave file to be played. Files specified by the Wav File Manager can be selected. Wave files can only be selected if a Wav Player is included in the DME configuration. [Min], and [Max] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI input voltage will affect the specified parameter. and specify continuous control of continuously-variable parameters from an external fader, knob, or similar device. and specify on/off control of 2-state parameters via an external switching device. The specified Wave file will be played each time the voltage applied to GPI IN rises from below to above the median voltage.* Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Trigger The specified Wave file will be played each time the voltage applied to GPI IN drops from above to below the median voltage.* Trigger Max. voltage applied to GPI IN Median voltage Min. voltage applied to GPI IN Same as . Same as . * “Median voltage” refers to the voltage halfway between the maximum and minimum voltages detectable by the GPI input terminals. Refer to the “GPI Page” section of the “Utility Screens” chapter of the DME64N/24N Owner’s manual for details on GPI voltages. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 87 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ GPI OUT The DME64N has 16 GPI OUT channels, and the DME24N has 8 GPI OUT channels. These settings determine which DME parameter values will be output via each individual GPI IN channel. The channel numbers are shown in the leftmost column. [Function] Specifies the function to be transmitted via a GPI output. The four available functions are: [No Assign], [Parameter Value Edit], [Scene Change], and [GPI Lock]. The [Parameter], [Threshold], [Terminal], and [Polarity] items will change according to the selected function. • [No Assign] No function assigned, and no GPI output will occur. This is the default setting. Select [No Assign] to clear an assigned function. The [Parameter], [Threshold], [Terminal], and [Polarity] items are not available. • [Parameter Value Edit] Allows component parameter values to be output via GPI. In this case [Parameter] is used to select the parameter to be output. [Threshold] specifies the parameter threshold value. [Terminal] and [Polarity] determine how the GPI voltage will be output in response to parameter changes. Terminal Polarity GPI Output Ignored When value of the specified parameter is above the threshold level the output will be high, and when below the threshold level the output will be low. Ignored When value of the specified parameter is below the threshold level the output will be high, and when above the threshold level the output will be low. A pulse*1 will be output when the value of the parameter changes from below to above the threshold. A pulse*1 will be output when the value of the parameter changes from above to below the threshold. A pulse*2 will be output when the value of the parameter changes from below to above the threshold. A pulse*2 will be output when the value of the parameter changes from above to below the threshold. 88 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [Scene Change] The recall status of the specified scene is transmitted via GPI output. [Parameter] specifies the scene for which the recall status is to be output. [Threshold] and [Polarity] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI voltage will be output in response to parameter changes. Terminal GPI Output When the current scene is the same as the scene specified by [Parameter] the output will be high, and when different the output will be low. When the current scene is the same as the scene specified by [Parameter] the output will be low, and when different the output will be high. A pulse*1 will be output when the current scene is the same as the scene specified by [Parameter]. A pulse*2 will be output when the current scene is the same as the scene specified by [Parameter]. • [GPI Lock] The GPI Lock status is transmitted via GPI output. [Parameter], [Threshold], and [Polarity] are not available. [Terminal] determines how the GPI voltage will be output in response to parameter changes. Terminal GPI Output When GPI Lock is ON the output will be high, and when OFF the output will be low. When GPI Lock is ON the output will be high, and when OFF the output will be low. *1 Pulse waveform 1 *2 Pulse waveform 2 HI HI LO LO 250 msec 250 msec Event Schedule Event Schedule is shown when [GPI OUT] is set in “Event Scheduler.” See “Event Scheduler” on page 116. User Defined Button User Defined Button is shown when [GPI OUT] is set in “User Defined Button.” See “User Defined Button (User Defined Parameters)” on page 98. Event Log Event Log is shown when [GPI OUT] is set in “Event Logger.” See “Event Logger” on page 111. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 89 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window MIDI When you click the [MIDI] command on the [Tools] menu, the “MIDI” dialog box is displayed. Here you can make MIDI input/output port, remote control, and other settings. [Setup] Tab Sets the DME MIDI channels along with program change, control change, and parameter change. ■ [DME] From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings. ■ MIDI CH Sets the MIDI channel. This number is also used as the Parameter Change Device ID. [Tx] Select the MIDI transmit channel from the list. [Rx] Select the MIDI receive channel from the list. ■ Program Change/Control Change/Parameter Change Sets transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), OMNI, and Echo for program change/control change/parameter change. When ON, clicking turns this OFF. When OFF, clicking turns this ON. When OMNI is [ON] channel messages are received regardless of the receive channel setting. When ECHO is [ON] the input data is “echoed” (re-transmitted) via the output port that corresponds to the input port via which it was received. Detailed settings for program change, control change, and parameter change are made on the [Program Change] tab, the [Control Change] tab, and the [Parameter Change] tab. 90 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Control Change] Tab Assigns components to control change for each DME. You can change DME parameters by sending control change messages from external equipment. You can assign to control change numbers 1-31, 33-95, and 102-119. NOTE Because control change numbers 0 and 32 are used for bank select MSB, numbers 96-101 are RPN/NRPN related, and 120-127 are used for mode messages, they cannot be used for component assignment. ■ [DME] From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings. ■ Control Change List The control change numbers and current settings are displayed in the list in the center. No. Displays the control change numbers. Component Displays the assigned components. Control changes that have no component assigned to them are blank. If you click here, a list will be displayed. Usable components are on the list. Click the component name to select it. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 91 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Parameter Set the assigned component link parameter. When you click here, a list of parameters included in the component is displayed. Select the parameter you want to assign. Min/Max Sets the range of operation for the parameter. The current values for the [Min] (lower limit) and [Max] (upper limit) are displayed. If you click here, a slider will be displayed. The range and parameter units that can be set will vary, depending on the parameter selected in the [Parameter] box. You can change the parameter by dragging the slider. To make a finer setting, press the <Shift> key while dragging the slider. The value for the parameter will be shown while you are dragging the slider. When you finish dragging and release the mouse button, the slider will disappear. The same slider is displayed whether you click the [Min] box or the [Max] box. The black part is the parameter range. If you drag the left edge of the black part, the [Min] value will change. If you drag the right edge, the [Max] will change. ■ [Clear] Button Clears assignments for the selected control change numbers. ■ [All Clear] Button Clears assignments for all control change numbers. 92 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Program Change] Tab Assigns scenes to program control change numbers 1 through 128. Switches scenes when program changes are received. These settings are shared by all DMEs in the zone. Up to 999 assignments can be made. Scenes above number 128 are assigned by changing banks. ■ Program Change Event Program numbers and the scenes assigned to them are displayed in a list. No. This displays program numbers from 1 to 128. Scene Displays the scene number and name of the assigned scene. Program changes that have no scene assigned to them are blank. When you click here, a list of scenes is displayed. Select the scene you want to assign. ■ [All Clear] Button Clears all scene assignments. ■ [Clear] Button Clears the scene assignment for the program number selected in the list, so that no scene is assigned to that number. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 93 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [All Assign] Button Assigns all scenes in order starting from program number 1. ■ Bank Select LSB The bank is changed when assigning scenes numbered 129 and higher. Eight banks can be used, numbered from zero to seven. Click the [▼] and select the bank where you will make settings. [Parameter Change] Tab Specifies the parameter to be controlled by parameter change commands for each address. Up to 128 can be set. ■ [DME] From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings. 94 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ Parameter Change List The current settings are displayed in the list in the center. No. This displays the parameter change numbers. Component Assigns components. If you click here, a list will be displayed. Assignable components are on the list. Click the component name to select it. Parameter Set the assigned component link parameter. When you click here, a list is displayed of parameters included in the component selected in the [Component] box. Select the parameter you want to assign. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 95 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Min/Max This sets the parameter range. The current values for the [Min] (lower limit) and [Max] (upper limit) are displayed. The range and units that can be set will vary, depending on the parameter selected. If you click here, a slider will be displayed. You can change the parameter by dragging the slider. To make a finer setting, press the <Shift> key while dragging the slider. The value for the parameter will be shown while you are dragging the slider. When you finish dragging and release the mouse button, the slider will disappear. The same slider is displayed whether you click the [Min] box or the [Max] box. The black part is the parameter range. If you drag the left edge of the black part, the [Min] value will change. If you drag the right edge, the [Max] will change. ■ [Clear] Button Clears the assignment for the parameter change selected in the list, so that nothing will be assigned to it. ■ [All Clear] Button Clears all parameter change assignments. 96 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Port] Tab Sets the MIDI port for the current zone used by DME Designer. ■ MIDI PORT Selects the MIDI driver used for transmitting and receiving MIDI messages. [Tx] Selects, from a list, the MIDI driver used for transmitting MIDI messages. [Rx] Selects, from a list, the MIDI driver used for receiving MIDI messages. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 97 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window User Defined Button (User Defined Parameters) User Defined Parameters Parameters that the user can operate using function keys <F1> through <F6> in the DME unit or ICP1 are called “User Defined Parameters.” Frequently changed parameters can be assigned in advance to any of 24 (four pages times six) presets, and operated on the DME unit or ICP1 even if DME Designer is not being used. This function sets parameters in DME Designer that can be called by these function keys <F1> through <F6>. In DME Designer, user defined parameter settings are made using the “User Defined Button” dialog box. The user defined parameter settings are shared between zone configurations. “User Defined Button” Dialog Box When you click [User Defined Button] in the [Tools] menu, the “User Defined Button” dialog box is displayed. ■ [1]/[2]/[3]/[4] Tabs Switches the set to which settings will apply. You can set up to six function keys in each set. The user defined parameters set on a single tab are displayed on one page in the DME unit main screen. Function Keys The function keys are displayed in the leftmost column of the table. When you enter text for [LCD Display], a short name with up to eight characters will be created and displayed to the right of the function key. 98 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Function Specifies the function to be assigned to the function keys. • [No Assign] No assignment. Select this option to clear an assigned function. • [Parameter Value Edit] Allows the parameter specified in the [Parameter] field to be changed. • [Direct Parameter Value] Allows the value of a parameter to be set directly. The target parameter is specified in the [Parameter] field, and the value to be set is specified in the [Max] field. • [Scene Change] Allows scene recall. The scene to be recalled is specified in the [Parameter] field. • [GPI OUT] Allows GPI output. The GPI setting is made in the [Parameter] field. • [Play Wav File] Allows initiation of Wave file playback. The Wave file setting is made in the [Parameter] field. Wave files set by the Wav File manager can be specified. Files can not be selected unless a Wav Player is included in the DME configuration. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 99 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Parameter Sets the parameter assigned to each function key. If you click here, a list will be displayed. This list displays the parameters that are included in the current configuration. Select the parameter you want called by the function key. LCD Display Sets the text displayed on the DME unit. Click the [LCD Display] box and enter text. Up to 23 characters can be entered into the [LCD Display] box. After you confirm the name by pressing the <Enter> key, a short name will be created and displayed in the function key area as follows: “F1 [shortnam].” The short name will also be displayed in the DME unit main display. A short name is automatically created with up to eight characters for display as the user defined parameter name on the DME unit main screen Min, Max Sets the lower and upper limits for a parameter. ■ [Clear] Button Clears assignments for the selected function keys. This is the same as “No Assign.” ■ [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 100 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Setting User Defined Parameters After creating a parameter link group to assign, set the user defined parameter. 1 Create a configuration. 2 Click [User Defined Button] in the [Tools] menu. The “User Defined Button” dialog box will be displayed. 3 Click one of the tabs numbered [1] through [4] to select the set of user defined parameters you will assign your parameters to. The four tabs correspond to the pages on the DME unit main screen. 4 Click the [Parameter] box for the function key to which you will assign the parameter. A list of parameters included in the current configuration will be displayed. 5 Select the parameter to assign to the function key. 6 Click the [LCD Display] box and enter text for the user defined parameter name. The [LCD Display] box can accept up to 23 characters, but only eight characters can be displayed in the DME unit main screen. When making a user defined parameter name, the first eight characters should be understandable. Note When making multiple registrations, you can save time by first setting just the [Parameter] box for all keys, then setting the [LCD Display] box names. When you enter a user defined parameter name into an [LCD Display] box and press the <Enter> key to confirm it, the next [LCD Display] box down will be selected, and you can enter text there immediately. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 101 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Word Clock The signal that synchronizes all devices connected to the DME is called the “Word Clock.” It uses the same frequency as the sampling frequency. The word clock is set for each DME in the “Word Clock” dialog box. When you click [Word Clock] on the [Tools] menu, the “Work Clock” dialog box is displayed. Clock Information Slot Information Clock Status • The DME24N has only one SLOT, and [Cascade] is not available. • The number of channels varies according to the card inserted into the slot. ■ DME From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings. ■ Clock Information Displays the word clock frequency for the DME selected in [DME]. 102 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ Card (Slot Information) Displays the name of the card inserted into the slot. Slot Number Card Name ■ Clock Status The clock status is displayed using a color code: Status Meaning Indicates that there is no input signal. Indicates there is an input signal and sync is possible with the current word clock. Indicates there is an input signal but cannot sync with word clock (clocks are different). Indicates that there is no DME unit information. ■ Internal/Word Clock/Cascade You can select one of the following for the word clock: [Slot] (64N: 1-4, 24N: 1 only), [Internal] (44.1kHz/48kHz/88.2kHz/96kHz), [Word Clock] (WCK IN), [Cascade] (IN/OUT, 64N only). Clock buttons that are grayed out cannot be selected. ■ [Close] Button Closes the dialog box. NOTE You can close the dialog box using the Close button, or by pressing <Esc> or <Alt>+<F4>. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 103 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Monitor When you click the [Monitor] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Monitor” dialog box is displayed. Sets the monitor output destination. ■ [DME] From the list, select the DME where you will be making settings. ■ Drop down list From the list, select the card that will be the destination for the monitor output. ■ [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 104 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Clock When you click the [Clock] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Clock” dialog box is displayed. Here you can set the DME internal clock. This can be set only when online. The default is the computer date and time. Set the date in the left box and the time in the right box. You can change the numbers using the [▲] and [▼] at the right of the boxes. NOTE You can close the dialog box using the Close button, or by pressing <Esc> or <Alt>+<F4>. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 105 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Language Settings When you click the [Language] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Language” dialog box is displayed. This sets the DME unit language. ■ [Language] Select the language. [English/German/French/Spanish] and [Japanese] are in the list. ■ [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. NOTE You can close the dialog box using the Close button, or by pressing <Esc> or <Alt>+<F4>. 106 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window DME Firmware Update You can update the DME unit firmware using the [Firmware Update] command on the [Tools] menu. When you move the mouse cursor over the [Firmware] command on the [Tools] menu, a submenu is displayed. When you select [Program] or [Component] on the submenu, the “Open” dialog box will be displayed. You can perform a firmware update by specifying a firmware update file. When performing a firmware update, connect the DME unit and the computer. When the DME update is finished, the DME unit will be automatically restarted. You also need to restart DME Designer. NOTE If the firmware has been updated from V1.07 or lower to V1.10 or upper, perform the update twice. Because the text display data in the DME unit is changed, text display for Japanese is not possible with one update only. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 107 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Program] Updates the DME/CP1 unit program area firmware. Opens update files with the extension “.DPB”. 1 Select [Firmware Update] ➞ [Program] in the [Tools] menu. The “Open” dialog box will be displayed. 2 Select an update program with the extension “.DPB” and click the [Open] button. The “Firm Update” dialog box will be displayed. The DMEs in the current zone will be displayed in a list. 3 Check the DME you wish to update. You can click on a checkmark to turn it ON/OFF. The [Select All] button places a checkmark next to all the DMEs. The [Clear All] button turns OFF all the DME checkmarks. 108 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window 4 Check the DME you wish to update, then click the [Update] button. The firmware update will begin. NOTE While updating, be very careful not to disconnect the USB or Ethernet cable or turn off the power to the DME. The DME Designer MIDI setting information will be lost. When the DME update is finished, the DME unit will be automatically restarted. You also need to restart DME Designer. ■ [Component] Updates the DME unit component firmware. When you select this command, the “Open” dialog box will be displayed. Opens update files with the extension “.DCB” (for DME) or “.CCB” (for ICP1). You can select multiple update files for components. ■ DME Unit When performing the firmware update, connect the DME unit and the computer by USB or Ethernet. The USB-MIDI or DME-N Network Driver must be installed in the computer. ■ ICP1 To perform the firmware update, the ICP1 and the zone master DME unit must be connected by Ethernet. In addition, the zone master DME unit must be connected to the computer as described above. 1 Select [Firmware Update] ➞ [Component] in the [Tools] menu. The “Open” dialog box will be displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 109 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window 2 Select an update program with the extension “.DCB” (for DME) or “.CCB” (for ICP1) and click the [Open] button. The “Firmware Update” dialog box will be displayed. The DMEs or ICPs in the current zone will be displayed in a list. The component names and versions will be displayed hierarchically for each DME. 3 Check the component you wish to update. You can click on the checkmark to turn it ON/OFF. The [Select All] button places a checkmark next to all the DMEs. The [Clear All] button turns OFF all the DME checkmarks. 4 Check the component you wish to update, then click the [Update] button. The component update will begin. NOTE While updating, be very careful not to disconnect the USB or Ethernet cable or turn off the power to the DME. The DME Designer MIDI setting information will be lost. When the DME update is finished, the DME unit will be automatically restarted. You also need to restart DME Designer. 110 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Event Logger When you click [Event Logger] in the [View] menu while online, the “Event Logger” window is displayed. This records and displays DME unit events. When the dialog box is opened while online, the event log is automatically obtained and displayed as a list in the Event Logger window. Events are displayed in realtime as long as the dialog box stays open while online. The information is also simultaneously recorded in a file if the log function is enabled. NOTE Only users for whom the [View Log Window] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been turned ON can display the Event Logger window. The default setting for this parameter is OFF. NOTE The events you wish to display in the Event Logger window must be set in advance in the “Event Log List” dialog box. ■ DME List • [Date] Displays the date the event occurred. (Example Display: 2004-08-24) • [Time] Displays the time the event occurred. • [Type] Displays the event type and icon. There are three event types: (Warning): Warning event (Error): Error event (Information): Other events • [Zone] Displays the name of the zone in which the event occurred. • [DME] Displays the name of the DME in which the event occurred. • [Event] Displays the content of the event. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 111 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Log Setup] Button Displays the “Log Setup” dialog box. Here you can make Event Log settings. [Get Log] Button When you are offline, this selects the DME from which the log will be taken. During online status, this button is grayed out and cannot be used. Clicking here displays the “Get Log” dialog box. [Zone] Selects the zone for which events will be displayed. Only events from the selected zone will be displayed in the window. If [All Zones] is selected, events will be displayed for all DMEs arranged in the zone. Display button (Information/Warning/Error) • [Display Information] Button Switches between displaying and hiding Information events. When turned ON, Information events are displayed in the Event Logger window. • [Display Warning] Button Switches between displaying and hiding Warning events. When turned ON, Warning events are displayed in the Event Logger window. • [Display Error] Button Switches between displaying and hiding Error events. When turned ON, Error events are displayed in the Event Logger window. [Clear Screen] Button Clears (erases) events. 112 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window “Log Setup” dialog box Click the [Log Setup] button in the Event Logger window to display the “Log Setup” dialog box. Here you can make Event Log settings. These settings apply to the system as a whole. ■ [Enable Logging] Turns ON or OFF the function that writes the obtained event log data to a file. When a check is placed here, the event log is written to a file. When checked, it is set in the [Enable Logging] frame. Record __ days per log file Sets the number of days recorded into a single log file. When the specified number of days is exceeded, a new log file is created, and future log events are recorded there. When “1” is set for the number of days at 10:00 AM, information will be recorded in the same file until the next day at 9:59 AM. The number of days counted are cleared when the “Log Setup” dialog box is closed by clicking the [OK] button, or when the system goes online. Automatically delete log files after __ days When a check is placed here, log files exceeding the specified number of days are automatically deleted. Specifies the number of days after which log files are automatically deleted. Log file folder Specify the folder for saving log files. Clicking the [Browse] button opens the standard operating system dialog box for specifying folders. Here you can select a folder. Log files are saved with the following file name: “LOG + Start_Date.txt”. If there is a file with the same name already in the specified folder, a number will be affixed to the end of the file name, and it will be saved as a separate file. (Example: LOG20040824-2.txt) ■ [Display Event] Displays events with checks next to them. This operates together with the [Display Information], [Display Warning], and [Display Error] buttons in the Event Logger window. You can place checks next to multiple events. ■ [Display Log Buffer Full Message] When a check is placed here, “Log Buffer Full” messages will be displayed on the displays of all DME units in the zone. ■ [Log List Setup] Button Sets events sent from the DME units. Clicking here displays the “Event Log List” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 113 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window “Get Log” dialog box Click the [Get Log] button in the Event Logger window to display the “Get Log” dialog box. ■ DME List Displays the IP addresses and types of DME units included in the zone. Click the DME from which to obtain events by placing a check next to it. ■ [Output File Name] Sets the file name and save location for the log file. Clicking the [Browse] button opens the file select dialog box, where you can select a file. ■ [DME Log Clear] Clears (erases) logs in the DME checked. When you click this button, a confirmation dialog is displayed. 114 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window “Event Log List” Dialog Box Sets events sent from the DME units. Sends events with checks next to them. ■ [Zone] If you click here, a list will be displayed. Specifies a zone. ■ [DME] If you click here, a list will be displayed. Specifies DMEs. ■ [Event] You can turn sending of logs for each event ON or OFF. ■ [Type] If you click here, a list will be displayed. Select type of event. [Information], [Warning], and [Error] are displayed in a list. ■ [GPI OUT] Sends GPI output for each event. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 115 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Event Scheduler “Event Scheduler” Dialog Box When you click [Event Scheduler] in the [Tools] menu, the “Event Scheduler” dialog box is displayed. This sets the scheduling for events. You can schedule events by specifying the date, time, and the action to execute. You can set up schedules for events to be executed at a specified time, and events that are to be repeated periodically. Periodic events are those that repeat each year, month, week, or day. Up to 50 events can be scheduled. Scheduling can be set separately for each zone. Settings and changes are sent to the DME unit during online status. Scene changes, parameter changes, and GPI output can all be scheduled. NOTE Only users for whom the [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been turned ON can edit scheduling settings. ■ Event View Displays registered scheduling events. When periodic events (cyclical events) are first displayed together, they are displayed in order of date. The order of same-time events can be changed by dragging and dropping. Click to select an event. ■ [No.] Displays the event number. Numbers are added from the top in order. This function will not be executed if the checkbox is not checked. ■ [Name] Displays the event names. Clicking an event will select it, allowing you to change its name. There is no limit to the number of characters. ■ [Operation] Displays the function that will be executed when the event starts. 116 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Date] Displays the event start date. Periodic events are displayed as shown below, with an icon and text that indicate a periodic event. • [January 1 every year] Each New Year's Day • [First Monday of January every year] First Monday in January each year • [Day 1 every month] First day of each month • [Second Monday of every month] The second Monday of each month. • [Monday every week] Each week on Monday • [Every day] Every day ■ [Time] Displays the time for starting the event. ■ [Enable Event Schedule] Enables the scheduled events. ■ [Add] Button Adds an event. Clicking here displays the “Add Event” dialog box. If the maximum of 50 events has already been registered, this button is grayed out. ■ [Remove] Button Deletes the event selected on the list. This button is grayed out when no event is selected. ■ [Edit] Button Lets you edit the selected event. Displays the “Edit Event” dialog box. This button is grayed out when no event is selected. ■ [Copy] Button Copies the selected event. This button is grayed out when no event is selected. ■ [Paste] Button Pastes the copied event. The event is added. This button is grayed out when no event has been copied. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 117 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Add Event (Edit Event)] Dialog Box The dialog box is displayed when you click on the [Add] or [Edit] button in the “Event Scheduler” dialog box. Here you can add or edit a scheduling event. ■ [Event Name] Box Enter the event name. There is no limit to the number of characters. ■ [Event Operation] Set the operation that is executed when the event starts. [Operation] When you click this button, a list of events is displayed. Specify the operation that is executed when the event starts. The following three items are on the list: • [Scene Change] Changes the scene. • [Parameter Value Edit] Changes a parameter. • [GPI Out] Sends GPI output. • [Play Wav File] Allows initiation of Wave file playback. 118 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Operation Setting] The content changes according to the event selected for [Operation]. • When [Scene Change] is selected: Select the scene to be recalled from the [Scene] list. Stored scenes are displayed in the list. • When [Parameter Value Edit] is selected: [Scene] Select a scene from the list. If the DME unit's current scene differs from the scene specified in event scheduling, the scheduled scene will be recalled. If the DME unit's current scene is the same as the scene specified in event scheduling, the scheduled scene will not be recalled. [DME Unit] From the list, select the DME unit to which this scheduled event will apply. The DMEs included in the zone are displayed in the list. [Component] Select the component that has the parameter to be changed. The list displays the components arranged for the DME that is selected in the [DME Unit] box. [Parameter] Select the parameter that will change. Parameters for the component that is selected in the [Component] box are displayed in a list. [Value] Set a value for the parameter. Change the parameter using the spin buttons or the slider on the right. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 119 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • When [GPI Out] is selected: [DME] From the list, select the DME that will produce the GPI output. [Ch1]/[Ch2]/[Ch3] ... Set [ON], [OFF], or [---] for each channel. If it is set to [OFF], the [LOW→HIGH] channel outputs [HIGH→LOW] signal, the [HIGH→LOW] channel outputs [LOW→HIGH] signal. • When [Play Wav File] is selected: [Scene] Select a scene from the list. [Wave] Select a Wave file from the list. Wave files set by the Wav File manager can be specified. Files can not be selected unless a Wav Player is included in the DME configuration. 120 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Event Schedule] Set the year/month/date to start the event. Calendar Sets the date the event will start. Change the year and month using the [<] and [>] buttons. Click on a day to set that date. February 29 can be set on the calendar, where it appears every four years (each leap year). [Time] Sets the time the event will start. Click the hour and minute, then set numerical values using the spin boxes. Only the time is set for periodic events. [Repeating Event] When a check is placed here, the event becomes a periodic event, and the calendar is ignored. • [Year]/[Month]/[Week]/[Day]/[Hour] Set the period for the event, using the radio buttons to the left. • [Day]/[Day of the week] Set the conditions on the right side. Select [Day]/[Day of the week], and set the date and other information. The items that can be set vary according to the selected period. When the event period is [Year] All settings can be made. When the event period is [Month] If [Day] is selected, only the date can be set. If [Day Of The Week] is selected, the week of the month and day of the week is set. When the event period is [Week] Only [Day Of The Week] can be selected. Set the day of the week. When the event period is [Day]/[Hour] Condition settings on the area on the right are not needed. [Exception] Button Opens the “Event Exceptions” dialog. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 121 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Event Exceptions] Specifies “exception” year/month/day and time settings at which events will not be executed. The available settings will depend on the event cycle. • When the event cycle is [Year] Only the [Year] setting is available. • When the event cycle is [Month] Only the [Month] and [Week] setting is available. • When the event cycle is [Week] Only the [Month], [Week] and [Day] settings are available. • When the event cycle is [Day] Only the [Month], [Week], [Day], and [Day of the week] settings are available. • When the event cycle is [Hour] Only the [Month], [Week], [Day], [Day of the week], and [Hour] settings are available. 122 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Remote Control Setup List Registers the parameters to be controlled from an external controller. Refer to the “DME-N Remote Control Protocol Specifications” document for details about the communication protocol. Information about the “DME-N Remote Control Protocol Specifications” document can be found at the Yamaha pro Audio website (URL below). http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ [DME] Click to see a list and select a DME. [Function] Select [No Assign], [Parameter Value Edit] or [Level Meter]. [Parameter] Specifies the parameter to be controlled. A list of parameters will be displayed according to the selection of [Function]. [Min]/[Max] Displays the minimum and maximum values for the parameter. [Type] Selects a fader curve when level, etc., is select for [Parameter]. Select [dB] to directly control the level in dB, or [Curve Table] to use one of the DME fader curves for level adjustment. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 123 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Parameter List When you click [Parameter List] in the [Tools] menu, the “Parameter List” dialog box is displayed. A list of parameters in the current configuration of the current zone are displayed. Here you can check things like the parameter IDs. You can also print the list of parameters. When the dialog box is opened or when a DME is selected from the [DME] list, the parameter values are displayed. ■ [DME] From the list, select the DME that will have its parameters displayed. The DMEs included in the current configuration are displayed in the list. Components in the selected DME are displayed in the component list. Component List The components and user modules included in the DME, their IDs, and the component parameters are displayed in hierarchal list. The AD and slot are also displayed. NOTE Components for user modules are also listed in a hierarchal display, but if user module security is enabled, the components are not displayed. However, parameters displayed in the user module editor are displayed here. [ID] Displays the component or parameter ID. The following is displayed for the parameter ID: “Element No. : X : Y : Parameter No. : Index No.” [Value] Displays the value for the parameter. 124 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Min]/[Max] Displays the minimum and maximum values for the parameter. NOTE The displayed parameter values are those that were in effect when the dialog box was opened or when the displayed DME was selected from the [DME] list. They cannot be changed here. ■ [Preview] Button Prints a list of parameters. When you click this button a preview screen is displayed. ■ [Save] Button Saves the parameter list as a CSV file. When you click this button, the standard operating system save dialog box is displayed. NOTE The CSV format is a comma delimited text file that can be read by many types of software, such as word processor, spreadsheet, or database programs. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. Printing a List of Parameters Prints all parameters for the component selected in the list, all parameters for the selected DME, or all parameters for all DMEs. When you click the [Preview] button, the dialog box display will change, and the print preview will be displayed in the center. Buttons will be added to the upper part of the dialog box. ■ [Print] Button Prints a list of parameters. Clicking here displays the “Print” dialog box. When you click the [Print] button, printing begins. NOTE The displayed [Print] dialog box will vary according to the connected printer. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 125 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Setup] Button Clicking here displays the “Print Setup” dialog box. Here you can set the paper size, paper orientation, and font. [Paper Size] Select the paper size from the list. [Orientation] Set the orientation of the paper by clicking one of the radio buttons. • [Portrait] Prints on the paper with it oriented vertically. • [Landscape] Prints on the paper with it orientated horizontally. [Font] Displays the set font. Clicking the [Font] button displays the “Font” dialog box, where you can change the font. [Target] Set the parameters to be printed by clicking one of the radio buttons. • [Selected Component] Prints all parameters for the component selected in the list. • [Selected DME] Prints all parameters for the selected DME. • [All DME] Prints all parameters for all DMEs. [Close] Button Ends the preview and returns the screen to the original dialog box. [Prev] Button/[Next] Button Switches the page being previewed when there are multiple pages. The [Prev] button goes to the previous page. The [Next] button goes to the next page. 126 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Component Lock Click [Component Lock] in the [Tools] menu to display the Component Lock dialog. The component/user module names included in the DME will be displayed. AD and Slot will also be displayed. Components can be locked so that parameter changes cannot be made from an external device by checking the checkbox to the left of the component name. The lock settings will be transferred to the DME when the unit is placed on-line. The settings can only be changed while off-line. NOTE The hierarchy of user components in user modules will be displayed, but if user module security is enabled the components will not be displayed. Components displayed by the User Module Editor will be displayed. NOTE Only users who's [Edit] box is checked can edit the lock status. ■ [Select All] Button Checks all component checkboxes. ■ [Clear All] Button Clears all component checkboxes. ■ [OK] Button Enters the settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without entering the settings. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 127 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Wav File Manager When you click [Wav File Manager] on the [Tools] menu, the “Wav File Manager” dialog box is displayed. Here you can manage playback settings for Wave files played in the Wav File Player. This is set for each DME. The setting can be made only when in offline status. Up to 100 Wave files can be managed. Up to a maximum of 12 megabytes of Wave files can be registered for each DME unit. If a Wave file is added that will exceed this amount, a warning message will be displayed. NOTE These settings can be edited only by users for whom the [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been turned ON. NOTE Only Wave files with file names of 31 characters or less, (including the extension) can be registered. Check the Wave file name beforehand. Change the name if it has 32 or more characters, including the extension. NOTE When saving project files including Wave files, select “Project File with wave (*.daf)” in the file save dialog box. ■ [DME] From the list, select the DME you want to set. The DMEs included in the current zone are displayed in the list. ■ [Wave File] Displays the Wave file information. Settings can be made here as well. [No.] The Wave file number is displayed in the leftmost column. Numbers are added from the top in order. [List Name] You can set up to 27 characters as a label separate from the Wave file name. The Wave file name is displayed here by default. [File Name] Up to 31 characters are displayed as the wave file name. If you double-click the name, the file selection dialog is displayed, where you can select a file. 128 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window [Size] Displays Wave file size information. The units vary, depending on the file size. The size is displayed to the first decimal. Size Display Up to 1023 bytes 0.X KB 1024 bytes to 1023.9 kilobytes XXX.X KB 1024 kilobytes or more X.X MB [Repeats] Sets the number of repeats for playback. Clicking here will display a list where you can select the number of times. Select [0] to [98] or [INFINITY]. Since external input cannot be edited, [---] is displayed. [Interval] Sets the time until the next playback when [Repeats] is one or more. If you click here, a list will be displayed. You can set [0] to [99]. Since external input cannot be edited, [---] is displayed. [Auto Start] Turns automatic playback ON or OFF. If ON is set, playback happens automatically when the file is selected. If you click here, a list will be displayed. Select [ON] or [OFF]. [Next No.] Specifies the number for the Wave file to be played next. If you click here, a list will be displayed. Select the number for the Wave file to be played next. • [Stop] This stops playback after this Wave file is finished playing, without specifying the next wave file. Since external input cannot be edited, [---] is displayed. ■ [Store] Button Saves the current settings in the “Wav File Manager” dialog box in a file, as a library. Clicking here displays the file save dialog box. ■ [Recall] Button Reads a saved library. Clicking this button displays a menu. A menu displays library files saved in the folder that has been set as the Contents Folder. Click the library to be read. [Open File Dialog] Displays the file select dialog box. You can select a library file that is saved in the folder set as the Contents Folder, and read it. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 129 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [Add] Button When you click here, External Input and the file select list is displayed. [Wave File] The file selection dialog box is displayed, where you can select a Wave file. If the selected table already has data, an overwrite confirmation dialog box is displayed. [External Input] Sets [External Input]. You can select multiple Wave files. If multiple files are specified, they are added after the selected table. If a Wave file is registered to the number being added, it will be overwritten. The following Wave file formats are supported: 48, 44.1, 24, 22.05 kHz, 16bit/8bit, Mono/Stereo. If a file is selected with a format different than these, a message is displayed that says the file cannot be used. There is an upper limit to size beyond which a file cannot be used. This limit varies according to the format. If the size of the selected file is beyond the limit, a message is displayed that says the file cannot be used. 22.05 K Mono 8 bit 1.37 MB 44.1 K Mono 8 bit 2.75 MB 22.05 K Stereo 8 bit 2.75 MB 44.1 K Stereo 8 bit 5.5 MB 22.05 K Mono 16 bit 2.75 MB 44.1 K Mono 16 bit 5.5 MB 22.05 K Stereo 16 bit 5.5 MB 44.1 K Stereo 16 bit 5.9 MB 24.05 K Mono 8 bit 1.5 MB 48 K Mono 8 bit 3 MB 24 K Stereo 8 bit 3 MB 48 K Stereo 8 bit 5.9 MB 24 K Mono 16 bit 3 MB 48 K Mono 16 bit 5.9 MB 24 K Stereo 16 bit 5.9 MB 48 K Stereo 16 bit 5.9 MB ■ [Remove] Button Deletes settings from the selected line. This button is grayed out when no Wave file is selected in the list. ■ [Up] Button Moves the selected line up one. It is switched with the line immediately above. The button will be grayed out if nothing is selected in the list, or if [No. 1] is selected in the list. ■ [Down] Button Moves the selected line down one. It is switched with the line immediately below. The button will be grayed out if nothing is selected in the list, or if [No. 100] is selected in the list. ■ [Play] Button Plays the selected Wave file on the computer. Allows monitoring and checking of the Wave file. ■ [Stop] Button Stops playback of the Wave file. ■ [Remaining Memory] Displays the remaining size that can be added. 130 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window ■ [OK] Button Updates the settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. Adding Wave Files To add a Wave file, select the line where you want to add the file, then click the [Add] button. You can also add a Wave file by dragging and dropping it from the desktop to the “Wav File Manager” dialog box list. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 131 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window DAW Control When you click [DAW Control] on the [Tools] menu, the “DAW Control” dialog box is displayed. Here you can make settings for when the DME is controlled from a DAW controller. This is set for each zone configuration. The setting can be made only when in offline status. NOTE DAW control editing can be performed only by users for whom the [Edit] security checkbox has been checked. ■ [DME] From the list, select the DME you want to set. The DMEs included in the current zone are displayed in the list. ■ [DAW Type] Select the DAW type. The following choices are in the list: [Off], [Type1], and [Type2]. ■ DAW Control Table The following can be set for each channel from 1 to 64: [Function], [Controller], [Label], [Parameter]. [Function] Selects the function that will be changed by the DAW controller. If you click here, a list will be displayed. 132 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window • [No Assign] Makes no assignments. Select this when you are erasing an already set assignment. • [Parameter Value Edit] Allows the parameter of the component specified in the [Parameter] field to be changed. • [Scene Change] Recalls a scene. The scene is recalled even if the current scene, and the one changed by the DAW controller, are the same. When a selection has been made, [SCENE] is displayed in the [Label] field. The last scene is set in the [Parameter] field. • [Scene Increment] Sets the scene increment. Recalls the next valid scene after the current scene. When a selection has been made, [SINC] is displayed in the [Label] field. • [Scene Decrement] Selects the scene decrement. Recalls the next valid scene before the current scene. When a selection has been made, [SDEC] is displayed in the [Label] field. • [Mute] Sets all mute. Mute is set ON and OFF by the DAW controller. When a selection has been made, [MUTE] is displayed in the [Label] field. • [Component] Changes the component parameters. Selectable component names that are arranged in the configuration are displayed in a list. When selected, the first parameter included in the component is set in the [Parameter] field. • [GPI Lock] Assigns GPI Lock. GPI Lock is set ON and OFF by the DAW controller. When a selection has been made, [LOCK] is displayed in the [Label] field. • [Play Wav File] Allows initiation of Wave file playback. The Wave file setting is made in the [Parameter] field. Wave files set by the Wav File manager can be specified. Files can not be selected unless a Wav Player is included in the DME configuration. [Controller] Selects a controller from the list when [Parameter Value Edit] is set in [Function]. [Switch], [Fader], or [Knob] can be selected. [Label] Enter a label. Double-click to enter the text. You can enter up to 16 characters of text. Set the value with the <Enter> key, or cancel it with the <ESC> key. NOTE If [Scene Change], [Scene Increment], [Scene Decrement], [Mute], or [GPI Lock] is selected for [Function], the label name is fixed. [Parameter] If [Scene Change] , [Parameter Value Edit] or [Play Wav File], is set in [Function], set the parameters. If you click here, a list will be displayed. • When [Scene Change] is set in [Function] Displays scenes that can be selected. • When [Parameter Value Edit] is set in [Function] Selectable parameters are displayed. • When [Play Wav File] is set in [Function] Selectable Wave files are displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 133 Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Shortcut Keys Click [Shortcut Keys] in the [Tools] menu to display the “Shortcut Keys” dialog. Click to select the desired shortcut item. ■ [Enter New Key] If assigned, the current shortcut will be displayed. A shortcut entered via the computer keyboard will be displayed. ■ [OK] Button Enters the settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without entering the settings. 134 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Main Panel Window Backup When you click the [Backup] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Backup” dialog box is displayed. Data in the DME is gathered in the computer and saved as a file. Backup files are created for each DME. You can also send the information saved in a file to a DME. Backup can be performed only when in offline status. NOTE Backup operations can be performed only by users for whom the [Edit] security checkbox has been checked. ■ [Target DME] Displays DME, IP addresses, and DME types for each zone. Check the DME from which you want to obtain data. You can place checks next to multiple DMEs. ■ [Folder] Box Specifies the folder that will be the destination for saving and reading operations. Clicking the [Browse] button opens the folder select dialog box, where you can specify a folder. The backup file name will be the DME’s IP address. If the folder is specified when sending DME data, the file sent to the DME will be the file in the folder whose file name that matches the DME’s IP address. ■ [Load] Button Sends the backed up file to the specified DME. ■ [Save] Button Obtains data from the specified DME, and saves it as a backup file. ■ [Close] Button Closes the dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 135 Chapter 4 Designer Editing Configurations Configurations Information about inputs/outputs, along with the arrangement of components and how they are connected, is called a “configuration.” Configurations are created in the Designer window and sent to the DME unit. In the Designer window, configurations are designed using various design windows, such as the Area, Zone, Configuration, and User Module windows. In each window a sheet is displayed, on which objects can be arranged. New Configurations You can create multiple zones within an area, and multiple configurations within a zone. Zones are added using the “Zone” dialog box, while configurations are added using the “Configuration” dialog box. For information about the “Zone” dialog box, see “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone” on page 231. For information about the “Configuration” dialog box, see “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Configuration” on page 233. Security Editing in the Designer window can be restricted based on the user security settings. Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can display the Designer window and edit configurations. For information about the “Security” dialog box, see “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55. Edit Mode There is an “Edit Mode” in the Designer window. When the Edit Mode is ON, configurations can be edited. When it is turned OFF, the DME is controlled by DME Designer. ■ Edit Mode=ON When Edit Mode is ON, you can do configuration editing tasks such as arranging objects, making connections, and changing properties. ■ Edit Mode=OFF When Edit Mode is OFF, you cannot arrange objects, make selections, or display “Properties” dialog boxes for objects. You can display the component editor. ■ Edit Mode ON/OFF The edit mode can be turned on or off via the [Edit Mode] command in the [Tools] menu or in the contextual menu that appears when you right-click the sheet. To turn Edit Mode ON click the command, placing a checkmark to the left of the command name. When there is a checkmark next to the command (when Edit Mode is ON), clicking the command again removes the checkmark and turns OFF the Edit Mode. NOTE Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can turn the Edit Mode ON. 136 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Designer Window You can display or hide the Designer window using the [Designer] command on the [View] menu in the Main Panel window. Navigator Window Title Bar Menu Bar Toolbar Toolkit Window Status Bar Design Window Resource Meter Window Title Bar “Designer” is displayed on the title bar. You can move the window by dragging the title bar. There are [Minimize], [Maximize]/[Restore], and [Close] buttons at the right edge of the title bar. Menu Bar Commands that can be executed in the application are collected into categories on the menu bar. When you click one of the categories, a list of commands is displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 137 Chapter 4 Designer Toolbar Frequently used commands are arranged here as buttons. [Navigator] Button [Probe Monitor] Button [Zoom To] Button [Redo] Button [Analyze] button [Zoom In] Button [Copy] Button [Print] Button [Undo] Button [Actual Size] Button [Show Signal Delay] button [Zoom Out] Button [Resource Meter] Button [Paste] Button [Cut] Button ■ [Print] Button Prints the active design window. → “Printing Each Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 214) ■ [Undo] Button (page 145) Undoes the most recent edit operation. ■ [Redo] Button (page 145) Restores operations undone with the [Undo] button back to their original condition. ■ [Cut] Button (page 145) Cuts the selected object from the screen and moves it to the clipboard. ■ [Copy] Button (page 145) Copies the selected object to the clipboard. ■ [Paste] Button (page 145) Pastes data from the clipboard. ■ [Navigator] Button (page 140) Displays or hides the Navigator window. ■ [Resource Meter] Button (page 139) Displays or hides the Resource Meter window. ■ [Analyze] Button Displays the “Analyze” dialog box, and analyzes the configuration. → "Analyze (Configuration Analysis)" in "Configuration Window" (page 249) ■ [Show Signal Delay] Button The digital signal delay value is displayed in the Configuration window. → "Show Signal Delay (Delay Display Value)" in "Configuration Window" (page 246) ■ [Probe Monitor] Button Turns the probe monitor ON or OFF. → “Probe Monitor” in “Configuration Window” (page 244) 138 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ [Zoom Out]/[Zoom In]/[Actual Size]/[Zoom To] Buttons These buttons correspond to the commands on the [View] menu with the same names. Changes the magnification of the display on the screen. → “[View] Menu” in “Designer Window Menus” (page 147) Status Bar DME ID/Component ID Sheet Size Coordinates ■ DME ID/Component ID When the mouse pointer is moved over a DME device in the Zone window, the ID for that DME device is displayed. When the mouse pointer is moved over a component in the Configuration window, the ID for the component is displayed. ■ Sheet size Displays the size of the sheet in the active design window. ■ Coordinates Displays the coordinates of the mouse pointer any time it is within the design window. When dragging an object, the coordinates displayed here refer to the upper left corner of the object being dragged. Resource Meter Window The Resource Meter window is displayed only when the Configuration window and User Module window are active. Meters for the DSP memory usage percentage and the SPX resource usage percentage are in the Resource Meter window. ■ DSP Memory Usage Percentage When you are designing in the Configuration window, it gives you a yardstick for judging the total usage percentage for DSP memory in the DME unit. You cannot create a design that exceeds 100 percent usage in a single configuration window. In addition, the usage percentage varies depending on the sampling frequency, even for the same component. When the configuration is synchronized with the DME unit during online status, checks of connections and component information begin automatically (this is called compiling). The actual total usage percentage is calculated after this compiling operation. The usage percentage will vary according to the number of connections and components. The Resource Meter window gives you a precompile guideline for use while designing your configuration. An error may occur even when the meter shows less than 100 percent, based on conditions such as the number of connections, and type and number of components used. NOTE If a configuration is compiled at fs=44.1kHz or 48kHz, and the sampling frequency is then changed to 88.2kHz or 96kHz, it is necessary to recompile at 88.2kHz or 96kHz. If this is not done some configurations may produce no sound. In such cases a “DSP Power Shortage” message will be displayed on the DME unit. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 139 Chapter 4 Designer ■ SPX Resource Usage Ratio Displays the resource usage ratio for SPX components arranged in the configuration. NOTE If the [Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output] or the [Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output] components are placed in the DME64N configuration window, you will not be able to use other components, even though the window does not reach 100 percent. The [Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output] or [Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output] components cannot be used in the DME24N. Navigator Window Gives a hierarchical display of the area, zones, and configurations, along with the DME devices, user modules and components arranged within the configurations. This allows you to check the overall status of your setup. When doing offline editing, you can click the icon or name for an area, zone, configuration, DME device, user module, or component to make each design window active. NOTE For user modules with security enabled, a password is requested when displaying the hierarchical display shown below. Area Zones Configuration DME Devices User Module Components included in the User Module Components ■ [+]/[-] The subordinate items are displayed or hidden using the [+]/[-] buttons to the left of the area, zones, configurations, user modules, or DME devices. When the subordinate items are displayed, the button changes to [-]. If you click this button, the subordinate items will be hidden. When the subordinate items are hidden, the button changes to [+]. If you click this button, the subordinate items will be displayed. Subordinate items are also displayed and the button changes to [-] when you click on an area, zone, configuration, user module, or DME device. 140 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ Area If you click the area while doing offline editing, the Area window becomes active. ■ Zone If you click a zone while doing offline editing, the Zone window becomes active. If another Zone window is open, it will be closed. NOTE When there are multiple configurations in a zone, click a configuration to switch configurations, not the zone. ■ Configuration If you click a configuration while doing offline editing, the Zone window for the clicked configuration becomes active. If another Zone window is open, it will be closed. ■ DME Device If you click a DME, a Configuration window will be opened for that unit. If that window is already open, it will be displayed on top of any other windows. ■ Component Click a component and the component editor will open. ■ User Module The window specified by “User Module Properties [Double Click Action]” will open when clicked. ■ Components Included in the User Module Click a component in the user module and the component editor will be displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 141 Chapter 4 Designer Four Design Windows The following design windows are available: the Area window, Zone window, Configuration window, and User Module window. In each window there is a single sheet on which objects can be arranged. Within the Designer window, you can simultaneously open and edit in the Area window, Zone Window, Configuration window, and User Module window. Configuration Structure and Four Design Windows Area Window Zone Window Configuration Window Component Editor User Module Window ■ Area Window Used to design areas. → See “Area Window” on page 235. ■ Zone Window Used to design zone configurations. → See “Zone Window” on page 237. ■ Configuration Window Used to design configurations for DME units arranged in a zone. → See “Configuration Window” on page 242. ■ User Module Window Used to design user modules configurations. A module that combines a number of other components, yet is treated as a single component, is called a “user module.” It is arranged in the Configuration window. → See “User Module Window” on page 257. 142 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Toolkit Window The Toolkit displays objects that can be arranged in each design window. The displayed contents vary according to which window is active. → See “Toolkit Window” on page 152. Displayed in the designer window Floating-style DME Designer Owner’s Manual 143 Chapter 4 Designer Designer Window Menu [Print] Menu This menu provides commands for exporting configurations and printing windows. ■ [Export DXF] Exports the information in the active window and saves it as a DXF file, which is compatible with CAD software sold by other companies. → “Exporting the Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 211) ■ [Print Setup] When you select this command, the “Print Setup” dialog box will be displayed. Sets the paper size and orientation. → “Printing Each Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 214) ■ [Print Preview] Displays a print preview of the active design window. → “Printing Each Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 214) ■ [Print] Prints the active window. When you select this command, the “Print” dialog box will be displayed. → “Printing Each Design Window” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 214) ■ [Preferences] Displays the “Preferences” dialog box. Sets the line thickness and the design window edit operations. → “Preferences” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 207) 144 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer [Edit] Menu This menu provides edit commands. ■ [Undo] Undoes the most recent edit operation. Repeatedly clicking this button will delete multiple operations. When [Undo] is not possible, the command will be grayed out. ■ [Redo] Returns to the status before the [Undo] command was executed. If you repeatedly click this button, it will redo multiple operations. If redo is not possible, the command will be grayed out. ■ [Cut] Cuts the selected object. Moves the selected object to the clipboard. ■ [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. The selected object remains as is. ■ [Paste] This command pastes the object on the clipboard into the active window. If there is no data on the clipboard or if the object on the clipboard is not a type that can be pasted into the active window, this command cannot be used. ■ [Delete] Deletes the selected object. The data on the clipboard does not change. NOTE There are some objects that cannot be deleted with the [Delete] command. ■ [Select All] Selects all objects in the active design window. ■ [Duplicate] Duplicates the selected object. The data on the clipboard does not change. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 145 Chapter 4 Designer ■ [Display Order] Changes the display order (in front or behind) of the selected objects. → “Changing the Order” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 218) ■ [Edit Legend] This command can be selected when an Area window, Zone window, or Configuration window is active. It lets you edit the descriptive text (legend) displayed on the sheet in the Area window, Zone window, or Configuration window. When this command is selected, the “Edit Legend” dialog box will be displayed. → “Legend (Descriptive Fields)” in “Objects” (page 198) ■ [Properties] Opens the “Properties” dialog box for the selected objects. → See “Object Types” on page 156. 146 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer [View] Menu Displays or hides the windows. ■ [Toolbar] Displays or hides the toolbar. A checkmark appears beside this menu item when the toolbar is displayed. ■ [Status Bar] Displays or hides the status bar. A checkmark appears beside this menu item when the status bar is displayed. ■ [Area]/[Toolkit]/[Resource Meter]/[Navigator] Displays or hides the Area window, Toolkit, Resource Meter, or Navigator window. A checkmark appears to the left of the command name when a window is displayed. The Resource Meter window is displayed only when the Configuration window and User Module window are active. ■ [Full Screen] Displays in full-screen mode. Displays the active design window (Area, Zone, Configuration, or User Module window) exclusively, with it covering the entire screen. A context menu appears wherever you right-click on the screen, containing the commands that are needed at that location. To return from the full-screen mode to the original display status, press the <Esc> key. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 147 Chapter 4 Designer ■ [Port Long Name] Switches the port name display. When you select this command, a checkmark appears next to it and long names are displayed. If you select this command when a checkmark is next to it, the checkmark disappears and short names are displayed. Long name Short name ■ [Zoom In] Gives a closer view of an area displayed on the screen. ■ [Zoom Out] Widens the area displayed on the screen. ■ [Zoom To] Selects the display magnification from a submenu. ■ [Actual Size] Returns the display to normal dimensions. ■ [Fit in Window] Increases or decreases the display magnification so that the sheet exactly fits the current window. The entire sheet will be visible. 148 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer [Tools] Menu ■ [Area Parts List] This command can be used only when the Area window is active. A submenu displays the same objects that are in the Toolkit window displayed while the Area window is active. Clicking an object on the submenu, then clicking the Area window, places that object in the Area window. → [Area Parts List] in “Toolkit Window” (page 153) ■ [Device List] This command can be used only when the Zone window is active. A submenu here displays the same objects as the Toolkit window. Clicking an object on the submenu, then clicking the Zone window, places that object in the Zone window. → [Zone Device List] in “Toolkit Window” (page 154) ■ [Component List] This command can be used only when a Configuration window or User Module window is active. A submenu here displays the same objects as the Toolkit window. Clicking an object on the submenu, then clicking the Configuration/User Module window, places the object in that window. → “Component List (Configuration Window)” in “Toolkit Window” (page 154), “Component List (User Module Window)” in “Toolkit Window” (page 155) ■ [Zone] Displays the “Zone” dialog box. Here you can add, delete, or rename a zone. → See “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone” on page 231. ■ [Configuration] Displays the “Configuration” dialog box. Here you can add, delete, or rename a configuration. → See “Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Configuration” on page 233. ■ [Save User Module] This command can be used only when a User Module is selected in the Configuration window. Saves the selected user module. → “User Module Manager” Dialog Box in “User Modules” (page 255) DME Designer Owner’s Manual 149 Chapter 4 Designer ■ [User Module Manager] Displays the “User Module Manager” dialog box. Here you rename or delete user modules. → “User Module Manager” Dialog Box in “User Modules” (page 250) ■ [Show Signal Delay] The digital signal delay value is displayed in the configuration window with sample units. → "Show Signal Delay (Delay Display Value)" in "Configuration Window" (page 246) ■ [Analyze] Displays the “Analyze” dialog box, and analyzes the configuration. → "Analyze (Configuration Analysis)" in "Configuration Window" (page 249) ■ [Probe Monitor] Turns the probe monitor ON or OFF. This command can be selected only when a Configuration window or User Module window is active while in online status. → “Probe Monitor” in “Configuration Window” (page 244) ■ [Monitoring Point List] Opens the “Monitoring Point List” dialog box. Registers points for monitoring with headphones. → "Monitoring Point List" in "Configuration Window" (page 247) ■ [Edit Mode] Turns the edit mode ON or OFF. → “Edit Mode” in “Editing Configurations” (page 136) NOTE Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can select this command. ■ [Sheet] Opens the “Sheet” dialog box. Sets the sheet size and background. → “Sheet” in “Objects” (page 200) ■ [Prohibit Diagonal Connections] Allows you to draw horizontal and vertical wires only. Diagonal wires cannot be drawn. → “Drawing Settings” in “Drawing and Editing Wires” (page 223) ■ [Grid] Opens the “Grid” dialog box. Displays or hides the grid and sets the grid spacing. → “Grid” in “Design Window Shared Settings and Operations” (page 210) 150 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer [Window] Menu Arranges multiple windows. The lower part of the menu displays the names of currently open windows. A checkmark appears next to the active window. When you click the name of a window, that window becomes active. ■ [Cascade] Displays the windows overlapping one another. ■ [Tile] Displays the windows arranged side-by-side. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 151 Chapter 4 Designer Toolkit Window Displaying the Toolkit Window You can display or hide the Toolkit window using the [Toolkit] command on the [View] menu. The Toolkit displays objects that can be arranged in each design window. You can arrange objects in each design window by dragging them from the Toolkit window or by double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. The objects are categorized by type and displayed here in a hierarchy. You can use the [+]/[-] buttons to display or hide items below a particular level in the window. Click the [+] button to display the items on the next level down, and the [-] button to hide them. Moving the Toolkit Window You can move the Toolkit window by dragging it. If you drag the window to right or left side, it will remain fixed. If you drag it to other locations, it will float independently. When DME Designer is started, the Toolkit window is displayed at the left side of the Designer window. 152 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Toolkit Window Types The contents of the Toolkit window will vary, depending on which window is active. Active Design Window Toolkit Window Area Window Area Parts List Zone Window Device List Configuration Window Component List User Module Window Component List The following objects are displayed in each window: Component List (Configuration Window) Component List (User Module Window) Component ✔ ✔ SPX Component ✔ ✔ User Module ✔ Area Parts List Device List DME ✔ ICP ✔ External Device ✔ ✔ Pictures ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Text ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Boxes ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Ellipses ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ [Area Parts List] The [Area Parts List] displays objects that can be arranged in the Area window. The same objects are displayed in the [Area Parts List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that appears when you right-click on the sheet. NOTE You can create multiple zones in an area. They are added using the menu bar [Tool] menu → “Zone” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 153 Chapter 4 Designer [Device List] The Device list displays objects that can be arranged in a Zone window (configuration). The same objects are displayed in the [Device List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that appears when you right-click on the sheet. [Tools] menu Toolkit window [Device List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu NOTE Configurations are added using the menu bar [Tool] menu → “Configuration” dialog box. [Component List] (Configuration Window) The Component List displays objects that can be arranged in Configuration windows. The same objects are displayed in the [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that appears when you right-click on the sheet. [Tools] menu Toolkit window 154 DME Designer Owner’s Manual [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu Chapter 4 Designer [Component List] (User Module Window) The Component List displays objects that can be arranged in the User Module window. The same objects are displayed in the [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that appears when you right-click on the sheet. [Tools] menu Toolkit window [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu DME Designer Owner’s Manual 155 Chapter 4 Designer Objects Object Types The devices, shapes, and wires that can be arranged in each design window are called “Objects.” The following objects are available: Name Window Where It can be Placed/Displayed Explanation Zone Area Zones DME Zones DME and any cards inserted into its slots ICP Zones User defined parameter control External Device Zones External Device Component Configuration User Module User Module, Audio processor, Control parts SPX Component Configuration User Module SPX components User Module Configuration Combination of components Slot Component Configuration Cards inserted into DME slot Pictures All Image Text All Text box Boxes All Box shape Ellipses All Circular shape Wires All Connecting wire, straight line shape Legend All Zones Configuration An area displayed on the sheet where descriptive information is presented. Sheet -- One sheet per design window. Various design elements, such as name, color and size, can be set in the “Properties” dialog box for each object. Size is set using the [Width] and [Height] boxes in the “Properties” dialog box. The maximum size values that can be set may vary according to the sheet size and object position. You can set a size that allows the object to fit in the sheet. 156 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Zone There must be at least one zone in the Area window. Zones are added and deleted using the “Zone” dialog box. Zones are not displayed in the Toolkit window or in the [Area Parts List] submenu in the [Tools] Menu If you right-click on the name of a zone object located in the Area window, a context menu will be displayed. ■ Zone Context Menu [Open] Opens the Configuration window. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the “Area Properties” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 157 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Zone Object Properties When you select a zone in the Area window, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu, the “Area Properties” dialog box is displayed. Here you can set properties for zone objects. The [Properties] command is also located on the context menu for zone objects. [Text] Box You can enter up to 100 English characters for the object name. The object name is displayed in the rectangular box for the object. If there is a large number of characters and the object’s shape is too narrow, all characters might not be displayed. [Font] Button Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. This sets the font used to display the object name. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. [Color] Button Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. This sets the color of the object name text. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. Text Position Sets the location of the text. The list to the left sets the vertical position of the text. The list to the right sets the horizontal position. • Vertical Position Select [Top], [Center], or [Bottom]. • Horizontal Position Select [Left], [Center], or [Right]. [Width] Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels. 158 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer [Style] Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken]. Raised Sunken Background Image Sets background effects for the object. • [Color] Button Sets the color. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. • [Image] Button Displays an image inside the object. You can use image files in the following formats: BMP (.bmp), PNG (.png), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg). Clicking here displays the “Select Image” dialog box. Specify an image file and set its display method. For information about the “Select Image” dialog box, see page 205. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 159 Chapter 4 Designer DME DMEs are arranged in the Zone window. If DME properties settings have been made for an expansion card installed in one of the DME slots, the card will be displayed automatically. DME24N DME24N with no I/O card installed. DME24N with an I/O card installed in its expansion slot. DME64N DME64N with no I/O cards connected in slots. DME64N with I/O cards installed in expansion slots 1, 2, and 4. 160 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer When I/O Cards Are Installed in DME Expansion Slots When an I/O card is selected for an expansion slot in the DME properties, an I/O port is added for the DME arranged in the Zone window. An I/O component block will be added to the configuration window. If [None] is selected for I/O cards in the DME properties, any I/O component blocks will also be deleted automatically from the Configuration window. (Even if the I/O components are deleted, the wiring will remain.) DME64N block with card inserted in a slot and the Configuration window When the DME64N Cascade Setting is Turned ON When [Show Cascade Port] is checked in the DME64N “DME Device Properties” dialog box, the cascade I/O components will be displayed in the Configuration window. If “Show Cascade Port” is turned OFF in the DME64N “DME Device Properties” dialog box, cascade I/O components will also be deleted automatically in the Configuration window. (Even if the Cascade I/O components are deleted, the wiring will remain.) DME Designer Owner’s Manual 161 Chapter 4 Designer CobraNet Card If the I/O card is a CobraNet card, a CobraNet icon will be displayed in the DME object. DME block with CobraNet card inserted ■ Object Selection To open a configuration window for a DME object arranged in the Zone window, first select it by clicking on it, then double-click on it. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. 162 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ DME Object Context Menu [Open Configuration Window] Opens the Configuration window. [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the DME device that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Flash Unit LEDs] When selected the DME front panel will flash, and will continue flashing until selected a second time. [Output Level] When you select this command, the “Output Level” dialog box will be displayed. This sets the DME master volume. [Properties] Displays the “DME Device Properties” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 163 Chapter 4 Designer ■ DME Properties To display the “DME Device Properties” dialog box, select a DME object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. Here you can set DME properties. DME24N DME64N [Label] Box You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object. NOTE The name set in the [Label] box will be displayed on the list in the Toolkit window, [Import]/[Export] menu commands, and on the list in the dialog box. If there are multiple examples of the same DME, set different names for each so that you can distinguish one from the other. [Width] Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels. [Style] Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken]. [Label Font] Button Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. [Label Color] Button This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Port Label Color] Button Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Color] Button Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. NOTE For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. 164 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Analog I/O Sets the label for the DME24N I/O port. When you click the [Edit I/O Port Label] button, the “Edit Port Label” dialog box is displayed. Cascade Turns the DME 64N cascade ON or OFF. • Show Cascade Port Checking this enables cascade. • Cascade Setting Here you can make settings that apply when cascade is enabled. Clicking here displays the “Cascade Setting” dialog box. I/O Card Settings for the [Slot1] ~ [Slot4] I/O cards. [Slot1] only can be set for DME24N. • [Select I/O Card] Specifies the type of I/O card. • [Card Label] I/O card names having up to 100 characters can be entered here. • [Edit SlotN I/O Port Label] Button Specifies an I/O port label for each slot. Clicking here displays the “Edit Port Label” dialog box. Port Style On Zone Window Specifies how the DME ports appear in the zone window. • [Audio Port (Classic Style)] Displays all audio ports. • [Custom Port Style] Customizes the port display. [Left] Sets the number of ports to be displayed on the left. [Right] Sets the number of ports to be displayed to the right. • [Edit Port Label and Type] Sets the label and type for each port. Click to display the [Edit Port Label] dialog. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 165 Chapter 4 Designer ■ “Cascade Setting” Dialog Box Clicking the [Cascade Setting] button displays the “Cascade Setting” dialog box. Here you can display DME64E cascade connections and make settings related to them. These settings are common to the cascaded DMEs in the same zone. Unit No. (Cascade Connection Number) All DME units other than the first unit (default “1”) are assigned automatically, and are grayed out after connection indicating that the settings cannot be changed. Head Margin Here you can display and set the head margin for the Cascade connection audio signal. Select [0 db] or [-18 db]. All DME Unit No. settings for DME units other than the first unit will be automatically set to the same value as the first unit when connected. These settings are grayed out after connection indicating that they cannot be changed. Mixer I/O Channel Here you can display and set the channel used for audio input/output to a mixer. If the checkbox is turned ON, the channel for the Cascade connection with the mixer is set. If turned OFF, the channel for connecting with the DME is set. [Check All] Button Checks all checkboxes. [Clear All] Button Clears all checkboxes. [OK] Button Updates the settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 166 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ “Edit Port Label” Dialog Box When you click the [Edit I/O Port Label]/[Edit SlotN I/O Port Label] button, the “Edit Port Label” dialog box is displayed. Here you can set the port labels displayed for components. Enter a [Short Name] and [Long Name] for [Inputs] and [Outputs]. You can enter up to 100 English characters for each name. You can switch between long and short port names displayed in the configuration window with the [Port Long Name] command in the [View] menu. When you select this command, a checkmark appears next to it and long names are displayed. If you select this command while a checkmark is next to it, the checkmark disappears and short names are displayed. When the Port Style On Zone Window [Custom Port Style] is selected, labels specified here will not appear in the Zone Window. Labels specified here are always displayed in the Configuration Window. ■ Edit Port Label and Type Dialog Box The Edit Port Label and Type dialog box will appear when the [Edit Port Label and Type ..] button is clicked. Here you can specify the port labels and types to be displayed in for the components. To set labels enter the [Port Name] for [Left] and [Right]. Each name can be up to 100 characters in length. To set the port type use [Port Type] to select the [Left] and [Right] types. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 167 Chapter 4 Designer ICP You can arrange control panel objects in the Zone window. These can be controlled using user defined parameters. First click on an ICP object arranged in the Zone window to select it, then double-click the object. This opens a “Control Panel Properties” window. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. ■ ICP Object Context Menu [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the control panel object that is on the clipboard. If the same control panel object exists on the sheet where you are pasting, a new ICP object will be created. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the properties dialog box. 168 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ ICP Properties To display the “Control Panel Properties” dialog box, select a ICP object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Label] Box You can enter up to 100 text characters to display above the object. Labels for identical ICP objects that exist in other configurations will also be changed. [Width] Box Specifies the object width in pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the object height in pixels. [Style] Sets the object style. Select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken] from the list. [Label Font] Button Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. [Back Color] Button Sets the object color. Click to display the Select Color dialog box. [Label Color] Button This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. [User Defined Lock] Sets whether user defined parameters will be displayed or hidden. Pages with checkmarks will not be displayed. The four [1]/[2]/[3]/[4] tabs in the “User Defined Button” dialog box correspond to the pages on the DME unit main display. Ethernet Port Turns Ethernet port rendering on or off. Ethernet port display will appear when the checkbox is ON. The radio buttons can be used to specify whether the display is on the left or right side. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 169 Chapter 4 Designer [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. External Device Arranges external device objects in the Zone window. These objects can be added by plug-in functions. External applications can be linked to the devices arranged in the window. These links to external applications are set using the “External Device Properties” dialog box. To start the application linked to an external device object arranged in the Zone window, first click on the object to select it, then double-click it. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. NOTE If no external application is linked to the an object, no application will start when the object is double-clicked. ■ AD824/AD8HR The AD824 is an eight-channel analog-to-digital converter. The AD8HR is an eight-channel analogto-digital converter that features a head amp with high quality sound. You can connect Yamaha AD824 and AD8HR A/D converters to a DME unit and control them remotely from DME Designer. DME Designer has a component editor for controlling [AD824] and [AD8HR] units. If you arrange an [AD824] or [AD8HR] from [External Device] in the Zone window, select the connected DME unit in the properties dialog box, and double-click on an [AD824] or [AD8HR] block, the component editor is displayed. NOTE If a DME is not selected in the properties dialog box, the component editor will not be displayed even if you double-click. 170 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ External Device Object Context Menu [Open Component Editor] Starts the application assigned to the object. For the [AD824] and [AD8HR], it opens the component editor. [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the “External Device Properties” dialog box. At the lowest position below [External Device], [AD824] and [AD8HR] display the “Serial Controlled Device Properties” dialog box. The other objects display the “External Device Properties” dialog box. ■ External Device Properties To display the “External Device Properties” dialog box, select any external device object besides AD824 or AD8HR, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Label] Box You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object. [Width] Box Specifies the object width in pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the object height in pixels. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 171 Chapter 4 Designer [Style] Sets the object style. Select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken] from the list. [Label Font] Button Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. [Label Color] Button This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Port Label Color] Button Sets the color of the I/O port label. Click to display the Select Color dialog box. [Back Color] Button Sets the object color. Click to display the Select Color dialog box. NOTE For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. Launch Application The radio buttons determines whether an application or file will be linked to an external device. • [Application] Box The linked application will be displayed. Click the [Browse] button to locate and select an application. Specifies the path to an application to be launched when an External Device object is double-clicked. • [File] Box The linked file will be displayed. Click the [Browse] button to locate and select a file. Specifies the path to a file to be launched when an External Device object is double-clicked. Port Specifies the number of ports displayed for an External Device object. • [Left] Sets the number of ports to be displayed on the left. • [Right] Sets the number of ports to be displayed to the right. • [Edit Port Label] Button Sets the label and type for each port. Click to display the [Edit Port Label] dialog. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 172 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ External Device Properties (AD824, AD8HR “Serial Controlled Device Properties” Dialog Box) To display the “Serial Controlled Device Properties” dialog box, select AD824 or AD8HR, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. This dialog box is the same as the “External Device Properties” dialog box, except for [Remote]. Remote Select the DME you will control remotely from AD824 and AD8HR. • [DME Unit] The DMEs in the current configuration will be displayed in a list. Select the DME you will control remotely. • [ID] Selects an ID from 1 to 8. The default is 1. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 173 Chapter 4 Designer Component Components are arranged in the Configuration window and the User Module window. They include audio processors like mixers and compressors, and control parts like switches and sliders. They can be added by plug-in functions. Component objects arranged in a configuration are displayed in block form. To open the component editor for an arranged component, first select it by clicking on it, then doubleclick on it. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. Label ID Input Port Output Port Amount of DSP memory used in the DME ■ Component Object Context Menu [Open Component Editor] Opens the component editor. [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Recall Component Library] Recalls libraries with component parameters saved in them. Clicking here displays the submenu. When a library is selected from the submenu, the library is read and the component parameters are changed. For more information about libraries, see “Library” (page 275). [Store Component Library] Saves the component parameters. Click to display the Store dialog. If you then save without changing the folder, the parameters will be added to the library. Refer to “Library” on page 275 for more information. [Properties] Displays the “Component Properties” dialog box. 174 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer NOTE Libraries can be recalled only by users for whom [Control Component Editor] in security is turned ON. The command is grayed out for users for whom [Control Component Editor] is turned OFF. ■ Component Properties Here you can set properties for each component. If multiple examples of the same component type are arranged on a single sheet, changing the properties of a single component does not change the others. To display the “Component Properties” dialog box, select a component object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Label] Box You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object. [Width] Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels. [Style] Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken]. [Label Font] Button Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 175 Chapter 4 Designer [Label Color] Button This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Inputs/Outputs Label Color] Button Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Color] Button Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. NOTE For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 176 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer SPX Component SPX components are arranged in the Configuration window and the User Module window. Component objects arranged in a configuration are displayed in block form. Clicking on a positioned SPX component will select it, and right-clicking will display a contextual menu. Unlike normal components, SPX components use SPX-specific resources and therefore the usage percentage display that appears to the lower right of normal components will not appear. Check the SPX resource usage percentage via the SPX meter in the Resource Meter window. ■ Context Menu for SPX Component Objects [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the “SPX Component Properties” dialog box. [Recall Component Library] Recalls libraries with component parameters saved in them. Clicking here displays the submenu. When a library is selected from the submenu, the library is read and the component parameters are changed. For more information about libraries, see “Library” (page 275). When you will change the effect type for the SPX component, select the desired type from the [Effect Type] displayed in the submenu. NOTE Libraries can be recalled only by users for whom [Control Component Editor] in security is turned ON. The command is grayed out for users for whom [Control Component Editor] is turned OFF. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 177 Chapter 4 Designer ■ SPX Component Properties SPX component properties are set for each component. If multiple examples of the same component type are arranged on a single sheet, changing the properties of a single component does not change the others. To display the “SPX Component Properties” dialog box, select a component object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Label] Box You can enter up to 100 characters to display over the object. [Width] Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels. [Style] Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken]. [Label Font] button Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see “Select Font” dialog box (page 202). [Label Color] Button Sets the color for the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Inputs/Outputs Label Color] Button Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Color] Button Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. NOTE For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see “'Select Color' Dialog Box” (page 203). [OK] Button Updates the settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 178 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Slot Component If an inserted I/O card is selected in the DME properties settings, it will be displayed in the Configuration window as a Slot component. Slot component objects arranged in a configuration are displayed in block form. If you select an arranged component by clicking on it, then double-click it, the Slot Out component editor opens. If you right click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. ■ Slot Component Object Context Menu [Open MY-Card Editor] Opens the editor for an MY-Card inserted in a slot. [Open Slot Out Component Editor] Opens the Slot Out component editor. [Cut]/[Copy]/[Paste]/[Delete]/[Duplicate] The functions cannot be used with Slot components. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the “Slot Out Component Properties” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 179 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Slot Out Component Properties To display the “Slo tOut Component Properties” dialog box, select a Slot Out component object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Label] Box You can enter up to 100 characters to display over the object. [Width] Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels. [Style] Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken]. [Label Font] button Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see “'Select Font' Dialog Box” (page 202). [Label Color] Button This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Inputs/Outputs Label Color] Button Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Color] Button Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. NOTE For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see “'Select Color' Dialog Box” (page 203). [OK] Button Updates the settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 180 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer User Module A user module combines a number of other components into a module that is treated as a single component. It can be arranged in the Configuration window. A user object arranged in a window is displayed as a single block. The User Module Design Window or User Module Window will open, according to the “User Module Manager” setting when you double click the user module (page 250). If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. ■ User Module Object Context Menu [Open User Module Design Window] Opens the User Module Design Window. [Open User Module Editor] Opens the User Module Editor. [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Recall Component Library] Recalls a library into which component parameters have been saved. Click to display a sub-menu. Select a library from the sub-menu to load the parameters into the component. Refer to “Library” on page 275 for more information. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 181 Chapter 4 Designer [Store Component Library] Saves the component parameters. Click to display the Store dialog. If you then save without changing the folder, the parameters will be added to the library. Refer to “Library” on page 275 for more information. [Save User Module] Saves the selected user module. See “Saving User Modules” on page 255. [Properties] Displays the “User Module Properties” dialog box. NOTE Libraries can be recalled only by users for whom [Control Component Editor] in security is turned ON. The command is grayed out for users for whom [Control Component Editor] is turned OFF. The submenu displays library files saved in the “Library” folder for user modules. • [Open File Dialog] Displays the file select dialog box. You can recall libraries saved in folders other than the user module “Library” folder. ■ User Module Properties To display the “User Module Properties” dialog box, select a user module object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. NOTE The “User Module Properties” dialog box is also displayed when a [Blank User Module] is arranged in the configuration window. 182 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer [Label] Box You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object. [Width] Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels. [Style] Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], [Sunken], or [Image]. When [Image] is selected the Open dialog will appear. Select an image file and click [Open] to place the selected image as an object. [Label Font] Button Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. [Label Color] Button This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Inputs/Outputs Labels Color] Button Sets the color for the I/O port label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Color] Button Sets the color of the object. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. NOTE For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. Inputs/Outputs Sets Sets the number of input/output ports. Enter a number into the [Inputs] box and [Outputs] box, or set a value using the [▲] and [▼] buttons at the right of each box. The maximum of both input and output ports is 64. Edit I/O Port Label Input and output port names up to 100 characters in length can be entered. Double-Click Action Sets the action that occurs when you double-click on a user module object arranged in the Configuration window. • [Open User Module Design Window] Opens the User Module window. • [Open User Module Editor] Opens the User Module editor. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 183 Chapter 4 Designer Security Settings Turns user module security ON or OFF, and sets a password. • [Enable Security] Enables user module security. If you turn this function ON when no password is currently set, the “Set Password” dialog box appears. Enter a password, then click the [OK] button. If you change the setting from OFF to ON, the “Input Password” dialog box appears. You cannot turn Security OFF until you enter the correct password. NOTE When security is active the editor cannot be opened unless the appropriate password is entered. Once the password has been entered security is temporarily disabled until the DME Designer is quit, or a different file is opened. • [Set Password] Button Changes the password for user modules. Clicking this button displays the “Input Password” dialog box. Enter the current password and click the [OK] button. The “Set Password” dialog box will be displayed, and you can set a new password. This button will be grayed out when [Enable Security] is turned OFF. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 184 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Picture An image can be arranged as an object on a sheet. This specifies a file for this purpose. You can use image files in the following formats: BMP (.bmp), PNG (.png), XBM (.xbm), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg). Before placing a picture object, prepare an image file. Copy the image file to the folder specified in the “Preferences” dialog box → [Application] tab → [ContentsFolder] in the Main Panel window. In the project file, the location and name of the image file are registered in an relative path below the [ContentsFolder] and the linked image file is read and displayed. If the image file is moved, renamed, or the [ContentsFolder] is changed, the image cannot be displayed. NOTE The default for the “Preferences” dialog box → [Application] tab → [ContentsFolder] in the Main Panel window is “C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME Designer.” The [Designer] folder is located in the [DME Designer] folder. Within that folder, there is an [Images] folder prepared for saving image files. NOTE Background images for sheets are specified in the “Sheet” dialog box. Pictures are arranged as objects on the sheets. ■ Placing Pictures There are three picture placement methods: • You can drop the [Picture] item from the Toolkit window into each design window. • You can double-click [Picture] on the Toolkit window. • You can click [Picture] in the [Area Parts]/[Device List]/[Component List] on the [Tools] menu, then click each design window. When you place a picture object, the “Open” dialog box is displayed. Select the image file and click the [Open] button. The picture will be placed in the design window. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 185 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Picture Object When you click a picture object that is located in each design window, handles (small squares) appear at the corners and sides of the object. You can expand or reduce the picture’s size by dragging a handle. If you double-click on the object, the “Open” dialog opens. There you can change the image file. If you right-click on a picture object, a context menu will be displayed. ■ Picture Module Object Context Menu [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the “Picture Properties” dialog box. 186 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ Picture Object Properties To display the “Picture Properties” dialog box, select a picture object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Label] Box You can enter up to 100 English characters to display over the object. If the box is left blank, the label will disappear. [Draw Picture Border] Displays a border around picture objects. [Label Font] Button Sets the font for the label. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. [Label Color] Button This sets the color of the label text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. [Port Label Color] Button Sets the color of the I/O port label. Click to display the Select Color dialog box. [File Name] Box Displays the path to the graphic file. [Browse] Button Selects a graphic file. [Link Component Editor] When On a Picture object can be double clicked to open the component editor specified by the [Select Component] button. [Select Component] Button Specifies the component editor to be opened when a Picture object is double clicked. Only effective when [Link Component editor] is On. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 187 Chapter 4 Designer Port Specifies the number of ports to be displayed for a picture object. • [Left] Sets the number of ports to be displayed on the left. • [Right] Sets the number of ports to be displayed to the right. • [Edit Port Label] Button Sets the label and type for each port. Click to display the [Edit Port Label] dialog. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 188 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Text Box Text objects can be arranged in all design windows. Text is entered into the “Text Properties” dialog box. When first placed in the design window, the word “Text” is entered into the box. If you click the text object, handles (small squares) appear at the corners and sides of the object. You can adjust the size by dragging the handles. You can open the “Text Properties” dialog box by doubleclicking the box. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. ■ Text Object Context Menu [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the “Text Properties” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 189 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Text Object Properties To display the “Text Properties” dialog box, double-click on a text object, or select a text object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Text] Box You can enter up to 10,000 English characters to display in the text object box. [Text Font] Button Sets the font. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. [Text Color] Button Sets the color of the text. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Background Color] Button Sets the color of the background. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. NOTE For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. [Draw Text Border] Displays a frame around the text object. If this is not checked, only the text will be displayed on the sheet. [Text Border Style] Box Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken]. [Link Component Editor] When On a Text object can be double clicked to open the component editor specified by the [Select Component] button. [Select Component] Button Specifies the component editor to be opened when a Text object is double clicked. Only effective when [Link Component editor] is On. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 190 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Box (Rectangle) You can arrange rectangles on the sheet. If you click the box, handles (small squares) appear at the corners and sides of the object. You can adjust the size by dragging the handles. You can open the “Box Properties” dialog box by doubleclicking the box. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. ■ Box Object Context Menu [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the “Box Properties” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 191 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Box Object Properties To display the “Box Properties” dialog box, double-click on a box object or select a box object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Width] Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels. [Style] Sets the style of the object. From the list, select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken]. [Round Corner] Creates a rectangular box with rounded corners. [Color] Button Sets the color of the box. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. Line Sets the line that frames the box. • [Type] Displays a list where you can select the type of line to frame the box. The following types are available: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [DashDot], and [DashDotDot]. • [Size] Box Sets the width of the line that frames the box. This setting can range from 1 to 100 pixels. • [Color] Button Sets the color of the line that frames the box. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 192 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Ellipse [Ellipse] in the Toolkit window places a elliptical shape on the sheet. When you click an Ellipse object that is located in the sheet, handles (small squares) appear at the corners and sides of the object. You can adjust the size by dragging the handles. You can open the “Ellipse Properties” dialog box by double-clicking the ellipse. If you right-click on the object, a context menu will be displayed. ■ Ellipse Object Context Menu [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the object you clicked on. [Duplicate] Duplicates the object you clicked on. [Display Order] Changes the display order of the objects, according to a command in the submenu. [Properties] Displays the “Ellipse Properties” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 193 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Ellipse Object Properties To display the “Ellipse Properties” dialog box, double-click on an ellipse object, or select an ellipse object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Width] Box Specifies the width of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels. [Height] Box Specifies the height of the object in pixels. The default is 50 pixels. [Color] Button Sets the color of the ellipse. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. Line Sets the line that frames the ellipse. • [Type] Displays a list where you can select the type of line to frame the ellipse. The following types are available: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [DashDot], and [DashDotDot]. • [Size] Box Sets the width of the line that frames the ellipse. This setting can range from 1 to 100 pixels. • [Color] Button Sets the color of the line that frames the ellipse. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 194 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Wire Draws lines (wires) for connecting components and creating shapes. For instructions on drawing wires, see “Drawing and Editing Wires” on page 219. First click on an wire object arranged on the sheet to select it, then double-click the object. This opens a “Wire Properties” window. Node Termination Line Segment If you right-click on a wire object, one of three types of context menus will be displayed, depending where you clicked. ■ Wire Object Context Menu (Line Segment) Line Segment Context Menu [Start Wire] Begins drawing a line segment from the location where you clicked. [Delete Wire] Deletes the entire wire. [Cut] Cuts the selected object and moves it to the clipboard. [Copy] Copies the selected object to the clipboard. [Paste] Pastes the object that is on the clipboard. [Delete] Deletes the line segment where you right-clicked. [Duplicate] Duplicates the wire object. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 195 Chapter 4 Designer [Wire Color] Specifies the wire color. [Properties] Displays the “Wire Properties” dialog box. ■ Wire Object Context Menu (Node) Node Context Menu [Start Wire] Begins drawing a wire segment from the location where you right-clicked. [Delete Wire] Deletes the entire wire. [Delete] Deletes the node. The nodes before and after will become directly connected. [Properties] Displays the “Wire Properties” dialog box. ■ Wire Object Context Menu (Termination) Termination Context Menu [Continue Wire] Begins drawing wire from a termination node. [Start Wire] Begins drawing a wire from the location where you right-clicked. [Delete Wire] Deletes the entire wire. [Properties] Displays the “Wire Properties” dialog box. 196 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ Wire Object Properties To display the “Wire Properties” dialog box, double-click on a wire object. You can also select a wire object, then click the [Properties] command on the [Edit] menu. [Line Width] Box Set the line width. This setting can range from 1 to 10 pixels. [Line Type] Displays a list where you can select the type of line. The following types are available: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [DashDot], and [DashDotDot]. [Line Color] Button Sets the color of the line. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. [Selected Color] Button Sets the color of the selected line. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. NOTE For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 197 Chapter 4 Designer Legend (Descriptive Fields) Displays a legend for all sheets except the User Module window. When you click the [Edit Legend] command on the [Edit] menu or double-click on one of the Legend fields displayed on the sheet, the “Edit Legend” dialog box is displayed. If you right-click on the Legend, the displayed context menu will have the [Edit Legend] command only. If you click there it will display the “Edit Legend” dialog box. The “Edit Legend” dialog box is used to enable/disable Legend display and to set the contents displayed there. You can display the [Edit Legend] command from the [Edit] menu. 198 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ “Edit Legend” Dialog Box [Project] Box, [Title] Box, [No.] Box, [Author] Box, [Company] Box, [Address1] Box, and [Address2] Box Used to enter the Project, Title, Number, Author, Company, Address1, and Address2. You can enter up to 100 English characters for each field. [Date] Box and [Revisions] Box You can enter up to five dates and five revisions. You can enter up to 100 English characters for each field. [Legend Base Font Style] Displays a list where you can select the font. [Show Legend] Place a checkmark here to display the legend on the sheet. [Save as Default Legend] Saves this legend as the default legend used when a new sheet is created. When a new configuration is created, it will have a legend with the same contents as this one. [Change for All Legends In Area] Place a checkmark here to have the changes made here reflected in sheets in all design windows included in the area. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 199 Chapter 4 Designer Sheet There is one sheet in each design window for arranging objects. The size of the sheet and its background image are specified with the “Sheet” dialog box. This dialog box is displayed using the [Sheet] command from the [Tools] menu. Make the window where you are going to change sheet settings active, then click [Tools] menu → [Sheet]. ■ “Sheet” Dialog Box [Preset Size] Displays a list where you can select preset paper sizes. When you select a paper size, numerical values are set for [Horizontal] and [Vertical]. [Custom Sizes] Set a custom size by specifying the vertical and horizontal sizes of the sheet. • [Horizontal] Box Sets the horizontal width of the sheet. • [Vertical] Box Sets the vertical height of the sheet. • [Fixed Aspect Ratio] When this is checked the relationship between horizontal and vertical is fixed. When the value for [Horizontal] or [Vertical] changed, the size of the other direction changes so that the proportions of the paper remain the same. • [Save As Default Sheet Size] When turned ON, the current values will become the default for creating sheets. New sheets will be created at the same size. NOTE The upper left is the starting point for measuring sheet size. Therefore, in the [Horizontal] box set the number of pixels to the right edge, and in the [Vertical] box, set the number of pixels to the lower edge. The boundaries in which items are already arranged on the sheet will form the minimum sheet size. Because any objects that are moved, cut, or deleted will return to the same location if the [Undo] command is used, the minimum sheet size will be determined by the boundaries in which any objects were located, now or in the past. 200 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Background Effect Sets the background for the sheet. • [Color] Button Sets the color of the background. Clicking here displays the “Select Color” dialog box. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. • [Image] Button Displays an image as the sheet background. You can use image files in the following formats: BMP (.bmp), PNG (.png), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg). Clicking here displays the “Select Image” dialog box. For information about the “Select Image” dialog box, see page 205. • [Change for All Sheets] Changes all sheets so that they are the same. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 201 Chapter 4 Designer “Select Font” Dialog Box When you click the [Font] or [Label Font] button in an object’s properties dialog box, the “Select Font” dialog box is displayed. Sets the font. ■ Font Selects the font. The currently selected font name is displayed in this box. Select a font by clicking its name on the list. ■ Font Style Sets the style of the text. The currently selected style is displayed in the box. Select a style by clicking its name on the list below. • Normal ..........Standard style • Italic ..............Italic or slanted text • Bold ..............Bold text • Bold Italic......Bold italic text ■ Size Sets the text size. The currently selected size is displayed in the box. Select a size by clicking it in the list below. ■ Effects Sets effects for the text. Check the effects you wish to set. • Strikeout........Adds a strikeout line through the center of the text. • Underline ......Adds an underline to the text. ■ Script From the list, select the script (language) for the text. There is no need to change the language setting unless you want to specify a specific language. ■ Sample Displays an example of the current settings. 202 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer “Select Color” Dialog Box When you click the [Color] or [Label Color] button in an object’s properties dialog box, the “Select color” dialog box is displayed. Sets the color of objects and text. ■ Setting Basic Colors There are 48 basic colors provided in the [Basic colors] section. When you select a basic color by clicking on it, the position of that color in the color palette to the right is indicated by a cross (+). Information about the selected color is displayed below the color palette. Click the [OK] button to set the color you selected. ■ Setting Colors That Are Not in the [Basic colors] Section. You can select any color in the color palette displayed at the upper-right of the dialog box by clicking on it in the palette. Color information is displayed below the color palette. If you like the color you selected, click the [OK] button. If you don’t like the color, you can select a new color by clicking in another location in the color palette, or by dragging the cross symbol to another location there. Grey colors can be selected on the tall, thin chart to the right of the palette. Click the [OK] button to set the color you selected. ■ Saving Colors You Have Created In the custom color section, you can save up to 16 colors you have created. When you save a custom color, it can be selected by clicking on its color button, in the same way as for the [Basic colors]. Even if you open the “Select color” dialog box from the Properties of another object, any custom color you save will be displayed and you can use that same color for the other object. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 203 Chapter 4 Designer 1 Click the [Custom colors] box where you will save the color you create. The box you clicked will be selected and a frame will appear around it. 2 Set the color on the color palette. 3 Click the [Add to Custom Colors] button. The selected color will be added to [Custom colors]. NOTE You can save another color in a box that already has an original color saved in it. Just click on the box to select it. The new color will overwrite the previous color, which will be lost. 204 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer “Select Image” Dialog Box You can display an image for the background of sheets or objects. You can use image files in the following formats: BMP (.bmp), PNG (.png), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg). In the project file, the location and name of the image file are registered in an relative path below the [ContentsFolder] and the linked image file is read and displayed. If the image file is moved, renamed, or the [ContentsFolder] is changed, the image cannot be displayed. NOTE The default for the “Preferences” dialog box → [Application] tab → [ContentsFolder] in the Main Panel window is “C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME Designer.” The [Designer] folder is located in the [DME Designer] folder. Within that folder, there is an [Images] folder prepared for saving image files. If you click the [Image] button in the properties dialog box for an object that can display a background image or in the “Sheet” dialog box, the “Select Image” dialog box will be displayed. Specify an image file and set its display method. Image Layout Selects the manner in which the image file will be displayed. • [Center] Centers the image in the object or sheet. • [Tile] Displays multiple copies of the image side-by-side until the available space is filled. If the image file is smaller than the sheet, it will be displayed repeatedly like tiles on a wall. • [Fit] Expands or reduces the size of the image to match the size of the sheet where it will be displayed. [File] Box Specifies a path for the image file. A path can be directly entered in the box. You can also click the [Browse] button and select the image file. It will be entered automatically. To stop display of an image, delete all characters in the box, leaving the field blank. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 205 Chapter 4 Designer [Browse] Button Specifies a path for the image file. Clicking here displays the “Open” dialog box. Select a file with one of the following extensions: “.bmp,” “.png,” “.xpm,” or “.jpg,” then click the [Open] button. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 206 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Design Window Shared Settings and Operations Preferences You can set the operating environment for the Designer window in the “Preferences” dialog box. This dialog box is opened using the [Preferences] command in the Designer window [Print] menu. ■ Graphics Ports & Wires Specifies wire color, thickness, and type for each port type. • [Color] Sets the default color for the port and wire. • [Width] Sets the default wire width from a range of 1 to 5. • [Type] Sets the port type. NOTE The initial color and thickness of the wires produced when drawing connections are specified here. The color and thickness of drawn wires can be changed via the Wire Properties dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 207 Chapter 4 Designer Crosshairs • [Show Crosshairs While Dragging] Place a checkmark here to have crosshairs displayed for guidance when dragging the wire endpoint. • [Arbitrary Crosshair Length] Specifies the length of the crosshair lines. Enter a number into the [Arbitrary Crosshair Length] box to specify the length in pixels. [Infinite Crosshairs] causes the lines to go all the way to the edge of the window. Offset Paste/Duplicate from Original By Sets the position when pasting or duplicating objects. • [Auto-size (based on original object)] If you place a checkmark here, the paste/duplicate position will be automatically adjusted so that the object does not overlap the original object. • [Horizontal Pixels] Box Sets the horizontal distance. • [Vertical Pixels] Box Sets the vertical distance. Auto Suffix Number Turns automatic appending of sequentially-numbered suffixes to the names of placed objects on or off. • [DME/ICP1] When ON numbered suffixes will automatically be appended to added DME, and ICP objects. • [Component] When ON numbered suffixes will automatically be appended to added SPX and user module objects. • [Other Objects] When ON numbered suffixes will automatically be appended to added objects not covered by the above two categories. 208 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Compile Priority Here you can make compile settings for the configuration. NOTE These compile settings are reflected in online status. If you change the settings in offline status, it will be enabled when going online after going offline once. • [Resource] Compiles arrangable components in order based on their component numbers. The Delay values differ depending on the signal lines. • [Fixed Delay] Fixes the Delay value (number of Samples) for the signal lines. However, it also reduces the number of components that can be arranged. • [Auto Delay Compensation] This turns ON or OFF a function that automatically corrects the component delay when [Fixed Delay] is selected. NOTE Auto Delay Compensation will not function properly in configurations that have a loop connection. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 209 Chapter 4 Designer Grid Displays a grid on the sheet in each design window to guide the placement of objects. You can also have the objects “snap to” (automatically align with) the grid when dragging them. When you click the [Grid] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Grid” dialog box is displayed. Here you can enable or disable display of the grid and set the grid interval and form. [Snap to Grid] Makes objects align the grid when dragging them. Spacing This sets the spacing of the grid. This setting can range from 2 to 99 pixels. • [X:] Box This sets the spacing of the grid in the horizontal direction. • [Y:] Box This sets the spacing of the grid in the vertical direction. [Show Grid] Displays the grid. Place a checkmark here to enable display and select the type of grid. • [Line] Displays the grid using lines. • [Dot] Displays the grid using dots. [Save As Default Setting] Place a checkmark here to make the current grid settings the default when a new sheet is created. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 210 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Exporting Each Design Window Configurations are saved in project files. This is done using the [File] menu → [Save] and [Save As] commands in the Main Panel window. For information about saving project files see “Project Files” on page 22. Instead of saving projects in their entirety, you can output the information contained in the active window using the Designer Window [Print] → [Export DXF] command and save it in a DXF format file. These files have “.dxf” as their filename extension. Because the DXF format uses the standard CAD file format, it can be opened using CAD software. DXF format files can also be opened by graphics software that support vector graphics, such as Adobe Illustrator®. When you select this command, the “Export DXF” dialog box will be displayed. • Symbols are substituted for external devices in the following three types of folders. Microphone → mike symbol Power Amp → amp symbol Speaker → speaker symbol • Text decoration except for size will be eliminated. • Picture objects and background images for the sheet or objects will all be eliminated. • [Style] attributes for boxes will be eliminated. When you select the [Print] menu → [Export DXF] command, the “Export DXF” dialog box will be displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 211 Chapter 4 Designer ■ DXF File Name Enter a filename for the DXF file. The default file name entered here will vary according to the currently active window. If you click the [...] button at the right of the box, the “DXF File Name” dialog box is displayed. Specify the DXF file filename and the folder where the file will be saved. Enter the filename, specify the folder where the file will be saved, then click the [Save] button. When you return to the “Export DXF” dialog box, the specified filename will be displayed in the [DXF File Name] box. NOTE When you click on the [Save] button in the “DXF File Name” dialog box, the DXF file is not saved. Only when you click on the [OK] button in the “Export DXF” dialog box, does the DXF file become saved. ■ Scale Sets the reduction ratio. When the size of the sheet is large, you can reduce it before exporting it. ■ Text Style Specifies the text font for output in DXF format. The default is the “TXT” (drawing font used in CAD). ■ Block Sets the block form used in the sheet. Displays a list where you can select the form. [Block] Makes the blocks rectangular and groups the text in the port icons and port names. [Explode] Makes the blocks into sets of four lines, and does not group the text in the port icons and port names. 212 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ [Paper Size] Sets the size of the paper. [Preset Size] Displays a list where you can select preset paper sizes. When you select a paper size, numerical values are set for [Horizontal] and [Vertical]. [Custom Sizes] Set a custom size by specifying the vertical and horizontal sizes of the sheet. • [Horizontal] Box Sets the horizontal width of the sheet. • [Vertical] Box Sets the vertical height of the sheet. [Unit] Selects the unit used for setting the sheet size. [OK] Button Saves the DXF file according to the settings in the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Cancels the DXF file export process. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 213 Chapter 4 Designer Printing Each Design Window You can print out the content of each design window just as it appears on the screen. The content in the window will be expanded or reduced in size as necessary to match the size and orientation of the paper, and printed onto a single sheet of paper. Commands related to printing are found on the Designer Window [Print] menu. ■ [Print Setup] When you select this command, the “Print Setup” dialog box will be displayed. Sets the paper size and orientation. [Paper Size] Displays a list where you can select the paper size. Orientation Sets the orientation of the paper. • [Portrait] Prints on the paper with its long sides vertical. • [Landscape] Prints on the paper with its long sides horizontal. [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 214 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ [Print Preview] Displays a print preview of the active design window. You can check the appearance of the page before printing it. [Print] Displays the “Print” dialog box. [Close] Closes the print preview window. ■ [Print] Prints the active window. When you select this command, the “Print” dialog box will be displayed. Enter the number of copies to print into the [Number of Copies] box, and click the [Print] button. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 215 Chapter 4 Designer Arranging Objects Multiple object placement methods are available. ■ Dragging from the Toolkit Window You can drag items from the Toolkit window to the location where you want to place them in each design window. ■ Double-Clicking an Object in the Toolkit Window You can double-click an object in the Toolkit window to place it in each design window. ■ Selecting from the [Tools] Menu Available objects are displayed on the [Area Parts List]/[Device List]/[Component List] submenus which are accessed from the [Tools] menu. When you click an object name, the mouse pointer changes shape. Click the location on the sheet where you want to place the object. ■ Selecting from the Context Menu If you right-click on the sheet, you will see the [Area Parts List]/[Device List]/[Component List] commands displayed on the context menu that appears. When you click an object name on the submenu, the mouse pointer changes shape. Click the location on the sheet where you want to place the object. Selecting Objects ■ Selecting with a Click You can select an object by clicking on it. If you click another object or an empty location on the sheet, it will cancel selection of the object you previously clicked. ■ Selecting with Click + <Ctrl> Key When you want to select multiple objects, hold down the <Ctrl> key as you click each new object you want to select. If you hold down the <Ctrl> key and click again on one of the objects that is part of the multiple selection, it will cancel selection of that single object. ■ Selecting by Dragging If you position the mouse in an empty location on the sheet and start dragging from there, a frame will be displayed as the pointer moves. Any objects within this frame will be selected. ■ Changing the Selected Object Using the <Tab> Key When a single object is selected, you can change the selection to the next object by pressing the <Tab> key. If you press <Shift> + <Tab>, the selection moves to the previous object. The selection order moves from left to right. NOTE Wires cannot be selected with the <Tab> key. 216 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Editing Objects Objects that have been arranged on the sheet can be edited using the [Cut], [Copy], [Paste], [Duplicate], and similar commands in the [Edit] menu. These edit commands will also appear in the context menu displayed when you right-click an object in the design window. Buttons for [Cut], [Copy], and [Paste] are also available on the Designer window toolbar. NOTE Some objects cannot be edited. ■ Undoing and Redoing Operations You can undo operations using the [Undo] command on the [Edit] menu. You can use the [Redo] command to redo operations that have been undone. ■ Deleting Objects Objects can be deleted by selecting them and pressing the <Delete> key. NOTE Some objects cannot be deleted. With some other objects, you must first make appropriate settings in a dialog box before you can delete them. ■ Moving Objects You can move objects by dragging them with the mouse. If [Snap to Grid] is ON in the “Grid” dialog box, the dragged objects will automatically align with the grid. You can also move a selected object using the arrow keys. If [Snap to Grid] is ON in the “Grid” dialog box, the selected object will move from grid line to grid line. If [Snap to Grid] is OFF, the object will move pixel to pixel. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 217 Chapter 4 Designer Changing the Order Objects newly placed on the sheet will be displayed above any previously placed objects they overlap. You can change this behavior using the [Display Order] command on the [Edit] menu. Select the object for which you want to change the display order, then select the appropriate command from the [Display Order] submenu on the [Edit] menu. [Top] Moves the selected object to the top of the stack. [Bottom] Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stack. [Front] Moves the selected object up one level in the stack. [Back] Moves the selected object down one level in the stack. Uppermost Object Bottom 218 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Back Chapter 4 Designer Drawing and Editing Wires Wire Objects that are arranged on sheets in the Configuration or User Module windows can be connected to each other by wires. Not only does this let you logically connect signal sources (output side) and destinations (input side), it also lets you draw connections and independent lines on the display. Each wire has at least two wire nodes. Between the nodes are line segments. Wire Node Line Segment ■ Selecting Wires and Canceling Selection You can select a line segment by clicking on it. If you hold down the <Alt> key while clicking, you will select the entire wire. NOTE The color used when a wire object is selected can be set with [Selected Color] in the “Wire Properties” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 219 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Line Segment The line width default value is set from one to five pixels in the Designer window “Properties” dialog box. In the “Wire Properties” dialog box, the line thickness and color can be adjusted as required for the various wires arranged on the sheet. Line Segment Selection When you select a line segment by clicking on it, only that line segment is selected. If you hold down the <Ctrl> key while clicking, you can select multiple line segments. Furthermore, if you drag the mouse from an empty location on the sheet so that nodes are enclosed by a box, line segments between those nodes will be selected. Canceling Line Segment Selection If you select another object or an empty location on the sheet, it will cancel selection of the object you previously clicked. You can also cancel selections by holding the <Ctrl> key while clicking. <Ctrl> + Click 220 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Canceling Selection of a Line Segment Selected with <Ctrl> + Click Chapter 4 Designer ■ Wire Nodes Both ends of a wire, the location where wires bend, and the location where wires diverge are called “Nodes.” When a wire object is not selected, its nodes are not displayed. When a wire is selected, the nodes are displayed with a red circle. Node Selection When you click on a node, only that node itself is selected. You can select multiple nodes by holding down the <Ctrl> key while clicking. Furthermore, if you drag the mouse from an empty location on the sheet so that nodes are enclosed by a box, the enclosed nodes will be selected. Canceling Node Selection If you select another object or an empty location on the sheet, it will cancel selection of the object you previously clicked. You can also cancel node selections by holding the <Ctrl> key while clicking. With this technique, you can cancel only the node you clicked on when multiple nodes are selected. <Ctrl> + Click Canceling Selection of a Node Selected with <Ctrl> + Click DME Designer Owner’s Manual 221 Chapter 4 Designer Hotspot The small white rectangles at the edge of objects are called “Hotspots.” Wires usually connect to hotspots. Hotspots • Some hotspots do not have a connection to a logical signal within the hardware. • Component and user module hotspots normally include logical connections. • External device hotspots do not include logical connections. ■ Selecting Hotspots If you click a hotspot, drawing will start. To select, press <Shift> + click. You can select multiple hotspots as follows: Select a hotspot with <Shift> + click, then select additional hotspots using <Ctrl> + <Shift> + click. 222 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Drawing Settings Several functions are available to help ensure accurate wire drawing. ■ Grid To accurately draw in relation to the grid, turn ON [Snap to Grid] in the “Grid” dialog box. ■ Draw Exact Vertical and Horizontal Lines If you turn ON [Prohibit Diagonal Connections] in the [Tools] menu, wires will be drawn only vertically or horizontally. It will not be possible to draw diagonal wires. When you select this command, it is turned ON, and a checkmark appears next to it. If you select the command while it is ON, it will turn OFF. Even if “Prohibit Diagonal Connections” is turned OFF, this function will operate whenever you press the <Shift> key while drawing. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 223 Chapter 4 Designer Wire Drawing Wire drawing starts at the positions shown in the following table: Drawing Start Location Start Method Hotspot Click Wire End Terminal Right-click → click [Continue Wire] on the menu Node Right-click → click [Start Wire] on the menu Line Segment Right-click → click [Start Wire] on the menu Anywhere on the Sheet Right-click → click [Start Wire] on the menu NOTE When creating diagrams the keyboard cursor keys can be used to move the mouse cursor, and the <Enter. Key can be used to create nodes. ■ Connecting Hotspots with Hotspots Method 1 Clicking Click the hotspot where the connection originates to begin drawing, then click the destination hotspot. The two hotspots will be connected by a wire. NOTE A termination cannot be connected to a terminal that will be shorted. Multiple connections cannot be made to a DME object's Cascade port. NOTE When creating diagrams horizontally aligned hot spots can be automatically connected by pressing the <Shift> + <→> keys or <Shift> + <←> keys. Method 2 Dragging Drag from the origin hotspot to the destination hotspot. NOTE A termination cannot be connected to a terminal that will be shorted. Multiple connections cannot be made to a DME object's Cascade port. ■ Connect with Bent Line Method 1 From Hotspot to Hotspot Click the hotspot where the connection originates to begin drawing, then click the location (which will become a node) where you want the line to bend. Finally, click the destination hotspot to complete the connection. 224 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Method 2 From Hotspot to Node or Line Segment Click the hotspot where the connection originates to begin drawing, then click the location (node) where you want the line to bend. Click an already drawn wire node or line segment to complete the connection. If you connect to a line segment, a node will be created there. NOTE A termination cannot be connected to a terminal that will be shorted. Multiple connections cannot be made to a DME object's Cascade port. ■ Connect Multiple Hotspots in a Single Operation Method 1 <Ctrl> Key Combinations If you hold down the <Ctrl> key when finishing dragging, a wire will be drawn at all origin hotspots. The wire will be connected to the destination hotspot you dragged and those that come after. Begin dragging from the connection origin hotspot, then press the <Ctrl> key after aligning the mouse pointer with the hotspot you will connect too. A wire will be displayed below the destination hotspot. Finish dragging while holding the <Ctrl> key down. Press <Ctrl> Key Method 2 Connect Multiple Selected Hotspots Select multiple hotspots using <Shift> + click and <Ctrl> + click, then drag from one of the selected hotspots to the destination hotspot. The selected multiple origin hotspots will all be connected. Multiple Hotspots Selected DME Designer Owner’s Manual 225 Chapter 4 Designer Method 3 Using Shortcuts Press the [F2] key to select the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the selected object and begin drawing a wire. Press <Shift> + [F2] to select the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the selected object and begin drawing a wire. Press the [F4] key to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the selected object and the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the object on the right. Press <Shift> + [F4] to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the selected object and the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the object on the left. 226 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Press the [F5] key to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the selected object and the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the object on the right, and continue automatically making sequential connections until no more open ports are available on either object. Automatic connections will not be made over other objects. Press <Shift> + [F5] to connect the uppermost open hot spot to the left of the selected object and the uppermost open hot spot to the right of the object on the left, and continue automatically making sequential connections until no more open ports are available on either object. Automatic connections will not be made over other objects. Press the [F8] key to clear all wires connected to the selected object. NOTE When multiple objects are selected these operations apply to the first object selected. NOTE These shortcuts can be changed as required. → See Chapter 3 Main Panel Window, “Shortcut Keys” on page 134. ■ Starting Drawing from the End Point/Node/Line Segment of an Existing Wire You can draw from the end or midway point of an existing wire. If you start from a node or line segment, a branch line will be created. Method 1 Continue Drawing from a Wire End Point When continuing an existing wire, right-click on the wire end point, then click [Continue Wire] on the displayed context menu. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 227 Chapter 4 Designer Method 2 Start Drawing from a Node Right-click on a wire node, then click [Start Wire] on the displayed menu. You can start a branch wire from the node you clicked on. Method 3 Start Drawing from a Line Segment Right-click on a wire line segment, then click [Start Wire] on the displayed menu. A node will be created at the point you right-clicked, and you can start a branch wire from that node. ■ Drawing from Anywhere on the Sheet Right-click the start position for drawing, the click [Start Wire] on the context menu that is displayed. Click the location where the line should bend, then double-click at the end location to finish drawing. ■ Finishing Drawing When the hotspots or already drawn wires are connected, drawing is finished. To finish drawing without connecting to a hotspot, use one of the following methods: • Right-click the mouse • Double-click • Press the <Esc> key Drawing also finishes if another window is made active. 228 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Wire Editing You can delete wires, change node positions, connect to other wires, and perform other wire edit operations. ■ Delete Deleting an Entire Wire Right-click the wire then click [Delete Wire] in the context menu Deleting Nodes Nodes can be deleted by selecting them and pressing the <Delete> key. Nodes on both sides of the deleted node will become directly connected. Selected Node ■ Editing by Dragging Moving Nodes You can move nodes by dragging them with the mouse. When multiple nodes are selected and dragged with the mouse, you can move all selected nodes simultaneously. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 229 Chapter 4 Designer Moving Line Segments To move a line segment, select the nodes on both sides of the segment, and drag one of the nodes. ■ Connecting to Other Wires If you drag a node and lay it over another wire, the two will be connected at that position. If you drag it to a line segment, a node will be created. Created Node Logical connection A connection from a source (output side) signal to a destination (input side) signal is called a “logical connection.” If a logical connection is present in a configuration, the actual hardware signal will be connected. A single wire can make a single logical connection. Logical connections are possible only in the Configuration window and the User Module window. Wires in the Area window or Zone window can be drawn for display only. Even in the Configuration window and User Module window, you can also draw wires for display only. Window Wire Area Window Drawing for display only Zone Window Drawing for display only Configuration Window Logical connection and drawing for display only User Module Window Logical connection and drawing for display only ■ Situations Where No Logical Connection Is Created • • • • 230 Both sides are source (output side) signals Both sides are destination (input side) signals Two source (output side) signals are connected to a destination There are two destination (input side) signals, and the wire is not connected to a source (output side) signal. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Zone At least one zone is included within an area. In the default Area window that zone will be named [Zone1]. Multiple zones can be arranged in an Area. When you click the [Zone] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Zone” dialog box is displayed. Here you can add, delete, or rename a zone. Zone List Lists the zones included in the project. To change settings for a zone, select it by clicking it in the list. [Add] Button Adds a zone. Clicking here displays the “Please enter new name” dialog box. Enter a new name, then click [OK]. A zone will be added. [Delete] Button Deletes the zone selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Are you sure?” dialog box. Click the [OK] button, and the zone will be deleted. Click the [Cancel] button, and the deletion will be cancelled. NOTE A minimum of one zone is required. When only one zone remains, deletion is impossible. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 231 Chapter 4 Designer [Rename] Button Changes the name of the zone selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Enter new name for the current zone name” dialog box. Enter a zone name, then click the [OK] button. NOTE The current name of the zone you will be renaming is displayed in the “Current Zone Name” box of the “Enter new name for current zone name” message. [Close] Button Closes the “Zone” dialog box. 232 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Adding, Deleting, and Renaming a Configuration At least one configuration is included within a zone. In a new Zone that configuration will be named [Configuration1]. You can add configurations as required. When you click the [Configuration] command on the [Tools] menu, the “Configuration” dialog box is displayed. Here you can add, delete, or rename a configuration. Configurations Lists the configurations included in the zone being edited. To change settings for a configuration, select it by clicking it in the list. [Add] Button Adds a configuration. Clicking here displays the “Please enter new name” dialog box. Enter a configuration name, then click [OK]. A configuration will be added. [Delete] Button Deletes the configuration selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Are you sure?” dialog box. Click the [OK] button, and the configuration will be deleted. Click the [Cancel] button, and the deletion will be cancelled. NOTE A minimum of one configuration is required. When only one configuration remains, deletion is impossible. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 233 Chapter 4 Designer [Rename] Button Changes the name of the configuration selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Enter new name for the current configuration” dialog box. Enter a configuration name, then click the [OK] button. NOTE The current name of the configuration you will be renaming is displayed in the “Current Configuration Name” box of the “Enter new name for current configuration name” message. [Close] Button Closes the “Configuration” dialog box. 234 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Area Window In the Area window, the area is designed by arranging objects on a design sheet, When you click “Area” in the Navigator window, the Area window becomes active. You can also open the Area window using the [Area] command in the [View] menu. The following objects can be arranged in the Area window: • Zone • External Device • Picture • Text • Box • Ellipse • Wire • Legend Title Bar Menu Bar Tool Bar Zones Wire (Line) Picture (Image) Text (Text Object) Toolkit Window Ellipse (Circle) Wire Box (Rectangle) Legend Sheet ■ Title Bar You can move windows by dragging the title bar. ■ Zone Zones are added and deleted using the “Zone” dialog box. You cannot perform operations such as deletion, cut, or copy. You can change the position and design of zone objects in the Area window. Double-click to open a Zone window. ■ Objects You can perform edit operations such as arrange, cut, copy, paste, delete, and move on all objects except zones. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 235 Chapter 4 Designer Arranging Objects Objects other than zones can be placed in the window by dragging them from the Toolkit window. You can also place objects by double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. You can also display the [Area Parts List] from the [Tools] menu or from the context menu that appears when you right-click on the sheet. 236 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Zone Window In the Zone window, the zone configuration is designed by arranging zone devices on a design sheet, A zone configuration can be created that is the same as the actual hardware arrangement. To display the Zone window, double-click in the Area window. When you click a configuration in the Navigator window, it becomes active. The following objects can be arranged in the Zone window: • DME • ICP • External Device • Picture • Text • Box • Ellipse (Circle) • Legend Title Bar Menu Bar Tool Bar DME ICP External Device Picture (Image) Text (Text Object) Box (Rectangle) Sheet Toolkit Window Ellipse (Circle) Legend ■ Title Bar Displays the zone name you have in the “Zone” dialog box. There is always one zone named [Zone 1] in a newly created project. ■ Configuration You can create multiple configurations within a zone, but they cannot be arranged within the Zone window. There is a Zone window for each configuration where devices can be arranged. To switch configurations, click the desired configuration in the Navigator window. You can add, delete, and rename configurations in the “Configuration” dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 237 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Objects You can perform edit operations such as place, cut, copy, paste, delete, and move to devices and shapes. If you double-click on a device arranged in the window, a Configuration window or dialog box will open. Device Action When Double-Clicked DME Displays Configuration Window ICP Displays “Control Panel Properties” dialog box External Device Opens external application linked to the device. Arranging Objects You can place objects by dragging them from the Toolkit window. You can also place objects by double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. The same objects are displayed in the [Device List] submenu on the context menu that appears when you right-click the [Tools] menu or on the sheet. For information about the “Device List,” see page 154. ■ DME Arrangement To place a DME object, first drag the [New] icon. When you drag the [New] icon and place it in the Zone window, you also add an icon for that DME to the Toolkit window. You can rename the DME in the “DME Device Properties” dialog box. This also renames the DME icon in the Toolkit Window. You can place a created DME in another configuration, but you cannot place multiple identical DMEs in a single configuration. If there are multiple DMEs in a hardware configuration, create an equivalent number of DME objects. Place New DME Placed DME DME not placed in active configuration 238 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Placing a New DME Below the DME folder in the Toolkit window are the [DME24N] and [DME64N] folders. Below these folders you will find a [New] icon. Drag it to the Zone window. When you drag the [New] icon and place it in the Zone window, you also add an icon for that DME to the Toolkit window. A DME added to the Toolkit window cannot be placed again in the same configuration window. The DME placed in the Toolkit window will be displayed with a muted color. To place multiple DMEs, drag the [New] icon to add each DME. Placing Existing DMEs When there are multiple configurations, you can place existing DMEs in configurations other than their original one. Drag the DME icon created in the Toolkit window to the Zone window. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 239 Chapter 4 Designer When you place the DME in the Zone window, the DME icon display in the Toolkit window will change to a muted color that indicates that it has already been placed. ■ ICP Placement Just like for a DME, the first step it placing an ICP is to drag the [New] icon from the Toolkit window. You can place the created ICP in another configuration, but you cannot place multiple identical ICPs in a single configuration. If there are multiple ICPs in a hardware configuration, create an equivalent number of ICP objects. ICP not placed in active configuration Placed ICP Place New ICP Placing a New ICP Subordinate to the ICP folder in the Toolkit window is the [ICP1] folder. Below these folders you will find a [New] icon. Drag it to the Zone window. 240 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer When you drag the ICP [New] icon and place it in the Zone window, you also add an icon for that ICP to the Toolkit window. The ICP added in the Toolkit window will be displayed with a muted color to indicate it has already been placed. To place multiple ICPs, drag the [New] icon to add each new ICP. Placing Existing ICPs When there are multiple configurations, you can place existing ICPs in configurations other than their original one. Drag the ICP icon created in the Toolkit window to the Zone window. The ICP will be placed in the Zone window. The ICP added in the Toolkit window will be displayed with a muted color to indicate it has already been placed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 241 Chapter 4 Designer Configuration Window The Configuration window is used for arranging components on the sheet and making logical connections. It is displayed when you double-click on a DME. Title Bar Menu Bar Tool Bar Component Sheet Toolkit Window Wire User Module I/O Component Legend ■ Title Bar Displays “DME Name (Zone Name).” The configuration window for a DME64N placed in [Zone1] will be “DME64N (Zone1).” The DME name is set in the properties for the DME placed in the Zone window. ■ Objects Objects such components, user modules, and shapes are arranged in the Configuration window. When you double-click a component placed in the window, the component editor will open. If you double-click a user module, the user module will open. ■ I/O Component Depending on the settings for the DME placed in the Zone window, I/O components will be automatically placed or added. • I/O components can be arranged in the DME24N configuration window. • When “Show Cascade Port” is ON in the DME64N “DME Device Properties” dialog, Cascade I/O is added automatically. • When you set a slot in the properties for a DME placed in the Zone window, Slot I/O will be automatically added. You cannot apply edit operations like cut/copy/paste/duplicate to I/O components, Slot I/O, and Cascade I/O. 242 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Placing Components You can place objects by dragging them from the Toolkit window. You can also place objects by double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. The same objects are displayed in the [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that appears when you right-click on the sheet. For information about the [Component List] in the Configuration window, see page 154. NOTE If the [Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output] or the [Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output] components are placed in the DME64N configuration window, you will not be able to use other components, even though the window does not reach 100 percent. The [Matrix Mixer 64 input 64 output] or [Matrix Mixer 64 input 32 output] components cannot be used in the DME24N. ■ Arranging a Number of Components of the Same Type You can arrange a number of components of the same type. If there are two or more of the same component, numbers will be attached to their names as follows: “Compressor (2),” “Compressor (3)” and so on. Multiple components placed in the configuration are independent, and you can set different parameters for each of them. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 243 Chapter 4 Designer Probe Monitor Probe monitor is a function that lets you monitor output ports in your configuration with headphones. You can turn it ON or OFF using [Probe Monitor] in the [Tools] menu or the [Probe Monitor] button on the toolbar. The probe monitor can be set to ON or OFF for each DME. The probe monitor can be used only when online with the DME and Configuration window or user module active. When the probe monitor is ON, no editing is possible except in the Component Editor. ■ Probe Monitor Procedure 1 Turn the probe monitor ON. Click [Probe Monitor] in the [Tools] menu or the [Probe Monitor] button on the toolbar. The shape of the mouse pointer changes. 2 Click the output port you want to monitor. The output port you clicked will be selected and monitoring will begin. Monitor object If you click another output port, the location being monitored will change. 244 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ L/R Selection To monitor the left channel and right channel simultaneously, <Shift> + click on the left channel, then do the some for the right channel. ■ Exiting the Probe Monitor Click [Probe Monitor] in the [Tools] menu or the [Probe Monitor] button on the toolbar to turn OFF the probe monitor. When probe monitor is turned off, the mouse pointer returns to its normal shape. ■ Monitoring the Second or Later Time The software remembers the location being monitored even when probe monitoring is turned OFF. The next time probe monitoring is turned ON, the location that was being monitored previously will be selected. NOTE If the configuration is edited after turning monitoring OFF, the monitor location will not be selected. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 245 Chapter 4 Designer Show Signal Delay (Delay Display Value) The signal delays according to the processing time in the audio processor. The [Show Signal Delay] command from the [Tools] menu calculates a delay value and displays it for the component. Selecting this command switches delay value display between ON and OFF. A checkmark appears when display is turned ON. When turned ON, the settings are compiled to obtain a delay value, which is displayed for components and lines. The delay value obtained through compilation remains valid until the configuration is edited. Sample units are used to display the delay value. This corresponds to the [Show Signal Delay] button on the toolbar. ON and OFF settings for [Show Signal Display] are saved for each configuration window. Switching the setting between ON and OFF in another configuration window has no effect on the current window. You can edit the configuration while [Show Signal Delay] is turned ON. When you turn ON [Show Signal Delay], the delay value appears above the object. Delay values for components and I/O components are displayed at the lower center of the object. Delay values for wires are displayed beside the input port of the connected object. NOTE Delay values for SPX components vary depending on the Bypass ON/OFF status, because SPX components add the effect signal to the original signal. When [Show Signal Delay] is turned ON, the delay value for the Bypass ON status will be displayed. NOTE Delay values for Wav File Player components are displayed for external inputs. Delay values for local Wave files cannot be displayed. 246 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Monitoring Point List When you click [Monitoring Point List] in the [Tools] menu, the “Monitoring Point List” dialog box is displayed. Here you can register or edit points for monitoring with headphones. NOTE Monitoring points can be edited only by users for whom the [Edit] security checkbox has been turned ON. ■ [Cut] Button Cuts the selected monitoring point information. When monitoring point information is cut, information below that point moves up. ■ [Copy] Button Copies the selected monitoring point information. ■ [Paste] Button Pastes the copied monitoring point information at the selected line. ■ [Insert] Button The copied monitoring point information is inserted at the selected point. ■ [Clear] Button Deletes the selected monitoring point information. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 247 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Monitoring Point List Displays and allows editing of monitoring point information. [No.] Displays the numbers for monitor link points. Numbers are assigned in order from the top. [Label] Displays and allows editing of monitoring point names. Clicking here selects the text. You can then enter a new name. [Component L] Sets the monitoring point L channel component. Clicking here displays a list of components arranged in the active configuration window. You can then select components for monitoring. NOTE Components arranged in user modules are also displayed in the list. However, components for user modules for which security is set will not be displayed. [Port L] Sets the monitoring point L channel port. Clicking here displays a list of ports for the component selected in the [Component L] field. Click the port you want to monitor. NOTE If you click a port in the designer window while the “Monitoring Point List” dialog box is displayed, the port will be registered to the monitoring point of current selected row. If you will register the monitoring points as stereo, click a port while holding down the <Shift> key to register Component L and Port L, then click a port again while holding down the <Shift> key to register Component R and Port R. [Component R] Sets the monitoring point R channel component. Clicking here displays a list of components arranged in the active configuration window. You can then select components for monitoring. NOTE Components arranged in user modules are also displayed in the list. However, components for user modules for which security is set will not be displayed. [Port R] Sets the monitoring point R channel port. Clicking here displays a list of ports for the component selected in the [Component R] field. Click the port you want to monitor. ■ [OK] Button Updates the settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. 248 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Analyze (Configuration Analysis) When you click the [Analyze] command on the [Tools] menu or the [Analyze] button on the toolbar, the “Analyze” dialog box is displayed. The wire connections in the currently active configuration window are analyzed, and the results are displayed in the “Analyze” dialog box. Because this function allows you to make sure there are no problems with component arrangement and wires without connecting to the DME unit, it is useful for eliminating complier errors before executing Synchronization. NOTE The [Analyze] command on the [Tools] menu can be selected only when a configuration window is active. ■ Message Box Displays the progress of the analysis operation. When the analysis finishes, the results are displayed. If errors are detected during analysis, they will display as shown below. ■ [Close] Button Closes the dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 249 Chapter 4 Designer User Module User Modules A module treated as a single component that combines a number of other components is called a “user module.” A user module can be arranged in the Configuration window just like any other component. User module editing consists of placing the component and making logical connections with wires, the same as for configurations. User modules are saved in the project file, but they can also be saved as files. User modules saved as files can be displayed in the Toolkit window and used in other project files. A “User Modules” folder will be created in the folder specified in [Contents Folder] in the “Preferences” dialog box in the Main Panel window. User modules will be saved there. If you do not change the setting in the “Preferences” dialog box, the location will be “C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME Designer\User Modules.” NOTE The Main Panel Menu “Preferences” dialog box is displayed using [Preference] in the [File] menu. User Module Manager When you click [User Module Manager] on the [Tools] menu, the “User Module Manager” dialog box is displayed. You can change settings, rename or delete in the window that opens when you doubleclick a user module. ■ User Modules Lists user modules that are saved in the “User Modules” folder. Select the target user module by clicking on it. NOTE Only user modules saved can be displayed. User modules placed in the component editor are saved in project files, and can be used without being saved as files. However, they will not be displayed in the “User Module Manager” dialog box list. 250 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ Double Click Action Sets the action that occurs when you double-click on a user module placed in the Configuration window. [Open User Module Design Window] Opens the User Module window. [Open User Module Editor] Opens the User Module editor. The user module editor is a window where controls for components that are placed in a user module can be laid out and their parameters changed. For more information about the user module editor, see “User Control/User Module Editor” on page 279. ■ Security Settings Makes security settings for the user module selected on the list. [Enable Security] Enables user module security. If security is enabled, a password is requested when attempting to open the User Module window. If the correct password is not entered, the window will stay closed. When you place a checkmark here, the “Set Password” dialog box appears. Enter the same password into the [Password] box and [Confirm Password] box, and click the [OK] button. To disable user module security, turn OFF the checkbox. If you click the checkbox when it already has a checkmark, the “Input Password” dialog box appears. Enter the password set for this user module, and click the [OK] button. You can disable security in this way. If you do not enter the correct password, you will not be able to disable security. [Set Password] Button Changes the password. Clicking here displays the “Input Password” dialog box. Enter the current password and click the [OK] button. The “Set Password” dialog box will be displayed. Enter the same password into the [Password] box and [Confirm Password] box, and click the [OK] button. ■ Default Library Specifies the default library file for newly-created user modules. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 251 Chapter 4 Designer ■ [Rename] Button Changes the name of the user module selected on the list. Clicking here displays the “Rename User Module” dialog box. Enter a name into the user module name box, and click the [OK] button. NOTE The user module name also becomes the file name. When naming a user module, do not use characters that cannot be used for filenames. ■ [Delete] Button Deletes the user module selected on the list. ■ [Import] Button Imports the user module settings and library from the user module export file. ■ [Export] Button Saves the user module settings and library to the user module export file. Click to display the Export dialog, All features of this dialog window are the same as the standard Windows file save dialog, except for the [Export Library] option. [Export Library] can be sued to select the library to be saved. ■ [Import Library] Button Loads a file from the specified folder into the library. 252 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer ■ [Export Library] Button Saves the library to a file. Use [Export Library] to select the library to be saved. ■ [OK] Button Accepts the changed settings and closes the dialog box. ■ [Cancel] Button Closes the dialog box without changing the settings. NOTE Settings in the “User Module Manager” dialog box are changed when you click the [OK] button. If you mistakenly set security, change the password, or delete a user module, you can click the [Cancel] button to close the dialog box and return to the original unchanged settings. Please note that [Import], [Export], [Import Library], and [Export Library] will be applied even if the [Cancel] button is clicked. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 253 Chapter 4 Designer Creating User Modules When you place a blank user module in the Configuration window, a new user module is created. 1 Make the Configuration window active. 2 Click the [+] next to [User Module] in the Toolkit window. The items in the level below the [User Module] folder will be displayed. 3 Drag the [Blank User Module] to the Configuration window. When you release the mouse button at the location where you will place the user module, the “User Module Properties” dialog box is displayed. 4 Here you can set object properties. [Inputs/Outputs Sets] is set to 1. Set the required number of ports. 5 Click the [OK] button. A user module will be created, and placed in the Configuration window. The user module properties can also be changed later. For information about the “User Module Properties” dialog box, see “User Module” on page 181. 254 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer Saving User Modules When user modules are saved, they appear below [User Module] in the Toolkit window. They can be used in other project files. NOTE User modules placed in the component editor are saved in the project file. When you want to use a user module in another project or in another configuration in the same project, save it using the “Save User Module” command. Save the User Module using the [Save User Module] command on the [Tools] menu. The [Save User Module] command can be used only when a user module is selected in the Configuration window. When you select the command, the “Save User Module” dialog box will be displayed. Enter a name for the User Module, then click the [OK] button. Set [Double Click Action] and [Security Settings] at the lower part of the “Save User Module” dialog box. They correspond to the same items in the “User Module Manager” dialog box. When saved with different settings than the “User Module Manager” dialog box, the saved settings are immediately applied. ■ Double Click Action Sets the window that opens when you double-click on a user module placed in the component editor. [Open User Module Design Window] Opens the User Module window. [Open User Module Editor] Opens the User Module editor. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 255 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Security Settings Sets user module security. [Enable Security] Enables user module security. If you place a checkmark here, the “Set Password” dialog box appears. Enter the same password into the [Password] box and [Confirm Password] box, and click the [OK] button. [Set Password] Button Changes the password. Clicking here displays the “Input Password” dialog box. Enter the current password and click the [OK] button. The “Set Password” dialog box will be displayed. Enter the same password into the [Password] box and [Confirm Password] box, and click the [OK] button. If you try to save a user module with the same name as an already saved user module, a message asking “This file already exists. Overwrite?” will be displayed. To overwrite, click the [Yes] button. To change the name, click the [No] button, and change the file name in the “Save User Module” dialog box. NOTE When the “Save User Module” dialog box is displayed, the name set in the user module’s “User Module Properties” dialog box will be entered into the [File name] box. If you change the name of a user module and save it using the “Save User Module” dialog box, the filename in the user module and the user module name displayed in the Toolkit window will also change. The [Label] box displayed in the “User Module Properties” dialog box will not change. NOTE If characters not usable in file names are used in the file name set in the “User Module Properties” dialog box, an error message will be displayed at the same time as the “Save User Module” dialog box. Delete the unusable characters before saving. 256 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 4 Designer User Module Window User modules are edited in the User Module window. The User Module window is used for arranging components on the sheet and making logical connections. It is displayed when you double-click on an object arranged in the Configuration window. Title Bar Menu Bar Tool Bar Component Wire ■ Title Bar The user module names are displayed on the title bar. User module names are set in the “User Module Properties” dialog box. ■ Objects You can place, cut, copy, paste, delete, and move component and shape objects. When you double-click an object placed in the window, the component editor will open. ■ Placing Components Components are placed the same as in the Configuration window. You can place objects by dragging them from the Toolkit window to the User Module window. You can also place objects by double-clicking them in the Toolkit window. The same objects are displayed in the [Component List] submenu on the [Tools] menu or on the context menu that appears when you right-click on the sheet. For information about the User Module window [Component List], see page 155. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 257 Chapter 4 Designer ■ Placing a Number of Components of the Same Type You can arrange a number of components of the same type. If there are two or more of the same component, numbers will be attached to their names as follows: “Compressor (2),” “Compressor (3)” and so on. Multiple components placed in the configuration are independent, and you can set different parameters for each of them. 258 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Types of Components Component Groups When the Configuration window and User Module window are made active, a component list is displayed in the Toolkit window, and you can use the [Component List] on the [Tools] menu. Components can be separated into groups based on types. In the Toolkit window, component groups are displayed as folders. Some of the groups in the Toolkit window are further divided into subgroups. Click the [+]/[-] buttons to the left of the folders to display the components. Group Component NOTE When the User Module window is active, [User Module] is not present on the menu. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 259 Chapter 5 Components In the Designer window [Tools] menu → [Component List] menu, component groups are displayed as submenu items. The items with small rightward-facing triangles are groups. Those without triangles are components. Group Component NOTE When the User Module window is active, [User Module] is not present in the menu. Component List Group Crossover 2 Way 3 Way 4 Way 5 Way 6 Way Crossover Processor 2 Way 3 Way 4 Way 5 Way 6 Way Crossover Processor II 2 Way 3 Way 4 Way 5 Way 6 Way Delay 260 Component Variations DME Designer Owner’s Manual Long 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output Short 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output Chapter 5 Components Group Dynamics EQ Compander Mono Stereo CompanderS Mono Stereo Mono Stereo De-Esser Mono Stereo Ducking Mono Stereo Expander Mono Stereo Gate Mono Stereo Limiter Mono Stereo GEQ Fader Mono 7 Band 15 Band 31 Band Stereo 7 Band 15 Band 31 Band Mono 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 6 Band 8 Band Stereo 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 6 Band 8 Band 1 Channel 2 Channel 4 Channel 8 Channel 12 Channel 16 Channel BPF Mono Stereo HPF Mono Stereo LPF Mono Stereo Notch Mono Stereo Programmable BPF Mono Stereo Programmable HPF Mono Stereo Programmable LPF Mono Stereo Meter Miscellaneous CompanderH Compressor PEQ Filter Component Variations 1 Channel 2 Channel 4 Channel 8 Channel 12 Channel 16 Channel Oscillator Wav File Player Mono DME Designer Owner’s Manual 261 Chapter 5 Components Group Mixer Auto Mixer Delay Matrix Matrix Mixer Pan 262 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Component Variations 2 Channel 4 Channel 8 Channel 12 Channel 16 Channel 2 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 4 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 8 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 2 Input 1 Output 2 Output 4 Input 1 Output 2 Output 4 Output 8 Input 1 Output 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Input 1 Output 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Input 1 Output 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 32 Input 16 Output 32 Output 64 Input 32 Output 64 Output LCR 1 Channel 2 Channel 4 Channel 8 Channel 12 Channel 16 Channel LR 1 Channel 2 Channel 4 Channel 8 Channel 12 Channel 16 Channel Surround 3-1 5.1 6.1 Chapter 5 Components Group Router Source Selector Speaker Processor Component Variations 1 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 2 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 4 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 8 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 12 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 16 Input 2 Output 4 Output 8 Output 12 Output 16 Output 3 Position 1 Channel 4 Position 1 Channel 2 Channel 6 Channel 8 Position 1 Channel 2 Channel 6 Channel 16 Position 1 Channel 1 Way 2 Way 3 Way 4 Way 5 Way 6 Way SPX Slot Slot In Component Editor Slot Out Component Editor Cascade Cascade In Component Editor Cascade Out Component Editor DME Designer Owner’s Manual 263 Chapter 5 Components Component Editor Window Component Editor Component parameters are edited in the component editor. The same component can be placed multiple times on the same sheet in a Configuration or User Module window. If there are multiple examples of the same component in a configuration window or user module window, each component is independent and its parameters are set individually in a separate Component Editor window. Opening the Component Editor When you double-click on a component located in a Configuration window, the Component Editor window will open. There is not just one window that is called the component editor. The contents of the editor and the name on the title bar will differ according to type of component for which the window was opened. Component Editor Window Structure The contents of the Component Editor window vary according to the component. Library Back Button Title Bar Snap Graph Meter [ON] Button Slider Edit Box Knob ■ Title Bar Displays the label. Label settings are made in the “Component Properties” dialog box. For information about component labels see “Component” (page 174) in “Objects.”. 264 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components ■ Back Button This button appears in the child window of windows that have a parent-child relationship, and can be clicked to return the parent window. ■ Status Bar Component ID Component Name Parameter ID Component Name Displays the component name. Component ID Displays the component ID. NOTE When controlling the DME64N/24N by connecting an RS-232C compatible controller to the [REMOTE] terminal, a component ID is required for distinguishing the same components in the DME64N/24N. The component ID is included in the signal that controls the component parameters. For details about control methods, contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor at the end of the DME64N/24N Owner’s Manual. Parameter ID Displays the parameter ID for controls that are being operated. ■ Snap Up to four component editor parameter sets can be recorded temporarily. You can switch between parameter sets using buttons. Parameter sets can be copied by dragging and dropping a button onto any other button. Copy can also be carried out from the contextual menu that appears when a button is right-clicked. ■ Library Saves and recalls component editor parameter sets as files. → See “Library” on page 275. ■ Graph Displays the effects of the component in a graphical format. When parameters are changed, the graph changes too. In graphs that have control points, adjust parameters by dragging the points. As you drag the points, the corresponding parameters reflect the changes you make. ■ Meter Displays the signal level. ■ Slider/Knob You can change parameters by dragging the corresponding sliders or knobs. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 265 Chapter 5 Components Changing Parameters In the Component Editor window, parameter settings can be made by dragging buttons and sliders, not only by directly entering numbers. In locations where multiple controls, like edit boxes and knobs, are combined, you can change the values either way. ■ Preference When you click the [Preference] command on the [File] menu in the Main Panel window, the “Preferences” dialog box is displayed. You can set the action of the knobs and sliders on the [Component Editor] tab of the “Preferences” dialog box. When you close the dialog box after changing settings, those changes are immediately reflected in the component. Knob Mode Sets how the knobs operate. Slider Mode Sets the action that occurs when you click on the scale located under the sliders. Edit Box Zoom Specifies whether the edit box will be enlarged or not on mouse-over. Edit Box Font Specifies the edit box font. NOTE This is the font when the box is enlarged, not the font that is used when the box is at it's smallest size. The text may bleed beyond the box with some fonts. 266 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components ■ Knob You can change the way knobs operate, using the [Component Editor] tab → [Knob Mode] setting in the “Preferences” dialog box. Circular The knob is dragged following its shape, as though you were drawing a circle. Linear As you drag the knob to the upper, the value increases. Dragging it down decreases the value. NOTE To make a finer setting, press the <Shift> key while dragging the knob. If you click a knob while pressing the <Ctrl> key, the setting will return to its default value. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 267 Chapter 5 Components ■ Slider Slider Scale You can change the parameter by dragging the slider. You can set the action that results from using the mouse on the scale area with [Component Editor] tab → [Slider Mode] in the “Preferences” dialog box. Ramp When the fader bar is clicked the knob will move a preset amount in the corresponding direction. Touch The slider does not move without directly touching it, even if you click the mouse button. Jump The slider jumps to the location where you click. NOTE To make a finer setting, press the <Shift> key while dragging the slider. If you click a slider while pressing the <Ctrl> key, the setting will return to its default value. 268 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components ■ Buttons There are several types of buttons. Switches between ON/OFF. When turned on, the button lights up. The color depends on the button’s function. When turned ON When turned OFF In button sets of this type, you can select one of several buttons. When you do all other buttons in the set turn off. Click here to execute a command. Click this button to switch all channels in the block. Displays a menu. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 269 Chapter 5 Components Displays another window. ■ Edit Box Displays current values for settings. You can modify values by typing from the keyboard or using the mouse. When a value is changed, the knob or slider moves. Mouse-over When [Edit Box Zoom] in the [Component Editor] tab of the Preferences dialog box is checked, the edit box will zoom when the mouse is positioned over it (mouse-over). Click Text in the selected edit box will turn red. Values can be entered and edited via the keyboard. It is not necessary to enter the unit. Press the <ENTER> key to confirm the entry and display the unit. Changing Values Using Spin Boxes When the mouse pointer is placed over an edit box, a spin box appears. Clicking the up arrow button [▲] increases the value, while clicking the down arrow [▼] decreases it. 270 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Double-click Selects a number. You can change the selected number using the keyboard. There is no need to enter units. When you press the <Enter> key, the numbers you entered will be set and the units displayed. Enter a number from the keyboard. Set the value with the <Enter> key. Moving with the <Tab> Key If you press <Tab> key while an edit box is selected, the selection will move to the next edit box. If you press <Shift> + <Tab>, the selection moves to the previous edit box. Changing Selections with the Key/Mouse Wheel You can modify values in selected edit boxes using the direction keys or the mouse wheel. • Up and Down Arrow Keys Increases or decreases number settings. • <PageUp> Key/<PageDown> Key Increases or decreases number settings in large increments. The <PageUp> key increases and the <PageDown> key decreases the setting. • <Enter> Key When you press the <Enter> key, the numbers you entered will be confirmed. • <Ctrl> Key + <Enter> Key When you press the <Ctrl> + <Enter> key, the setting will return to its default value. • Mouse Wheel Rolling the mouse wheel upward (away from you) increases the value. Rolling it down (towards you) decreases the value. • Dragging Dragging upward increases the value, while dragging downward decreases it. • <ESC> Key The <ESC> key can be used to cancel a value being entered. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 271 Chapter 5 Components ■ Graph Control Point Displays parameters graphically. When parameters are changed, the graph also changes. In graphs that have control points, you can adjust parameters by dragging the points. On graphs with control points that are limited to movement in one direction only, aligning the mouse pointer with the control point and pressing the mouse button causes the mouse pointer to change to a double-headed arrow pointing in both directions of movement. Change the parameter by dragging in the directions of the arrow. Control points that can be dragged in any direction usually have their position determined by multiple parameters in the component editor. These multiple parameters can be adjusted by dragging the point. When there are multiple control points in the graph, they are identified by their colors. A bar with the same color as each control point can be found below the corresponding knob or edit box. NOTE When a graph that has control points is copied to the User Control Editor or User Module Editor, the controls points will not be displayed. The controllers assigned to the corresponding parameters must also be copied to display the control points. 272 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Snap About Snap The Snap function records parameters for the component editor, user control editor, and user module editor temporarily. Clicking a button switches the parameter set, setting all parameters in the editor to the status that existed when the parameters were recorded in the memory. You can record the current values for parameters. Furthermore, when you recall a library, it is recorded to the Snap button that is on at that time. For more information about libraries, see “Library” (page 275). Snap Buttons ■ Snap Buttons ([A] through [D]) The Snap buttons allow you to switch between parameter sets. The buttons change in appearance according to their ON/OFF status and to whether or not there were changes to the parameter set from when the editor was started. When there has been no change to the parameter set since the editor was started When a button is selected it lights up. ON OFF When a parameter set that is different than when the editor was started has been recorded to a button The color of the button name changes on buttons for which the parameter set has changed. When a button is selected it lights up. ON OFF DME Designer Owner’s Manual 273 Chapter 5 Components ■ Recording Parameter Sets Recording parameters from the current window The parameters present when the snap button is switched are recorded to the snap button before the switch. 1 Click the snap button ([A] through [D]) that will record the parameter set. This turns it ON. 2 Set the parameters in the editor to the settings you want to record. 3 Click another snap button. Recalling a Library 1 Click the snap button that has recorded the parameter set. This turns it ON. 2 The library is recalled. ■ Switching Parameter Set If you click a snap button that has a parameter set recorded, the system switches to the parameter set recorded there. ■ Copying Parameter Sets Parameter sets can be copied between snap buttons [A]~[D]. • Select from the contextual menu. • Drag and drop. Drag-and-drop copy will also work between components of the same type. 274 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Library The Library Component editor, user control editor, and user module editor parameters can be saved as library files. By reading back a saved library file, you can reset all the editor parameters to the status they had when the file was saved. Saving in a library file is called “storing,” while bringing back the settings is called “recalling” them. Library files have the following file name extensions: “.cel” for component editors, “.ucl” for user control editors, and “.uml” for user module editors. [Store Library] Button [Recall Library] Button [Recall Library] Menu If you store library files in folders that conform to the following path, they will be automatically displayed in the component editor [Recall Library] menu: “C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME Designer\Editor\Library\Component Group Name\Component Name.” The dialog box used for storing items in the library opens with the library folder displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 275 Chapter 5 Components If you save like this without changing the folder, the item you saved will be displayed on the [Recall Library] menu. When a library is saved, it can be displayed in the component editor for other project files besides the currently open one, and also in new project files. NOTE If you change the [Contents Folder] in the “Preferences” dialog box in the Main Panel window, a “Library” folder will be created in the specified folder, and a folder for each component will be created there. NOTE In the “Save Library File” dialog box, you can specify another folder for saving library files, and save them there. Library files that are saved in another folder also can be recalled by specifying the folder. ■ Library Filenames Because the library filenames are displayed in the [Recall Library] menu, use a filename that helps you understand the contents of the parameter set in the file. When saving in the default folder, there is no need to include the component name in the filename. For example, when you are storing a parameter set in the stereo compressor library, the “Save Library File” dialog will be displayed with the “C:\Program Files\YAMAHA\OPT Tools\DME Designer\Editor\Library\Compressor\Compressor Stereo” folder selected. If you save in that folder, the file you save will be displayed only in the [Recall Library” menu for stereo compressor components only. It will not be displayed in any other library. If you use a filename that makes it easy to understand the parameter contents or the conditions under which they are used, you can select them without confusion when recalling. Storing in the Library The library is the place to store component editor parameters. ■ Editor Window 1 Set the parameters to be stored in the library. 2 Click the [Store Library] button in the component editor. The “Save Library File” dialog box will be displayed. 3 Enter the filename. Select a filename that makes it easy to understand the contents of the parameter set. 4 Specify the folder for saving the file. If you want the saved file displayed on the [Recall Library] menu, do not change the folder for saving. 5 Click the [Save] button. ■ Designer Window Right-click a component or user module in the Designer window to show the contextual menu. Use the [Store Component Library] command to store the library. The menu that appears when the contextual menu [Store Component Library] command is clicked is the same as the menu that appears when the Edit window [Store Library] button is clicked. Specify a file name and save the file. 276 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Recalling a Library The recall function reads stored parameters into the component editor. ■ Editor Windows You can recall libraries in the component editor, user control editor, and user module editor windows by clicking the [Recall Library] button. When a library is recalled in an editor window, the parameter set is recorded to the selected snap button. 1 Click the snap button ([A] through [D]) that will record the parameter set. 2 Click the [Recall Library] button in the component editor. The [Recall Library] menu will be displayed. 3 Click the library name (filename) in the [Recall Library] menu. The parameters in the library will be recalled. ■ Designer Window If you right-click on a component or user module in the design window, a context menu will be displayed. You can recall a library using the [Recall Component Library] command. If you click [Recall Component Library] in the context menu, the same menu is displayed as when you click the [Recall Library] button in the editor window. If you select a library that is displayed in the submenu, that library is recalled. Not only the library name, but also the effect type is displayed in the submenu that appears when you right-click on an SPX component. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 277 Chapter 5 Components ■ Recalling a Library Stored in a Folder Other Than the Default Libraries not stored in the default folder do not appear on the [Recall Library] menu. You must specify the file you want in order to recall it. 1 Click the [Recall Library] button in the component editor. The [Recall Library] menu will be displayed. 2 Click the [Recall Library] menu [Open File Dialog]. The “Open” dialog box will be displayed. 3 Move to the correct folder and select a library file. 4 Click the [Open] button. 278 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components User Control/User Module Editor User Control The user control function lets you lay out a set of component controls in the Configuration window or User Module window, and create a control window with them. The controls in the user control editor are linked to the controls for the original component. If the parameters are changed in the user control editor, the parameters will change in the same way in the component editor. If parameters are changed in the component editor, the controls in the user control window will also change in the same way. You can create a compact control window by only including controls for parameters that are used frequently. You can also lay out controls for multiple components, so that you can adjust parameters for them from a single window. Component Editor User Control Editor Laid Out Controls Controls Laid Out in the User Control Edit Palette There is also a [Library] button in the user control editor, which you can use to save parameters to the library. User controls are created by selecting [View] menu → [User Control] → [New User Control] in the Main Panel window. Created user controls are displayed in the [View] menu → [User Control] submenu. If you select one, a window will open for it. The controls which can be opened by the user control editor are automatically set according to the user security settings of the currently logged in user. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 279 Chapter 5 Components [User Control] Menu User controls are displayed in the [View] → [User Control] submenu of the Main Panel window. If you click the [User Control] button in the Main Panel window, you will display the same menu as the [View] menu → [User Control] submenu. User Control Name Displays a menu of user controls included in the current configuration of the current zone. Clicking one of the user controls opens the user control editor. A checkmark appears next to already open windows. New User Control When you select the “New User Control” command, the “User Control Manager” dialog box will be displayed. Here you can create, delete, rename, and otherwise manage user controls. For information about the “User Control Manager” dialog box, see page 70. 280 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Creating New User Controls New user controls are added in the “User Control Manager” dialog box. 1 Click [User Control Manager] on the Main Panel window [Tools] menu. The “User Control Manager” dialog box will be displayed. NOTE You can also display the “User Control Manager” dialog box by clicking the [View] menu → [User Control] → [New User Control] command. 2 Click the [New] button. The “New User Control” dialog box will be displayed. 3 Enter the name for the new user control into the [Name] box. 4 Sets security for User Control. Different settings are provided for individual security levels and users. Security cannot be set higher than the user security level. Click the [User Level] [▼] button to select a security level. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 281 Chapter 5 Components Use [User Name] to select a user. 5 Click the [OK] button. The user control will be created and displayed on the list in the “User Control Manager” dialog box. 6 Click the [OK] button in the “User Control Manager” dialog box. When a new user control is created, it will be displayed in the [View] menu → [User Control] submenu in the Main Panel window. If you click the control, it will be displayed in a user control editor window. [Snap] and [Library] appear appears in a new user control. 282 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components User Control Security Security can be set independently for each User Control. User Control levels higher than the user security level will not be displayed in the menu or the User Control Manager dialog box. The security level settings for both the user control and the user affect editing and display of user controls. ■ User Control Security Level Security 1 ~ 10 can be set for each level or user. Level 1 is the highest level and 10 is the lowest. If the security level for a user control is set to 2, only users at level 1 or level 2 can display or edit it Security levels for user controls can be changed in the “User Control Manager” dialog box by a user who has logged on at a security level equal to or higher than the user control. 1 Click [User Control Manager] on the Main Panel window [Tools] menu. The “User Control Manager” dialog box will be displayed. 2 Changing User Control Security • To Change the Security level Click the [Security Level] box of the User Control to be changed. The security level list will appear. NOTE The levels displayed on the list will differ according to the security level of the user. Click the level to be set for the User Control. The selected level will be displayed in the [Security Level] box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 283 Chapter 5 Components • Setting Security for Individual Users Click the [User] box of the User Control to be changed. The user list will appear. NOTE The users that can be selected will depend on the user security level. Click the user to be set for the User Control. The selected user name will be displayed in the [User] box. 3 Click the [OK] button. ■ User Security Settings In the “Security” dialog box in the Main Panel window, you can set the user control levels at which to allow or disallow editing and display. A user can edit user controls if a check has been placed for that user in the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox. User controls at a level equal to or lower than the level set in [Operation Security] → [User Control Level] will be displayed in the menu. Using user security, you can set whether user controls will open at logon or when a file is opened. If [Startup User Control] is turned ON, the user control editor will be automatically displayed when files that include user controls are opened. For information about the “Security” dialog box, see “Security (Creating Users and Making User Settings)” on page 55. 284 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components User Module Editor The user module editor lets you make a layout of controls for components arranged in the user module window. For each user module there is one user module editor. The name of the user module is displayed in the title bar. Only components that are arranged in a particular user module can be laid out in the specific control window that is associated with that user module. Both the user module and the control window will have the same name. NOTE You can copy controls from a user module to the user control editor. Component Editor User Module Editor Laid Out Controls Controls Laid Out in the User Control Status Bar Edit Palette ■ Opening a User Module Editor Window Use [Double Click Action] in the “User Module Manager” dialog box or “User Module Properties” dialog box to set the window that will open when you double-click in the Configuration window. If the [Open User Module Editor] checkbox has been turned ON for a user module, a user module editor can be opened for it. For information about the “User Module Manager” dialog box, see page 250. For information about the “User Module Properties” dialog box, see page 181. A User Module can also be opened via the User Module contextual menu in the Designer window. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 285 Chapter 5 Components Operation Mode and Design Mode There are two modes for the user control editor/user module editor and the component editor: “operation mode” and “design mode.” In operation mode you adjust parameters, while in design mode you lay out controls. You can switch between operation mode and design mode using the context menu that is displayed when you right-click in the user control editor/user module editor or component editor. Switches between operation mode and design mode The [Design Mode] command switches the design mode between ON and OFF. A checkmark appears when the design mode is turned ON. If you click in the context menu when the checkmark is present, design mode will turn OFF, and the edit window will return to operation mode. NOTE Only users for whom the [Operation Security] → [Edit] checkbox in the “Security” dialog box has been checked can turn the design mode ON. NOTE You can select controls in the component editor so that you can copy them into the user control editor/user module editor. When you want to select multiple objects, hold down the <Ctrl> key as you click each new object you want to select. 286 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Status Bar The lock icon will appear in the User Module when security is active. → User Module properties (page 181). → User Module (page 250). The lock icon will appear locked when the password has not been entered, and layouts edited in the Design Mode cannot be saved. When the password is entered it becomes temporarily possible to save the layout. The lock icon will not appear if the [Enable Security] checkbox in the “Properties” dialog box is not checked. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 287 Chapter 5 Components Edit Palette The edit palette is automatically displayed whenever the user control editor/user module editor is active in design mode. Whenever you move the user control editor/user module editor, the edit palette moves together with it. When you turn OFF design mode, the palette disappears. Commands for editing in the user control editor/user module editor are provided on the edit palette. [Design Mode Off] Button [Undo] Button [Redo] Button Control Alignment [Paste] Button [Copy] Button [Cut] Button ■ [Design Mode Off] Button Turns OFF the design mode. ■ [Undo] Button/[Redo] Button Used to undo/redo operations. ■ [Cut] Button/[Copy] Button Cuts or copies the selected controls. → See “Cut/Copy/Paste Controls” on page 303. ■ [Paste] Button Pastes cut or copied controls. → See “Cut/Copy/Paste Controls” on page 303. 288 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Grid Setting Chapter 5 Components ■ Alignment of Controls Aligns the positions of multiple controls. [Picture] Button [Align Left] Button [Align Right] Button [Align To Top] Button [Align To Bottom] Button [TEXT] Button [Box] Button [Ellipse] Button [Frame] Button [Vertical/Center Align] Button [Horizontal/Center Align] Button [Align Vertically] Button [Align Horizontally] Button [Align Left] Button Aligns all selected controls with the left edge of the leftmost selected control. [Align Right] Button Aligns all selected controls with the right edge of the rightmost selected control. [Align To Top] Button Aligns all selected controls with the top edge of the uppermost selected control. [Align To Bottom] Button Aligns all selected controls with the bottom edge of the lowermost selected control. [Align Horizontally] Button This button can be used only when three or more controls are selected. It arranges the controls in a uniform horizontal line. Without changing the position of the leftmost and rightmost control, this button arranges the controls between them at uniform intervals. It puts the same amount of space between each control and its neighbor. [Align Vertically] Button This button can be used only when three or more controls are selected. It arranges the controls in a uniform vertical line. Without changing the position of the uppermost and lowermost control, this button arranges the controls between them at uniform intervals. It puts the same amount of space between each control and its neighbor. [Horizontal/Center Align] Button Aligns the selected controls horizontally with the center position. [Vertical/Center Align] Button Aligns the selected controls vertically with the center position. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 289 Chapter 5 Components ■ [Picture] Button Places a graphic file. ■ [TEXT] Button Places a text box. ■ [Box] Button Places a square. ■ [Ellipse] Button Places an ellipse. ■ [Frame] Button Places a frame. ■ Grid Setting When arranging controls, you can align them along the grid. This menu sets the spacing of the grid. Grid=10 Grid=20 Clicking the [▼] button displays a menu. Click the menu to set the grid spacing. Select [OFF] to turn OFF the grid. NOTE When the grid is turned ON (when any grid item besides OFF is selected), clicking any control that is not aligned with the grid position, will cause it to align with the nearest grid. Please note that after copying multiple controls in one operation from the component editor and adjusting their positions manually, their positions could become disarranged when you select them by clicking on them, if they do not already align with the grid interval. Furthermore, if you change the grid spacing after aligning the positions of controls in the user control editor/user module editor, the controls will be placed into positions that do not align with the grid even if they are arranged using the align buttons. When there are controls that do not align with the grid, turn the grid OFF. 290 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components User Control Editor/User Module Editor Context Menu The context menus that appear when you right-click in a window will differ in operation mode and in design mode. In design mode, other commands will be added, depending on where you click. The context menu for the user module editor contains the [Set User Module As Master Layout] command. ■ Operation Mode Commands that are displayed in the context menus for operation mode will also be displayed in design mode. [Design Mode] Switches between design mode and operation mode. When you are in design mode, a checkmark will appear to the left of the command name. [Peak Hold] Turns the peak hold meter ON or OFF and performs a reset. The ON or OFF setting for peak hold applies to the whole zone. • [On] When you select this, peak hold is turned ON, and a checkmark appears next to it. If you select this item while it is checked, peak hold is turned OFF. • [Reset] Resets peak hold. NOTE Peak hold is a function that makes it easy to see the maximum signal value by lighting up at the level of the maximum value as the signal peak comes in. [Close All Editor Windows] Closes all component editor windows. [Open Parameter Link] Opens the “Parameter Link” window. For information about the Parameter Link window, see “Parameter Link” (page 73). DME Designer Owner’s Manual 291 Chapter 5 Components [Parameter Link Mode] A checkmark appears when this is turned ON. Turning this ON changes to parameter link mode, where group parameters can be linked. When this is turned OFF, group parameters will not be linked, and they can be changed individually. Turn this OFF when editing the offset for each parameter. Parameter link mode is linked to the [Parameter Link] check box in the Parameter Link window. [Set User Module As Master Layout] (User Module Editor Only) Sets the layout of active user module editor as the master layout. The window size and the background will be applied to user module editors created in the future. ■ The Context Menu Displayed in Design Mode When You Right-Click an Empty Location [Tab Order] When using user control editors or user module editors, this function displays the order in which you move through them by pressing the <Tab> key. When you select this command, numbers are displayed next to the edit boxes. A checkmark appears next to [Tab Order] in the context menu. To exit tab order settings, click [Tab Order] the context menu or click anywhere besides a tab order number in the user control editor. Clicking the displayed numbers changes the order. The numbers are changed in the order that they are clicked. To exit tab order settings, click [Tab Order] the context menu or click anywhere besides a tab order number in the user control editor. → See “Changing the Tab Order” on page 313. [Set Background Image] Sets a background image for a window. Clicking here displays the “Background Image” dialog box. → See “Setting Background Images for Windows” on page 295. 292 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components ■ The Context Menu Displayed in Design Mode When You Right-Click a Control [Open Original Component Editor] This menu is displayed when you right-click a control in design mode. It opens the component editor for the control you clicked. [Add Parameter to Parameter Link] Adds a control to the parameter link group. Click the group name displayed in the submenu. See “Creating Parameter Links” (page 314). If you click a parameter link group name, a control is added to that group. [Property] Opens the properties dialog box for the control. → See “Control Properties” on page 303. NOTE There some controls, such as edit boxes and sliders, that do not display the [Property] command. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 293 Chapter 5 Components Changing the Window Size In design mode, you can change the window size of the user control editor. If you align the mouse pointer with a side or corner of the window, its shape will change into a double-headed arrow. When the arrow is shaped like this, dragging it will change the size of the window. Even if you change the width of the window, the library button will remain where it is, in the upper right corner. 294 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Setting Background Images for Windows The default color for the user control editor/user module editor window background is black, the same as for the component editor window. However, you can change the color or display an image in the background. These settings are made in the “Background Image” dialog box. To display this dialog box, right-click in the user control editor window while in design mode, then click [Set Background Image] on the displayed context menu. ■ [Default] Sets the background color to black, the same as the component editor. Select this if you have set the background with [Color] or [Image], and you want to return to the original background. ■ [Color] Sets the color of the background. Use the [Select Color] button to select a color. [Select Color] Button Clicking here displays the “Select color” dialog box. This sets the color of the background. For information about the “Select color” dialog box, see page 203. NOTE If you select a light color, it may be difficult to see the grid. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 295 Chapter 5 Components ■ [Image] Displays an image for the background. You can use image files in the following formats: BMP (.bmp), PNG (.png), XPM (.xpm), and JPEG (.jpg). Use the [Select Image] button to select an image file. [Select Image] Button Clicking here displays the “Select Image” dialog box. Here you can select an image file to be displayed as the window background. [Layout] Box This box displays a list where you can select how the image file will be displayed. • [Center] Centers the image in the window. • [Tile] Displays multiple copies of the image side-by-side until the available space is filled. If the image file is smaller than the window, it will be displayed repeatedly like tiles on a wall. • [Fit] Expands or reduces the size of the image to match the size of the window where it will be displayed. [File] Box Specifies a path for the image file. Click the [Select Image] button and select an image file. The path will be automatically entered. 296 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Placing Controls Controls can be placed when you are in the design mode. You can turn the design mode ON and OFF by right-clicking in the user control editor/user module editor, or component editor, then clicking the [Design Mode] command in the context menu that is displayed. You can place controls by dragging them from the component editor or by using the copy and paste commands. Knob Edit Box Slider Buttons Text Solid Frame Graph [Library] Edit Palette ■ Selecting Controls If you click a control in the component editor while in design mode, the control will be selected and a red frame will be displayed around it. Controls like knobs, sliders, edit boxes, and labels are all separate objects. Only the item clicked will be selected. If you hold down the <Ctrl> key while clicking, you can select multiple controls and labels. If you use <Ctrl> + click on a selected control, it will cancel that control’s selection. If you position the mouse in an empty location on the sheet and start dragging from there, a frame will be displayed as the pointer moves. All controls enclosed by that frame will be selected. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 297 Chapter 5 Components NOTE If you drag controls like knobs and sliders, edit boxes and labels that show parameter types, and place them one-by-one in the user control editor, they must be arranged in the user control editor. If you select multiple items and drag them, you can copy them as a group into the user control editor, keeping their original arrangement. When copying multiple controls from a single component editor, if you select all the controls you want copy and drag them together as a unit, their original positional relationship and tab order will be maintained. ■ Placing Controls by Dragging Them (User Control Editor) You can drag the controls you want to copy from the component editor to the user control editor. 1 Open the component edit window that has the controls you will be placing in the user control box. 2 Open the user control editor. User control names are displayed in the [View] → [User Control] submenu in the Main Panel window Click a user control name to open its window. 3 Right-click in the component editor or the user control editor. The context menu will be displayed. 4 Click [Design Mode] on the menu. Design mode will be turned ON. 5 Drag the controls from the component editor to the user control editor. 298 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Arrange the controls in the user control editor. ■ Placing Controls by Dragging Them (User Module Editor) You can drag the controls you want to copy from the component editor window in the user module to the user module editor. 1 Create a user module, then arrange and connect the components for it. 2 Store the user module by checking [Double Click Action] ➞ [Open User Module Editor] in the Store dialog box (see “Saving User Modules” on page 255 for details about storing user modules). 3 Double-click a user module in the Configuration window. The user module editor and edit windows for the components arranged in the user module will be displayed. 4 Right-click in the component editor or user module editor, then click the [Design Mode] command in the context menu. Design mode will be turned ON. 5 Drag the controls from the component editor to the user module editor. Arrange the controls in the user control editor. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 299 Chapter 5 Components ■ Placing Controls Using Copy and Paste Copy the controls in the component editor and paste in the user control editor or user module editor. To copy controls in the component editor, press the [Copy] command shortcut keys, <Ctrl> + <C>. To paste in the user control editor or user module editor, press the [Paste] command shortcut key, <Ctrl> + <V>, or the [Paste] button on the edit palette. 1 Click on the source component editor window to make it active, then select the control or controls you want to copy. 2 Press the <C> key while holding down the <Ctrl> key. The selected controls will be copied to the clipboard. 3 With the target user control editor or user module editor active, press the <V> key while holding down the <Ctrl> key. You can also paste by clicking the [Paste] button on the edit palette. The controls will be copied. 300 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components ■ When You Cannot Copy Regardless of whether you drag or use copy and paste, you cannot create multiple copies from the same single component. If you drag controls that are already copied into the user control editor or user module editor, the mouse pointer will change into the “unavailable” mark (a circle with a diagonal slash), indicating that you cannot copy. You can copy more than one component of the same type into the user control editor, as long as they come from different components located in the configuration or user module. Controls for components arranged in the configuration can be copied only to the user control editor. Controls for components arranged in a user module can be copied to both the user control editor and the user module. ■ Order of Controls Controls newly pasted in the user control editor will be displayed above any previously pasted controls they overlap. The tab order for edit boxes will be the order in which they were pasted. Because the order cannot be changed, paste solid frames with parameter groups arranged on them before copying controls. NOTE In the component editor, you can select multiple controls using <Ctrl> + click or by dragging. Once controls are copied, they will be pasted in the order in which they were copied. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 301 Chapter 5 Components Moving and Aligning Controls In the user control editor or user module editor, you can move or align copied controls. ■ Selecting Controls In the user control editor or user module editor, controls are selected in the same way as in the component editor. Click a control to select it, or press <Ctrl> + click to select multiple controls. If you use <Ctrl> + click on a selected control, it will cancel that control's selection. If you position the mouse in an empty location in the user control editor or user module editor and start dragging from there, a frame will be displayed as the pointer moves. All controls enclosed by that frame will be selected. A red frame will be drawn around the selected controls. ■ Moving Controls Move selected controls by dragging them or by pressing the arrow keys on your keyboard. When you select multiple controls using <Shift> + click, you can move all of them at the same time. Dragging When grid is ON, the upper left of the dragged controls will automatically align with the grid. When dragging, the coordinates displayed here refer to the upper left corner of the object being dragged. The “Distance to Right” and “Distance to Bottom” are displayed in pixel units, using the upper-left of the window as a reference point. When multiple controls are selected and dragged, the coordinates are those of the upper-left corner of the control where the mouse is aligned. Arrow Keys When the grid is ON, the arrow keys move controls a grid unit at a time. When the grid is OFF, controls are moved one pixel at a time. ■ Alignment You can align controls using the following alignment buttons on the edit palette: [Align Left], [Align Right], [Align To Top], [Align To Bottom], [Align Horizontally], [Align Vertically], [Horizontal/Center Align], and [Vertical/Center Align]. You can only use the [Align Horizontally] or [Align Vertically] buttons when three or more controls are selected. 302 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Cut/Copy/Paste Controls You can edit controls arranged in the user control editor or user module editor using the [Cut], [Copy], and [Paste] commands in the edit palette. ■ Cut Cuts controls arranged in the user control editor. Select one or more controls, then press the [Cut] button on the edit palette ■ Copy Copies controls arranged in the user control editor or user module editor. Select one or more controls, then press the [Copy] button on the edit palette. ■ Paste Pastes cut or copied controls. Click the [Paste] button on the edit palette. If you cannot paste, the button color turns pale. ■ Delete Controls can be deleted by selecting them and pressing the <Delete> key. Undo and Redo Commands During Editing You can undo or redo control movements, size changes, or deletions using the [Undo] and [Redo] commands in the [Edit] menu. NOTE If you close an editor window, you will no longer be able to undo and redo operations performed there. Control Properties A properties dialog box will open when you either double click a controller in the User Control Editor or User Module Editor, or right-click the controller and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can specify a design for the controller. Multiple properties of the same type can be set at the same time by clicking the controllers while holding the <Ctrl> key and then opening the properties dialog box. Edited items are shown in bold text until you either click [OK] or [Cancel]. NOTE Sliders have no property settings. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 303 Chapter 5 Components ■ “Knob Properties” Dialog Box When you right-click on a knob, then select [Properties] from the context menu, the “Knob Properties” dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box sets the size of the knob. [Size] Displays a list where you can select the knob size. Select [Large], [Medium], [Small], or [Very Small]. NOTE You can change the size of a knob by dragging one of the marks at the four corners (top, bottom, left, right) of the knob in the user control editor. [Color] Select a color from the list: [White], [Red], [Yellow], [Green], [Blue], or [Violet]. ■ “Toggle Button Properties” Dialog Box The Toggle Button Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click the ON/OFF button or right-click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. This sets the text displayed by the button, along with the color of the button. [Text] box Enter the text to be displayed by the button. You can set different text for when the button is ON and for when it is OFF. [Size] Select a button size from the list: [Small (37x11)], [Small (51x11], [Medium (74x11)], [Medium (74x22)], or [Large (111x33)]. 304 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components [Color] Displays a list where you can select the color of the button. If you click the [▼], a list of button colors will be displayed. [Text Font] Button Sets the font, size and style. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. ■ “Radio Button Properties” Dialog Box The Radio Button Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click a radio button or right-click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. You can set the button's color, size, and font. [Color] Select a color from the list: [White], [Red], [Yellow], [Green], [Blue], or [Violet]. [Size] Select a button size from the list: [Small (37x11)], [Small (44x11], [Medium (75x11)], [Medium (74x22)], or [Large (111x33)]. [Text] Box Enter the text to be displayed by the button. [Text Font] Button Sets the font, size and style. Clicking here displays the “Select Font” dialog box. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 202. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 305 Chapter 5 Components ■ “Text Properties” Dialog Box The Text Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click a parameter name or other text, or right-click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can enter the text to be displayed. [Text] Box Enter the text to be displayed by the button. [Text Font] button Click this button to display the “Select Font” dialog box. Sets the font, font size, and style. For information about the “Select Font” dialog box, see page 203. [Alignment] Specifies the horizontal alignment of the text: [Left], [Center], or [Right]. [Rotate] Rotates the text by the specified angle: [-90], [0], [90], or [180]. [Link Component Editor] Specifies the component editor to be opened when text is clicked. [Text Color] Button Click this button to display the “Select Color” dialog box. Sets the color of the text. For information about the “Select Color” dialog box, see page 203. 306 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components ■ Edit Box Properties The Edit Box Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click an edit box or rightclick it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can set the edit box size. [Size] Select an edit box size from the list: [Large], [Medium], or [Small]. ■ Level Meter Properties The Level Meter Properties dialog box will appear when you either double click a level meter or right-click it and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can specify the number of meter segments and scale. [Segment] Select a number of meter segments from the list: [2], [6], or [60]. [Scale] Select the type of scale to be displayed beside the meter from the list. This option is only available when [Segment] is set to 60. ■ “Solid Frame Properties” Dialog Box The Solid Frame Properties dialog box will appear when you right-click a solid frame and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can enter the text to be displayed. Here you can set the frame size and divider location. Partition Line Sub-Partition Line Frame Size The width is set using the [Width] and the height is set using [Height]. The units are pixels. NOTE You can change the size of a frame by dragging one of the marks at the four corners (top, bottom, left, right) of the frame in the user control editor. Partition Line/Sub-Partition Line Sets partition lines within the frame. [Partition Line] is a long partition line displayed from end to end, and [Sub-Partition Line] is a short partition line. • [Direction] Select the direction of a partition line from the list. [Vertical] inserts a vertical partition line and [Horizontal] inserts a horizontal partition line. When [None] is select, partition lines are not displayed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 307 Chapter 5 Components • [Position] Displays the currently set line position. Displays the number of pixels from the top of the solid frame when [Vertical] is selected for the [Direction], and the number of pixels from the left of the solid frame when [Horizontal] is selected. NOTE You can change the position of a partition line by dragging one of the marks on the line in the user control editor. • [Add] Button If you set the position of the partition line in the box on the right and click the [Add] button, the partition line will be added and displayed in the [Position] list. • [Delete] Button Deletes the partition line selected in the [Position] list. ■ “Color Frame Properties” Dialog Box The Color Frame Properties dialog box will appear when you right-click a solid frame and select [Properties] from the contextual menu. Here you can enter the text to be displayed. Here you can set the frame size and divider location. Frame Size The width is set using the [Width] and the height is set using [Height]. The units are pixels and the minimum value is 3. NOTE You can change the size of a frame by dragging one of the marks at the four corners (top, bottom, left, right) of the frame in the user control editor. Frame Color Sets the color of the color frame. Click this button to display the “Select color” dialog box. For information about the “Select color” dialog box, see page 203. Fill Color Sets the frame fill color. Click the [Select Color] button to display the “Select color” dialog box. Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box in the Object section on page 203 for information on this dialog box. Line Width Sets the thickness of the lines at [Top]/[Left]/[Right]/[Bottom]. Set “0” to display no lines. 308 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components ■ User Picture Properties Dialog Box Right-click the image and select [Properties] from the contextual menu to display the User Picture Properties dialog box. [File Path] Box Displays the path to the graphic file. [Select File] Button Selects a graphic file. Size • [Width] Specifies the width in pixels. • [Height] Specifies the height in pixels. • [Reset] Button Click to display the graphic at it's original size. • [Stretch] When ON, the graphic will be enlarged when a size that is bigger than it's original size is specified. [Link Component Editor] When ON, clicking the [Select Component] button selects the editor that is opened when the graphic is clicked. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 309 Chapter 5 Components ■ Text Properties Dialog Box Right-click the text box and select [Properties] from the contextual menu to display the Text Properties dialog box. [Text] Box Displays and edits the text to be displayed. [Text Font] Selects the font. Click to display the Select Font dialog box. Refer to “Select Font” Dialog Box on page 202 for more information on the Select Font dialog box. [Text Color] Button Sets the text color. Click to display the Select Color dialog box. [Alignment] Selects [Left], [Center], or [Right] text alignment. [Rotate] Rotates the text box. [Link Component Editor] When ON, clicking the [Select Component] button selects the editor that is opened when the text box is clicked. 310 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components ■ Box Properties Dialog Box Right-click the box and select [Properties] from the contextual menu to display the Box Properties dialog box. Box Size • [Width] Specifies the width in pixels. • [Height] Specifies the height in pixels. Box Style • [Style] Sets the style of the object. Select [Plain], [Raised], or [Sunken] from the list. • [Round Corner] Turn ON to produce a round-cornered box. Use [Curve] to select the degree of roundness. Line • [Type] Select a type of frame line from the list: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [Dash Dot]. Or [Dash Dot Dot]. • [Size] Sets the thickness of the frame line in pixels. The range is from 1 to 100. • [Select Color] Button Sets the color of the frame line. Click to display the “Select color” dialog box. Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box on page 203 for more information on the Select Color dialog box. Fill Color • [Select Color] Button Sets the frame fill color. Click to display the “Select color” dialog box. Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box on page 203 for more information on the Select Color dialog box. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 311 Chapter 5 Components ■ Ellipse Properties Dialog Box Right-click the ellipse and select [Properties] from the contextual menu to display the Ellipse Properties dialog box. Ellipse Size • [Width] Specifies the width in pixels. • [Height] Specifies the height in pixels. Line • [Type] Select a type of frame line from the list: [Solid], [Dash], [Dot], [Dash Dot]. Or [Dash Dot Dot]. • [Size] Sets the thickness of the frame line in pixels. The range is from 1 to 100. • [Select Color] Button Sets the color of the frame line. Click to display the “Select color” dialog box. Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box on page 203 for more information on the Select color dialog box. Fill Color Sets the ellipse fill color when ON. • [Select Color] Button Sets the ellipse fill color. Click to display the “Select color” dialog box. Refer to “Select Color” Dialog Box on page 203 for more information on the Select color dialog box. 312 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Changing the Tab Order The tab order for controls is determined by the order in which they were pasted into the user control editor or user module editor. If you right-click the user control editor or user module editor, you can check or change the tab order using the [Tab Order] command on the context menu. If you select the [Tab Order] command, tab order numbers will be displayed at the upper-left of each edit box. Clicking the displayed numbers changes the order. 1 Right-click in the user control editor or user module editor. The context menu will be displayed. 2 Click [Tab Order] in the context menu. Numbers for the current tab order are displayed to the upper-left of each edit box. 3 Click the tab order numbers in the order in which you want to set the tab order. Even if you do not want to change tab order number 1, click all the numbers in the order you desire, starting from number 1. When you click on each number, it will change to the number that reflects the order in which it was clicked. 4 Once you have finished specifying the order, click somewhere within the window where there is no tab number. The tab order numbers will disappear. The changed tab order will apply the next time DME Designer is started. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 313 Chapter 5 Components Creating Parameter Links You can group controls (parameters) and link their parameters. You can create parameter link groups and add controls to them in the component editor. Parameter link settings are made in the Parameter Link window. For information about parameter links and the Parameter Link window, see “Parameter Link” (page 73). NOTE A parameter can belong to one group only. Furthermore, only parameters of the same type can be grouped. ■ Creating Parameter Links If you right-click on a control, a context menu will be displayed. The [Global Link] → [Add Group] and [Local Link] → [Add Group] commands create new groups. Controls can be added by right-clicking. ■ Adding Controls to a Group If you right-click a control in the component editor, a context menu will be displayed. You can create groups or add controls using commands in the [Add Parameter to Parameter Link] submenu. Groups that do not have the same type of parameters will be grayed out and cannot be selected. Global Link The group names for global link groups are displayed in the [Global Link] submenu. When you click a group name, a control is added to the group. 314 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Components Local Link The group names for local like groups are displayed in the [Local Link] submenu. When you click a group name, a control is added to the group. ■ Adding Multiple Controls You can select multiple controls in Design Mode. When multiple controls are selected, multiple parameters can be added to a group simultaneously. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 315 Chapter 6 Component Guide Crossover Separates input signals into multiple frequency channels and outputs them. The following five types of components are available in the Crossover group: 2 Way, 3 Way, 4 Way, 5 Way, and 6 Way. Crossover components have a single input and multiple outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Crossover component 1 3 2 5 7 ) ! 6 4 @ 8 9 Name 1 Crossover Curve Section Displays the level of each frequency band, distinguished by color. Parameter Setting Range Function 2 Input Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. 3 Output Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each frequency band. 4 Mute ON/OFF Mutes the output signal level for each frequency band. 5 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for each frequency band. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cross frequency between each frequency band. 6 316 Function Frequency DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide 7 Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 8 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency. 9 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. ! Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. @ Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. ) LPF HPF The number of output channels varies according to the component variation. 2 Way Low/High 3 Way Low/Mid/High 4 Way Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High 5 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High 6 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/Mid/High-Mid/High Set the attenuation curve for the lowest band and the middle bands with the Low Pass Filter (LPF) and High Pass Filter (HPF), and the highest band with HPF. Each frequency band has its own color, with Low being red, Mid being green, and so on. These correspond to the colors of the lines on the graph. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 317 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Graphic Control Points The graph control points show [Output Level] and [Frequency]. As you modify the parameters using the knobs and edit boxes, the control points move. Also, as you drag the points, the [Output Level] and [Frequency] parameters reflect the changes you make. You can adjust the [Output Level] parameter by vertically dragging the control point in the center of each curve. Changing the [Output Level] Parameter You can adjust the [Frequency] parameter by horizontally dragging the control point at the intersection of the curves for each frequency band. Changing the [Frequency] Parameter 318 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ LFP/HPF [Type] sets the attenuation slope and the filter type for the LPF and HPF. The selected items are displayed on the buttons. Clicking these buttons displays a menu. Combinations of six slope types and four filter types are available. [6dB/Oct], [12dB/Oct], [18dB/Oct], [24dB/Oct], [36dB/Oct], and [48dB/Oct] set the attenuation per octave. A low value produces gentle attenuation. A large value produces sudden attenuation. Type • THRU No filter is applied. There is no attenuation, which produces a level line at all frequencies. • AdjustGc (Adjustable Gc) With this setting, you can adjust Gc (gain on the cutoff frequency) between -6 dB and +6 dB. If you set -3 dB it becomes a Butterworth filter. If you set -6 dB, it becomes Linkwitz-Riley filter. When you select Adjustable Gc, the Gc knob is displayed. • Butrwrth (Butterworth) This filter has the most general characteristics. The pass band is flat and the gain for the cutoff frequency is -3 dB. • Bessel For curves where phase characteristics are important, Bessel has gentler attenuation than Butterworth, and there is little distortion of the waveform when square waves are passed through. • Linkwitz (Linkwitz-Riley) As second-order filters, the sum of the output voltages for LPF and HPF have a gain of 0 dB across the entire band. The pass band is flat, but the cutoff frequency gain is -6 dB. Butterworth Linkwitz-Riley Bessel DME Designer Owner’s Manual 319 Chapter 6 Component Guide Crossover Processor A crossover processor consists of a crossover, delay, parametric equalizer, and compressor. After the input signal is processed by the crossover, effects of the delay, parametric equalizer, and compressor are applied to each frequency band. The following two types are available in the Crossover Processor group: Crossover Processor and Crossover Processor II. Crossover Processor The following five types of components are available in the Crossover Processor group: 2 Way, 3 Way, 4 Way, 5 Way, and 6 Way. Crossover processors have a single input and 2 to 6 outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Band numbers may vary depending on the component, but they share a common configuration in the component editor. If you click the [Crossover], [Compressor], [PEQ], or [Delay] button in the [Navigator] section, an editor for the crossover, compressor, parametric equalizer, or delay will be displayed in a separate window. A separate component editor will open for each output channel (such as Low or Mid) when you click on the compressor, parametric equalizer, or delay. Component editor for Crossover Processor 2 3 4 1 6 5 7 8 Section 1 320 Navigator Parameter Setting Range Function Crossover -- This opens the crossover editor window. 2 Delay -- This opens the delay editor window. 3 PEQ -- This opens the parametric equalizer editor window. 4 Compressor -- This opens the compressor editor window. 5 Input Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. 6 Output Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each frequency band. 7 Mute ON/OFF Mutes the signal for each frequency band. 8 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for each frequency band. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide The output number varies according to the component variation. 2 Way Low/High 3 Way Low/Mid/High 4 Way Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High 5 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High 6 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/Mid/High-Mid/High Set the attenuation curve for the lowest band and the middle bands with the Low Pass Filter (LPF) and High Pass Filter (HPF), and the highest band with HPF. Each frequency band has its own color, with Low being red, Mid being green, and so on. These correspond to the colors of the lines on the graph. ■ Crossover When you click the [Crossover] button for the crossover processor, it opens the crossover editor window. [Crossover Processor-Crossover] editor window 1 2 6 7 3 8 4 5 Name 1 Crossover Curve Section 2 Function Frequency Displays the level of each frequency channel, distinguished by color. Parameter Frequency Setting Range 20 Hz to 20 kHz Function Sets the cross frequency between each frequency band. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 321 Chapter 6 Component Guide 3 Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 4 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency. 5 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 7 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. 8 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. 6 322 LPF HPF DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Delay When you click the [Delay] button for the crossover processor, it opens the delay editor window. Here you can set the delay for each frequency band. [Crossover Processor - Delay] editor window 1 2 5 3 4 Parameter Setting Range Function 1 Delay Sets the delay time. ms: 0 to 500 Sample: the range depends on the Fs value. Meter: 0 to 171.8 Feet: 0 to 563.6 Frame: the range depends on the Frame value. Beat: the range depends on the Beat value. 2 Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel 3 On ON/OFF Turns delay ON. 4 Mute ON/OFF Mutes the signal for each frequency band. 5 Delay Scale ms Sample Meter Feet Frame Beat Selects the units for setting the delay time. The selected button will light up, and the units in the [Delay] edit box will change. If [Beat] is selected, use the knob to set the BPM (beats/minute). DME Designer Owner’s Manual 323 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Parametric Equalizer When you click [PEQ] button for the crossover processor, it opens the parametric equalizer editor window. Here you can make parametric equalizer settings for each frequency band. [Crossover Processor-PEQ] editor window 1 2 7 3 4 5 6 Name 1 PEQ Curve Parameter 324 Function Displays the PEQ curve. Setting Range Function 2 Type PEQ L.SHELF 6 dB/Oct L.SHELF 12 dB/Oct H.SHELF 6 dB/Oct H.SHELF 12 dB/Oct HPF LPF Select the filter type from a menu. 3 Q: 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the frequency band width for each band. 4 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency for each band. 5 Gain -18 dB to +18 dB Sets the gain for each band. 6 Bypass ON/OFF Turns ON bypass for each band. 7 PEQ On ON/OFF Turns the PEQ ON. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Compressor When you click the [Compressor] button for the crossover processor, it opens the compressor editor window. Here you can make compressor settings for each frequency band. [Crossover Processor-Compressor] editor window 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 ) Name Function 1 Compressor Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio. 6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way compression is applied. 7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. 8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the release time. The setting range may very, depending on the operating frequency. 9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain. ) On ON/OFF Turns the compressor ON. When you turn this button OFF, the compressor is bypassed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 325 Chapter 6 Component Guide Crossover Processor II The following five types of components are available in the Crossover Processor II group: 2 Way, 3 Way, 4 Way, 5 Way, and 6 Way. Crossover processor II components have a single input and 2 to 6 outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of bands may vary depending on the component, but they share a common configuration in the component editor. There are input and output level meters in the upper part of the window. If you click the [Crossover], [Delay], [PEQ], or [Compressor] button in the [Navigator] section, an editor for the crossover, delay, parametric equalizer, or compressor will be displayed in a separate window. A separate component editor will open for each output channel (such as Low or Mid) when you click on the delay, parametric equalizer, or compressor. Crossover Processor II 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 Name 6 ) Function 1 Input Meter Displays the input signal level. 2 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Section 3 Input 4 5 Output 6 326 5 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Parameter Setting Range Function Gain -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Mute ON/OFF Mutes the input signal. Gain -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each frequency band. Mute ON/OFF Mutes the output signal for each frequency band. Chapter 6 Component Guide Name 7 Navigator Function Crossover -- This opens the crossover editor window. 8 Delay -- This opens the delay editor window. 9 PEQ -- This opens the parametric equalizer editor window. ) Compressor -- This opens the compressor editor window. ■ Crossover When you click the [Crossover] button for the crossover processor, it opens the crossover editor window. Crossover Processor II component editor 1 2 3 4 8 5 9 ) 6 7 Name 1 Function Crossover Curve Section Displays the level of each frequency band, distinguished by color. Parameter Setting Range Function 2 Frequency Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cross frequency between each frequency band. 3 Polarity Polarity Normal/Inverted Reverses the output signal phase for each frequency band. 4 Mute Mute ON/OFF Mutes the signal for each frequency band. This is linked to the Mute setting in the original window. The display appears as a dotted line when muted. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 327 Chapter 6 Component Guide 5 Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 6 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency. 7 Gc -6 dB to 6 dB When [Adjustable Gc] is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 9 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. ) Gc -6 dB to 6 dB When [Adjustable Gc] is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. 8 328 LPF HPF DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Delay When you click the [Delay] button for the crossover processor, it opens the delay editor window. Here you can set the delay for each frequency band. 1 4 2 3 Parameter Setting Range Function 1 Delay Sets the delay time. ms: 0 to 500 Sample: the range depends on the Fs value. Meter: 0 to 171.8 Feet: 0 to 563.6 Frame: the range depends on the Frame value. Beat: the range depends on the Beat value. 2 Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel. 3 On ON/OFF Turns delay ON. 4 Delay Scale ms Sample Meter Feet Frame Beat Selects the units for setting the delay time. The selected button will light up, and the units in the [Delay] edit box will change. If [Beat] is selected, use the knob to set the BPM (beats/minute). DME Designer Owner’s Manual 329 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Parametric Equalizer When you click the [PEQ] button for the crossover processor, it opens the parametric equalizer editor window. Here you can make parametric equalizer settings for each frequency band. 1 2 7 3 4 5 6 Name 1 PEQ Curve Parameter 330 Function Displays the PEQ curve. Setting Range Function 2 Type PEQ L.SHELF 6 dB/Oct L.SHELF 12 dB/Oct H.SHELF 6 dB/Oct H.SHELF 12 dB/Oct HPF LPF Select the filter type from the menu. 3 Q 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the band width of each band. 4 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency of each band. 5 Gain -18 dB to +18 dB Sets the frequency gain for each band. 6 Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses all PEQ bands. 7 PEQ On ON/OFF Turn the PEQ ON. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Compressor When you click the [Compressor] button for the crossover processor, it opens the compressor editor window. Here you can make compressor settings for each frequency band. 1 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 ) Name Function 1 Compressor Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio. 6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way compression is applied. 7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. 8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the release time. The setting range may vary, depending on the operating frequency. 9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain. ) On ON/OFF Turns the compressor ON. When you turn this button OFF, the compressor is bypassed. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 331 Chapter 6 Component Guide Delay This is a multi-tap delay that provides independent delay and level control for each output. You can specify the delay time in milliseconds, samples, meters, feet, time code frames, or number of beats. Within the delay group, there are two subgroups called Long and Short. Each has a different setting range for the delay. Delay Long Delay long components are available with from one to eight outputs. Each has a single input and from one to eight outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Only the number of outputs in each component is different. The other parts are the same. Delay Long Component Editor 8 1 4 5 2 6 7 3 Section Setting Range Function 1 Delay All Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses from input to output. 2 Input Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the input signal level. Mute ON/OFF Mute the input signal. Delay ms: 0 to 1300 Sample: the range depends on the Fs value. Meter: 0 to 446.7 Feet: 0 to 1465.4 Frame: the range depends on the Frame value. Beat: the range depends on the Beat value. Sets the delay time. There are two edit boxes, displaying milliseconds and the units selected for [Delay Scale]. 5 Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel. 6 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s delay. 7 Mute ON/OFF Turns ON muting for each channel’s output. Delay Scale Delay Scale ms Sample Meter Feet Frame Beat Selects the units for setting the delay time. The selected button will light up, and the units in the [Delay] edit box will change. If [Beat] is selected, use the knob to set the BPM (beats/minute). 3 4 8 332 Parameter Delay Tap DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Delay Short Delay short components are available with from one to eight outputs. Each has a single input and from one to eight outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Only the number of outputs in each component is different. The other parts are the same. Delay-Short component editor 1 8 4 5 2 6 7 3 Section Parameter Setting Range Function 1 Delay All Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses from input to output. 2 Input Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the input signal level. Mute ON/OFF Mute the input signal. Delay ms: 0 to 130 Sample: the range depends on the Fs value. Meter: 0 to 44.7 Feet: 0 to 146.5 Frame: the range depends on the Frame value. Beat: the range depends on the Beat value. Sets the delay time. There are two edit boxes, displaying milliseconds and the units selected for [Delay Scale]. 5 Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel. 6 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s delay. 7 Mute ON/OFF Turns ON muting for each channel’s output. Delay Scale Delay Scale ms Sample Meter Feet Frame Beat Selects the units for setting the delay time. The selected button will light up, and the units in the [Delay] edit box will change. If [Beat] is selected, use the knob to set the BPM (beats/minute). 3 4 8 Delay Tap DME Designer Owner’s Manual 333 Chapter 6 Component Guide Dynamics Components in the dynamic group adjust the dynamic range of the sound. There are eight types of components, each of which is available in mono channel and stereo channel versions. The seven types are: compander hard, compander soft, compressor, de-esser, ducking, expander, gate, and limiter. ■ KeyIn All components in the dynamic group, except the de-esser, have KeyIn input. This is used as a trigger source that activates the effects of the component. The trigger source is set in the [KeyIn] section of the component editor. [KeyIn] Section The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button. Click the button and select the trigger source from the menu. Mono channel Stereo channel • [SELF] Sets the input signal as the trigger source for mono channel components. • [L]/[R] Sets the left or right input signal as the trigger source for stereo channel components. • [LR BOTH] Sets both the left and right input signals as the trigger source for stereo channel components. The strongest input signal will be the trigger source, whether from the left or right channel. • [KEYIN] The KeyIn input will be the trigger source. 334 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Compander The compander combines the effects of a compressor and an expander. A compressor compresses signals that exceed the threshold, while the expander reduces signals that fall below the threshold. There are two compander groups, CompanderH (compander hard) and CompanderS (compander soft). Within each group, there are mono channel and stereo channel companders. Mono channel companders have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel companders have two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input. CompanderS CompanderH Stereo channel Mono channel Stereo channel Mono channel Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. The compander hard and compander soft differ in the compression ratio of their fixed expander. The expander compression is expressed by the straight portion of the lower-left part of the compander curve. The compression ratio of the compander hard is large. The slope is also large. The compression ratio of the compander soft is small, with a gentle compression. The parameters in the component editor are the same. CompanderH Mono component editor 4 5 CompanderS Stereo component editor 6 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 7 23 8 ) 9 ! 2 3 Name ) ! Function 1 Compander Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio. 6 Width +1 dB to +90 dB Sets the width of the expander. 7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. 8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the release time. The setting range may very, depending on the operating frequency. 9 Gain -18 dB to ±0 dB Sets the output gain. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 335 Chapter 6 Component Guide ) ! KeyIn On Mono SELF KEYIN Stereo L R LR BOTH KEYIN Selects the trigger source from a menu. The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button. ON/OFF Turns the compander ON. Ratio=4:1 +20 Width=25 Output Level (dB) +10 0 –10 –20 –30 –40 –50 Threshold=–25dB –60 –70 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 Input Level (dB) Compressor Compresses signals that exceed a threshold. Narrows the dynamic range of the signal, making it easier to mix or record signals with a wide dynamic range such as vocals or piano music. Both mono channel and stereo channel compressors are provided. Mono channel compressors have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel compressors have two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input. Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. Compressor component editor 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 336 DME Designer Owner’s Manual ) ! Chapter 6 Component Guide Name Function 1 Compressor Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio. 6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way compression is applied. 7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. 8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the release time. The setting range may very, depending on the operating frequency. 9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain. ) KeyIn Mono SELF KEYIN Stereo L R LR BOTH KEYIN ! On ON/OFF Selects the trigger source from a menu. The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button. Turns the compressor ON. +20 Output Level (dB) +10 Ratio=2:1 0 –10 –20 Knee=Hard –30 –40 –50 Threshold=–20dB –60 –70 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 Input Level (dB) De-Esser Compresses the signal above a specified frequency. The de-esser controls sibilant (hissing) sounds included in speech that are produced by the letter “S.” Both mono channel and stereo channel deessers are provided. Mono channel de-essers have one input and one output each. Stereo channel de-essers have two inputs and two outputs each. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 337 Chapter 6 Component Guide Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. De-Esser component editor 4 5 6 1 7 8 2 3 9 ) 9 Name Function 1 De-Esser Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio. 6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way the de-esser effect is applied. 7 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. 8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the release time. The setting range may very, depending on the operating frequency. 9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain. ) Frequency 80 Hz to 10 kHz Sets the minimum signal frequency for compression. ! On ON/OFF Turns the de-esser ON. +20 Output Level (dB) +10 Ratio=2:1 0 –10 –20 Knee=Hard –30 –40 –50 Threshold=–20dB –60 –70 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 Input Level (dB) 338 DME Designer Owner’s Manual 0 +10 +20 Chapter 6 Component Guide Ducking Attenuates the output a particular amount, when an input signal exceeds its threshold. Both mono channel and stereo channel duckers are provided. Mono channel duckers have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel duckers have two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input. Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. Ducking component editor 4 5 6 1 2 3 7 8 9 ) Name Function 1 Ducking Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Range -70 dB to ±0 dB Sets the amount by which the level is reduced. 6 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. 7 Hold 44.1 kHz: 0.02 ms to 2.13 s 48 kHz: 0.02 ms to 1.96 s 88.2 kHz: 0.01 ms to 1.06 s 96 kHz: 0.01 ms to 981 ms Sets the hold time. The setting range may very, depending on the operating frequency. 8 Decay 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the decay time. The setting range may very, depending on the operating frequency. 9 KeyIn Mono SELF KEYIN Stereo L R LR BOTH KEYIN Selects the trigger source from a menu. The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button. ) On ON/OFF Turns the ducking ON. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 339 Chapter 6 Component Guide +20 Output Level (dB) +10 0 Threshold=–20dB –10 –20 Range=–25dB –30 –40 –50 –60 –70 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 Input Level (dB) Expander Widens the dynamic range of the signal. Low-level signals such as noise are diminished. Both mono channel and stereo channel expanders are provided. Mono channel expanders have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel expanders have two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input. Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. Expander component editor 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 ) ! Name 1 Expander Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter 340 Function Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Ratio 1:1 to ∞:1 Sets the compression ratio. 6 Knee HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Sets the way the expander is applied. 8 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide 8 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the release time. The setting range may very, depending on the operating frequency. 9 Gain ±0 dB to +18 dB Sets the output gain. ) KeyIn Mono SELF KEYIN Stereo L R LR BOTH KEYIN ! On Selects the trigger source from a menu. The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button. ON/OFF Turns the expander ON. +20 Output Level (dB) +10 0 Knee=Hard –10 –20 Ratio=2:1 –30 –40 Threshold=–10dB –50 –60 –70 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 Input Level (dB) Gate Attenuates signals that are lower than the threshold level. Both mono channel and stereo channel gates are provided. Mono channel gates have one input, one output, and one KeyIn input. Stereo channel gates have two inputs, two outputs, and one KeyIn input. Double-click a component to open the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. Gate component editor 4 5 6 1 2 3 7 8 9 ) DME Designer Owner’s Manual 341 Chapter 6 Component Guide Name Function 1 Gate Curve Displays results graphically. The horizontal axis is the input signal level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the gain reduction attenuation. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Range -70 dB to ±0 dB Sets the amount by which the level is reduced. 6 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. 7 Hold 44.1 kHz: 0.02 ms to 2.13 s 48 kHz: 0.02 ms to 1.96 s 88.2 kHz: 0.01 ms to 1.06 s 96 kHz: 0.01 ms to 981 ms Sets the hold time. 8 Decay 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the decay time. The setting range may very, depending on the operating frequency. 9 KeyIn Mono SELF KEYIN Stereo L R LR BOTH KEYIN Selects the trigger source from a menu. The currently selected trigger source is displayed on the button. ) On ON/OFF Turns the gate ON. +20 Output Level (dB) +10 0 –10 Threshold=–20dB –20 –30 Range=–25dB –40 –50 –60 –70 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 Input Level (dB) Limiter Signals above the threshold are compressed at an ∞:1 ratio, preventing output of signals that exceed the threshold level. Mono channel and stereo channel components are provided. Mono channel components have a single input and output plus a key input, while stereo channel components have two inputs and outputs and a key input. 342 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Double click the component to open the component editor. Mono channel and stereo channel components have the same parameters. Limiter component editor 4 1 5 23 6 7 8 Name Function 1 Limiter Curve Displays the limiter response in graph form. The horizontal axis represents input signal level and the vertical axis represents output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the amount of gain reduction. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. Parameter Setting Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold value. 5 Attack 0 to 120 ms Sets the attack time. 6 Release 44.1 kHz: 6 ms to 46 s 48 kHz: 5 ms to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 3 ms to 23 s 96 kHz: 3 ms to 21.1 s Sets the release time. The range varies according to the operating frequency. 9 KeyIn Mono SELF KEYIN Stereo L R LR BOTH KEYIN The trigger source can be selected from this menu. The currently selected source is displayed in the button. On ON/OFF Turns the limiter ON. +20 RATIO=20:1 +10 0 Output Level (dB) ) Threshold=–20dB –10 –20 –30 –40 –50 –60 –70 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 Input Level (dB) DME Designer Owner’s Manual 343 Chapter 6 Component Guide Equalizer (EQ) The equalizer boosts or cuts the levels of specified frequencies. The EQ group contains graphic equalizers (GEQ) and parametric equalizers (PEQ). The frequency bands in the graphic equalizer are fixed. The graphical interface lets you visually check the gain of each frequency. There are three different types of equalizers, each with a different number of frequency bands. Mono channel and stereo channel equalizers are available for each type. With the parametric equalizer, you can freely adjust the frequency bands, their amplitudes, and bandwidths. There are six different types of parametric equalizers, each with a different number of frequency bands. Mono channel and stereo channel equalizers are available for each type. Graphic Equalizer (GEQ) Boosts or cuts signals within the specified frequencies. The mono group contains 7 band, 15 band, and 31 band mono channel components. The stereo group contains 7 band, 15 band, and 31 band stereo channel components. Mono channel GEQs have one input and one output each. Stereo channel GEQs have two inputs and two outputs each. Mono channel Stereo channel Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of bands varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. Component editor for GEQ 2 1 3 4 6 7 5 8 9 # ! ) @ $ Name 344 * % ^ & % ^ & % ^ & % ^ & ( Function 1 Input Meter Displays the input signal level. 2 EQ Curve Displays the equalizer effect. 3 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Section 4 Setting Range Function Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses all bands in the GEQ equalizer section. 5 Gain Set by [Range]. Sets the output gain for its band. 6 GEQ ON ON/OFF Turns the GEQ ON. 7 Range (Button) ±15 ±12 ±6 -24 Selects the gain adjust width. 8 EQ Flat 9 Equalizer Parameter Input -- Returns the faders of all bands to 0dB. Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency. Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the notch filter frequency. ^ Q: 0.1 to 63.0 Sets the width of the frequency band that will be changed by the filter. & Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the signal level. On ON/OFF Turns output ON. ) ! HPF @ # LPF $ % * ( Notch Output ■ EQ Graph [Bypass] Button A number for each frequency band is displayed on these buttons. When you click the button, it lights up and the bypass turns ON. When you turn this ON, bypassed sound (unchanged sound) is output. When you turn this OFF, the sound is output with effects applied. Bypass ON Bypass OFF DME Designer Owner’s Manual 345 Chapter 6 Component Guide Parametric Equalizer (PEQ) Boosts or cuts signals within specified frequencies. In both the Mono group and Stereo group there are 2 band, 3 band, 4 band, 6 band, and 8 band components available. Mono channel PEQs have one input and one output each. Stereo channel PEQs have two inputs and two outputs each. The number of bands varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of bands varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. PEQ component editor 1 4 9 5 2 ) 6 7 8 3 ! Name 1 EQ Curve Displays the equalizer effect. You can change the parameter by dragging the control point with the mouse. Section 2 Input Parameter Setting Range Function Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Type PEQ L.SHELF 6 dB/Oct L.SHELF 12 dB/Oct H.SHELF 6 dB/Oct H.SHELF 12 dB/Oct HPF LPF Select the filter type from the menu. 5 Q 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the band width for each frequency band. 6 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency for each band. 7 Gain -18 dB to +18 dB Sets the level of the frequency that will be changed. 8 Bypass ON/OFF Turns ON bypass for each band. 3 4 346 Function Equalizer DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide 9 Equalizer PEQ ON ON/OFF Turns the PEQ ON ) Output Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level. On ON/OFF Turns output ON. ! ■ Filter Type Various types of curves are available for changing the level. Click the [Type] button and select the type from the menu. • PEQ This is a general parametric equalizer. • L. SHELF (Low Shelving) There is no sound attenuation at low frequencies. The sound is attenuated at a constant rate from the cutoff frequency towards the higher frequencies. The attenuation rate per octave can be set to [6 dB/Oct] or [12 dB/Oct]. • H.SHELF (High Shelving) There is no sound attenuation at high frequencies. The sound is attenuated at a constant rate from the cutoff frequency towards the lower frequencies. The attenuation rate per octave can be set to [6 dB/Oct] or [12 dB/Oct]. • HPF This is a high-pass filter (Q=0.7). Attenuates the low frequencies with a gentle curve (12 dB/ Oct). • LPF This is a low-pass filter (Q=0.7). Attenuates the high frequencies with a gentle curve (12 dB/ Oct). DME Designer Owner’s Manual 347 Chapter 6 Component Guide Fader Controls the output level for each channel. Fader components are available for 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16 channels. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies, but all components share a common configuration in the component editor. Fader component editor 1 2 3 4 Parameter Setting Range Function 1 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for each channel. 2 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s output. 3 Fader -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel. 4 Fade ON/OFF Sets fade during scene recall ON or OFF. ■ [Fade] Sets the action of the fader when there is a large change in its position during scene recall. When you turn this ON, the fader moves gradually to the position after the jump. If you turn this OFF, it immediately jumps to the parameters saved in the recalled scene. See “The ‘Scene Manager’ Dialog Box” (page 63) for details about settings for the components to be faded and the time period when the [Fade] is On. 348 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Filters A filter passes specific frequencies and attenuates all others. There are seven types of filters available in the filter group: band pass filter (BPF), high pass filter (HPF), low pass filter (LPF), notch filter (Notch), programmable BPF, programmable HPF, and programmable LPF. Band Pass Filter (BPF) The band pass filter passes the signal from a specified frequency band, while attenuating frequencies outside that band. There are two types of BPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono channel BPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel BPFs have two of each. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. BPF component editor 1 2 Section 1 Input Parameter 3 4 6 5 Setting Range Function Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the center frequency. 4 Q: 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the band width of a frequency band. 5 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level. 2 3 6 BPF Output DME Designer Owner’s Manual 349 Chapter 6 Component Guide High Pass Filter (HPF) The high pass filter passes frequencies in the signal that are higher than a specified frequency, while attenuating lower frequencies in the signal. There are two types of HPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono channel HPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel HPFs have two of each. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. HPF component editor 1 2 Section 1 Input 4 6 5 Setting Range Function Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cutoff frequency. 4 Slope 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct Sets the attenuation for each octave. 5 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level. 2 3 6 350 Parameter 3 HPF Output DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Low Pass Filter (LPF) The low pass filter passes frequencies in the signal that are lower than a specified frequency, while attenuating higher frequencies in the signal. There are two types of LPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono channel LPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel LPFs have two of each. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. LPF component editor 1 2 Section 1 Input Parameter 3 4 6 5 Setting Range Function Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the cutoff frequency. 4 Slope 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct Sets the attenuation for each octave. 5 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level. 2 3 6 LPF Output DME Designer Owner’s Manual 351 Chapter 6 Component Guide Notch Filter (Notch) The notch filter attenuates the signal within a specified frequency band, while passing frequencies outside that band. There are two types of notch filter components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono channel notch filters have one input and one output. Stereo channel notch filters have two of each. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. Notch component editor 1 2 Section 1 Input 4 6 5 Setting Range Function Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the center frequency. 4 Q: 0.1 to 63.0 Sets the band width of the frequency band that will be changed 5 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level. 2 3 6 352 Parameter 3 Notch Output DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Programmable BPF The band pass filter passes the signal from a specified frequency band, while attenuating frequencies outside that band. With the programmable band pass filter you can set the filter type and the slope between the frequency band that is passed and the band that is cutoff. There are two types of programmable BPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono channel programmable BPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel programmable BPFs have two of each. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. Programmable BPF component editor 1 2 Section 1 Input Parameter ! 3 4 7 8 5 9 6 ) Setting Range Function Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. 4 Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 5 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. 6 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. 2 3 HPF DME Designer Owner’s Manual 353 Chapter 6 Component Guide Section 7 354 Setting Range Function Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency. 8 Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 9 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. ) Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level. ! LPF Parameter Output DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Programmable HPF The high pass filter passes frequencies in the signal that are higher the specified frequency, while attenuating lower frequencies in the signal. With the programmable high pass filter you can set the filter type and the slope between the frequency band that is passed and the band that is cutoff. There are two types of programmable HPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono channel programmable HPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel programmable HPFs have two of each. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. Programmable HPF component editors 7 1 3 4 5 2 Section 1 Input Parameter 6 Setting Range Function Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. 5 Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 6 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. 7 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level. 2 3 8 HPF Output DME Designer Owner’s Manual 355 Chapter 6 Component Guide Programmable LPF The low pass filter passes frequencies in the signal that are lower than the specified frequency, while attenuating higher frequencies in the signal. With the programmable low pass filter you can set the filter type and the slope between the frequency band that is passed and the band that is cutoff. There are two types of programmable LPF components: mono channel and stereo channel. Mono channel programmable LPFs have one input and one output. Stereo channel programmable LPFs have two of each. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The parameters are the same for mono channel and stereo channel components. Programmable LPF component editor 1 3 7 4 5 2 Section 1 Input Setting Range Function Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency. 5 Type Thru 6 dB/Oct 12 dB/Oct AdjustGc 12 dB/Oct Butrwrth 12 dB/Oct Bessel 12 dB/Oct Linkwitz 18 dB/Oct AdjustGc 18 dB/Oct Butrwrth 18 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct AdjustGc 24 dB/Oct Butrwrth 24 dB/Oct Bessel 24 dB/Oct Linkwitz 36 dB/Oct AdjustGc 36 dB/Oct Butrwrth 36 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct AdjustGc 48 dB/Oct Butrwrth 48 dB/Oct Bessel 48 dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the attenuation for each octave and the filter type. [THRU] turns off the filter. 6 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB When [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc) is selected for [Type], this sets the gain for the cutoff frequency. 7 Bypass ON/OFF Turns bypass ON. Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output signal level. 2 3 8 356 Parameter 6 LPF Output DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Meter Displays signal levels. Meter components are available with 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16 channels. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. Meter component editor 1 Name 1 Meter Function Displays signal levels for each channel. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 357 Chapter 6 Component Guide Miscellaneous In the Miscellaneous group, there are the Oscillator subgroup and the Wav File Player. Oscillator The Oscillator subgroup contains a monochannel oscillator component. The oscillator generates sine waves at fixed frequencies of 100 Hz, 1 kHz, and 10 kHz, a variable frequency sine wave, pink noise, and burst noise. The oscillator component has two outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Oscillator component editor 2 1 4 5 3 Section 1 Setting Range Function Sine 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz Vari 2 Noise Pink Burst 3 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz When [Vari] is selected for [Sine], this sets the frequency of the generated sine wave. Level -∞ to +6 dB Displays the signal level. 5 On ON/OFF Turns ON the oscillator. 6 Meter 4 Wave Form Parameter 6 Output Selects the frequency and waveform that will be generated. Only one of the six [Sine] and [Noise] buttons can be selected. -- Displays the output signal level. Pink Noise A standard signal used for sound measurement. This sound covers a frequency range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz. As the frequency doubles, the energy of the sound is cut in half. The sound level is equal at all frequencies. Burst Outputs pink noise continuously. 358 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Wav File Player The Wav File Player is a component for playing Wave files. Only one Wav File Player component can be arranged for each single DME unit. NOTE If you switch the effect type for SPX components while playing Wave file by Wav File Player, drop-outs in the sound played in the Wav File Player may occur. Double-click the component to display the component editor for it. Wav File Player component editor 1 2 Section Parameter 4 5 Setting Range 6 7 3 Function 1 Ex. Input Level -∞ to 0 dB Sets the input level from an input port. Only effective when “External Input” is selected as the playback file. 2 Wav File Player Play 001 to 100 Selects and displays the playback file. Only files set in the DME unit in which this component is placed by the Wav File Manager can be selected. 3 List -- Open the Wav File Manager to display a list of files set in the DME unit in which this component is located. This list functions as a play list. 4 IG -- Selects the previous file in the play list. 5 HI -- Selects the next file in the playsuit. 6 F -- Plays the selected Wave file. Mute is turned OFF when “External Input” is selected. 7 J -- Stops playback of the Wave file. Muted when “External Input” is selected. NOTE Playback will be paused if synchronization is carried out in the “Designer ← DME” direction during playback. Playback will resume once synchronization is complete, but if a Wave file was being played it will resume playback from the beginning. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 359 Chapter 6 Component Guide Mixer The Mixer group contains the Auto Mixer, Delay Matrix, and Matrix Mixer. Auto Mixer There is a noise gate for each input channel, which passes only signals that exceed a specified threshold. There are five mixer types, each with a different number of inputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. The auto mixer component editor consists of two sections: input channels and master output. Auto Mixer component editor 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 360 7 ) 8 ! DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Section 1 Input Channels Parameter Phase Setting Range ON/OFF Function Reverses the phase of each channel’s input signal. 2 Gate Indicator 3 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB 4 Hold 44.1 kHz: 110 m to 2.13 s Sets the gate hold time. 48 kHz: 101 m to 1.96 s The setting range may vary, depending 88.2 kHz: 55.1 m to 1.06 s on the operating frequency. 96 kHz: 50. 6m to 981 m Decay 44.1 kHz: 110 m to 46 s 48 kHz: 101 m to 42.3 s 88.2 kHz: 55 m to 23 s 96 kHz: 51 m to 21.1 s Sets the speed for closing the gate. The setting range may vary, depending on the operating frequency. 6 Solo ON/OFF Turns solo ON. 7 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s input. 8 Fader -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level for each channel. Gain Correct ON/OFF Turns ON gain correction. ) On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s output. ! Master -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level. 5 9 Input Channels Master Output -- When the gate is open, the light turns green. When the gate is closed, the light turns yellow. Sets the threshold value for each gate. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 361 Chapter 6 Component Guide Delay Matrix This is a matrix mixer that allows you to set an independent delay time and level adjustment for each output. There are three groups of delay matrix, based on the number of inputs: 2 Input, 4 Input, and 8 Input. In each of the three groups there are five mixers available with 2, 4, 8, 12, or 16 outputs, for a total of 15 components. 2 Input 4 Input 8 Input Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of input and output channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. The delay matrix component editor consists of four sections: input, output, matrix, and block. The [Master] buttons in the [Input] and [Output] sections display windows where you can make master input and output settings. Delay and level for each channel are set in separate windows that display four channels each. Delay Matrix component editor 2 4 6 1 5 7 3 Section 362 Name Function 1 Input Master Opens the Input Master window. 2 Output Master Opens the Output Master window. 3 Matrix Delay meters Output level meters Displays output level and delay time for each output channel. Clicking here displays the Crosspoint window. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Section 4 Block Name Function On Turns ON output for all channels in the Crosspoint window. Lights the [ON] button (does not change the delay matrix component editor). 5 Off Turns OFF output for all channels in the Crosspoint window (does not change the delay matrix component editor). 6 Nominal Resets all output levels in the Crosspoint window, making them 0 dB. The delay settings are not changed. 7 Minimum Resets all output levels in the Crosspoint window, making them -∞ dB. The delay settings are not changed. ■ Matrix (Delay Meter/Output Level Meter) The upper row has delay meters, while the middle row has output level meters. You can view parameters for all output channels at once. Delay Meter Output Level Meter When you click the output channel number on the matrix, the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window opens. When you click the input channel number on the left side of the matrix, the [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window opens. Click to open the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window. Click to open the [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window. The matrix is divided into groups. For the 2 Input matrix, each group has two input channels and four output channels. For the 4 Input matrix, each group has four input channels and four output channels. Groups in matrixes with more than four inputs are the same as for the 4 Input matrix. When you place the mouse pointer over a group, its channel numbers are highlighted. Click to open the [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window. Click to open the “In 1-4 x Out 1-4” Crosspoint window. Click to open the “In 5-8 x Out 5-8” Crosspoint window. For 2 input matrix, click to open the “In 1-2 x Out 1-4” Crosspoint window. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 363 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Input Master If you click the [Input Master] button in the delay matrix component editor, it will open the [Delay Matrix - InputMaster] editor window. Here you can turn the master input for each channel ON and OFF and set the level. [Delay Matrix - InputMaster] editor window 1 2 5 7 3 4 Section 1 364 Setting Range 8 Function Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of each channel’s signal. 2 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the level of the signal from each channel’s input. 3 Solo ON/OFF Turns ON solo for each channel. 4 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s input. 5 Input Parameter 6 Block On -- Turns ON input for all channels in the Input Master window. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. 6 Off -- Turns OFF input for all channels in the Input Master window. 7 Nominal -- Resets all input signal levels in the Input Master window, making them 0 dB. 8 Minimum -- Resets all input signal levels in the Input Master windows, making them -∞ dB. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Output Master If you click the [Output Master] button in the delay matrix component editor, it will open the [Delay Matrix - OutputMaster] editor window. Here you can turn the master output for each channel ON and OFF and set the level. [Delay Matrix - OutputMaster] editor window 1 4 6 2 5 7 3 Section 1 Output Parameter Meter Setting Range -- Function Displays the output signal level for each channel. 2 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel. 3 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s output. 4 Block On -- Turns ON output for all channels in the Output Master window. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. 5 Off -- Turns OFF output for all channels in the Output Master window. 6 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master window, making them 0 dB. 7 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master window, making them -∞ dB. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 365 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ All Inputs to One Output When you click the output channel number on the matrix, the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window opens. All input channels and one output channel are displayed. The output channel is the one you have clicked on in the delay mixer component editor. 4 1 7 9 2 8 ) 3 5 Section Parameter 1 Bus Send Level Delay 2 3 4 Output Setting Range 6 Function 0 to 500 Sets the delay time for each input channel. Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each input channel. On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for each input channel. Channel -- Displays the selected output channel. Select another channel from a menu. 5 On 6 Meter -- Displays the output signal level of the channel displayed in the window. On -- Turns ON all channel inputs. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. 8 Off -- Turns OFF all channel inputs. 9 Nominal -- Resets all of input signal levels, making them 0 dB. ) Minimum -- Resets all of input signal levels, making them -∞ dB. 7 Block ON/OFF Turns ON the output for the channel displayed in the window. Output Channel Switching The [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window displays the output channel clicked on in the delay matrix component editor. The [Channel] buttons in the [Output] section of the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window. If you make the delay matrix component editor active while the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window is displayed, and then click another output channel, that channel group will be displayed in the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window. One [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window is displayed for each delay matrix component editor. 366 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ One Input to All Outputs When you click the input channel number on the left side of matrix, the [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window opens. One input channel and all output channels are displayed. The input channel is the one you have clicked on in the delay mixer component editor. 1 2 6 9 3 ! 7 4 5 Section 1 Input ) @ 8 Parameter Channel Setting Range Function -- Displays the selected input channel. Select another channel from a menu. 2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. 3 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. 4 Solo ON/OFF Turns solo ON. 5 On ON/OFF Turns input ON. 0 to 500 Sets the delay time for each output channel. 6 Bus Send Level Delay 7 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the signal level for each output channel. 8 On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for each output channel. 9 Block On -- Turns ON all channel outputs. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. ) Off -- Turns OFF all channel outputs. ! Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels, making them 0 dB. @ Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels, making them -∞ dB. Input Channel Switching The [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window displays the input channel for the channel number clicked on in the delay matrix component editor. The [Channel] buttons in the [Input] section of the [Delay Matrix - All Inputs to One Output] editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 367 Chapter 6 Component Guide If you make the delay matrix component editor active while the [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window is displayed, and then click another input channel, that channel will be displayed in the [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window. One [Delay Matrix - One Input to All Outputs] editor window is displayed for each delay matrix component editor. ■ Crosspoint [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window If you click a level meter in the delay matrix component editor, that group's [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window will be displayed. Turns the input channels ON and OFF and sets their levels. Just like the delay matrix component editor, the input channels are arranged vertically while the output channels are arranged horizontally. 2 3 4 6 5 8 7 9 1 Section Setting Range Function 1 Input Channel -- Switches to another channel group. 2 Output Channel -- Switches to another channel group. 3 Bus Send Level Delay 4 5 6 368 Parameter Block 0 to 500 Sets the delay time for each crosspoint. Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each crosspoint. On ON/OFF Turns ON output for each crosspoint. On -- Turns ON output for all channels in the Crosspoint window. The [On] button lights up. 7 Off -- Turns OFF output for all channels in the Crosspoint window. 8 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Crosspoint window, making them 0 dB. 9 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Crosspoint window, making them -∞ dB. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Channel Group Switching The [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window displays four channels each for Input and Output. It displays the channel group you click on in the delay matrix component editor. The [Channel] buttons in the [Input] and [Output] sections of the [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window. [Input] section [Channel] menu [Output] section [Channel] menu If you click another channel group when the delay matrix component editor is active and an [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window is displayed, that channel group will be displayed in the open [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] editor window. Only one [Delay Matrix - Crosspoint] matrix window is displayed for each delay matrix component editor. Matrix Mixer In the matrix mixer, the input channels and output buses are arranged in a checkerboard configuration. You can adjust the group balance for each output bus. There are 24 components in the in the Matrix Mixer group, each with different numbers of input and output channels. There are seven groups based on the number of inputs, as follows: 2 Input, 4 Input, 8 Input, 12 Input, 16 Input, 32 Input, and 64 Input. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 369 Chapter 6 Component Guide NOTE If a 64 input 64 output Matrix Mixer component or a 64 input 32 output Matrix Mixer component is placed in the DME64N configuration window, no other components can be used even though the resource meter does not reach 100%. The 64 input 64 output Matrix Mixer component or the 64 input 32 output Matrix Mixer component cannot be used in the DME24N. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of input and output channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. The matrix mixer component editor consists of four sections: input, output, matrix, and block. The [Master] buttons in the [Input] and [Output] sections display windows where you can make master input and output settings. The level for each channel is set in separate windows that display four channels each. Matrix Mixer component editor 2 4 3 6 1 Section 370 Name 5 7 Function 1 Input Master Opens the Input Master window. 2 Output Master Opens the Output Master window. 3 Matrix Output level meters These meters display the output level for each channel. Clicking here displays the Crosspoint window. 4 Block On Turns ON output for all channels in the Crosspoint window. Lights the [ON] button (does not change the matrix mixer component editor). 5 Off Turns OFF output for all channels in the Crosspoint window (does not change the matrix mixer component editor). 6 Nominal Resets all output levels in the Crosspoint window, making them 0 dB. 7 Minimum Resets all output levels in the Crosspoint window, making them -∞ dB. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Matrix (Output Level Meters) In the matrix, you can view levels for all output channels at once. The meter will be grayed out when the corresponding channel is set to Off. Output level meter When you click an output channel number on the matrix, the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window opens. When you click the input channel number on the left side of the matrix, the [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window opens. Click to open the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window. Click to open the [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window. The matrix is divided into groups, each with four input channels and four output channels. When you place the mouse pointer over a group, its channel numbers are highlighted. Click to open the [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window. Click to open the “In 1-4 x Out 5-8” [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window DME Designer Owner’s Manual 371 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Input Master If you click the [Input Master] button in the matrix mixer component editor, it will open the [Matrix Mixer - InputMaster] editor window. Here you can turn the master input for each channel ON and OFF and set the level. [Matrix Mixer - InputMaster] editor window [Matrix Mixer - InputMaster] G fB^ [ EB h E 1 5 2 7 3 4 Section 1 372 Setting Range 8 Function Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of each channel’s signal. 2 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the signal level from each channel input to the output bus. 3 Solo ON/OFF Turns ON solo for each channel. 4 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s input. 5 Input Parameter 6 Block On -- Turns ON input for all channels in the Input Master window. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. 6 Off -- Turns OFF input for all channels in the Input Master window. 7 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Input Master window, making them 0 dB. 8 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Input master window, making them -∞ dB. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Output Master Window If you click the [Output Master] button in the matrix mixer component editor, it will open the Output Master window. Her you can turn the master output for each channel ON and OFF and set the level. [Matrix Mixer - OutputMaster] editor window [Matrix Mixer - OutputMaster] G fB^ [ EB h E 1 4 6 2 5 7 3 Section 1 Output Parameter Meter Setting Range -- Function Displays the output signal level for each channel. 2 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each channel. 3 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel’s output. 4 Block On -- Turns ON output for all channels in the Output Master window. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. 5 Off -- Turns OFF output for all channels in the Output Master window. 6 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master window, making them 0 dB. 7 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Output Master window, making them -∞ dB. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 373 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ All Inputs to One Output When you click the output channel number on the matrix, the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window opens. All input channels and one output channel are displayed. The output channel is the one you have clicked on in the matrix mixer component editor. 3 6 1 8 2 4 Section 1 Bus Send Level Level 2 3 Parameter On Output Channel Setting Range 7 9 5 Function -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each input channel. ON/OFF Turns ON the output for each input channel. -- Displays the selected output channel. Select another channel from a menu. 4 On 5 Meter -- Displays the output signal level of the channel displayed in the window. On -- Turns ON all channel inputs. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. 7 Off -- Turns OFF all channel inputs. 8 Nominal -- Resets all input signal levels, making them 0 dB. 9 Minimum -- Reset all input signal levels, making them -∞ dB. 6 Block ON/OFF Turns ON the output for the channel displayed in the window. Output Channel Switching [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window displays the output channel clicked in the matrix mixer component editor. The [Channel] buttons in the [Output] section of the [Matrix Mixer All Inputs to One Output] editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window. If you make the matrix mixer component editor active while the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window is displayed, and then click another output channel, that channel group will be displayed in the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window. One [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window is displayed for each matrix mixer component editor. 374 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ One Input to All Outputs When you click the input channel number on the left side of the matrix, the [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window opens. One input channel and all output channels are displayed. The input channel is the one you have clicked on in the delay mixer component editor. 1 2 3 Section Input ) 7 4 5 1 8 6 Parameter Setting Range Channel -- 9 ! Function Displays the selected input channel. Select another channel from a menu. 2 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the input signal. 3 Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the input signal level. 4 Solo ON/OFF Turns solo ON. 5 On ON/OFF Turns input ON. Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the signal level for each output channel. On ON/OFF Turns ON the output for each output channel. 6 Bus Send Level 7 8 Block On -- Turns ON all channel outputs. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. 9 Off -- Turns OFF all channel outputs. ) Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels, making them 0 dB. ! Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels, making them -∞ dB. Input Channel Switching The [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window displays the input channel for the channel number clicked on in the matrix mixer component editor. The [Channel] buttons in the [Input] section of the [Matrix Mixer - All Inputs to One Output] editor window switch the channel group that is displayed in the window. If you make the matrix mixer component editor active while the [Matrix Mixer- One Input to All Outputs] editor window is displayed, and then click another input channel, that channel will be displayed in the [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window. One [Matrix Mixer - One Input to All Outputs] editor window is displayed for each matrix mixer component editor. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 375 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Crosspoint If you click a level meter in the matrix mixer component editor, the output crosspoint window for the group will be displayed. Turns the input channels ON and OFF and sets their levels. Just like the matrix mixture component editor, the input channels are arranged vertically while the output channels are arranged horizontally. [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] G fB^ [ EB h E 2 3 5 4 7 6 8 1 Section Setting Range Function 1 Input Channel -- Switches to another channel group. 2 Output Channel -- Switches to another channel group. 3 Bus Send Level Level 4 5 376 Parameter On Block -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output signal level for each crosspoint. ON/OFF Turns ON output for each crosspoint. On -- Turns ON output for all channels in the Crosspoint window. When turned ON, the [On] button lights up. 6 Off -- Turns OFF output for all channels in the Crosspoint window. 7 Nominal -- Resets all output signal levels in the Crosspoint window, making them 0 dB. 8 Minimum -- Resets all output signal levels in the Crosspoint window, making them -∞ dB. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Channel Group Switching The [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window displays four channels each for Input and Output. It displays the channel group that was clicked on in the matrix mixer component editor. The [Channel] buttons in the [Input] and [Output] sections of the [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window switch the channel group that is displayed. [Input] section [Channel] menu [Output] section [Channel] menu If you click another channel group when the matrix mixer component editor is active and an [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window is displayed, that channel group will be displayed in the open [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] editor window. Only one [Matrix Mixer - Crosspoint] matrix window is displayed for each matrix mixer component editor. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 377 Chapter 6 Component Guide Pan The Pan group contains the following subgroups: LCR, LR, and Surround. ■ Pan Nominal Position Component editors for both LCR and Surround contain the “Pan Nominal Position” parameter. The button for that parameter displays its current setting. Clicking the button displays a menu with [Center] and [LR], which are used to set the pan 0 dB reference. Center (Center Nominal) Uses the center volume as a reference, setting it as 0 dB. The LR speakers are -3 dB. LR (LR Nominal) Uses the LR speaker volumes as a reference, setting them as 0 dB. The center volume is +3 dB. LCR In the LCR component, one input is divided into left, center, and right outputs. The number of outputs is triple the inputs. Components are available with 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16 channels. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. 378 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide LCR component editor 1 2 3 Parameter Setting Range Function 1 CSR 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the center signal to LR. 2 Pan L63 - Center - R63 Sets LR orientation. 3 Pan Nominal Position Center LR Selects the nominal position from a menu. LR Separates a single input into left and right outputs. Components are available with 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16 channels. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. Pan component editor 1 2 Parameter Setting Range Function 1 Pan L63 - R63 Sets the LR orientation. 2 Pan Nominal Position Center LR Selects the nominal position from a menu. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 379 Chapter 6 Component Guide Surround There are three types of surround pan components in the Surround subgroup: 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1. The surround pan component editor has a two-dimensional surround pan graph where you can set the location of the sound image. Surround 6.1 component editor 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 9 ) Name 1 2D Surround Pan Graph 2 Speaker Button Location, Setting Range -- Function Sets the sound image orientation. You can move the sound image by clicking and dragging. L Left L63 F63 C Center C F63 4 R Right R63 F63 5 Ls Left Surround L63 R63 6 Bs Back Surround C R63 7 Rs Right Surround R63 R63 8 LFE Low Frequency Effect (Sub Woofer) 9 Left-Right Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the LR sound image. ) Front-Back Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the front-back sound image. 3 -- Clicking here moves the sound image to the button location. Indicates that there is a sub woofer. Clicking makes the LFE level 0 dB. The sound image does not move by clicking. You can set the sound location using the mouse in the two-dimensional surround pan graph. The sound image location is displayed at the bottom of the two-dimensional surround pan graph, but numbers cannot be entered there. 380 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Dragging You can move the control by dragging it with the mouse. Click If you click within the graph, the control point will move to that position. Click DME Designer Owner’s Manual 381 Chapter 6 Component Guide Speaker Button If you click any speaker button besides the [LFE] button, the control point will jump to that speaker’s position. Click 382 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Surround 3-1 Surround 3-1 has four channel surround pan, with three channels in front, and one in the rear. There is one input and four outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Surround 3-1 component editor 2 5 1 6 2 3 4 Section 1 2D Surround Pan Graph 2 3 Position 4 Name/Parameter Setting Range Function 2D Surround Pan Graph -- Sets the sound image orientation. You can move the sound image by clicking and dragging. Speaker Button -- Clicking here moves the sound image to the button location. Left-Right Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the LR surround location. Front-Back Position F63 - C - R63 Displays the front-back surround location. Front 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the front-center signal to front L and front R. Center LR Selects the nominal position from a menu. 5 Divergence 6 Pan Nominal Position DME Designer Owner’s Manual 383 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Surround 5.1 Surround 5.1 has surround pan with three channels in front, two in the rear, and one sub woofer channel. There is one input and six outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Surround 5.1 component editor 2 5 1 6 2 7 3 4 Section 1 2D Surround Pan Graph 2 3 Position 4 384 Name/Parameter Setting Range Function 2D Surround Pan Graph -- Sets the sound image orientation. You can move the sound image by clicking and dragging. Speaker Button -- Clicking here moves the sound image to the button location. Left-Right Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the LR surround location. Front-Back Position F63 - C - R63 Displays the front-back surround location. 5 Divergence Front 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the front-center signal to front L and front R. 6 LFE Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets output level to the sub woofer. 7 Pan Nominal Position Center LR Selects the nominal position from a menu. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Surround 6.1 Surround 6.1 has surround pan with three channels in front, three in the rear, and one sub woofer channel. There is one input and seven outputs. Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. Surround 6.1 component editor 2 5 6 1 7 2 8 3 4 Section 1 2D Surround Pan Graph 2 3 Position 4 5 Divergence 6 Name/Parameter Setting Range Function 2D Surround Pan Graph -- Sets the sound image orientation. You can move the sound image by clicking and dragging. Speaker Button -- Clicking here moves the sound image to the button location. Left-Right Position L63 - C - R63 Displays the LR surround location. Front-Back Position F63 - C - R63 Displays the front-back surround location. Front 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the front-center signal to front L and front R. Rear 0 to 100% Sets the ratio for sending the rear-center signal to rear L and rear R. Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets output level to the sub woofer. Center LR Selects the nominal position from a menu. 7 LFE 8 Pan Nominal Position DME Designer Owner’s Manual 385 Chapter 6 Component Guide Router The router assigns inputs to outputs. Each of the six router groups has a different number of inputs. The groups are 1 input, 2 input, 4 input, 8 input, 12 input and 16 input. Each group has five components, with 2, 4, 8, 12, and 16 outputs. 1 Input 8 Input 2 Input 12 Input 4 Input 16 Input Double-click a component to display the component editor for it. The number of channels varies depending on the component, but all share a common configuration in the component editor. Routers let you route signals from various [Input] locations by connecting them to various [Output] locations. One output can be connected to one input only. A single input can be output to multiple channels, but multiple inputs cannot be output over a single channel. In other words, you can distribute the inputs, but you cannot mix them. You cannot setup routing for more signals than the number of output channels. 386 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Routing Settings To change an assignment, click at the position where the desired input and output channels intersect. When the mouse pointer is moved over a cell, the input and output channels are highlighted, and a red line is displayed connecting them. Click to set routing for that position. If another output channel has been assigned to the clicked input channel, the original assignment will not be cleared. If another input channel has been assigned to the clicked output channel, the original assignment will be cleared. Click Cleared Not Cleared ■ Clearing Routing Settings If you click the dot that indicates routing, the routing indicated by that dot will be cleared and the dot will be erased. Click DME Designer Owner’s Manual 387 Chapter 6 Component Guide Source Selector This component selects a single input source from multiple input sources. “Position” is the number of input sources, and “Channel” is the number of channels included in the source. For example, a “4 Position 2 Channel” component allows you to select a single 2-channel source from four 2-channel input sources. 3 Position and 16 Position components are all 1 Channel types, while 1, 2, and 6 Channel versions of 4 Position and 8 Position components are provided. 388 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Double-click a component to open the component editor. The component editor is the same for all types, the only difference being the number of sources. Source Selector Component The Source Selector connects the selected input to the output. For example, if you select [1] for a 4 Position 2 Channel component, IN1-1 will be connected to OUT-1 and IN1-2 will be connected to OUT2. If you select [2] IN2-1 will be connected to OUT-1 and IN2-2 will be connected to OUT2. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 389 Chapter 6 Component Guide Speaker Processor The Speaker Processor is a crossover processor that includes APF (All Pass Filter), horn EQ, and limiter functions. Six component types are available: 1 Way, 2 Way, 3 Way, 4 Way, 5 Way, and 6 Way. Speaker Processor components have one input and one or multiple outputs. Double-click a component to open the component editor. Speaker processor Component 1 3 4 2 5 8 6 5 9 ) ! Name # $ Function 1 Crossover response (phase) Crossover phase response, color coded for output channel. 2 Crossover response (level) Crossover level response, color coded for each output channel. 3 Input meter Displays the input signal level. 4 Output meter Displays the output level for each band. 5 Crossover Curve Display Button Turns crossover curve display for each output channel on or off. Section 390 @ 7 Parameter Range Function 6 Delay Delay ON/OFF Applies delay to the crossover response. 7 PEQ PEQ ON/OFF Applies PEQ to the crossover response. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide 8 Navigator Input Level -∞ to +10 dB 9 Crossover – Opens the crossover editor window. ) Delay – Opens the delay editor window. ! PEQ – Opens the parametric equalizer editor window. @ Output Level -∞ to +10 dB Sets the output level from each output channel. # Mute $ Limiter ON/OFF – Specifies the input signal level. Mutes the output of each output channel. Opens the limiter editor window. Different numbers of channels are provided by each component variation. 1 Way ALL 2 Way Low/High 3 Way Low/Mid/High 4 Way Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High 5 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/High-Mid/High 6 Way Sub-Low/Low/Low-Mid/Mid/High-Mid/High Each frequency band has its own color, with Low being red, Mid being green, and so on. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 391 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Graph Control Points The crossover level control points indicate [Output Level] and [Frequency]. The control points will move in response to [Output Level] changes made via the knobs or edit boxes. The [Output Level] and [Frequency] parameters can also be changed by directly dragging the control points. Changes to the [Frequency] parameter are shown on the crossover phase response graph. The control point in the center of the graph can be dragged vertically to change the [Output Level] parameter. The [Output Level] parameter changes. Control points at the intersections between the frequency bands can be dragged horizontally to change the [Frequency]. The crossover phase response will change. 392 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Crossover Click the Speaker Processor [Crossover] button to open the crossover editor window. [Speaker Processor - Crossover] editor window 3 1 2 7 4 8 Section 9 5 6 Parameter Range Function 1 Polarity Polarity Normal/Inverted Inverts the polarity of each output channel. 2 Mute Mute ON/OFF Mutes the output of each output channel. This parameter is linked to the Mute setting in the original window. 3 Frequency Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the crossover frequency between output channels. The display appears as a dotted line when muted. 4 LPF Type Thru 6dB/Oct 12dB/Oct AdjustGc 12dB/Oct Butrwrth 12dB/Oct Bessel 12dB/Oct Linkwitz 18dB/Oct AdjustGc 18dB/Oct Butrwrth 18dB/Oct Bessel 24dB/Oct AdjustGc 24dB/Oct Butrwrth 24dB/Oct Bessel 24dB/Oct Linkwitz 36dB/Oct AdjustGc 36dB/Oct Butrwrth 36dB/Oct Bessel 48dB/Oct AdjustGc 48dB/Oct Butrwrth 48dB/Oct Bessel 48dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the roll-off slope and filter type for each octave. The filter is bypassed when [Thru] is selected. 5 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the LPF cutoff frequency. 6 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB Sets the cutoff frequency gain when the [Type] setting is [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc). DME Designer Owner’s Manual 393 Chapter 6 Component Guide Section 7 Parameter Range Function Type Thru 6dB/Oct 12dB/Oct AdjustGc 12dB/Oct Butrwrth 12dB/Oct Bessel 12dB/Oct Linkwitz 18dB/Oct AdjustGc 18dB/Oct Butrwrth 18dB/Oct Bessel 24dB/Oct AdjustGc 24dB/Oct Butrwrth 24dB/Oct Bessel 24dB/Oct Linkwitz 36dB/Oct AdjustGc 36dB/Oct Butrwrth 36dB/Oct Bessel 48dB/Oct AdjustGc 48dB/Oct Butrwrth 48dB/Oct Bessel 48dB/Oct Linkwitz Sets the roll-off slope and filter type for each octave. The filter is bypassed when [Thru] is selected. 8 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the HPF cutoff frequency. 9 Gc -6 dB to +6 dB Sets the cutoff frequency gain when the [Type] setting is [AdjustGc] (Adjustable Gc). HPF ■ Delay Click the Speaker Processor [Delay] button to open the window. Delay can be set independently for each output channel. [Speaker Processor - Delay] editor window 1 3 2 Parameter 394 Range Function 1 Delay ms: 0 to 500 Sample: the range depends on the Fs value. Meter: 0 to 171.8 Feet: 0 to 563.6 Frame: the range depends on the Frame value. Beat: the range depends on the Beat value. Sets the delay time. Two edit boxes show milliseconds and the unit specified in the [Delay Scale] section. Sets the output level for each band. 2 On ON/OFF Turns delay ON. 3 Delay Scale ms Sample Meter Feet Frame Beat Selects the delay time units. The selected button will light and the [Delay] edit box will change accordingly. When [Beat] is selected the knobs can be used to adjust BPM. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Parametric Equalizer Click the Crossover Processor [PEQ] button to open the window. Parametric equalization is provided for each crossover band. [Speaker Processor - PEQ] edit window 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 Name Function 1 Crossover response (phase) Shows crossover phase response. 2 Crossover response (level) Shows crossover level response. Parameter Range Function 3 Type PEQ L.SHELF 6dB/Oct L.SHELF 12dB/Oct H.SHELF 6dB/Oct H.SHELF 12dB/Oct HPF LPF APF*1 1st APF*1 2nd Horn EQ*2 Select a filter type from the menu. 4 B/W 0.090 to 6.672 Sets the octave bandwidth for each band. 5 Q 0.1 to 16.0 Sets the Q for each band. 6 Frequency 20 Hz to 20 kHz Sets the frequency for each band. 7 Gain -18 dB to +18 dB Sets the gain for each band. 8 Bypass ON/OFF Bypasses the PEQ for each band. 9 PEQ On ON/OFF Turns PEQ ON. *1 APF: The APF (All Pass Filter) is a filter that passes all frequency bands while affecting only the phase. Used to match the phase of the crossover bands. APF 1st shifts the phase from 0° to 180°, while APF 2nd shifts the phase from 0° to 360°. APF 2nd also allows Q adjustment. *2 Horn EQ: CD (Constant Directivity) horn speakers exhibit a roll-off in high-frequency level. Horn EQ is provided to compensate for this roll-off. For this reason the gain can only be set to higher than 0dB, and the frequency higher than 500Hz. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 395 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Limiter Click the Speaker Processor [Limiter] button to open the window. Limiter settings are provided for each output channel. [Speaker Processor - Limiter] Editor Window 4 5 6 1 23 7 Name 1 Limiter Curve A graphic representation of limiter response. The horizontal axis represents input level, and the vertical axis represents output level. 2 Gain Reduction Meter Displays the amount of gain reduction. 3 Output Meter Displays the output level. Parameter 396 Function Range Function 4 Threshold -54 dB to ±0 dB Sets the threshold level. 5 Attack Fast Mid Slow Manual (0 to 120ms) Sets the attack time. 6 Release Fast Mid Slow Manual (44.1kHz: 6ms to46s 48kHz: 5ms to 42.3s 88.2kHz: 3ms to 23s 96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s) Sets the release time. With the [Fast], [Mid], or [Slow] settings the optimum value is automatically set based on the longest wavelength audio signal received by the limiter. Three settings are available: [Fast], [Mid], and [Slow]. 7 On ON/OFF Turns the limiter ON. The limiter is bypassed when the button is turned OFF. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide SPX SPX is an effect component that supports many different effect applications, such as reverb, delay, and modulation effects, along with complex combinations of multiple effects. Although the SPX component is a single component, it encompasses 43 effect types. When you change the effect type, right-click the SPX component to display the context menu, click [Recall Component Library], then select the effect type from the [Effect Type] submenu. Double-click this component to display the component editor for it. SPX component editor Name Function 1 Input Meter Displays the input signal level. 2 [Mix Balance] Control Adjusts the balance between the fundamental tone and the effect tone. 3 [Bypass] button When turned ON, the input signal is output without change. 4 Output Meter Displays the output signal level. 5 Other Parameters Other parameters vary according to the effect type. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 397 Chapter 6 Component Guide Other effect parameters vary according to the selected effect type, as shown below. Effect Type Reverb Hall Reverb Room Reverb Stage Reverb Plate One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates. Parameter 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0.1 to 2.4 0 to 10 0 to 100% 0.0 to 100.0 ms 0 to 100% HPF LPF Gate Lvl Attack Hold RoomSize Liveness THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU OFF, -60 to 0 dB 0 to 120 ms 44.1kHz: 0.02ms to 2.13s 48kHz: 0.02 ms to 1.96s 88.2kHz: 0.01ms to 1.06s 96kHz: 0.01ms to 981ms 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s 48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s 88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s 96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring 0.1 to 20.0 0 to 10 Ini.Dly Diff. Density ER Num. FB.Gain Hi.Ratio HPF LPF Type RoomSize Liveness 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0 to 10 0 to 100% 1 to 19 -99 to +99% 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Type-A, Type-B 0.1 to 20.0 0 to 10 Decay Early Ref. One input, two output early reflections. Gate Reverb Reverse Gate One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate. Type Ini.Dly Diff. Density ER Num. FB.Gain Hi.Ratio HPF LPF Mono Delay Delay One input, one output basic repeat FB.Gain delay. Hi.Ratio HPF LPF 398 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Setting Range Rev Time Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Lo.Ratio Diff. Density E/R Dly E/R Bal. 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0 to 10 0 to 100% 1 to 19 -99 to +99% 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0.0 to 2730.0 ms -99 to +99% 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Function Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Low-frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread) Reverb density Delay between early reflections and reverb Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Level at which gate kicks in Gate opening speed Gate open time Gate closing speed Type of early reflection simulation Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) Initial delay before reverb begins Reflection diffusion (left-right reflection spread) Reflection density Number of early reflections Feedback gain High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Type of early reflection simulation Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) Initial delay before reverb begins Reflection diffusion (left-right reflection spread) Reflection density Number of early reflections Feedback gain High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type Parameter Stereo Delay Delay L Two input, two output basic stereo Delay R delay. FB.Gain L FB.Gain R Setting Range 0.0 to 1350.0 ms 0.0 to 1350.0 ms -99 to +99% -99 to +99% Hi.Ratio HPF LPF Mod.Delay Delay One input, two output basic repeat FB.Gain delay with modulation. Hi.Ratio Freq. Depth Wave HPF LPF Delay LCR Delay L One input, two output 3-tap delay Delay C (left, center, right). Delay R Delay FB Level L Level C Level R FB.Gain 0.1 to 1.0 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% Sine, Tri THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0.0 to 2730.0 ms 0.0 to 2730.0 ms 0.0 to 2730.0 ms 0.0 to 2730.0 ms -100 to +100% -100 to +100% -100 to +100% -99 to +99% Hi.Ratio HPF LPF Echo Delay L Two input, two output stereo delay Delay R with crossed FB.Dly L feedback loop. FB.Dly R FB.Gain L 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0.0 to 1350.0 ms 0.0 to 1350.0 ms 0.0 to 1350.0 ms 0.0 to 1350.0 ms -99 to +99% Chorus Two input, two output chorus effect. 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0.0 to 2725.0 ms -99 to +99% FB.Gain R -99 to +99% L->R FBG -99 to +99% R->L FBG -99 to +99% Hi.Ratio HPF LPF Freq. AM.Depth PM.Depth Mod.Dly Wave LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms Sine, Tri 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 10.0 to 0.10 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB Function Left channel delay time Right channel delay time Left channel feedback (plus values for normalphase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Right channel feedback (plus values for normalphase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation waveform High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Left channel delay time Center channel delay time Right channel delay time Feedback delay time Left channel delay level Center channel delay level Right channel delay level Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Left channel delay time Right channel delay time Left channel feedback delay time Right channel feedback delay time Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normalphase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reversephase feedback) Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reversephase feedback) Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reversephase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Modulation speed Amplitude modulation depth Pitch modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ (peaking type) gain EQ (peaking type) bandwidth High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain DME Designer Owner’s Manual 399 Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type Parameter Flange Freq. Two input, two output flange effect. Depth Mod.Dly FB.Gain Symphonic Two input, two output symphonic effect. Phaser Two input, two output 16-stage phaser. Auto Pan Two input, two output autopanner. Tremolo Two input, two output tremolo effect. 400 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Setting Range 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms -99 to +99% Wave LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G Freq. Depth Mod.Dly Wave LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G Freq. Depth FB.Gain Sine, Tri 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 10.0 to 0.10 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms Sine, Tri 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 10.0 to 0.10 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% -99 to +99% Offset PHASE Stage LSH F LSH G HSH F HSH G Freq. Depth Direction 0 to 100 0.00 to 354.38 degrees 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% L<->R, L->R, L<-R, Turn L, Turn R Sine, Tri, Square 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 10.0 to 0.10 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% Sine, Tri, Square 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 10.0 to 0.10 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB Wave LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G Freq. Depth Wave LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G Function Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Modulation waveform Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ (peaking type) gain EQ (peaking type) bandwidth High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ (peaking type) gain EQ (peaking type) bandwidth High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain Modulation speed Modulation depth Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset Left and right modulation phase balance Number of phase shift stages Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain Modulation speed Modulation depth Panning direction Modulation waveform Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ (peaking type) gain EQ (peaking type) bandwidth High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation waveform Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ (peaking type) gain EQ (peaking type) bandwidth High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type HQ.Pitch One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter. Dual Pitch Two input, two output pitch shifter. Rotary One input, two output rotary speaker simulator. Ring Mod. Two input, two output ring modulator. Mod.Filter Two input, two output modulation filter. Distortion One input, two output distortion effect. Parameter Setting Range Pitch Fine Delay FB.Gain -12 to +12 semitones -50 to +50 cents 0.0 to 1000.0 ms -99 to +99% Mode Pitch 1 Fine 1 Pitch 2 Fine 2 Level 1 1 to 10 -24 to +24 semitones -50 to +50 cents -24 to +24 semitones -50 to +50 cents -100 to +100% Pan 1 Level 2 L63 to R63 -100 to +100% Pan 2 Delay 1 FB.Gain 1 L63 to R63 0.0 to 1000.0 ms -99 to +99% Delay 2 FB.Gain 2 0.0 to 1000.0 ms -99 to +99% Mode Rotate Speed Slow Fast Drive Accel Low High Source Osc.Freq. FM Freq. FM Depth Freq. Depth Phase 1 to 10 STOP, START SLOW, FAST 0.05 to 10.00 Hz 0.05 to 10.00 Hz 0 to 100 0 to 10 0 to 100 0 to 100 OSC, SELF 0.0 to 5000.0 Hz 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0.00 to 354.38 degrees Type Offset Reso. Level DST.Type LPF, HPF, BPF 0 to 100 0 to 20 0 to 100 DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH 0 to 100 0 to 100 -10 to +10 0 to 20 Drive Master Tone N.Gate Function Pitch shift Pitch shift fine Delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Pitch shift precision Channel #1 pitch shift Channel #1 pitch shift fine Channel #2 pitch shift Channel #2 pitch shift fine Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) Channel #1 pan Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) Channel #2 pan Channel #1 delay time Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normalphase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Channel #2 delay time Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normalphase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Pitch shift precision Rotation stop, start Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters) SLOW rotation speed FAST rotation speed Overdrive level Acceleration at speed changes Low-frequency filter High-frequency filter Modulation source: oscillator or input signal Oscillator frequency Oscillator frequency modulation speed Oscillator frequency modulation depth Modulation speed Modulation depth Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass Filter frequency offset Filter resonance Output level Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) Distortion drive Master volume Tone Noise reduction DME Designer Owner’s Manual 401 Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type Parameter Amp Simulate One input, two output guitar amp simulator. AMP.Type DST.Type Dyna.Filter Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter. Drive Master Bass Middle Treble Cab Dep EQ F EQ G EQ Q N.Gate Sense Direction Decay Dyna.Flange Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger. Type Offset Reso. Level Sense Direction Decay Offset FB.Gain Dyna.Phaser Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser. 402 DME Designer Owner’s Manual LSH F LSH G EQ F EQ G EQ Q HSH F HSH G Sense Direction Decay Setting Range STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100% 100 to 8.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB 10.0 to 0.10 0 to 20 0 to 100 UP, DOWN 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s 48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s 88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s 96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s LPF, HPF, BPF 0 to 100 0 to 20 0 to 100 0 to 100 UP, DOWN 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s 48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s 88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s 96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s 0 to 100 -99 to +99% Offset FB.Gain 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 100 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 10.0 to 0.10 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB 0 to 100 UP, DOWN 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s 48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s 88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s 96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s 0 to 100 -99 to +99% Stage LSH F LSH G HSH F HSH G 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -12 to +12 dB 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz -12 to +12 dB Function Guitar amp simulation type Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) Distortion drive Master volume Bass tone control Middle tone control High tone control Speaker cabinet simulation depth EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ (peaking type) gain EQ (peaking type) bandwidth Noise reduction Sensitivity Upward or downward frequency change Filter frequency change decay speed Filter type Filter frequency offset Filter resonance Output Level Sensitivity Upward or downward frequency change Decay speed Delay time offset Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ (peaking type) gain EQ (peaking type) bandwidth High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain Sensitivity Upward or downward frequency change Decay speed Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Number of phase shift stages Low shelving filter frequency Low shelving filter gain High shelving filter frequency High shelving filter gain Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type Rev+Chorus One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel. Parameter Setting Range Rev Time Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Diff. Density HPF LPF Rev/Cho 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Rev->Chorus One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series. Freq. AM.Depth PM.Depth Mod.Dly Wave Rev Time Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Diff. Density HPF LPF Rev Bal. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms Sine, Tri 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Rev+Flange One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel. Freq. AM.Depth PM.Depth Mod.Dly Wave Rev Time Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Diff. Density HPF LPF Rev/Flg 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms Sine, Tri 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Freq. Depth Mod.Dly FB.Gain 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms -99 to +99% Wave Rev Time Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Diff. Density HPF LPF Rev Bal. Sine, Tri 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Freq. Depth Mod.Dly FB.Gain 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms -99 to +99% Wave Sine, Tri Rev->Flange One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series. Function Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus) Modulation speed Amplitude modulation depth Pitch modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb) Modulation speed Amplitude modulation depth Pitch modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange) Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Modulation waveform Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb) Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Modulation waveform DME Designer Owner’s Manual 403 Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type Rev+Sympho. One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel. Setting Range 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Rev->Sympho. One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series. Freq. Depth Mod.Dly Wave Rev Time Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Diff. Density HPF LPF Rev Bal. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms Sine, Tri 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Rev->Pan One input, two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel. Freq. Depth Mod.Dly Wave Rev Time Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Diff. Density HPF LPF Rev Bal. 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0.0 to 500.0 ms Sine, Tri 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Freq. Depth Direction Wave Delay L Delay R FB.Dly FB.Gain 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% L<->R, L->R, L<-R, Turn L, Turn R Sine, Tri, Square 0.0 to 1000.0 ms 0.0 to 1000.0 ms 0.0 to 1000.0 ms -99 to +99% Hi.Ratio HPF LPF Dly/ER 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Type RoomSize Liveness S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring 0.1 to 20.0 0 to 10 Ini.Dly Diff. Density ER Num. 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0 to 10 0 to 100% 1 to 19 Delay+ER. One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel. 404 Parameter Rev Time Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Diff. Density HPF LPF Rev/Sym DME Designer Owner’s Manual Function Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic) Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb) Modulation speed Modulation depth Modulation delay time Modulation waveform Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all reverb) Modulation speed Modulation depth Panning direction Modulation waveform Left channel delay time Right channel delay time Feedback delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all early reflections) Type of early reflection simulation Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) Initial delay before reverb begins Spread Reverb density Number of early reflections Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type Delay->ER. One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series. Delay+Reverb One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel. Delay->Reverb One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series. Parameter Setting Range Delay L Delay R FB.Dly FB.Gain 0.0 to 1000.0 ms 0.0 to 1000.0 ms 0.0 to 1000.0 ms -99 to +99% Hi.Ratio HPF LPF DLY.BAL 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Type RoomSize Liveness S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring 0.1 to 20.0 0 to 10 Ini.Dly Diff. Density ER Num. Delay L Delay R FB.Dly FB.Gain 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0 to 10 0 to 100% 1 to 19 0.0 to 1000.0 ms 0.0 to 1000.0 ms 0.0 to 1000.0 ms -99 to +99% Delay Hi HPF LPF Dly/Rev 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Rev Time Ini.Dly Rev Hi Diff. Density Delay L Delay R FB.Dly FB.Gain 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% 0.0 to 1000.0 ms 0.0 to 1000.0 ms 0.0 to 1000.0 ms -99 to +99% Delay Hi HPF LPF Dly.Bal 0.1 to 1.0 THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU 0 to 100% Rev Time Ini.Dly Rev Hi Diff. Density 0.3 to 99.0 s 0.0 to 500.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0 to 10 0 to 100% Function Left channel delay time Right channel delay time Feedback delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay) Type of early reflection simulation Reflection spacing Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) Initial delay before reverb begins Spread Reverb density Number of early reflections Left channel delay time Right channel delay time Feedback delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Delay high-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb) Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density Left channel delay time Right channel delay time Feedback delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Delay high-frequency feedback ratio High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay) Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Spread Reverb density DME Designer Owner’s Manual 405 Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type Parameter Dist->Delay DST.Type One input, two output distortion and delay effects in Drive series. Master Tone N.Gate Delay FB.Gain Multi.Filter Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/ octave). Stereo Reverb Two input, two output stereo reverb. 406 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Setting Range DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH 0 to 100 0 to 100 -10 to +10 0 to 20 0.0 to 2725.0 ms -99 to +99% Hi.Ratio Freq. Depth Dly.Bal 0.1 to 1.0 0.05 to 40.00 Hz 0 to 100% 0 to 100% Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Freq. 1 Freq. 2 Freq. 3 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Reso. 1 Reso. 2 Reso. 3 Rev Time Rev Type Ini.Dly Hi.Ratio Lo.Ratio Diff. Density E/R Bal. HPF, LPF, BPF HPF, LPF, BPF HPF, LPF, BPF 28.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz 28.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz 28.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 20 0 to 20 0 to 20 0.3 to 99.0 s Hall, Room, Stage, Plate 0.0 to 100.0 ms 0.1 to 1.0 0.1 to 2.4 0 to 10 0 to 100% 0 to 100% HPF LPF THRU, 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 50.0 Hz to 16.0 kHz, THRU Function Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) Distortion drive Master volume Tone control Noise reduction Delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-frequency feedback ratio Modulation speed Modulation depth Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion) Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass Filter 1 frequency Filter 2 frequency Filter 3 frequency Filter 1 level Filter 2 level Filter 3 level Filter 1 resonance Filter 2 resonance Filter 3 resonance Reverb time Reverb type Initial delay before reverb begins High-frequency reverb time ratio Low-frequency reverb time ratio Reverb diffusion (left-right reverb spread) Reverb density Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Chapter 6 Component Guide Effect Type M.Band Dyna. Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band. Parameter Setting Range Low Gain Mid Gain Hi. Gain Presence -96.0 to +12.0 dB -96.0 to +12.0 dB -96.0 to +12.0 dB -10 to +10 Cmp.Thre Cmp.Rat Cmp.Atk Cmp.Rel -24.0 dB to 0.0 dB 1:1 to 20:1 0 to 120 ms 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s 48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s 88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s 96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s 0 to 5 0.0 to 100.0 ms ON/OFF 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz 21.2 Hz to 8.00 kHz -6 dB, -12 dB -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF -54.0 dB to -24.0 dB 1:1 to ∞:1 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s 48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s 88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s 96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s ON/OFF -12.0 dB to 0.0 dB 0 to 120 ms 44.1kHz: 6.0ms to 46.0s 48kHz: 5.0ms to 42.3s 88.2kHz: 3ms to 23.0s 96kHz: 3ms to 21.1s ON/OFF 0 to 5 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Cmp.Knee Lookup Cmp.Byp L-M XOver M-H XOver Slope Ceiling Exp.Thre Exp.Rat Exp.Rel Exp.Byp Lim.Thre Lim.Atk Lim.Rel Lim.Byp Lim.Knee Low Mid High Function Low band level Mid band level High band level For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected the same. Compressor threshold Compressor ratio Compressor attack Compressor release time Compressor knee Lookup delay Compressor bypass Low/mid crossover frequency Mid/high crossover frequency Filter slope Specifies the maximum output level Expander threshold Expander ratio Expander release time Expander bypass Limiter threshold Limiter attack Limiter release time Limiter bypass Limiter knee Low band solo Mid band solo High band solo DME Designer Owner’s Manual 407 Chapter 6 Component Guide Slot ■ Slot In The Slot In Component only has outputs. 4, 8, and 16 channel types are provided. Right-click the component and select [Open Slot In Component] from the contextual menu to open the component editor. The component editor is the same for all types. Name 1 408 Meter DME Designer Owner’s Manual Function Shows the signal level for each channel. Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Slot Out The Slot Out component has only an input. There are three types of Slot In components: fourchannel, eight-channel, and 16 channel types. The component editor can be displayed by right-clicking the component, then clicking [Open Slot Out Component Editor] on the displayed context menu. Slot Out component editor 1 3 4 2 5 Parameter Setting Range Function 1 Phase ON/OFF Reverses the phase of the output signal for each channel. 2 On ON/OFF Turns ON each channel's output. 3 Delay 0 to 24 Samples Sets the delay time. 4 Level -∞ to ±0 dB Sets the output level. 5 Dither Off 16 20 24 Sets the quantization bit rate for conversion. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 409 Chapter 6 Component Guide Cascade ■ Cascade In The Cascade In Component only has outputs. Only the DME64N has a Cascade In component, which can be displayed by checking [Show Cascade Port] in the DME Device Properties dialog box. Right-click the component and select [Open Component Editor] from the contextual menu to open the component editor. The component editor is the same for all types. Name 1 410 Meter DME Designer Owner’s Manual Function Shows the signal level for each channel. Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ Cascade Out The Cascade Out Component only has inputs. Right-click the component and select [Open Component Editor] from the contextual menu to open the component editor. The component editor is the same for all types. Name 1 Meter Function Shows the signal level for each channel. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 411 Chapter 6 Component Guide Internal Head Amp In the DME24 configuration window, there are [Unit Input] and [Unit Output] blocks. They are the Analog In and Analog Out DME24 I/O ports. ■ Unit Input Double-click [Unit Input] to display the component editor for it. Internal Head Amp component editor 1 2 Parameter Setting Range Function 1 +48 ON/OFF Turns ON phantom power (+48V). 2 Gain +10 to -60 dB Sets the head amp gain. ■ Analog Out Double-click [Unit Output] to display the component editor for it. The displayed parameters are the same as for Slot Out component editor. 412 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide MY-Card This shows the input and output for the card inserted into the DME expansion slot. The following components are available, depending on the card types: Input Format/Output Format This is the I/O mode for high sample rate operation (88.2/96 kHz). In the Double Channel Mode, high sampling rate data (88.2/96 kHz) is transmitted and received by two channels, each channel handling the digital audio data at half the sampling rate. For this reason the total number of available channels is halved, and even-numbered channels are unavailable. In the Double Speed Mode digital audio data is transmitted and received at the current high sampling rate (88.2/96 kHz). In the Single Mode digital audio data is transmitted and received at half the current high sampling rate (88.2/96 kHz). Setting Examples Operation clock of related equipment 88.2/96 kHz (Double Channel) The DME operation clock 88.2/96 kHz Input Format/Output Format Double Channel 88.2/96 kHz (Double Speed) Double Speed 44.1k/48k Single When the MY card word clock is used as the master word clock, Double FS determines whether the speed of that word clock is to be doubled and used as the DME clock. The Double Fs setting is only available the word clock from an MY Card is used. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 413 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ MY-Others Double-click the block to display the component editor for it.This editor can be used for generic MY card editing, but some parameters are not available. Use a card specific editor when available. 1 3 Parameter 2 Setting Range Function 1 Input Format Double Channel Double Speed Single Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz. 2 Double Fs ON/OFF When ON the speed of the word clock from the MY Card is doubled. 3 Output Format Double Channel Double Speed Single Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz. ■ MY8-AE96S Double-click the block to display the component editor for it. MY8-AE96S component editor 1 3 2 4 Parameter 414 Setting Range Function 1 Input Format Double Channel Double Speed Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz. 2 Double Fs ON/OFF When ON the speed of the word clock from the MY Card is doubled. 3 Output Format Double Channel Double Speed Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz. 4 Sampling Rate Converter ON/OFF Turns the sampling rate converter ON. DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ MY16-AE/MY8-AE96/MY8-AE/MY8-AT/MY8-TD/MY16-TD/MY16-AT Double-click the block to display the component editor for it. Example: MY16-AE component editor 1 3 Parameter 2 Setting Range Function 1 Input Format Double Channel Double Speed Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz. For MY8-AE96, the setting range is Double Channel/Double Speed. For other cards, it is Double Channel/Single. 2 Double Fs ON/OFF When ON the speed of the word clock from the MY Card is doubled. Only for MY16-AE/MY8-AE96/MY16TD. When On is set for the MY8-AE96, the Input Format is Double Channel. When Off is set, the input format is Double Speed. 3 Output Format Double Channel Double Speed Single Selects the format for 88.2/96 kHz. For MY8-AE96, the setting range is Double Channel/Double Speed. For other cards, it is Double Channel/Single. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 415 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ MY16-C Double-click the block to display the component editor for it. MY16-C component editor MY16-C R |[l g G fB^ [ 1 2 3 4 5 Section Parameter 1 Setting Priority 2 Bundle Number Input 3 4 Serial Channel Properties 5 Setting Priority Setting Range Function Hardware/ Software The MY16-C switch settings take priority when “Hardware” is selected, and the DME Designer settings take priority when “Software” is selected. 0 to 65279 Sets the input bundle number. Output 0 to 65279 Sets the output bundle number. Rx OFF, 1 - 16 Sets the serial channel for the receive side. Tx OFF, 1 - 16 Sets the serial channel for the send side. Bit Length Bit Off 16 bit 20 bit 24 bit Sets the bit rate for output. Mutes the signal if [Bit Off] is set. Latency 5.33 ms 2.67 ms 1.33 ms Sets the delay. NOTE The parameters will not link immediately when Setting Priority is switched. Please edit another parameter after switching Setting Priority. 416 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Remote Controlled Head Amp There are AD824 and AD8HR components arranged in the zone window. ■ AD824 Controls the Yamaha A/D converter AD824. The AD824 is an eight channel analog to digital converter. Double-click the component to display the component editor for it. NOTE If a DME is not selected in the properties dialog box, the component editor will not be displayed even if you double-click (page 170). AD824 component editor 1 3 Parameter 2 Setting Range Function 1 +48 ON/OFF Turns ON phantom power (+48V). 2 Gain +10 to -62 dBu Sets the head amp gain. 3 Word Clock 48 kHz 44.1 kHz BNC Slot Sets the operating frequency for the Word Clock. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 417 Chapter 6 Component Guide ■ AD8HR Controls the Yamaha A/D converter AD8HR. The AD8HR is an eight channel analog to digital converter. Double-click this component to display the component editor for it. NOTE If a DME is not selected in the properties dialog box, the component editor will not be displayed even if you double-click (page 170). AD8HR component editor 1 2 3 5 4 Section 1 418 Setting Range Function +48 ON/OFF Turns ON phantom power (+48V). 2 HPF ON/OFF Turns output ON. 3 Frequency 20 to 600Hz Sets the cutoff frequency. 4 Gain +10 to -62 dBu Sets the head amp gain. Word Clock 96 kHz 88.2 kHz 48 kHz 44.1 kHz Word Clock In Digital Out A Sets the operating frequency for the Word Clock. Double Speed Double Channel Selects the operation for 88.2/96 kHz. 5 Gain Parameter Word Clock DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Component Glossary Adjustable Gc (AdjustGc) One type of filter characteristic. With this setting, you can adjust Gc (gain on the cutoff frequency) between -6 dB and +6 dB. If you set -3 dB it becomes a Butterworth filter. If you set -6 dB, it becomes Linkwitz-Riley filter. Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor Attack (Attack Time) In dynamic components, sets the time period for compressing or expanding the signal after the component operates. As the attack time is made faster, compression or expansion becomes more instantaneous. As it is made slower, the initial attack part of the sound will not be compressed or expanded. Components: Crossover Processor, Compander, Crossover Processor II, Compressor, DeEsser, Ducking, Expander, Gate, Limiter, Speaker Processor Bessel One type of filter characteristic. For curves where phase characteristics are important, Bessel has gentler attenuation then Butterworth, and there is little distortion of the waveform when square waves are passed through. Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor Butterworth (Butrwrth) One type of filter characteristics. This filter has the most general characteristics. The pass band is flat and the gain for the cutoff frequency is -3 dB. Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor Bypass Passes the signal without changing it. When you turn this ON, bypassed sound (unchanged sound) is output. When you turn this OFF, the sound is output with effects applied. Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, GEQ, PEQ, BPF, HPF, LPF, Notch, Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor, SPX Decay (Decay Time) Sets the time period until gain returns to normal after a trigger signal level falls below the threshold value. Components: Ducking, Gate, Auto Mixer Delay Sets the time period by which a signal is delayed. Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Delay Long, Delay Short, Delay Matrix, Speaker Processor, SPX, Slot Output, Unit Output DME Designer Owner’s Manual 419 Chapter 6 Component Guide Delay Scale Sets the units used for specifying the delay time. Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Delay Long, Delay Short, Speaker Processor Divergence Sets the ratio for sending the center signal to LR. When 100 percent is set, the signal will be sent to LR only. When zero percent is set, the signal is sent to center only. Components: LCR, Surround 3-1, Surround 5.1, Surround 6.1 Fade Sets the action of the fader when there is a large change in its position during scene recall. When you turn this ON, the fader moves gradually to the position after the jump. If you turn this OFF, it immediately jumps to the parameters saved in the recalled scene. Component: Fader Frequency Sets a frequency. In the de-esser, this sets the lowest frequency of the signal to be compressed when the component is operating. In the BPF, HPF, and LPF filters, this sets the cutoff frequency. In the graphic equalizer, it is also used as the frequency band button. Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, De-Esser, GEQ, PEQ, BPF, HPF, LPF, Notch, Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Oscillator, Speaker Processor, SPX, Remote HA Gain Sets the amplification factor for the entire signal level. Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Compander, Compressor, De-Esser, Expander, GEQ, PEQ, Auto Mixer, Speaker Processor, Remote HA, DME24N HA-AD Gain Correct In the Auto-Mixer, automatically controls the output level for the number of open channels. In situations, where multiple microphones are used, feedback may occur because many channels are open at the same time. Feedback can be avoided by using gain correct. Component: Auto Mixer Hold (Hold Time) Sets how long the gate stays open or the ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold level. Components: Ducking, Gate, Auto Mixer, SPX KeyIn Turns an input signal connected to a component's KeyIn port into a trigger that activates the component. You can select the trigger source in components that have KeyIn ports. Components: Compander, Compressor, Ducking, Expander, Gate, Limiter 420 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Chapter 6 Component Guide Knee In compressors, de-essers, and expanders, sets the way in which compression or expansion will be applied after the signal exceeds the threshold. The following range of settings is available: HARD, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. If Hard is set, the signal level changes to a straight line following the specified slope when the trigger signal exceeds the threshold. If a value between 1 and 5 (5 = softest) is specified, the curve gradually changes when the threshold is exceeded, producing a more natural sound. Components: Compander, Compressor, Ducking, Expander, Gate, Limiter LFE (Sub Woofer Speaker) This is a special speaker for playing back low frequency sounds. Component: Surround 5.1, Surround 6.1 Linkwitz-Riley (Linkwitz) One type of filter characteristics. As second-order filters, the sum of the output voltages for LPF and HPF have a gain of 0bB across the entire band. The pass band is flat, but the cutoff frequency gain is -6 dB. Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Speaker Processor Pan Sets the distribution ratio of the input signal between right and left. Components: LCR, LR, SPX Pan Nominal Position Sets the 0 dB reference for pan. There are two selections available, [Center] and [LR] (LR Nominal). Center nominal uses the center volume as a reference. The means the center volume is 0 dB, and the LR speakers are -3 dB. LR nominal uses the LR speaker volume as the reference. The means the LR speaker volume is 0 dB, and the center is +3 dB. Components: LCR, Surround 3-1, Surround 5.1, Surround 6.1 Phase Reverses the phase of the signal. If you turn this ON, signal is inverted. If you turn this OFF, the signal is not inverted. Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, GEQ, PEQ, BPF, HPF, LPF, Notch, Programmable BPF, Programmable HPF, Programmable LPF, Fader, Auto Mixer, Delay Matrix, Matrix Mixer, Slot Output, Unit Output Q Sets the frequency bandwidth that will change the sound. As the value gets larger, the width gets narrower and the curve becomes steeper. In the parametric equalizer, this sets the frequency width where the gain will be cut or boosted. When Q is widened, the gain is boosted or cut along a wide range centering on the frequency set by the frequency setting, resulting in a large change in the tone quality. When Q is narrowed, only a specific frequency is boosted or cut. Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, GEQ, PEQ, BPF, Notch, Speaker Processor, SPX DME Designer Owner’s Manual 421 Chapter 6 Component Guide Range Set for Ducking and Gate. Sets the amount by which the level is reduced when signal is ducked/ gated. It can be set within the range of -70 to 0 dB. At -70 dB the entire signal above the threshold value is cut. At 0 dB, there is no effect. Components: Ducking, Gate Ratio Sets the ratio of change in the output signal level with respect to the input signal level. At 1:1, there is no compression. At 2:1, when a trigger signal level that exceeds the threshold changes by 10 dB, the output level will change by 5 dB. Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Compander, Compressor, De-Esser, Expander, SPX Release (Release Time) Sets the time period until gain returns to normal after a trigger signal level falls below the threshold value and operation of a component ceases. If the release time is short, the sound will seem like it is jumping (the ear will notice the change) because the gain suddenly returns to normal. If the release is set too long, compression might not be applied properly because the next high level signal will be input before the gain returns to normal from the previous high. It’s a good ideal to try an initial release time setting in the range of 0.11 to 0.5 milliseconds. Components: Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Compander, Compressor, De-Esser, Expander, Limiter, Speaker Processor, SPX Slope In a high pass filter (HPF) or low pass filter (LPF), this sets the attenuation amount for each octave. A large value results in rapid attenuation. Clicking the [Slope] button displays a menu. You can select [6 dB/Oct] or [12 dB/Oct] in the HPF or LPF. In the crossover that is part of the crossover processor, in the stand-alone crossover, the programmable BPF, the programmable LPF, and the programmable HPF, you can select from [6 dB/ Oct], [12 dB/Oct], [18 dB/Oct], [24 dB/Oct], [36 dB/Oct], and [48 dB/Oct]. Component: HPF, LPF Threshold Sets the signal level that causes the component to operate. Components: Crossover, Crossover Processor, Crossover Processor II, Compander, Compressor, De-Esser, Ducking, Expander, Gate, Limiter, Auto Mixer, Speaker Processor, SPX Width Sets how much lower the level must be than the threshold level for the expansion effect to begin. When the trigger signal level changes by 2 dB with the expansion ratio of the expander set at 5:1, the output level will change by 10 dB. In the compander, if the width is set at 90 dB, the expander effect will be essentially be turned OFF. Component: Compander 422 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Troubleshooting For the latest information about DME Designer, visit the Yamaha pro audio site at http://www.yamahaproaudio.com. Symptom A compile error occurs during synchronization. Possible Causes DSP total resource consumption has exceeded the upper limit. Corrective Actions Delete unneeded components. The Resource Meter window must read 100% or less. The wiring between components is Change the connections so that a single connected from multiple output terminals output is connected to a single input to a single input. terminal. Using a matrix mixer or similar component, gather multiple outputs into one signal. Cannot place component. Cannot place You are in online status. wiring. Execute [Go Off-line] on the synchronization screen to go into offline status. The Designer window in not in edit mode. Place a checkmark next to [Edit] on the [Tool] menu. The currently logged on user is restricted Logoff, then log in again as a new user, from editing. or as the Administrator. If edit restrictions are required for a user, place a check in the [Security] → [Edit] checkbox A user module is not displayed on the list. The [File] menu → [Preference] → [ContentsFolder] has been changed, or the “User Module” folder has been moved. Check that there are user module files (.umf) in the “ContentsFolder” and “User Module” folders. Cannot switch configurations in the Navigator Window. While online, you cannot not switch to a configuration different from the current scene. If you can switch between scenes, you will be able to switch configurations. The user module window does not open, This is a user module saved by selecting Open the save dialog, select [Open] → even when a user module is double[Open] → [User Module Design [User Module Editor], and resave the clicked. Window]. user module. No editor displays after right-clicking on Some cards do not have editors. a card component, and selecting [Open] from the context menu. No special corrective action. The message “Reset Config…” is This is not abnormal. If many scenes are Wait until processing finishes. displayed for a long time in the message entered into the DME, processing takes area of the “Synchronization” dialog box. time. Cannot set the monitor output. This is because channels connected with Select an unconnected channel. wiring cannot be used as monitor output. The MIDI Setup toolbar will not be displayed. Stored in the minimized task tray. Right-click the MIDI Setup icon in the task tray then click [Show]. DME Designer Owner’s Manual 423 Index A AD824 ................................................................................. 170, 417 AD8HR ................................................................................ 170, 418 "Add Event" dialog box ................................................................ 118 “Add User” dialog box .................................................................. 60 Adjustable Gc (AdjustGc) ........................................................... 419 [Administrator] User ...................................................................... 55 Analyze ........................................................................................ 249 [Area Parts List] ........................................................................... 153 Area window .......................................................................... 15, 235 Attack (Attack Time) .................................................................... 419 Auto Log On .................................................................................. 21 Auto-Logon User ................................................................... 57 Auto Mixer ................................................................................... 360 B Background Images setting ................................................................................. 295 Backup ........................................................................................ 135 Band Pass Filter (BPF) ................................................................ 349 Bessel .......................................................................................... 419 Box (rectangle) ............................................................................ 191 Butterworth (Butrwrth) ................................................................. 419 Bypass ........................................................................................ 419 C “Cascade Setting” dialog box ..................................................... 166 “Change User Information” dialog box ......................................... 60 Changing Order .......................................................................... 218 “Clock” dialog box ...................................................................... 105 Close ............................................................................................. 29 Communication Status .................................................................. 43 Compander ................................................................................. 335 Component ............................................................................ 17, 174 placing ................................................................................ 243 Component Editor ......................................................................... 17 opening ............................................................................... 264 Component Editor window structure .............................................................................. 264 Component Group ...................................................................... 259 Component List ........................................................................... 260 [Component List] (Configuration window) .................................. 154 [Component List] (User Module window) ................................... 155 Compressor ................................................................................. 336 Configuration ............................................................................... 136 adding ................................................................................. 233 analysis ............................................................................... 249 creating new ....................................................................... 136 creation procedure ................................................................ 34 deleting ............................................................................... 233 editing ................................................................................. 136 renaming ............................................................................. 233 Configuration window ............................................................ 16, 242 [Component List] ................................................................. 154 Control aligning ................................................................................ 302 copy .................................................................................... 303 cut ....................................................................................... 303 moving ................................................................................. 302 paste ................................................................................... 303 placing ................................................................................ 297 properties ............................................................................ 303 [Control Change] tab .................................................................... 91 Crossover .................................................................................... 316 Crossover Processor ................................................................... 320 Crossover Processor II ................................................................ 326 424 DME Designer Owner’s Manual Current Scene ............................................................................... 42 Current Zone ................................................................................. 43 D DAW Control ................................................................................ 132 Decay (Decay Time) ................................................................... 419 De-Esser ...................................................................................... 337 Delay ................................................................................... 332, 419 delay long ........................................................................... 332 delay short .......................................................................... 333 Delay Matrix ................................................................................ 362 Delay Scale ................................................................................. 420 Delay value .................................................................................. 246 Design Mode ............................................................................... 286 Design window ............................................................................ 142 exporting ............................................................................. 211 printing ................................................................................ 214 shared settings and operations .......................................... 207 Designer window ........................................................................... 15 [Device List] ................................................................................ 154 Display Order .............................................................................. 218 Divergence .................................................................................. 420 DME ............................................................................................. 160 arrangement ........................................................................ 238 DME Data File ............................................................................... 30 export .................................................................................... 32 import .................................................................................... 30 Drawing Setting ........................................................................... 223 Ducker ......................................................................................... 339 Dynamics .................................................................................... 334 E "Edit Event" dialog box ................................................................ 118 [Edit] menu ............................................................................ 47, 145 Edit Mode .................................................................................... 136 Edit Palette .................................................................................. 288 Ellipse .......................................................................................... 193 Auto Log On [Enable Auto-Log On] ........................................................... 57 [Enable Auto-Log On] ................................................................... 57 Equalizer Graphic Equalizer (GEQ) .................................................... 344 Parametric Equalizer (PEQ) ................................................ 346 Equalizer (EQ) ............................................................................. 344 “Event Log List” dialog box ......................................................... 115 Event Logger ............................................................................... 111 “Event Scheduler” dialog box ..................................................... 116 Expander ..................................................................................... 340 Export Design window .................................................................... 211 DME ...................................................................................... 32 External Device ........................................................................... 170 F Fade ............................................................................................ 420 Fader ........................................................................................... 348 [File] menu .................................................................................... 44 Filter Band Pass Filter (BPF) ........................................................ 349 High Pass Filter (HPF) ......................................................... 350 Low Pass Filter (LPF) .......................................................... 351 Notch Filter (Notch) ............................................................. 352 Programmable BPF ............................................................. 353 Programmable HPF ............................................................. 355 Programmable LPF ............................................................. 356 Index Filters ........................................................................................... 349 Firmware Update DME unit firmware ............................................................... 107 Frequency ................................................................................... 420 “Monitor” dialog box .................................................................... 104 Monitoring Point List .................................................................... 247 [Mute] button ................................................................................. 42 MY-Card ...................................................................................... 413 G N Gain ............................................................................................. 420 Gain Correct ................................................................................ 420 Gate ............................................................................................. 341 General Purpose Interface (GPI) ................................................... 79 “Get Log” dialog box ................................................................... 114 GPI (General Purpose Interface) ................................................... 79 “GPI” dialog box ............................................................................ 79 Graphic Equalizer (GEQ) ............................................................ 344 Grid ............................................................................................. 210 Navigator window .................................................................. 17, 140 Notch Filter (Notch) ..................................................................... 352 H [Help] menu .................................................................................. 51 High Pass Filter (HPF) ................................................................. 350 Hold (Hold Time) ......................................................................... 420 Hotspot ........................................................................................ 222 I ICP ............................................................................................... 168 placement ........................................................................... 240 Import DME ....................................................................................... 30 K KeyIn ................................................................................... 334, 420 Knee ............................................................................................ 421 L Language setting ................................................................................. 106 “Language” dialog box ............................................................... 106 LCR ............................................................................................. 378 Legend (Descriptive Fields) ........................................................ 198 LFE (Sub Woofer Speaker) .......................................................... 421 Library ......................................................................................... 275 recalling ............................................................................... 277 storing ................................................................................. 276 Linkwitz-Riley (Linkwitz) .............................................................. 421 Log Off .......................................................................................... 21 Log On .......................................................................................... 20 “Log Setup” dialog box ............................................................... 113 Logical connection ...................................................................... 230 situations where no logical connection is created .............. 230 Low Pass Filter (LPF) ................................................................... 351 LR ................................................................................................ 379 M Main Panel window ................................................................. 14, 39 Matrix Mixer ................................................................................. 369 Menu bar ............................................................................... 39, 137 Meter ........................................................................................... 357 MIDI ............................................................................................... 90 [Control Change] tab ............................................................ 91 [Parameter Change] tab ....................................................... 94 [Port] tab ............................................................................... 97 [Program Change] tab .......................................................... 93 [Setup] tab ............................................................................ 90 “MIDI” dialog box .......................................................................... 90 Miscellaneous ............................................................................. 358 Mixer ............................................................................................ 360 Auto Mixer ........................................................................... 360 Delay Matrix ........................................................................ 362 Matrix Mixer ......................................................................... 369 O Object ............................................................................................ 17 arranging ............................................................. 216, 236, 238 editing ................................................................................. 217 selecting .............................................................................. 216 types ................................................................................... 156 Offline ............................................................................................ 75 switching between online and offfline ................................... 75 Online ...................................................................................... 35, 75 switching between online and offfline ................................... 75 Open ............................................................................................. 27 opening a project file from the “Recently Used Files” list ..... 28 opening a project file that has security set ........................... 28 Operation Mode .......................................................................... 286 Oscillator ..................................................................................... 358 P Pan ...................................................................................... 378, 421 LCR ..................................................................................... 378 LR ........................................................................................ 379 Surround ............................................................................. 380 Pan Nominal Position .......................................................... 378, 421 Parameter changing ............................................................................. 266 [Parameter Change] tab ............................................................... 94 Parameter Link ...................................................................... 73, 314 Parameter List ............................................................................. 124 Parametric Equalizer (PEQ) ........................................................ 346 Phase .......................................................................................... 421 Picture ......................................................................................... 185 placing ................................................................................ 185 [Port] tab ....................................................................................... 97 Preferences ........................................................................... 53, 207 Preset list ....................................................................................... 68 Print Design window .................................................................... 214 [Print] menu ................................................................................. 144 Probe Monitor .............................................................................. 244 [Program Change] tab .................................................................. 93 Programmable BPF ..................................................................... 353 Programmable HPF ..................................................................... 355 Programmable LPF ..................................................................... 356 Project file ...................................................................................... 22 closing ................................................................................... 29 creating new ......................................................................... 22 opening ................................................................................. 27 saving .............................................................................. 23, 25 Q Q .................................................................................................. 421 R Range .......................................................................................... 422 Ratio ............................................................................................ 422 Release (Release Time) .............................................................. 422 Resource Meter ............................................................................. 18 Resource Meter window .............................................................. 139 Router .......................................................................................... 397 DME Designer Owner’s Manual 425 Index S Save ........................................................................................ 23, 25 saving a file with a new name ............................................... 25 Save As ................................................................................... 23, 25 Scene current ................................................................................... 42 Scene Manager ............................................................................. 63 “Scene Manager” dialog box ........................................................ 63 Security ....................................................................................... 136 [Administrator] User .............................................................. 55 creating users and making user settings .............................. 55 security for the Logged On User ..................................... 63, 70 user security level ................................................................. 56 user setting restrictions ......................................................... 55 Security Level ................................................................................ 56 “Select Color” Dialog Box ........................................................... 203 “Select Font” dialog box .............................................................. 202 “Select Image” dialog box .......................................................... 205 [Setup] tab .................................................................................... 90 Sheet ........................................................................................... 200 Show Signal Delay ...................................................................... 246 Slope ........................................................................................... 422 Slot Component ................................................................... 179, 408 Snap ............................................................................................ 273 SPX Component .................................................................. 177, 397 Status bar .................................................................................... 139 Surround 3-1 ............................................................................... 383 Surround 5.1 ................................................................................ 384 Surround 6.1 ................................................................................ 385 Synchronization DME Designer and DME unit synchronization ...................... 75 “Synchronization” dialog box ................................................ 76 T Tab Order changing ............................................................................. 313 Text box ....................................................................................... 189 Threshold .................................................................................... 422 Title bar ................................................................................. 39, 137 Tool button large ...................................................................................... 41 small ...................................................................................... 39 Toolbar ........................................................................................ 138 Toolkit window ....................................................................... 17, 143 displaying ............................................................................ 152 moving ................................................................................. 152 types ................................................................................... 153 [Tools] menu ......................................................................... 48, 149 U [User] logged on user ...................................................................... 43 User ............................................................................................... 19 creatng new .......................................................................... 61 list .......................................................................................... 58 User Control .......................................................................... 70, 279 creating new ....................................................................... 281 security ................................................................................ 283 “User Control Manager” dialog box .............................................. 70 [User Control] menu .................................................................... 280 User Defined Button User Defined Parameters ...................................................... 98 “User Defined Button” dialog box ................................................. 98 User Defined Parameters .............................................................. 98 setting ................................................................................. 101 User Module ........................................................................ 181, 250 creating ............................................................................... 254 saving .................................................................................. 255 User Module Editor ..................................................................... 285 context menu ...................................................................... 291 User Module Manager ................................................................ 250 426 DME Designer Owner’s Manual User Module window ............................................................. 16, 257 [Component List] ................................................................ 155 User Setting Restrictions ............................................................... 55 V [View] menu .......................................................................... 48, 147 W Wav File Manager ....................................................................... 128 Wav File Player ............................................................................ 359 Width ........................................................................................... 422 [Window] menu ..................................................................... 51, 151 Window size changing ............................................................................. 294 Wire ..................................................................................... 195, 219 drawing ............................................................................... 224 drawing settings .................................................................. 223 editing ................................................................................. 229 line segment ........................................................................ 220 nodes .................................................................................. 221 Z Zone ............................................................................................ 157 adding ................................................................................. 231 current ................................................................................... 43 deleting ............................................................................... 231 renaming ............................................................................. 231 Zone window ......................................................................... 16, 237 U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2004 Yamaha Corporation MW D0
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98
  • Page 99 99
  • Page 100 100
  • Page 101 101
  • Page 102 102
  • Page 103 103
  • Page 104 104
  • Page 105 105
  • Page 106 106
  • Page 107 107
  • Page 108 108
  • Page 109 109
  • Page 110 110
  • Page 111 111
  • Page 112 112
  • Page 113 113
  • Page 114 114
  • Page 115 115
  • Page 116 116
  • Page 117 117
  • Page 118 118
  • Page 119 119
  • Page 120 120
  • Page 121 121
  • Page 122 122
  • Page 123 123
  • Page 124 124
  • Page 125 125
  • Page 126 126
  • Page 127 127
  • Page 128 128
  • Page 129 129
  • Page 130 130
  • Page 131 131
  • Page 132 132
  • Page 133 133
  • Page 134 134
  • Page 135 135
  • Page 136 136
  • Page 137 137
  • Page 138 138
  • Page 139 139
  • Page 140 140
  • Page 141 141
  • Page 142 142
  • Page 143 143
  • Page 144 144
  • Page 145 145
  • Page 146 146
  • Page 147 147
  • Page 148 148
  • Page 149 149
  • Page 150 150
  • Page 151 151
  • Page 152 152
  • Page 153 153
  • Page 154 154
  • Page 155 155
  • Page 156 156
  • Page 157 157
  • Page 158 158
  • Page 159 159
  • Page 160 160
  • Page 161 161
  • Page 162 162
  • Page 163 163
  • Page 164 164
  • Page 165 165
  • Page 166 166
  • Page 167 167
  • Page 168 168
  • Page 169 169
  • Page 170 170
  • Page 171 171
  • Page 172 172
  • Page 173 173
  • Page 174 174
  • Page 175 175
  • Page 176 176
  • Page 177 177
  • Page 178 178
  • Page 179 179
  • Page 180 180
  • Page 181 181
  • Page 182 182
  • Page 183 183
  • Page 184 184
  • Page 185 185
  • Page 186 186
  • Page 187 187
  • Page 188 188
  • Page 189 189
  • Page 190 190
  • Page 191 191
  • Page 192 192
  • Page 193 193
  • Page 194 194
  • Page 195 195
  • Page 196 196
  • Page 197 197
  • Page 198 198
  • Page 199 199
  • Page 200 200
  • Page 201 201
  • Page 202 202
  • Page 203 203
  • Page 204 204
  • Page 205 205
  • Page 206 206
  • Page 207 207
  • Page 208 208
  • Page 209 209
  • Page 210 210
  • Page 211 211
  • Page 212 212
  • Page 213 213
  • Page 214 214
  • Page 215 215
  • Page 216 216
  • Page 217 217
  • Page 218 218
  • Page 219 219
  • Page 220 220
  • Page 221 221
  • Page 222 222
  • Page 223 223
  • Page 224 224
  • Page 225 225
  • Page 226 226
  • Page 227 227
  • Page 228 228
  • Page 229 229
  • Page 230 230
  • Page 231 231
  • Page 232 232
  • Page 233 233
  • Page 234 234
  • Page 235 235
  • Page 236 236
  • Page 237 237
  • Page 238 238
  • Page 239 239
  • Page 240 240
  • Page 241 241
  • Page 242 242
  • Page 243 243
  • Page 244 244
  • Page 245 245
  • Page 246 246
  • Page 247 247
  • Page 248 248
  • Page 249 249
  • Page 250 250
  • Page 251 251
  • Page 252 252
  • Page 253 253
  • Page 254 254
  • Page 255 255
  • Page 256 256
  • Page 257 257
  • Page 258 258
  • Page 259 259
  • Page 260 260
  • Page 261 261
  • Page 262 262
  • Page 263 263
  • Page 264 264
  • Page 265 265
  • Page 266 266
  • Page 267 267
  • Page 268 268
  • Page 269 269
  • Page 270 270
  • Page 271 271
  • Page 272 272
  • Page 273 273
  • Page 274 274
  • Page 275 275
  • Page 276 276
  • Page 277 277
  • Page 278 278
  • Page 279 279
  • Page 280 280
  • Page 281 281
  • Page 282 282
  • Page 283 283
  • Page 284 284
  • Page 285 285
  • Page 286 286
  • Page 287 287
  • Page 288 288
  • Page 289 289
  • Page 290 290
  • Page 291 291
  • Page 292 292
  • Page 293 293
  • Page 294 294
  • Page 295 295
  • Page 296 296
  • Page 297 297
  • Page 298 298
  • Page 299 299
  • Page 300 300
  • Page 301 301
  • Page 302 302
  • Page 303 303
  • Page 304 304
  • Page 305 305
  • Page 306 306
  • Page 307 307
  • Page 308 308
  • Page 309 309
  • Page 310 310
  • Page 311 311
  • Page 312 312
  • Page 313 313
  • Page 314 314
  • Page 315 315
  • Page 316 316
  • Page 317 317
  • Page 318 318
  • Page 319 319
  • Page 320 320
  • Page 321 321
  • Page 322 322
  • Page 323 323
  • Page 324 324
  • Page 325 325
  • Page 326 326
  • Page 327 327
  • Page 328 328
  • Page 329 329
  • Page 330 330
  • Page 331 331
  • Page 332 332
  • Page 333 333
  • Page 334 334
  • Page 335 335
  • Page 336 336
  • Page 337 337
  • Page 338 338
  • Page 339 339
  • Page 340 340
  • Page 341 341
  • Page 342 342
  • Page 343 343
  • Page 344 344
  • Page 345 345
  • Page 346 346
  • Page 347 347
  • Page 348 348
  • Page 349 349
  • Page 350 350
  • Page 351 351
  • Page 352 352
  • Page 353 353
  • Page 354 354
  • Page 355 355
  • Page 356 356
  • Page 357 357
  • Page 358 358
  • Page 359 359
  • Page 360 360
  • Page 361 361
  • Page 362 362
  • Page 363 363
  • Page 364 364
  • Page 365 365
  • Page 366 366
  • Page 367 367
  • Page 368 368
  • Page 369 369
  • Page 370 370
  • Page 371 371
  • Page 372 372
  • Page 373 373
  • Page 374 374
  • Page 375 375
  • Page 376 376
  • Page 377 377
  • Page 378 378
  • Page 379 379
  • Page 380 380
  • Page 381 381
  • Page 382 382
  • Page 383 383
  • Page 384 384
  • Page 385 385
  • Page 386 386
  • Page 387 387
  • Page 388 388
  • Page 389 389
  • Page 390 390
  • Page 391 391
  • Page 392 392
  • Page 393 393
  • Page 394 394
  • Page 395 395
  • Page 396 396
  • Page 397 397
  • Page 398 398
  • Page 399 399
  • Page 400 400
  • Page 401 401
  • Page 402 402
  • Page 403 403
  • Page 404 404
  • Page 405 405
  • Page 406 406
  • Page 407 407
  • Page 408 408
  • Page 409 409
  • Page 410 410
  • Page 411 411
  • Page 412 412
  • Page 413 413
  • Page 414 414
  • Page 415 415
  • Page 416 416
  • Page 417 417
  • Page 418 418
  • Page 419 419
  • Page 420 420
  • Page 421 421
  • Page 422 422
  • Page 423 423
  • Page 424 424
  • Page 425 425
  • Page 426 426
  • Page 427 427

Yamaha V1 de handleiding

Categorie
Audiomixers
Type
de handleiding